加载中...
共找到 38,886 条相关资讯
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the ARMOUR Residential REIT Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Scott Ulm, Chief Executive Officer. Please go ahead. Scott Ulm: Good morning, and welcome to ARMOUR Residential REIT's Third Quarter 2025 Conference Call. This morning, I'm joined by our Chief Financial Officer, Gordon Harper, as well as our Co-Chief Investment Officer, Sergey Losyev and Desmond Macauley. I'll now turn the call over to Gordon to run through the financial results. Gordon? Gordon Harper: Thank you, Scott. By now, everyone has access to ARMOUR's earnings release, which can be found on ARMOUR's website, www.armourreit.com. This conference call includes forward-looking statements, which are intended to be subject to the safe harbor protection provided by the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. The Risk Factors section of ARMOUR's periodic reports filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission describe certain factors beyond ARMOUR's control could that cause actual results to differ materially from those expressed in or implied by these forward-looking statements. Those periodic filings can be found on the SEC's website at www.sec.gov. All of today's forward-looking statements are subject to change without notice. We disclaim any obligation to update them unless required by law. Also, today's discussion refers to certain non-GAAP measures. These measures are reconciled with comparable GAAP measures in our earnings release. An online replay of this conference call will be available on ARMOUR's website shortly and will continue for 1 year. ARMOUR's Q3 GAAP net income available to common stockholders was $156.3 million or $1.49 per common share. Net interest income was $38.5 million. Distributable earnings available to common stockholders was $75.3 million or $0.72 per common share. This non-GAAP measure is defined as net interest income plus TBA drop income adjusted for interest income or expense on our interest rate swaps and futures contracts minus net operating expenses. Total economic return for the quarter was 7.75%. Quarter end book value was $17.49 per common share, up 3.5% from June 30 and up 2.8% from August 8, the last date which we have reported book value. Our most recent current available estimate of book value is as of Tuesday, October 21, and was $17.50 per common share, which reflects the accrual of the October common dividend of $0.24 per share payable on October 30. During Q3, ARMOUR raised approximately $99.5 million of capital by issuing approximately 6 million shares of common stock through an after the market offering program. In August, we completed the sale of 18.5 million shares of common stock for proceeds of approximately $298.6 million, net of underwriting discounts and commissions. And in September, we repurchased 700,000 shares of common stock through our common stock repurchase program. ARMOUR paid monthly common stock dividends per share of $0.24 per common share per month for a total of $0.72 for the quarter. We aim to pay an attractive dividend that is appropriate in context and stable over the medium term. On October 30, a cash dividend of $0.24 per outstanding common share will be paid to the holders of record on October 15. We have also declared a cash dividend of $0.24 per outstanding common share payable November 28, to holders of record on November 17, 2025. I'll now turn the call over to Scott Ulm to discuss ARMOUR's portfolio and current strategy. Scott Ulm: Thank you, Gordon. The third quarter unfolded against the backdrop of shifting macroeconomic currents. Downward revisions to employment data confirmed that the U.S. labor market had been softer than earlier reports suggested. In response, the Federal Reserve resumed its easing cycle, implementing a 25 basis point cut in September. Chair Powell described the move as a risk management cut, reflecting growing caution around labor conditions. Updated projections now signal 2 additional cuts by year-end, setting the stage for a constructive environment for Agency MBS as financing conditions continue to improve. Markets responded positively to the Fed's pivot. Treasury yields declined, Agency MBS spreads tightened by roughly 20 basis points and volatility fell to its lowest level since 2022. These dynamics produced a total economic return of 7.75% for the quarter, as previously mentioned by Gordon. Following this strong performance, MBS spreads are now near the tightest levels of the year. Near-term consolidation is possible valuations remain compelling on a medium-term horizon. As we entered the fourth quarter, macro and political visibility became more clouded. The federal government shutdown that began on October 1, delayed key data releases and introduced incremental uncertainty to growth forecast. Even so, the market continues to expect an easing bias through year-end that's likely to redirect liquidity from the short end of the rates curve into Agency MBS. Chair Powell's recent comments also indicated that quantitative tightening may conclude in the coming months. Although details are still evolving, the Fed's MBS runoff is likely to continue with paydowns from MBS and treasuries expected to be reinvested in the treasury market. Together with a broader push toward banking deregulation, these shifts are aimed to ease balance sheet constraints and reinforce demand for treasuries and Agency MBS. Notably, SOFR treasury spreads have turned more positive in recent weeks, strengthening the effectiveness of pay fixed SOFR swaps as portfolio hedges. On the policy front, reports suggest that major banks are positioning to lead potential IPOs for Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, collectively estimated around $30 billion. Although the process has been delayed by the U.S. government shutdown and the absence of a formal road map for privatization, administration officials have reiterated support for retaining an implicit government guarantee, an outcome that could transform GSE reform from a potential headwind into a tailwind for MBS investors. An additional and somewhat unexpected source of demand could come from GSEs themselves. After years of balance sheet contraction under conservatorship, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac now have roughly $250 billion of combined capacity to invest in mortgage loans and MBS should it align with GSE's earnings and valuation objectives. While no formal plan has been announced, recent disclosures point to greater flexibility within their investment mandates, hinting at a more dynamic approach to managing their portfolios than in the prior cycles. I'll now turn it over to Sergey for more detail on our portfolio. Sergey? Sergey Losyev: Thank you, Scott, and good morning. ARMOUR's most recent net duration and implied leverage were 0.2 years and 8.1x, respectively, a balance stance with a bias towards further Fed easing. Roughly 87% of our hedges are in OIS and SOFR pay fixed swaps with the balance in treasury futures. Our liquidity remains robust at approximately 55% of total capital. The portfolio is invested entirely in Agency MBS, Agency CMBS and U.S. treasuries. Our recent activity has centered on par to slight premium coupon mortgages where levered and hedge ROEs range from 16% to 18%. Higher premium pools continue to offer up to 19% returns, though with greater sensitivity to prepayment risk. Diversification across 30-year coupon stack, Ginnie Mae and DUS securities whose positive convexity and shorter duration provide relative value remain a key advantage. During the second half of the year, 30-year mortgage rate briefly reached 6.15%, lowest level of this year. While rates remain just above 2024 lows, refinancing activity has already exceeded last year's pace, elevating prepayment concerns for TBA and generic premium MBS. This reinforces our long-standing focus on specified pools, which represent over 92% of the portfolio. Aggregate portfolio prepayment rates rose to 9.6 CPR in October compared with the third quarter average of 8.1 CPR, a 19% increase and consistent with our expectations. We anticipate a similar uptick in November before prepayments stabilize towards the year-end as refinance volumes moderate. Should mortgage rates move down below 6%, levels we've not seen since early 2022. The MBS coupon stack offers a deep market of lower-priced coupons as a hedge against higher prepayments. Roughly 40% of our assets are already positioned in prepayment of protected Agency CMBS pools and discount MBS. As usual, we financed 40% to 60% of the MBS portfolio through BUCKLER Securities, distributing the balance across 15 to 20 additional repo counterparties. Average gross haircuts stand near 2.75%. Repo market liquidity remains healthy with only a modest 2 to 3 basis points increase in repo SOFR spreads versus Q3 average. More meaningfully, the spread between SOFR and Fed funds widened from 3 basis points in Q3 to roughly 10 basis points through October, muting the transmission of the Fed's recent cut to funding markets and by extension to broader economy. An increase in treasury bill issuance and a gradual decline in banking reserves means banks can lend cash at higher prices. This makes repo funding a key area of focus heading into year-end, yet despite a recent bump in SOFR rates, we view funding conditions as stable with standing repo facility to supply liquidity if needed. Looking ahead, we expect structural demand for Agency MBS to continue to strengthen. Regulatory clarity around banking reform and resumed easing cycle have historically been a powerful catalyst for high-quality liquid assets like MBS. While spreads have compressed, underlying fundamentals and market dynamics remain favorable. Back to you, Scott. Scott Ulm: Thanks, Sergey. We executed a $300 million overnight underwritten bought deal in August, first one we've done this decade. While it was somewhat more expensive than our ATM execution, it allowed us to put a significant amount of capital to work at attractive spread levels. In fact, we estimate that the spread tightening from the newly purchased assets alone contributed about 0.6% to our increase in book value this quarter, along with a meaningful reduction in operating expenses per share. We saw some weakness in our stock in mid-August. And as in the past, we repurchased some shares in the open market. We will continue to look at both sides, selling and buying in our equity account. As you know, we determined our dividend based on a medium-term outlook. We view our current dividend as appropriate for this environment and the returns available. ARMOUR's approach remains unchanged, grow and deploy capital thoughtfully during spread dislocations, maintain robust liquidity and dynamically adjust hedges for disciplined risk management. We are confident in our positioning strategy and ability to deliver value for shareholders. Thank you for joining today's call and your interest in ARMOUR. We're happy to now answer your questions. Please open the line for some questions, please. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Doug Harter with UBS. Douglas Harter: Hoping you could talk a little bit about where you see current returns on incremental investments and kind of the importance of the hedge choice you make in that and how that factors into your view of the attractiveness of the market today? Desmond Macauley: Yes. Doug. So expected ROEs, hedged ROEs are in the 16% to 18% range. Obviously, a touch lower than where they were at the end of June, given the tightness in mortgage spreads. So over a short-term basis here, you can assume 8 tons of leverage and hedge to swaps. So that's also picking up the swap income. Now we are still constructive medium term, given the resumption of the normalization cycle and also because of spreads, while local types are still attractive over a longer time horizon. So if we see another 10 basis points of tightening, that could add about 4% in return on equity to that base case of 16% to 18% range for production coupon. Douglas Harter: I guess how do you think about what the outlook is for swap spreads? And then how do you think about the attractiveness if you looked at mortgage spreads on like an OIS basis? Sergey Losyev: Doug, this is Sergey. Yes. So swap spreads have also had a big move since September meeting. We think swap spreads will continue to normalize. If you look at some of the average prior to Liberation Day, we see 10-year swaps somewhere in the mid-30s, currently trading around 44%. So we've gone a long way from minus 60 earlier in Q2, and we feel like this is going to continue to be a tailwind for the portfolio as effect of more effective hedges to hedge MBS. Currently, we have about 87% notional allocated to SOFR and OIS swaps. So that's a good positioning. We will probably tailor it if we do get back to those averages, but a lot of things have been lining up to see balance sheet expansion as well as potentially the Fed looking at changing the target policy rate from the Fed funds to SOFR or another repo measure, and that will provide lower volatility to funding rates and potentially wider SOFR spreads as well. So a lot of tailwinds are lining up there. Operator: And the next question comes from Jason Weaver with Jones Trading. Jason Weaver: Scott, along with your prepared remarks, if the administration is actively looking for ways to reduce borrower rates via GSE deregulation, do you have any thoughts on what the actual implementation looks like, whether that's GP manipulation, changes in LLPAs, underwriting guidelines? Scott Ulm: There are a lot of levers they could pull. And what knows we get a lot of levers pulled these days that we may or may not expect. So I think -- and I think that probably fits somewhere on their agenda. So the broad answer is yes. I think we could see a lot of things move around here. And particularly, if -- but particularly, I think you have to put it through the lens if they are thinking about a capital raise here for the GSEs. They're going to want to configure the GSEs to be as attractive a proposition as they can. So that may put the brakes on a couple of things as well. So there's a balance there I have no further insight into it other than just note that there are 2 competing things going there. One is undoubtedly, they'd like to see lower mortgage rates, but they also want to see the GSEs as an attractive investment proposition. Jason Weaver: Agree. That's helpful. And then noticing the hedge ratio ticked down quite a bit from Q2. Is that more of a timing issue? Or just along with the greater confidence in the pace of easing activity, you can be a bit more directional here? Scott Ulm: There are a lot of things going on in that. Sergey, Desmond, maybe you want to give a little more color on that, but there's a lot that goes into the way that, that ratio in itself works. Sergey, Desmond, do you want to give a little more color on that? Desmond Macauley: Yes, Jason. So I mean, the way we kind of look at hedges, it's really to hedge our duration across the entire curve, right? So as we said earlier, our duration of 0.2, we are taking a balanced view with a bias towards more Fed easing. So our goal is to -- most of that 0.2 duration is actually in the front end of the curve, whereas in the back end, we aim to stay flat. And ultimately, we move our hedges around to accomplish our duration targets across the curve. Operator: And the next question comes from Trevor Cranston with Citizens JMP. Trevor Cranston: All right. There was a pretty significant drop in interest rate volatility in the third quarter, which had a carryover impact to MBS, obviously. Can you guys share your thoughts on kind of how you think volatility evolves going forward? And since it's being priced significantly lower today, how that factors into your -- the potential to maybe add some swaptions or options into the hedge portfolio? Desmond Macauley: Yes. Trevor. So in terms of volatility hedging, you can think of 2 approaches to it. One, obviously, is you can use swaptions. We have used swaptions in the past. We continue to look at hedges even those that are not in our balance sheet. But the other approach is actually through asset selection, right? So you can pick assets that have low optionality. About 40% of our book, as we said in our prepared remarks, is in shorter -- lower coupons and also DUS securities. And these actually have very low optionality and another benefit of these securities is that their convexity in some cases, is even positive. So they act as a good offset to the negative convexity that you see in our production coupons. Now one more point on volatility is that, yes, volatility has come down a lot so far this year. But if you expand the time scale if you go back and look at other periods that are similar to this one, you can pick 2019. That was a period when the Fed had resumed normalization. They had started [indiscernible] back -- not buying mortgage-backed securities. That period of time, volatility was actually lower than where they are right now. If you take, for example, obviously, it's an entire volatility surface, but if you look at the swaptions for 1 year by 10-year, today is about 82 basis points. The average over that period was about 64 basis points. So still we are still about 18 basis points higher. If the Fed continues normalization, we can expect that the tail risks around rates will become compressed. And for that reason, we can see volatility in the medium term continue to decline, right? Now that's not going to prevent short-term bouts of volatility. But over the medium term, we can see volatility decline. And if you are long options, then the valuation of options would decline if volatility declines. So yes, I mean, we always -- it's a very dynamic position. We're always looking at our hedges. But for now, we think just keeping low optionality assets is the better approach. Operator: And the next question comes from Timothy D'Agostino with B. Riley Securities. Timothy D'Agostino: Just one for me. Regarding economic net interest margin, it seems like it widened about 1 basis point quarter-over-quarter. Looking forward to year-end and maybe to halfway through 2026, what would we need to see for this trend to kind of continue and if not pick up pace? Gordon Harper: Well, I guess you're going to -- it really depends on our portfolio and where continued cuts in the Fed rate, and that will imply how it impacts on our financing costs. And we think we've constructed a very good portfolio. And I think the returns that we're generating, I think, are reasonable under the circumstances. I don't know, Sergey and Desmond have other things to add to that what they think on the horizon, but we don't normally give too much forward-looking statements on where we think earnings are going to be in the future, but it's really going to be dependent on how fast the rates cut and also how the market reacts to that. But we think we've constructed a very good portfolio for the future. Desmond Macauley: Yes. Yes. So just on that to continue God's comment there. Yes, so we kind of typically just look at forward ROEs as well, another way to look at the same way of looking at things. So 16% to 18% in production coupons. Our dividend yield, weighted average dividend yield, both preferred and common plus operational expenses all in is about 18%. So that could be sort of as a hurdle rate. We already have assets we are buying that are at 18%. There are others that are slightly lower than that. But as we said, we're still constructive medium term here. So just a few more basis points of tightening and those assets would meet or exceed our hurdle rate. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from Eric Hagen with BTIG. Eric Hagen: Maybe following up on some of this conversation here. I mean what do you think is priced into MBS spreads with respect to the Fed cutting rates? Like right now, it looks like there's 125 basis points of cuts priced into the forward curve through the end of next year. Do you feel like spreads would widen if those expectations got walked back for any reason? And do you feel like spreads would actually have room to tighten once they actually deliver those cuts? Sergey Losyev: Eric, this is Sergey. Yes, to both. Definitely, a pause in the easing cycle or something that would cause them to walk back their projections would be a potential source of volatility in the market. But in terms of delivering cuts to the market, I think a lot of the bank demand will get unlocked there. If you look at the current coupon mortgages versus yields on money markets or T-bills, it's compressed again over the course of the year, closer to 100 basis points. So I think as we get closer to 152% on the spread of mortgage yields versus cash you start to see more and more engagement from other players in the market that we've seen -- we haven't seen as much demand as expected earlier this year. So I think that kind of answers yes to both scenarios. And we note in our prepared remarks that spreads have tightened significantly over the course of the quarter. We do see upside, but I think it's overall macro picture, the lack of government economic data coming through that's given us a little bit of pause here. But over a medium-term horizon, that's a clear positive for -- to have lower Fed funds rates. Eric Hagen: Yes. Got you. That's good color. The move to raise capital and buy back stock in the quarter, can you kind of share the rough level of your stock valuation when you did those transactions? And like what's the best way to compare the value from having done each of those deals, transactions? Scott Ulm: Yes. So Gordon will maybe give me the -- if you can pull up the level where we bought back. But look, we're committed to being on both sides. And when we get a dislocation, we'll buy back some stock. And when we see good valuations, we'll sell stock. Stock buybacks are always fraught because they happen when a bunch of other things are going on, and it's always expensive to get the stock back out there as well. But we had a pretty good spread between where we executed both of those. Gordon, do you have those numbers to hand? Gordon Harper: Yes, I know offhand, we -- when we did the buybacks, it was about a couple of cents accretive on the days, and it was in the 14 -- just get you the right number. Got it. We were buying it back at -- yes, it was in the [ $14.40 ] handle around that on the days that averaged out. So you can see we've bounced back since those days and we bought back the stock. Scott Ulm: Is that useful? Eric Hagen: Yes, that was helpful. I appreciate you guys. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Scott Ulm for any closing remarks. Scott Ulm: Thanks for joining the call today. We appreciate it. Any further questions occur to you, give a ring at the office, and we'll be back to you as soon as we can. Very good. Thank you, and have a nice day. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, welcome to the Q3 Results 2025 Conference Call of Beiersdorf AG. I'm Moritz, the Chorus Call operator. [Operator Instructions] And the conference is being recorded. The presentation will be followed by a question-and-answer session. [Operator Instructions] The conference must not be recorded for publication or broadcast. At this time, it's my pleasure to hand over to Christopher Sheldon, Head of Investor Relations. Please go ahead, sir. Christopher Sheldon: Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us for our third quarter conference call. I'm here with our CEO, Vincent Warnery; and our CFO, Astrid Hermann. As always, we will start with the presentation of our sales performance of the quarter and the first 9 months of the year, followed by a Q&A session. And with that, I'd like to hand over to Vincent. Vincent Warnery: Thank you, Christopher, and good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining our conference call. Astrid and I will provide an overview of our sales performance and key developments of the third quarter and the first 9 months of the year. The third quarter continued to be impacted by a very challenging market environment. Despite the headwinds, Beiersdorf was able to improve its performance versus the prior quarter. Our Derma business continues to outperform, delivering outstanding double-digit growth and winning market shares across regions. In September, we kicked off 2 major NIVEA launches. In our face care franchise, we roll out our breakthrough ingredient Epicelline. In our deodorant range, we launched the new Derma control line. While the initial impact on Q3 was limited due to timing, these launches are a key building block for our performance in Q4. We've also initiated a strategic rebalancing of the NIVEA core portfolio by broadening our efforts beyond face care to other skin care categories and reinforcing high potential categories like deodorants. And finally, in a continued challenging market, La Prairie returned to growth in Q3, supported by improved momentum in China. Let's take a closer look at how these developments are shaping our recent performance. The third quarter showed signs of gradual improvement, while we continue to see volatility across key markets. NIVEA continues to face pressure from an even weaker mass market environment especially in emerging markets, resulting in an organic sales decline of 0.4%. The major launches initiated in September only had a limited impact on Q3. Excluding the strategic repositioning in China, which is now completed, NIVEA's organic sales growth would have been positive. Our Derma business, with Eucerin and Aquaphor, once again delivered strong double-digit growth of 12.4%, reaffirming its role as a key growth driver in our portfolio. Our Health Care business, which includes the Hansaplast and Elastoplast brands outstanding growth of 9.8%, still supported by the successful rollout of our Second Skin plaster innovation. And despite ongoing market volatility, La Prairie continued its sequential quarterly improvement as planned, turning to positive organic sales growth of plus 1.6% in Q3. Overall, our Consumer Business recorded organic sales growth of 2.1% in the third quarter. Let me point out that our skin care organic sales growth increased to 4% in Q3 compared to 2.6% in the first half of the year. Beiersdorf's performance in the third quarter was flat, in line with our expectations and impacted by the difficult environment in the automotive industry. The Electronics segment, on the other hand, delivered a positive contribution, driven by a strong performance in Asia. Overall, this results in group organic sales growth of 1.7% in Q3. Looking at our Derma business in more detail. Once again, we delivered double-digit growth of 12.4% in the third quarter, a fantastic results on top of the tough 2024 comparison base when we first launched Epicelline. This underlines the strength of our innovation pipeline and our ability to identify and capture white space opportunities. It proves that we can deliver outstanding results and outperform competition even in markets that have slowed down substantially compared to previous years. Innovation remains the cornerstone of our success. This applies both to breakthrough ingredients and to the regular relaunches across our portfolio. Epicelline launched just a year ago, continues its successful rollout and remains a key growth driver in our Derma portfolio. And Thiamidol, which has been on the market for 7 years, continues to grow double digits. At Europe's leading dermatology congress EADV, Thiamidol was recognized as the only Derma-cosmetic active ingredient delivering effective treatment of hyperpigmentation at the root cause. This was endorsed by a newly established global consensus for the treatment of hyperpigmentation, a powerful validation of our science-led approach. But innovation doesn't stop with our hero ingredients. We continue to invest in regular relaunches across our portfolio. With our new Eucerin DERMOPURE Clinical range, for example, we are not simply introducing a new product line. We are delivering science-based solutions for acne, a skin concern that affects up to 85% of people globally. Acne is a leading reason for dermatological consultation and one of the fastest-growing categories in skin care. Our Derma business is not only performing across categories, it's also delivering across regions. In North America, our largest market for Derma, we achieved outstanding growth of plus 56% in the Eucerin Face category despite the slow overall market. The launch of the Eucerin Radiant Tone range with Thiamidol earlier this year, is showing excellent traction. In Europe, we are excited to report double-digit growth of plus 10%. This was fueled by the continued success of Epicelline, which is reinforcing our innovation leadership in the region. Looking at Northeast Asia, the entry of Eucerin into the domestic market in China has exceeded expectations with exceptional organic sales growth of plus 86% in the third quarter. Following the official approval of our patented ingredient Thiamidol last year, we are already seeing early success in the market. The Eucerin Thiamidol serum has already achieved a double-digit market share making it the #1 derma anti-pigment serum in China. And last but not least, we'll be launching Eucerin Japan, another white space next month. With NIVEA, we successfully started the launch of our breakthrough ingredient Epicelline in September. Building on the strong results achieved with Eucerin, we are now scaling this innovation into the mass market. This is the biggest NIVEA launch of all times. While the impact on our Q3 figures were still limited due to timing of the launch, the first week has already performed above our expectations. We are seeing strong early traction, including #1 category positions across key European markets. In France, for example, the NIVEA Epigenetics Serum reached the #1 position in hygiene and beauty products. And in Germany and Austria, we secured the #1 face care position at dm, the region's largest drugstore retailer. The initial strong launch performance is also visible in our September net sales figures for NIVEA with organic sales growth of plus 7.8%. A key driver of this momentum alongside the very recent NIVEA Epicelline launch, has been our NIVEA Derma Control Deodorant range. This is where our skin care expertise meets the high performance of personal care, the skinification of deodorants. While our recent launches are encouraging, we acknowledge that NIVEA's overall performance has fallen short of our initial expectations this year, particularly in the second quarter. So let me remind you of the journey we are on. Four years ago, we put a strategic focus on skin care, our core strength. We are committed to innovation, expanding into white spaces guided by our belief that beauty is global and offer-driven. This strategy has delivered outstanding results since 2022, 2023 and 2024, NIVEA achieved exceptional growth in some cases even double digit. That success gives us confidence in the path that we have chosen. Now to ensure that NIVEA continues on the strong growth trajectory we are making targeted adjustments with a proactive rebalancing of our portfolio. What does it mean? We are broadening our focus within skin care. While face care remains a key category, we are balancing our R&D and marketing investments across other skin care segments. We're also reinforcing deodorants as a strategic growth pillar, a category where NIVEA has a strong right to win through innovation. NIVEA is a value for money brand and stands for affordable prices, and that remains unchanged. While we see customers' willingness to pay for breakthrough innovations like Thiamidol and Epicelline, most of our portfolio continues to be priced at accessible price ranges. We know there is work ahead, but we also know that we are capable of, and we are taking action to bring NIVEA back to stronger growth and continue building on its legacy as 1 of the world's most trusted skin care brand. And let's not forget, as we have always said, even a brand has established as NIVEA still offers significant white space opportunities. A great example is India, where we launched NIVEA Face earlier this year and are continuing our double-digit trajectory. We are equally excited about the potential of NIVEA Thiamidol in China, where we are just beginning to build momentum. This leads me to our NIVEA repositioning efforts in China, which were completed at the end of Q3. Performance has stabilized, and NIVEA in China is already back to growth in October setting the stage for acceleration in the remaining fourth quarter. Our strategy in China is clear. We aim to win through innovation in skin care. With Thiamidol as our hero ingredient, we are confident that it provides a distinct competitive edge in this highly dynamic market. China remains a key opportunity for us in the mid- to long term. It's a demanding environment, but with the right portfolio and continued innovation, we are convinced that NIVEA is well positioned to compete even against strong local brands. Coming to La Prairie, which is back to growth. While the market environment remains volatile, La Prairie delivered a solid Q3 performance with growth of plus 1.6%. This was driven in part by continued momentum in China, which achieved growth of 3% and an outstanding double-digit sellout. I'm also pleased to announce a major milestone in our global expansion strategy. After successfully establishing NIVEA Face and Eucerin in India, we've now expanded our premium portfolio with the launch of La Prairie, exclusively on Nykaa. This marks our entry into 1 of the world's most dynamic and fast-growing beauty markets, an important step in strengthening our global footprint. Before I hand over to Astrid, let me turn to our e-commerce performance. E-commerce continues to be a key growth driver for Beiersdorf. In the first 9 months, we achieved organic sales growth of 16.6% with Q3 accelerating to 19.2%. We are gaining market share everywhere, with particularly strong momentum in emerging markets in Europe. Our Luxury e-commerce business continues to grow, fueled by targeting online activations, while our Derma portfolio shows global trends delivering double-digit growth across all regions. Astrid will now take us through the tesa results and our financial performance in more detail. Astrid Hermann: Thank you, Vincent. Now let us review tesa's business performance for the first 9 months of 2025. Despite ongoing market challenges, tesa delivered 2.0% organic sales growth year-to-date, rising uncertainty and the potential impact of U.S. tariffs continue to affect demand, particularly in Europe and North America, while Asia continues to be a strong growth contributor. Our Electronics business was a key growth driver, supported by strong demand for major customers, particularly in Asia. The automotive segment continues to navigate a complex and volatile market environment. Despite the challenges, the segment showed resilience and delivered growth in some regions, particularly in Asia Pacific, where we are winning new customer projects. tesa's consumer segment remains under pressure, especially in Europe, Nevertheless, it achieved growth over the first 9 months, supported by a solid performance in the third quarter. Finally, I'd like to highlight a leadership change Dr. Kourosh Bahrami, has succeeded Dr. Norman Goldberg as CEO of tesa, with over 30 years of international leadership in the adhesive industry, Dr. Bahrami brings strong leadership and a clear commitment to drive customer value and sustainable growth. We thank Dr. Goldberg for his transformative leadership and look forward to continuing tesa's successful course under Dr. Bahrami's direction. Now let's continue with our 9-month sales performance in more detail. In the first 9 months of 2025 Beiersdorf Consumer division grew by 2.0% organically. Due to unfavorable foreign exchange effects, nominal sales declined slightly to EUR 6.25 billion. The tesa division reported solid organic growth of 2.0% for the same period. In nominal terms, net sales remained flat at EUR 1.29 billion. Overall, the group generated EUR 7.5 billion net sales in the first 9 months of 2025, translating into 2.0% organic sales growth. Now let's take a closer look at the performance of our brands within the Consumer Business segment. Vincent has already provided an overview of the third quarter sales results. So I will focus on a summary of our brand's performance in the first 9 months of this year. In a persistently challenging market environment, NIVEA delivered modest growth of 0.6% in the first 9 months. Our performance was further impacted by higher competition from local brands and the strategic repositioning in China, which we successfully completed at the end of Q3. In addition, our innovation pipeline was weighted towards the second half of the year, especially Q4. Key launches, including Epicelline and Deo Derma Control, were launched in September and only had a minor effect on Q3. They are expected to be a strong pillar of our growth in Q4. Derma sustained its strong momentum with an outstanding performance over the first 9 months, achieving 12.3% sales growth, clearly outperforming the market and our peers. Eucerin Face delivered exceptional results driven by the successful rollout of Epicelline and the launch of Thiamidol in the U.S. Growth was further supported by the remarkable success in Latin America, particularly in Brazil and Mexico, as well as the successful launch of Eucerin in domestic China and India. Building on the strong momentum from the first half of the year, Health Care continued to reinforce its market position in Q3, delivering a remarkable 8.8% sales growth for the first 9 months. Australia and Indonesia delivered double-digit growth, both in Q3 and across the 9-months period, while Germany also accelerated to double-digit growth in Q3. For La Prairie, we have seen a gradual improvement quarter-by-quarter, resulting in a return to growth in the third quarter. This recovery was supported by an improving performance in China, particularly a strong e-commerce business during Q2 and Q3. Let's take a closer look at the organic sales growth of our Consumer Business in the first 9 months across regions. In Europe, we grew by 1.2% with Western Europe growing 1.7% and Eastern Europe slightly declining with 0.7%. Western Europe was negatively impacted by the global luxury travel retail business, particularly during the beginning of the year. Eastern Europe faced pressure from a broader market slowdown and retailer conflicts, particularly in the first half. The Americas region concluded the first 9 months with a robust growth of 2.2%. North America showed a mixed performance with excellent results in Derma, driven by the Thiamidol launch in the U.S. while facing some headwinds in the mass business and with Coppertone in the tough sun care market. Latin America grew by 2.0%, also reflecting a mixed performance. Eucerin delivered strong double-digit growth with outstanding results in key markets such as Mexico and Brazil while our NIVEA business was impacted by general market slowdown, particularly in the deo category and by increased competition from local brands. The Africa, Asia, Australia region delivered solid sales growth of 2.9% despite a negative impact from the ongoing NIVEA portfolio cleanup in China, which was successfully concluded by the end of Q3 as planned. Strong growth was recorded in markets such as India and Japan. With that, I would like to hand over to Vincent, who will provide the outlook for the rest of the year. Vincent Warnery: Thank you, Astrid. Let us conclude with our guidance for the rest of the year 2025. The Consumer Business delivered plus 2% organic sales growth over the first 9 months with an improvement visible in Q3. At the same time, we saw a further deterioration of the market in the third quarter, especially in emerging markets, which is affecting the core of our mass market business. As a result, we are adjusting our full year guidance to around 2.5% organic sales growth for consumer. Our expected growth for the fourth quarter is based on the following pillars. NIVEA is entering the final quarter with a strong innovation pipeline. We recently launched Epicelline, our breakthrough innovation in skin care along with our new derma control deodorant. These launches are still in the early stage and are expected to gain traction and visibility throughout the fourth quarter. Early indicators and the September performance are positive as highlighted in our presentation. The remainder of the year will be driven by the performance of these launches as well as the strengthening of Nivea core business to support both we have implemented targeted rebalancing measures to reinforce our core categories, while at the same time, supporting the successful rollout of our innovations. In China, the strategic repositioning of Nivea, which had a negative effect on our performance during the first 9 months has now been completed and will no longer weigh on our results going forward. Our luxury business with La Prairie is beginning to show encouraging signs of improvement, the return to growth in the third quarter. Finally, our Derma segment continues to perform strongly. We expect double-digit growth over the full year while Q4 is expected to remain below the 9 months performance due to an exceptionally strong fourth quarter in 2024 when Epicelline was rolled out initially. We still confirm our EBIT margin guidance with an improvement of 20 basis points, excluding special factor in the Consumer segment for the full year. In the tesa Business Segment, we confirm our guidance of 1% to 3% organic sales net growth and an EBIT margin, excluding special factors, at around 16%. At group level, we expect organic sales growth of around 2.5% with the EBIT margin, excluding special factors, slightly above last year's level. We continue to be committed to outperforming the market over mid-term, driven by innovation and strategic expansion into white spaces. On profitability, as we have stated in the past, will not sacrifice long-term value creation potential over short-term margin optimization. Nevertheless, we remain committed to profitable growth with EBIT growing at least as fast as the top line. We'll provide further guidance for 2026 and beyond in our full year 2025 call. Now over to you, Christopher for the Q&A. Christopher Sheldon: [Operator Instructions] And we will start with Patrick Folan of Barclays this morning. Patrick Folan: Just 2 questions for me. Maybe focusing on NIVEA first. You had a strong September performance. Was this mainly due to the Epicelline sell-in here and your Derma deo performance? Or was there a wider recovery in the core portfolio here? And my second question is that you talk about value for money for the NIVEA brand, are there any changes you are making to the current pricing strategy with NIVEA in any of your markets? And in terms of the Epicelline price point in Europe, are you still targeting a EUR 25 to EUR 30 pricing? Vincent Warnery: Patrick. On your first question, yes, absolutely, the success of the month of September is mostly due to the launch of Epicelline, NIVEA Epicelline and Derma Control, as the core business, the core market has been in line with Q2. Epicelline is really doing extremely well. I receive every day very good sell-out results. I mentioned, #1 hygiene and beauty product in France. I mentioned also Germany. I was looking also at Italy. This is already the #1 serum in Italy. This is the #1 serum in Netherlands. This is the #1 face care product in Switzerland, in Belgium, in Spain, in Portugal. So clearly, it was already by far the best ever launched Epicelline, but we clearly sell out going in the right direction. Derma Control, we launched it a bit later. We are doing extremely well. I mean, Romania, we are back to the best ever market share in deo. We are regaining market share in deo in Germany. So I feel also very positive about that. On your question about the value for money, I think you have to really to remember that there are only 2 expensive products in the range of NIVEA, which are the Epicelline and the Thiamidol launch. The rest of the product are priced between EUR 2 and EUR 4. So there is no issue of price positioning. This being said, we are currently launching Epicelline. And the way the business is managed, we have some promotions. So for example, if you go to the U.K. that [ Bucci ] is promoting the product at GBP 24, for example, versus a normal price at GBP 29. We have also some promotions. So we will fine-tune the -- we'll see a little bit of the first months are working. And if we feel the need to go below EUR 29, could be EUR 28, EUR 27. We'll do it just to be sure that we have absolutely the right price elasticity. On Derma Control, we had EUR 2.80, so absolutely no issue. So the only open question and again, we'll have the market results soon is do we decrease the price of Epicelline by EUR 1 or EUR 2 in Europe, knowing that, as you might remember, in emerging markets, we are pricing Epicelline below. We are at EUR 22, having also a specific packaging, which allows to keep the same margin, but at a lower price. Patrick Folan: Okay. Just to clarify one thing there. Just on pricing, so you feel comfortable with the price points you have in your current portfolio as we go into next year? Vincent Warnery: Absolutely. I mean the prices are between EUR 2 and EUR 4. What we are clearly trying to do is to reduce the price increase we do next year. You might remember that we were the only brand doing a price increase in 2025, which created some customer retaliations. We try to minimize that next year, focusing really on the products and the innovation where we are bringing a real added value to consumers. Christopher Sheldon: The next question is from Celine Pannuti of JPMorgan. Celine Pannuti: My first question is on the market growth. Vincent, you said that the market has decelerated, especially in emerging markets, and you adjusted your guide for that. How do you feel the company can deliver as you look into 2026? So also given that you're talking about the rebalancing of investment for NIVEA, I wonder as well if you can provide on how you feel in terms of your new level of investment in the deodorant and personal care part and whether for 2026, we should expect that you have -- you need this extra investment and maybe a limited margin expansion? That's my first question. I'll give you the second one after. Vincent Warnery: On your first question, Celine, so what we clearly see, and I mentioned that in my speech that the market -- the skin care market is difficult. And we have -- if you look at the year-to-date figures, we are more -- we are around 0.5%, 1% growth on the market with, of course, different dynamics in mass market, we are around 5%. Derma, this is the news, we are more into the 3%, 4% and luxury is still at minus 5%. So this is a market which is not growing as much as expected. We are expecting a small recovery in the months to come. We see, for example, that the derma market in the U.S. is doing better, and we are over performing this market. We see also luxury, I was mentioning China, but also saw some good figures in luxury going in the same direction. So overall, for the market growth this year between 1% and 2%, and we believe that we go slightly above next year. What we are -- what is making us optimistic in a way is that the worst market dynamics is the derma market. And this is a market which really used to be growing at double digit. And we are now into a market dynamics, which is around 3%, 4%. And this is a market where we are overperforming by a factor to between 2 and 3x the market because we are coming with innovation and because we are supporting those innovation. And this is why when I look at the dynamics next year, on NIVEA. I feel a little bit better than I would say, in 2025 because we have the launches that we are doing right now, and I mentioned Epicelline and Derma Control, but we have also a launch plan, which is much more -- much better balanced next year with more launches in the first semester versus this year and something where we can really have a more balanced dynamics launches versus core. And we are indeed, thanks also to the courageous decisions we have taken on prices, we are able to manage a pretty good gross margin, allowing us to invest -- to continue to invest on those launches. So we will rebalance a little bit the investment between the face care premium product, and we had to launch both Thiamidol and Epicelline in 2025. So rebalance this money into not only other skin care categories, also on more affordable face care proposal, for example, in emerging market, but also on the other end. So with the current P&L equation, we can increase the marketing spendings beyond NIVEA. And of course, on Derma, there is no question, we will continue to invest more. Celine Pannuti: All right. Just maybe to follow up on that, asking whether the 50 basis points plus margin expansion that's your midterm target, how you feel about it going into '26. So that's my follow-up. And then my second question, Astrid now. Can you provide a bit more details about Europe, which really came back to good growth at 3%. Was there a travel retail impact there? If you can tell us what quantify this? And how do you feel about the overall consumer and retail environment? Of course, you have the benefit of the sellout and sell-in of Epicelline. But overall, how you feel the European market is developing as we look into the quarters to come. Vincent Warnery: On your first question, so we will not give a guidance for 2026, and we'll give that in 2025, but we maintain the idea that we have to overperform the market and continue to grow profitably. So we'll come back to that in 3 months. On your question about Europe, yes, travel retail has an impact on the performance of Europe. This is a 40 basis point impact because we are overperforming this market with La Prairie, but this is a double-digit negative market. So this has an impact on Europe. When you look at the question sell-in versus sell-out, the fact that we see some improvement in deo, for example, which was really the biggest market share loss in 2025 in Europe is making us more optimistic. Even if you look at Germany, which is by far our biggest deo market we have been gaining market share over the last 3 months in a row, which is a good news. We see also that the outstanding success of the sun season in Europe, we grew 12% in a market which was growing double digit, but this is really one of the best performance in Sun is also giving us some good momentum. So deo, I would say we feel positive. Sun care is positive. The question is face care. As I said, the sellout results we are getting from specific retailers is promising. But you remember my story, sell-in is one thing, sell-out is another thing. Repurchase is absolutely essential, and this is what we'll be able to measure in the first quarter. So not to -- neither optimistic nor pessimistic, but some good signals that will -- should give us some better performance in Europe next year. Christopher Sheldon: The next question is from Jeremy Fialko of HSBC. Jeremy Fialko: So a couple of questions from me. First one, just to go into the Eastern Europe region that was kind of pretty negative within the period. So just what's going on there? And then the second question is just on kind of capital return. Now you've done the EUR 500 million share buyback for the last couple of years. Do you think -- what do you think the potential would there be to increase that in 2026, given where the share price is [indiscernible] given the kind of existing authority that you have got, if that's something you think would be on your agenda to bring on a board? Vincent Warnery: First question, yes, indeed. Eastern European used to grow double digit. The market was really booming. It suddenly decelerated vigorously and moving from a plus 12% to plus 2%, plus 3%. There's also interesting competitive environment, which has changed. If you look at a country like Poland, 100% of the growth is coming through Korean brands and not really big Korean brands, but Korean brands are there for 6 months and then replaced by others. So all of us, all the global brands are suffering from that. What also worsened the situation are a few customer issues that we have been able to solve. So that's something where we should have a positive momentum in 2026. But the key question is, and this is where obviously rebalancing the portfolio for us is to be sure that we are not only investing on Epicelline and Thiamidol, but we have also a strong action on deodorants. This is by far our biggest market in Eastern Europe. So that's what we are doing right now. And I mentioned the example of Romania, for example, where we reached our best ever market share in deo. That's something which is giving us some hope. On your question about share buyback, we just closed, the second time we did share buyback. So you have to allow us to discuss with the Supervisory Board at the end of the year what we want to do. What is essential? You remember that in terms of priority, we know that we have too much cash available and the priority should and will continue to be M&A. Christopher Sheldon: The next question would be from Guillaume Delmas from UBS. Guillaume Gerard Delmas: Two questions for me, please. The first one on the 2025 revised outlook. I mean, still trying to reconcile this updated guidance of around 2.5% for Consumer. That seems to imply a little bit more than 4% organic sales growth in Q4, but you also had that very strong momentum of NIVEA in September, growing nearly 8%. So why -- wondering why you would expect such a sequential slowdown between September and the fourth quarter? And then my second question, it's on the changes you are making to your strategy, particularly that stronger support behind more skin care categories and deo. I mean, I guess, first, when do you think we should start seeing some benefits from this? I mean, could it be immediate? Or is it more of a slow burn? And secondly, given that your margin guidance for the year for 2025 for Consumer is unchanged, would it be fair to assume that at this stage, it's much more about reallocation of resources rather than an overall increase in your marketing budget? Vincent Warnery: Guillaume, on your first question, you should not forget that, obviously, when you launch a new -- I mean, the biggest launch ever on Epicelline and NIVEA plus a range of 6 or 7 SKUs of deo in September, you cannot continue the same momentum for the next 3 months. So you will have -- the pipeline effect will be, I would say, September, October. And then you have the sellout. So this is why we have indeed planned the growth with the full success of those launches, but a core business, which will not improve dramatically. So that's the assumption of the Q4. This is why we wanted to come with a more realistic assumption for Q4, which is, by the way, consistent with what all of you thought. On the rebalancing, no, I mean, the reason why we came with Q2 and we decided to change the guidance on EBIT moving from plus 50 basis points to plus 20 basis points is simply because we knew that those big launches were coming in Q4, and we knew that it would have been a shame not to support them just because we wanted to deliver in a kind of dogmatic way the first guidance we gave on EBIT. So the 20 basis points that we -- the 30 basis points that we decided to allocate to marketing budget are exactly the money we're going to spend in Q4, and we have the biggest ever spending on the face care launch on NIVEA and the biggest ever spending on the deo launch on NIVEA on top of, of course, continuing to support the launch of all the launches and the activity of Derma and the bigger mission in China with 11/11. So no change in the media strategy, just using the 30 basis points that we freed in the Q2 to support those big launches in the weeks to come. Christopher Sheldon: The next question is from like Ulrike Dauer from Dow Jones. Ulrike Dauer: I hope you can hear me. I don't have much of a voice today. Sorry. I'd like to ask a question about the U.S. import tariffs after the failed tariff deal between Switzerland and U.S., the import tariffs are now 39%, which are affecting La Prairie. And I was just wondering, will you be able to pass on the additional cost to customers? How much more expensive will be even already expensive products deal? And is that still not enough for a strategy change? Or do you consider maybe producing more in the U.S. now like many other companies more or less voluntarily are planning to do? Also, the overall import tariff exposure, you said that a lot of the products for the U.S. market are produced in Mexico or other countries. Can you quantify additional costs related to those new import tariffs by quarter, by full year? Is there any additional information you might be able to provide? I have some other question about Kering. Maybe you can answer that question later. Vincent Warnery: Your question about La Prairie. So yes, indeed, the Swiss government has not yet been able to negotiate a reduced tax level tariff increase with the U.S. So we have indeed this extremely difficult situation. We have been, of course, anticipating the change of service. So we are covered, I would say, in terms of stocks in the U.S. For the time being, we are waiting -- wait and see in a way. We do not believe today that it will be wise to implement immediately the tariff increase on the La Prairie prices, which, as you mentioned, are already very high. You imagine that in percentage is high, but in absolute value, it's extremely high for La Prairie. So we are not planning to do that. You can imagine that we have anyway a gross margin, which is pretty comfortable on La Prairie. We will see the way other competitors are acting. What is absolutely out of the question is to produce in the U.S. because the strength of La Prairie is made in Switzerland. That's the story of the brand. So we'll absolutely not produce in the U.S. We'll continue to produce in Switzerland. On your second question, you rightly mentioned that we are in a way, lucky because we have one -- a big part of the production that we are selling in the U.S. is produced in the U.S. and the other big part is in Mexico, where there was no additional tariffs. So we have today an economic equation, which is pretty good for our business. Yes, we have a few products produced in Europe. So they will be affected by the 15% tariff increase, but it's really a minor, minor part of the range, and we'll be able to absorb that either through small price increases or just by managing value engineering projects. So all in all, yes, La Prairie is an issue, but it's a small part of the business in the U.S. The rest of the range is in a way, protected. Ulrike Dauer: May I ask one more question about the Kering brands that were up for sale. Have you looked at them and considered or don't they really match your portfolio strategy? Vincent Warnery: Ulrike, we are good in 1 category, which is skin care, skin care, skin care, and we are lucky enough that this is by far the biggest beauty category in the world. We have no expertise in perfume. So it would have been a mistake to enter this field without any expertise, so we did not even look at the project. Christopher Sheldon: And the next question is from Bernadette Hogg of Reuters. Bernadette Hogg: I'm sorry. I was still in mute. So it's a bit of a recap question on the slowdown of the market -- in the emerging markets for skin care. So do you see these factors as temporary? Or is it more structural? And how long do you anticipate it lasting? And what are the major causes of the slowdown? Vincent Warnery: A clear deceleration. We used to have an emerging markets, skin care growing double digit. We end up to a level which is close to low single digit, even negative in some countries. There are a few phenomenons which are taking place. Obviously, Latin America is hit by the -- not only the political uncertainties, but also all the discussions about U.S. tariffs, not U.S. tariffs and Mexico is a country where obviously, we -- the market was suffering with that. We see in other countries, the development of simplified routines. People -- this is what they call the skinimalism trend where people are buying less product and some of that cheaper. So the only solution, and this is what we are doing pretty successfully with Derma is to come with innovation. In fact, the worst market dynamics in emerging market is the derma market, and we are growing extremely high with double-digit growth in each and every market. We gained market share everywhere. So the recipe that we have been using successfully with Eucerin, we are using it now with NIVEA with also some changes and some rebalancing. For example, I mentioned already the fact that we -- it's the first time we are launching the same global product Epicelline with 2 different packaging proposal, so one allowing us to sell it at below EUR 22 in emerging markets, and that's much cheaper than the EUR 29 we have in Europe. We are also putting a lot of focus on products like NIVEA Soft in India, which is a fantastic accessible product, but also Facial in Brazil, which has a 30% market share in skin care. We are rebalancing our investment also on deo. I mentioned Derma Control, which is a global launch that we are launching everywhere. So we are not optimistic on the development of the emerging market dynamics. We'll see what happens. But clearly, we are coming with a much stronger innovation portfolio and -- I would say, much more -- much better adapted launch portfolio to emerging markets. So we hope to see some good figures in the months to come. Christopher Sheldon: The next question is from Anna Westkämper of Handelsblatt. Anna Westkämper: I have 2 questions regarding tesa. First of all, how dependent are you on the recovery of the automotive sector here? And second of all, are you looking into expanding into other industries like defense with tesa? Astrid Hermann: Thank you so much, Anna, for your questions. So look, automotive is a big part of the tesa business. Between automotive and electronics, they're really the pillars of what tesa has established. The nice thing about tesa is that they continue to make progress in each of the industries, in automotive as well. So while the market certainly was challenged in Europe and North America, the projects it gained, particularly in Asia Pacific, have really helped kind of balance that impact. so again, not an easy market and certainly not a huge growth driver for tesa year-to-date, but 1 that is also not a huge drag, which is very, very helpful. And yes, tesa has really invested if you followed some of our commentary also in previous calls. They've really invested over the last few years significantly into innovation and business development, and that is really to go beyond these 2 industries as well and significantly drive more business in other industries. Christopher Sheldon: And the next question is from Olivier Nicolai of Goldman Sachs. Jean-Olivier Nicolai: Just very 2 quick follow-ups. First, on NIVEA Epicelline, you obviously have it in Europe and a few other countries. But are you planning to roll this brand out across your whole geographic footprint in next year? And then secondly, on tesa, just a quick follow-up. In the context of obviously what we just discussed about the automotive market, should we expect most of the growth for tesa for next year to come from Electronics? Vincent Warnery: Thanks for your question. Yes, absolutely, NIVEA Epicelline will be launched and is launched absolutely everywhere. So obviously, not yet in China because we are focusing all our energies in Thiamidol. But this is -- the objective is to launch it in most of our NIVEA countries in the next 6 months. We have already covered Europe. We are starting now in Q4 to launch it in some emerging markets, but this is clearly a very big priority for NIVEA globally. On tesa, Astrid? Astrid Hermann: Yes. Thank you for your question on tesa. Look, we -- the tesa business absolutely wants to continue to grow in electronics. As you know, a lot of the Electronics business is a project business. So we need to win projects every single year, for example, also with the big device manufacturer. So absolutely, we continue to look for growth in the electronics business as well. Christopher Sheldon: Next question is from Mikheil Omanadze from BNP Paribas. Mikheil Omanadze: The first one would be on NIVEA. So if September was so strong, it would imply quite a sluggish delivery in July, August. Would you please be able to provide some color by categories within NIVEA, which were particularly weak in July, August? And my second question is on Chantecaille and Coppertone. How did both brands do in Q3? Vincent Warnery: On your question about the NIVEA, yes, July, August was well low also because, obviously, we had 0 launches at the time. We had also no effect on any price increase. So we did a minus single digit, I think, on NIVEA, if I remember well, on July, August, compensated by the figures of September, I was just sharing. You have also to keep in mind that's important also to mention that, that the Chinese relaunch has changed -- has obviously impacted strongly the development of NIVEA. If you look at the first 9 months, if we didn't have that this revamping of the Chinese business, NIVEA will be growing plus 1.3%. So that's also something which obviously we decided to do. We are hoping at the time to have a better NIVEA business, but it has obviously impacted the situation. The second question, Mikheil was? Mikheil Omanadze: It was on Coppertone, Chantecaille. Vincent Warnery: Coppertone, Chantecaille, yes. Coppertone, the only good news on Coppertone is that we finally found our way. We clearly have tried a lot of things with Coppertone, trying to launch in face care, trying to launch in spray, trying to develop the brand in a lot of directions. If you know a little bit the U.S. market, we have refocused on sport. We took a very famous rugby -- female rugby player. We are gaining market share on sport. It's not enough to compensate the loss of the rest of the categories. But at least we will continue to support that. We'll focus all our investment on sport, which is the legacy, the origin of the brand and try to gain market share in this category. Chantecaille, we had a very good first semester with also the launch of China, which impacted the figures. Q3 was a little bit more difficult because we suffered from the slow development of the U.S. luxury market, and we are very dependent on the luxury market. And we have not yet been able to open the stores we wanted to open. They are more coming in the fourth quarter and the first quarter. So all in all, we grow at 7%, 6.8%, which is good, but I was hoping to do better. And we'll see really the way the Chinese business, but also the Indian market, and we are launching in India will also complement hopefully, a better U.S. business in the months to come. Christopher Sheldon: And then we have Tom Sykes next in line. Tom Sykes: Just, I guess, some -- a couple of follow-ups on questions already been asked. But in terms of the rollout or level of innovation in full year '26, excluding the sort of country rollouts of Epicelline, then what's the level of that in full year '26 compared to '25? Because you obviously had theoretically a large upgrade of many products in NIVEA? And how would you view that being phased H1 versus H2? And just on pricing, I don't know whether you've given the -- I don't think you've given the commentary on sort of pricing versus volume at all at the moment. But any view on commentary you can give on that? And to what degree do you need to push price to maintain gross margins given that FX has moved from where we were, please? Vincent Warnery: Tom, on the rollout, yes, absolutely. We have a better launch plan for next year, better in 2 directions. First, balance between H1 and H2. I mean, one of the difficulties that we had this year was the fact that we had almost no launches on NIVEA in the first semester. One of the reasons being that I didn't want to launch NIVEA Epicelline too early after the launch of Eucerin Epicelline. So it has clearly created a first semester with a very low level of innovation. Next year, we have a big plan in the first semester, where clearly it's really 50-50 in terms of new launches, H1 versus H2. The second difference also it's also a wider plan in the sense that most of the initiatives in 2025 were in face care and Derma Control deo at the end of the year. We have next year some very good launches on body, on deo, on lip, on sun care. And on face care, which is interesting, not only the, I would say, the usual suspects, the premium product, Epicelline and Thiamidol, but also a very big ambition also on some more accessible offer, NIVEA Q10, NIVEA Soft, facial in Brazil in order to be sure that also in face care, we maintain this good value for money dimension. On pricing, I always say that the objective is clearly to have a dynamic which is more 2/3 volume, 1/3 price. What I find interesting in the third quarter is, in fact, this is a quarter which is purely driven by volumes. And this is the first time because obviously, the price effect was in Q1 and Q2, which I find interesting because it proved that this is one of the best performance in volume we had since a lot of quarter. We are able to regain this volume growth and also to recruit new consumers. So next year, will be surgical. We'll not do price increase over the board. We'll be surgical. We'll do it only when we are obliged indeed to do it because we want to protect the gross margin. And we are also willing to be much more demanding in terms of cost of goods increase. We are challenging our suppliers. We are moving also from a high dependency on single sourcing to a much better multi-sourcing in order to make some negotiation on the cost of goods. And we'll show that we do price increase where we have to protect the gross margin and/or where we are coming with an innovation or innovation was a true added value in the eyes of retailers, but also in the eyes of consumers. So the level of price increase will be strongly, dramatically below the one we had in the years before. Christopher Sheldon: And it looks like we have one follow-up question from Celine. Celine Pannuti: What China did in the third quarter, it seems that it was negative for NIVEA. But overall, if you can talk about how comfortable you feel about the reacceleration in the fourth quarter? And if you could comment as well on La Prairie. Vincent Warnery: I must say, Celine, I feel well with China. Let me start with the absolutely obvious success. We have Eucerin, which is growing 83% in Northeast Asia, which means that we are growing 150% in China. We have the anti-pigment serum of Eucerin, which is today the #1 anti-pigment serum in China. So we are beating not only the global competitors, but also local competitors. And the first 11/11 figures, so it's only 30% of the time, but we are growing in sell-out by 83% versus last year. So pretty, pretty happy with Eucerin. We have a great story. We have this unique ingredient, which is exactly what you need to succeed in China. So more to come, but an outstanding performance in 2025 and 2026. The second element, which is making us optimistic is La Prairie. I mentioned the fact that we are growing in net sales by 3%. But if you look at sellout, we are growing at 10% and with e-commerce growing at 30%, and that's really something that we did not experience in China since a long time. So La Prairie, good dynamics, compensating -- more than compensating the difficulty of Hainan, which was always small for us. I think the job which has been done by the new CEO and the team is starting to pay off. And the fact that we discovered late, but clearly, with a great execution, e-commerce is doing well. Last but not least, NIVEA, this is a question. What I can tell you that when you look at the face care business over the last quarter, we have been growing step by step. If you look at sellout quarter 2 plus 18%, quarter 3 plus 36%. Again, if I look at my 11/11 first figures, again, 30% of the time, we are growing plus 30%. I also believe that this Thiamidol story with, of course, a better price is an asset for NIVEA. And again, we are also using Eucerin to make some -- to create some awareness on Thiamidol. So I would not open champagne, but I think when I look at the 3 major brands in China, we have pretty good signals and more to come in Q4, which will be extremely strong for China. Christopher Sheldon: Thank you. That was the last question. This concludes our conference call. Beiersdorf's next Investor Relations event will be the release of our full year results on March 3, 2026. We appreciate your interest in Beiersdorf and look forward to seeing you back here again in the new year. Thank you very much. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, the conference is now over. Thank you for choosing Chorus Call, and thank you for participating in the conference. You may now disconnect your lines. Goodbye.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to the USANA Health Sciences third quarter earnings call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, this conference is being recorded. I will now turn the conference over to your host, Andrew Masuda, Director of Investor Relations. Thank you. You may begin. Andrew Masuda: Thanks, Diego, and good morning, everyone. We appreciate you joining us to review our third quarter results. Today's conference call is being broadcast live via webcast and can be accessed directly from our website at ir.usana.com. Shortly following the call, a replay will be available on our website. As a reminder, during the course of this conference call, management will make forward-looking statements regarding future events or the future financial performance of our company. Those statements involve risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ perhaps materially from the results projected in such forward-looking statements. Examples of these statements include those regarding our strategies and outlook for fiscal year 2025, uncertainty related to the economic and operating environment around the world and our operations and financial results. We caution you that these statements should be considered in conjunction with disclosures, including specific risk factors and financial data contained in our most recent filings with the SEC. I'm joined by our President and CEO, Jim Brown; our Chief Financial Officer, Doug Hekking; our Chief Commercial Officer, Brent Neidig; our Chief Operating Officer, Walter Noot; as well as other executives. Yesterday, after the market closed, we announced our third quarter results and posted our management commentary document on the company's website. We'll now hear brief remarks from Jim before opening the call for questions. Jim Brown: Thank you, Andrew, and good morning, everyone. We continue to execute our comprehensive commercial strategy in the third quarter, which was highlighted by the global rollout of our enhanced compensation plan. While third quarter results were impacted by softer sales and Brand Partner productivity leading up to the Global Convention in August, we are in the initial stages of the full rollout, and I'd like to be clear in saying that I'm encouraged by recent activity we are seeing in the business. If you recall, we enhanced our compensation plan to ensure USANA is at the forefront of today's evolving and competitive landscape for entrepreneurs. Our commercial strategy includes an enhanced compensation plan, product innovation, updated and refreshed brand story and improved tools to assist with building a business. The enhanced compensation plan focuses on three key elements: share, grow and lead. This new framework is designed to help our Brand Partners to have greater success in building their sales organization with new Brand Partners and customers in a simple and explainable way. This is particularly relevant today as the desire to earn part-time supplementary income or to earn income on one's own terms is as high as it has ever been. Our recent changes have systematically addressed the most important features of a competitive compensation plan in this market: simplicity, early earnings potential and competitive pay for performance. We have simplified the plan, made it easier for new people to understand, act and share, improved the earnings capability of our new Brand Partners so that they have the potential to see success faster. And we've enhanced our pay-for-performance criteria, which will more greatly reward those who are doing more of the work. Simplicity and early success are key requirements of a younger demographic, and early indications are that this offering is resonating with that audience. We are encouraged by our Brand Partners' response to the enhancements and the recent lift we have seen in sales activity and leader productivity. We are seeing improvement across several key metrics, including engagement, as indicated by meeting attendance, Brand Partner attraction and customer acquisition, speed to earnings their first commission and general stickiness of Brand Partners and customers. Qualitatively, Brand Partners across the world are sharing how these new changes have brought renewed excitement, energy and success to their businesses. Our vision of Brand Partners being a focal point continues to resonate and build trust with these entrepreneurs as they have expressed improved confidence in sharing the opportunity. During the quarter, we reported an increase in inventories that can be attributed to, in great part, new product introductions to support our growth strategy, increased investments in location of our inventory to support tariff mitigation efforts and working capital investments in our venture companies, Hiya and Rise Bar. We have also begun the process of targeted in-house production for our venture companies. We believe our in-house manufacturing capabilities contribute to better margins, improved control of inventory levels and help to mitigate supply chain risk while providing a meaningful contribution to delivering the highest-quality nutritional products. Moving on to our other businesses. If you recall, these businesses provide USANA the ability to reach a broader demographic of health and wellness market while providing diversification and strengthening USANA's financial profile. Overall, we're encouraged by the year-to-date sales growth of these entities. I'll start by sharing an update on our direct-to-consumer business, Hiya. Although Hiya experienced some challenges in top line growth in the third quarter, the company has delivered 26% year-to-date sales growth, putting them on track to deliver another year of record sales. Notably, we have made significant progress on several integration initiatives. In the first half of the year, a large focus was placed on the implementation of a new ERP system and related controls to ensure that Hiya is fully operating as a subsidiary of a public company. There has been significant progress made that we believe will support the Hiya team moving forward. We have also been working on other areas that provide operational synergies. For example, during the quarter we assisted the team in the transition to a new logistics partner, which is anticipated to drive operational efficiency in the coming year. We also continue to leverage core competencies at USANA, including research and development activities, manufacturing and general operational expertise to support Hiya in the new product formulation, international expansion and cost savings opportunities. Another example, we anticipate to begin the manufacturing of Hiya products in-house over the next several months, which we anticipate will continue to improve margins in the late second quarter and back half of 2026. Altogether, we're pleased with the progress we've made on all these fronts and continue to expect Hiya to generate double-digit sales growth for the full 2025. The team has several exciting growth initiatives planned for next year, which we will address next quarter when we provide our initial outlook for fiscal 2026. Rise Bar, which was acquired in 2022, reported record third quarter net sales and year-to-date net sales have increased 169%. Although Rise Bar is still relatively small as a percentage of our sales portfolio, we're very pleased with the progress, including channel expansion and new product offerings that we believe will contribute to strong future sales heading into 2026. We are investing additional resources and working capital as well as leveraging USANA's operational expertise to capitalize on current momentum and to drive long-term growth and efficiencies. We believe there is meaningful growth opportunities in the health and food space over the next several years. As included in our third quarter earnings release, we reported that we have initiated and are executing a global cost reduction process, including a rightsizing of our workforce. This process will focus on prioritizing top strategic priorities while also targeting efficiencies that support a more agile and adaptable organization moving forward. We expect to incur an estimated onetime charge of $4.7 million in the fourth quarter, which has been reflected in our updated outlook. In closing, we remain confident that our comprehensive commercial team strategy will position USANA to drive long-term growth in our direct selling business and deliver long-term value for our customers and Brand Partners. Additionally, we are succeeding in our diversification strategy with the growth of Hiya in the children's health and wellness market and the growth of Rise in the healthy foods market. Together, these elements reinforce our positive outlook for the future and our commitment to create lasting value across our portfolio. With that, I'll now ask the operator to please open the line for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And our first question comes from Anthony Lebiedzinski with Sidoti & Company. Anthony Lebiedzinski: So you have stated both in the release and this morning that you have seen a pickup in sales activity and leader productivity in recent weeks, which is encouraging. So can you just kind of walk us through maybe some -- share some additional details as far as the trajectory of your business trends as you went from July through August, September and maybe so far in October, if you could comment on that? Brent Neidig: Sure, Anthony. It's Brent. We have seen some promising trends from our new compensation plan that was launched earlier in July. And I think primarily what we've seen is we've seen more engagement and excitement around the offering than we historically have seen over the last couple of years. So it's been quite promising from that perspective. As Jim mentioned in his notes, we're really trying to focus on the upfront earnings opportunity. We know that as soon as people can engage with USANA, as soon as they see success and that they can see that success sooner on, they're more likely to stay with us longer. And so that's what's really resonated with our field right now and our Brand Partners. And historically, that's somewhat been a challenge over the last couple of years. And as people's expectations have changed in today's marketplace, they've been looking for an easier upfront earnings opportunity, and we feel like we've delivered on that front. So it's still early. Yet what we've seen in September, now the first couple of weeks in October, all signs are pretty promising, especially from our more mature markets like the United States. We've seen some reengagement from some of our longer tenured Brand Partners, which is really encouraging to see. Jim Brown: Yes. Just a further comment on that. During the quarter, we mentioned we didn't have the best quarter or it didn't meet our expectations. We did the kind of launch at the beginning of July of the compensation enhancement as well as some other stuff for our Brand Partners, and we saw a slowdown at that point in time where people were absorbing and not really getting into the business for a while. And then we've seen what Brent talked about. The pickup has really been after our Global Convention in August. So it really hit right at the end of August into September. So very promising signs, but again, early yet. G. Hekking: Yes. And Anthony, this is Doug. Just for context, and we talked about a little bit of this in the prerelease. When you roll a lot of information out, as Jim said, it takes some time to process. So we anticipated a little bit of softness as they took time to digest and understand and have some more of these in-person meetings. And our convention served and that investment there, I think, served as well to be able to have some of those conversations. But we saw maybe a little bit softer than we anticipated and lasted a little bit longer. But as Jim and Brent both indicated, we're pleased by kind of the traction we have now. There's a lot of work to do, but we're definitely leaning into it and working on executing the plan. Anthony Lebiedzinski: All right. That's very helpful context. And I guess that explains why the Americas and Europe region performed relatively better than some of your other regions, I guess, right, as far as looking at the percentage of your sales declines. Is that why? Because they're more mature of those markets? G. Hekking: Well, no, I think -- we had the event. We had some sales at the event. The other thing that you have to recognize is because the Rise Bar has been a relatively small percentage of sales. And because it's been there, we indicate -- you can see in the tables that we include that in the Americas and Europe number. And so part of that contribution -- without a doubt, what Brent said is accurate. But part of that contribution is also from the pickup in performance at Rise Bar as well. Anthony Lebiedzinski: Got it. Okay. And then can you just also talk about the incentives that you plan for the fourth quarter and whether some of those incentives may need to spill over into early '26? Or you think this is just a short-term one quarter event? Brent Neidig: Yes. Anthony, we're going to continue to look for strategic opportunities to provide incentives for our Brand Partners. Specifically now, as we've just launched our new compensation offering, it's really important for all of our Brand Partners around the world to understand it, to feel excitement around that offering and to really get going working according to that plan. So I think it's been indicated already, but we do have some incentives planned for the fourth quarter which should help us land with where we're guiding in terms of revenue. And it certainly will spill over into Q1 of next year just like it always does. We're always looking for opportunities for promotions to incentivize our Brand Partners. Anthony Lebiedzinski: Understood. Okay. And then just switching gears to Hiya. So as I look at the active customer count, that has declined. Can you talk about the reasons for that? And how confident are you that Hiya can get back to growth next year? Walter Noot: Yes. This is Walter. Yes, we're very confident with Hiya. We've had some slowdowns. In the third quarter, we expected more pickup because typically, their business is all DTC and they do a lot of marketing through Meta. And Meta has changed algorithms and so we're trying to figure that out. And we've been through this multiple times with Hiya in the past so we expect that to bounce back. And as Hiya continues to grow through DTC and retail and international expansion, yes, we expect that to continue to grow. Anthony Lebiedzinski: Got it. Okay. And then lastly for me before I pass it on to others. So in terms of just the rightsizing of your organization that you plan to do in the fourth quarter, how should we think about the level of annualized operating cost savings that you plan to achieve with this? G. Hekking: Yes. Anthony, this is Doug. So we're very early in the process. And so one of the components, as Jim mentioned, the rightsizing of staff is part of it. There's far more to it than there. And so I think what we'll look to do because we still got a lot of work and analysis and progress to make, we'll look to comment on that in February more fully. But we definitely expect to go back and see some cost savings and kind of cost reduction as a part of this process. And we'll talk about that in more detail in February. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And our next question comes from Susan Anderson with Canaccord Genuity. Susan Anderson: I guess maybe just a follow-up on Hiya. It sounds like as you integrate it further, maybe there's some more efficiencies to be had there. Maybe if you could talk about that a little bit more, I don't know, if you could quantify it and the impact it's going to have to margins at all. Walter Noot: Well, I won't give you all the details as far as -- this is Walter, by the way. I won't give you all the details on quantify. I think we'll have more information in February about that. But specifically, Hiya makes vitamins. That's their #1 product. They also do protein powders. And we have reformulated or formulated their products for our manufacturing process. We've got that ready. So we'll be making all of their vitamins here in-house, which we have all capabilities to do that. Also as far as operational efficiencies, there's just a lot. We're really good at operations as far as because of the size of our business, and so we're able to absorb a lot of support for supply chain. And they had a 3PL that they were using that we helped them move, transition to a different 3PL. And that reduced our cost by quite a bit and allowed them to be much more efficient. Susan Anderson: Okay. Great. That's really helpful. And then maybe if you could just talk a little bit about just the industry in general. Are you seeing any, I guess, slowdown from consumers as it relates to either VMS or wellness purchases? Are they looking for more value maybe than what they were 6 months or a year ago? And I guess maybe if you could talk about it by region as well. G. Hekking: Yes. Susan, to clarify, this is on the broader business, not specifically related to Hiya. Is that accurate? Susan Anderson: Correct, yes, just in the industry in general. Jim Brown: Yes. We're a part of some associations that help the industry in general. And quite honestly, the direct selling business has struggled over the past few years, probably since COVID. A lot of direct selling companies are basically enhancing their offerings, making it quicker and easier to earn modest income as well as share products. So we have seen that same struggle over that time period. But I think we're getting there when it comes to what we just offered in July through August of this year, and we're setting ourselves up for the future. Yes. And definitely, the product or the vitamin side of the business has struggled some. There is a lot of competition out there. And our biggest challenge is to make sure that we can easily show people our competitive offering. And again, our offering is a little bit different than some of the companies out there because of the direct selling industry. We offer fantastic products as well as an opportunity to earn. So that's one of the highlights when we go out there when we look at Hiya and Rise. And that information, I'll let Walter speak to that. Walter Noot: Yes. Hiya is children's vitamins. And the children's vitamin market has been, I would say, there's quite a bit of competition there. But Hiya creates a complete -- a different experience for their customers. And because of that and because they're DTC and because they're all subscription, that business has actually been really, really good for us. And they've been able to take market share from other companies and I think they'll continue to do that. So for the Hiya side, it's been a really good. Rise is protein powders, bars, RTD, and that business is really, really good for us too, especially with the protein business in the U.S. You just see a huge uptick and huge demand for proteins, and we're capitalizing that with high with Rise. That's why we're seeing such growth. G. Hekking: Yes. And Susan, a little bit more color on kind of just the broader category and what we're seeing with the consumers. We also play in a space where we have what I believe to be the best quality product out there. And one of the commercial team's strategy is get better and better and better at articulating that story so they really understand the value proposition. We're not a commodity-type product. That's not a place we're going to play. And we're going to continue to differentiate what we're offering and we're going to make sure that we convey that story so consumers understand the differentiation of our products. Susan Anderson: Okay. Great. And then I guess maybe if you could just talk about if you think there's opportunity -- Hiya has been pretty successful. The DTC business seem to be doing better. I mean, is there an opportunity, you think, to maybe buy a couple more DTC businesses maybe to tack on to that? Or how are you thinking about kind of like your future strategy? Jim Brown: Yes. This is Jim. You're definitely hitting it. Our future strategy is diversification. We're committed to the direct selling channel. We're going to continue to work on making that grow and be a big engine. As we get cash through our business, we are going to look at other opportunities in M&A or opportunities within the companies that they're there to actually expand within. So yes, that is part of our strategy. I think diversification will make a stronger USANA and we'll continue down that path. And even if you look at where we've been with direct sales and getting modest growth there just over time with the growth rates of both Hiya and Rise been, we'll see a shift in our overall portfolio of getting more omni-channel and more diversified. G. Hekking: Yes. I would also say kind of given the recent announcement during the fourth quarter, as we look to pivot to be more agile and adaptable and work on some of these cost reductions from a capital allocation priority in the near term, it will be investing in the commercial strategy as the top priority and, as Jim mentioned, kind of our venture companies because we see really good opportunity in both Hiya and Rise. And we continue to evaluate different opportunities. But those, without a doubt, will be our priorities from a capital allocation. Operator: And there are no further questions at this time, so I'll hand the floor back to Andrew Masuda for closing remarks -- actually, one question just popped in. And that question comes from Ivan Feinseth with Tigress Financial Partners. Ivan Feinseth: I have a few questions. As far as now, I see your strategy is to delineate between direct-to-consumer and still your sales marketing channel. But as an example, there's still a lot of confusion about supplements that I feel that your adviser channel can help. Like everybody is saying the #1 supplement that you should take is magnesium. But there's just tons of different formulations. You should take magnesium formulated with different amino acids or different formulations at night versus the morning. How do you feel your product line could meet some of those demands and that your adviser channel could help consumers better understand that? Kathryn Armstrong: Ivan, it's Kathryn. I think the data on magnesium is interesting and still, as we've discussed, a little confusing, right? So when we look at the clinical data and sort of who has been pushing the clinicals and what types of forms have been studied and whether or not there's been a lot of A/B testing of them versus each other, the data there is not consistent and solid. I think in alignment with USANA's core values, right, we are always prioritizing science and ensuring that our customers and Brand Partners have the best possible options. So we continue to look at different magnesium blends as well as all of the different elements that are important for human health. And we'll continue to look at that and to ensure that the research that's being vetted is being vetted objectively. Ivan Feinseth: And then how do you feel that RFK's Make America Healthy initiative is helping you to create some sales opportunity, getting more people interested in the need for supplements? How are you kind of capitalizing on that both direct-to-consumer and to your sales channels? Jim Brown: Yes. Ivan, this is Jim. I think, in general, we appreciate any direction that shows that vitamins and supplements are very important for people around the world. I mean, even if we look in at some of our other markets, there's initiatives from the government standpoint that we can attach to and educate and give people great offerings to meet the needs. We talked about this for years. Our diets really aren't hitting the mark and that's why supplements are so important. And I think, over time, people are getting more and more educated and understand that, and that just helps USANA and it helps the whole industry in general. Like Doug had said a minute ago, the thing that we supply is the best vitamins in the world and we'll continue to do that. We'll always look to see what our customers and Brand Partners need and make additions or adaptations to what we're offering. But I mean, any time you have the government or even other agencies talk about how supplements are needed for your overall balance and diet, it's just a benefit to us. And it -- go ahead, Ivan. Sorry. Ivan Feinseth: For a long time, the government has kind of been a headwind to the supplement industry, and now it really looks like it's going to be a tremendous tailwind led by the Make America Healthy initiative. Jim Brown: Yes, I agree with that. And again, that's just fantastic for the industry. And we've believed that all along. We've been in business 30 years. I can only imagine, I've been with the company right at 20, how difficult it was at the beginning when vitamins were really not looked at positively or there was just no information about it. And our Founder, Dr. Wentz, made the decision to move forward and give us the best product line out there. So yes, again, we'll go along with what's out there, and it's especially helpful when it's positive to the industry. Operator: Thank you. That was our last question. So I'll now hand the floor to Andrew Masuda to close. Thank you. Andrew Masuda: Thanks, Diego, and thank you all for your questions and participation on today's conference call. If you have any remaining questions, please feel free to contact Investor Relations at (801) 954-7210. Operator: Thank you. And with that, we conclude today's call. All parties may disconnect. Have a good day.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Blackstone Third Quarter 2025 Investor Call. Today's conference is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] At this time, I'd like to turn the conference over to Weston Tucker, Head of Shareholder Relations. Please go ahead. Weston Tucker: Thanks, Katie, and good morning, and welcome to Blackstone's third quarter conference call. Joining today are Steve Schwarzman, Chairman and CEO; Jon Gray, President and Chief Operating Officer; and Michael Chae, Vice Chairman and Chief Financial Officer. Earlier this morning, we issued a press release and slide presentation, which are available on our website. We expect to file our 10-Q report in a few weeks. I'd like to remind you that today's call may include forward-looking statements, which are uncertain and may differ from actual results materially. We do not undertake any duty to update these statements. For a discussion of some of the factors that could affect results, please see the Risk Factors section of our 10-K. We'll also refer to non-GAAP measures, and you'll find reconciliations in the press release on the Shareholders page of our website. Also note that nothing on this call constitutes an offer to sell or a solicitation of an offer to purchase an interest in any Blackstone fund. This audio cast is copyrighted material of Blackstone and may not be duplicated without consent. Quickly on results. We reported GAAP net income for the quarter of $1.2 billion. Distributable earnings were $1.9 billion or $1.52 per common share, and we declared a dividend of $1.29 per share, which will be paid to holders of record as of November 3. With that, I'll turn the call over to Steve. Stephen Schwarzman: Good morning, and thank you for joining our call. Before we begin, I want to take a moment to acknowledge the horrific shooting that occurred at our New York City offices on July 28. The random attack resulted in multiple deaths, including our beloved colleague, Wesley Lepatner. Wesley was a wife and mother and a dear friend and mentor to many within and outside of our firm. We will greatly miss Wesley. Will continue to honor her legacy. We're also grateful for the bravery of our building security team, along with the New York Police Department who responded that day and who put themselves in harm's way every day to protect others. Turning to our results. Blackstone reported an outstanding third quarter. Distributable earnings increased nearly 50% year-on-year to $1.9 billion, as Weston mentioned, underpinned by a 26% growth in fee-related earnings and a more than doubling of net realizations. Inflows reached $54 billion, the fourth consecutive quarter in excess of $50 billion and totaled $225 billion for the last 12 months. Our fundraising success lifted assets under management to a new industry record of $1.24 trillion. And looking forward, I believe our prospects for growth are strong today is at any point in the firm's history. The structural tailwinds driving the alternative sector are accelerating with Blackstone as the reference firm. More investors are being introduced to the benefits of private market solutions than ever before, with growing adoption across the vast private wealth and insurance channels. And following the U.S. administration's recent executive order, we expect the defined contribution market to open to alternatives over time as well. In these areas, the powerful advantages of our brand, scale and breadth of capabilities are even more pronounced. At the same time, institutional limited partners are increasing their allocations to alternatives in multiple areas, and they're consolidating relationships with the best performing managers who can provide comprehensive multi-asset solutions. Meanwhile, in terms of deployment, the scope of where we invest continues to expand significantly as we scale our platforms in digital and energy infrastructure, private credit, Asia, the secondaries market for alternatives and other key growth areas. We are in the early innings of penetrating markets of enormous size and potential. In addition to these secular forces, we're also now seeing the deal cycle turn, creating another significant tailwind for the firm, the combination of a resilient economy, declining cost of capital and equity markets at all-time highs is leading to a resurgence in capital markets activity, including global IPO issuance, which more than doubled year-over-year in the third quarter. Notwithstanding the current government's shutdown, more conducive capital markets should lead to greater realizations for Blackstone, which, in turn, support fundraising and deployment. In the last 3 months, we executed 3 successful IPOs. And our IPO pipeline for the next 12 months, if converted, would translate to one of the largest years of issuance in our history. Despite all these positive developments, over the past several weeks, there's been a significant external focus on the implications of certain credit defaults in the market. These events have been erroneously linked to the traditional private credit market as a result of misunderstandings and misinformation. Importantly, the defaults and focus resulted from bank-led and bank syndicated credits, not private credit. Moreover, these situations are widely believed to involve the fraudulent pledging of the same collateral to multiple parties. The traditional private credit model is characterized by direct origination in the context of a long-term hold strategy, with due diligence performed by sophisticated institutional managers and rigorously negotiated documentation. For Blackstone, our $150 billion-plus direct lending platform is comprised of over 95% senior secured debt, with low loan-to-value ratios of less than 50% on average, meaning there is significant borrower capital subordinate to our positions in nearly all cases from companies backed by financial sponsors or public companies. And in the private investment-grade area, we've concentrated our activities in multitrillion-dollar markets where Blackstone is often a leading player, including data centers, energy infrastructure and real estate, with our loans secured by underlying assets of excellent quality. Our long-term, highly disciplined approach to investing in credit is the foundation of the strong results we've produced in this area as with every business at the firm. Our non-investment grade private credit strategies have generated 10% returns annually, net of all fees since inception, nearly 20 years ago. In direct lending specifically, we've experienced annual realized losses of only 1/10 of 1%, including through the global financial crisis. And our investment-grade focused private credit platform in BXCI has experienced zero realized losses to date. Of course, as the cycle progresses, it's reasonable to assume we'll see some increases in defaults. But we believe our structural advantages will continue to produce superior results. Performance has powered our growth in private credit. And we believe it will continue to power our growth in the future. Stepping back, this month, we celebrate Blackstone's 40th anniversary. It's been, I can assure you, an extraordinary journey. The firm has grown from a start-up in 1985 to the largest alternative asset manager in the world today and one of the 50 largest public companies in the United States. Importantly, we achieved almost all of this growth organically, which is quite distinctive among large firms in our industry. We are business builders at Blackstone, not business buyers. And while it's harder to build a business than buy it, over the past 40 years, we methodically planted seeds that would grow into major market-leading platforms in nearly every area in which we operate. What we've achieved over the past 4 decades would not have been possible without the efforts of three extraordinary individuals, who worked alongside me to either start the firm or to take it to the next level. Pete Peterson, my co-founder, gave us the necessary credibility that provided the launchpad for our growth. He was joined in 2002 by Tony James, who helped professionalize the organization and led us into many new business areas. Jon Gray took over in 2018 and has done a remarkable job managing the firm and pioneering a plethora of new business lines and products. Jon also redefined our investment approach to emphasize thematic positioning, resulting in our concentration today in data centers, where we're the largest in the world; energy and power, logistics, private credit and India, among other winning areas. Jon as did Tony and Pete during their time at Blackstone, demonstrates an unstoppable work ethic and profound care for the firm, its reputation and its people. Each of them changed the destiny of the firm and have been the best partners for me that I could have imagined. I owe them all an enormous debt of gratitude. Looking forward, what's been built at Blackstone is ideally designed for the environment we see before us and to capture the generational shifts underway in the global economy and markets. In terms of where we raise capital, we believe Blackstone is the partner of choice to bring the best of private markets to a rapidly expanding universe of investors. In terms of where we invest, the future requires massive capital solutions across all forms of equity and debt capital to power the AI revolution, to develop the infrastructure needed to meet the rising global demand for energy, to fund the extraordinary advancements in drug development in the life sciences area, to partner with large investment-grade-rated corporates, who are increasingly looking to private credit to meet their objectives; to help India meet its incredible growth potential and to drive forward other transformative megatrends that will define the investment landscape for decades to come. Alternatives will play a vital role in this future. And we see Blackstone leading the way with the largest and broadest platform and the deepest investment capabilities, underpinned by the power of our brand. The firm has achieved much in the past 40 years. But I strongly believe the best is ahead. Thank you to our shareholders for joining us on this adventure. The adventure continues. With that, I'll turn it over to Jon. Jonathan Gray: Thank you, Steve, and good morning, everyone. What Steve has done to both create and continue to drive this firm for 40 years is the stuff of legend. I'd also like to emphasize what Steve said about Wesley. She was an extraordinary woman, colleague and dear friend, simply the best of the best. We will miss her a ton. Moving to the quarter, this is an exciting time for the firm and our investors. The deal dam is finally breaking, and we have a bunch of secular tailwinds driving us forward as well. I'm going to focus my remarks specifically on the growing sources of capital inflows at the firm. In corporate and real estate credit, we crossed the $500 billion milestone, up a remarkable 18% year-over-year. In private wealth, our AUM in the channel grew 15% year-over-year to nearly $290 billion. And in our institutional business, we're seeing strong momentum across numerous areas in our drawdown and open-ended vehicles. Diving into credit, private credit markets are expanding from their origins in noninvestment-grade corporate credit and direct lending to become a key mechanism for financing the real economy, including commercial finance, consumer and residential finance, fund finance and of course, infrastructure. Blackstone is tremendously well positioned to lead this evolution as the largest third-party investment manager in credit globally, alongside our continuous innovation. Notably, our infrastructure and asset-based credit business grew 29% year-over-year to $107 billion, one of the fastest-growing areas at the firm. Our scale gives us access to what we believe is the broadest set of opportunities across the risk spectrum, which we can offer holistically to clients. As a result, we're seeing robust demand for multi-asset credit solutions across our 3 I's, institutions, insurance companies and individual investors. Another important development underway in credit market -- markets is the rising opportunity to partner with large investment-grade rated corporates, which we've discussed previously. Fortune 500 companies with substantial funding needs are increasingly looking to private credit for customized long-duration capital solutions, which are difficult to replicate in public markets. Scale and reputation are key. And Blackstone has established ourselves as a partner of choice, following our landmark transactions with EQT Corp and Rogers Communications. In the third quarter, we executed another major partnership, a $7 billion investment we are leading in a venture with energy infrastructure company Sempra, to support construction of a liquefied natural gas project on the Gulf Coast. These corporate partnerships provide our clients with access to high-quality, directly originated investments in a sector where we have high conviction, as always, without taking on balance sheet risk. Meanwhile, in the insurance channel, our AUM grew 19% year-over-year to $264 billion across IG private credit, liquid credit and other strategies. Our open architecture, multi-client approach is a major advantage. Our platform now includes 33 strategic and SMA relationships, and we continue to add more. Importantly, in the past 12 months, nearly 2/3 of our clients have expanded their relationship with us, the strongest testament to the value we deliver for them. In our IG focused area overall, we generated over 170 basis points of incremental spread year-to-date versus comparably rated liquid credit. Our farm-to-table model, which brings clients directly to borrowers, is designed to produce a structural premium to liquid markets, particularly vital in an environment where spreads and interest rates are tightening. Turning to private wealth, where our platform has grown to nearly $290 billion, as I mentioned, up threefold in the past 5 years. To put our scale in perspective, a recent Goldman Sachs research report highlighted that Blackstone has an estimated 50% share of all private wealth revenue among 9 major alternative firms. To put our momentum in perspective, we raised over $11 billion in the channel in the third quarter, more than double year-over-year, to the highest level in over 3 years. BCRED led the way, raising $3.6 billion and is on pace for a strong Q4. BXP raised $2.1 billion in the third quarter, bringing its NAV to $15 billion in only 7 quarters. BREIT generated healthy sales of roughly $800 million in the third quarter, while repurchases continued on their downward trajectory to the lowest level in 3.5 years. Finally, BXINFRA raised over $600 million in Q3 with its NAV exceeding $3 billion only 3 quarters after launch. In private wealth, as with every business at Blackstone, it all comes back to investment performance. BCRED has achieved 10% net returns annually since inception nearly 5 years ago. BREIT has generated 9% net returns for its largest share class for nearly 9 years, a 60% premium to public real estate markets, including approximately 5% net for the first 3 quarters of the year. BREIT's exposure to data centers, now almost 20% continues to be extremely helpful in driving its results. And BXP has delivered a 16% annualized net return for its largest share class since inception. Our investment performance powers our fundraising along with our ability to innovate. Looking forward, we expect 2026 to be our busiest year yet in terms of product launches with a significant focus on multi-asset opportunities. We're also broadening distribution in several major markets around the world and moving deeper into key subchannels, including the RIA channel. With these developments alongside our strategic alliance with Wellington and Vanguard, our partnership with L&G and the U.K. wealth and retirement markets and the massive potential in the U.S. defined contribution channel over time, the opportunity in private wealth continues to expand for Blackstone. Moving to our institutional business, which has grown by 64% over the last 5 years and has strong momentum across multiple areas. In infrastructure, our dedicated platform grew 32% year-over-year to $69 billion, including over $3 billion raised in the third quarter. The commingled BIP strategy has generated remarkable 17% net returns annually since inception. Our multi-asset investing business, BXMA, grew 12% year-over-year to a record $93 billion, again driven by performance. Q3 represented the 22nd consecutive quarter of positive composite returns for BXMA's largest strategy. Investors are responding favorably, with BXMA generating year-to-date net inflows of over $5 billion, the highest in nearly 15 years. In our drawdown fund area, it was another quarter of fundraising. We held additional closings for our new private equity Asia flagship, bringing it to over $9 billion as of quarter end, already significantly larger than the prior $6 billion vintage, and we expect to meaningfully exceed our original $10 billion target. We also raised additional capital for our next life sciences flagship, bringing it to $3.3 billion already more than 2/3 the size of the prior $5 billion -- I'm sorry, already more than 2/3 the size of the prior $5 billion vintage. In credit, we held an initial close of $1.6 billion for our new high-yield asset-based finance strategy, targeting $4 billion. In secondaries, we finished raising the largest ever infrastructure vehicle at $5.5 billion, and we're now raising our next PE secondary flagship, targeting at least the size of the prior $22 billion vintage, with the first major close expected in the fourth quarter. Also in Q4, we expect to launch fundraising for the fifth vintage of our private equity energy transition strategy with a prior vintage already approximately 70% committed only 16 months after starting the investment period. Other drawdown strategies we are raising include opportunistic credit, tactical opportunities and GP stakes. Overall, we believe investor confidence in Blackstone is as high today as ever, which, as you've heard, is translating to growing capital commitments across many areas. In real estate specifically, investor sentiment is starting to improve following the downturn. We remain firm believers in the sector's recovery and that flows ultimately follow performance. Commercial real estate values bottomed in December 2023 and since then, have been slowly improving. We think they're now approaching a steeper point in that recovery curve. The cost and availability of capital have been steadily strengthening and transaction activity has been increasing, including by 25% year-over-year in logistics, U.S. logistics in the last 12 months. In a market driven by supply and demand, the dramatic decline in new construction starts, including to the lowest level in over a decade in U.S. logistics and apartments, our largest sectors in real estate; should be very positive for values over time. As we stated before, we believe Blackstone is the best positioned firm in the world to benefit from the recovery underway in real estate markets. In closing, the firm is in outstanding shape by any measure, a cyclical resurgence in transaction activity alongside multiple secular growth engines should be very positive for our shareholders. And with that, I will turn things over to Michael. Michael Chae: Thanks, Jon, and good morning, everyone. Over the past several quarters, we've highlighted how the scaling of the firm's platforms in key growth channels is driving robust momentum in fundraising, assets under management and FRE. In addition, we've outlined a path of accelerating net realizations over time as capital markets strengthen. The third quarter was an excellent illustration of these dynamics of work and reinforces a favorable multiyear picture for the firm. Starting with results, AUM continued to advance to new record levels. Total AUM rose 12% year-over-year to $1.242 trillion, while fee earning AUM grew 10% to $906 billion. Management fees increased 14% year-over-year to a record $2 billion, underpinned by continued double-digit growth in base management fees, including 23% growth in base management fees for the private equity segment, 18% for credit insurance and 15% for BXMA. At the same time, transaction and advisory fees for the firm nearly doubled year-over-year to $156 million, with our Capital Markets business reporting one of its 2 best quarters in history, following a record Q2. While we expect a lower baseline of these revenues in the fourth quarter, the expanding scope of the firm's investment activity is widening the aperture of activity in our capital markets business. Fee-related performance revenues grew 72% and year-over-year to $453 million in the third quarter, generated by 9 different perpetual strategies, including BCRED and multiple other vehicles across the credit complex, BREIT and real estate BXP and private equity and BIP and infrastructure. Overall, total fee revenues for the firm grew 22% year-over-year to $2.5 billion in the third quarter. Fee-related earnings increased 26% year-over-year to $1.5 billion or $1.20 per share, one of the three best quarters of FRE in our history, driven by the growth in fee revenues along with healthy margin expansion. With respect to margins, as we stated before, it's most informative to look over multiple quarters given intra-year movements. On a year-to-date basis, FRE margin was 58.6%, reflecting expansion of over 100 basis points versus the prior year comparable period. While we expect FRE margin in the fourth quarter to be sequentially lower due to seasonal expense factors, for the full year 2025, we are tracking favorably against the initial view of margins we provided in January. Distributable earnings increased 48% year-over-year to $1.9 billion in the third quarter or $1.52 per share, powered by the strong double-digit growth in FRE alongside a significant acceleration in net realizations. We generated $505 million of net realizations in the quarter, more than double the prior-year period and up 55% sequentially in Q2. The largest single realization in the third quarter was the sale of an interest in the GP stakes portfolio within our secondaries platform at the end of September. We also completed the full exit of Hotwire, sales of certain U.S. energy assets and a number of other realizations across the private and public portfolios. Looking forward, in terms of fund dispositions, we have a robust pipeline of processes underway amid the improving transaction backdrop, and we believe we're moving toward acceleration in 2026, the concentrated in private equity with expanding contribution from real estate over time. And the firm's underlying realization potential is significant. The net accrued performance revenue on our balance sheet, our store value, stood at $6.5 billion at quarter end or $5.30 per share, while performance revenue eligible AUM in the ground has reached a record $611 billion. Turning to investment performance, our funds delivered healthy returns overall in the third quarter. Infrastructure led the way with 5.2% appreciation in the quarter and 19% for the last 12 months, reflected of broad-based gains across digital infrastructure, including continued notable strength in our data center platform, along with gains in our power and transportation-related holdings. The corporate private equity funds appreciated 2.5% in the quarter and 14% for the LTM period. Revenue growth at our operating company strengthened to 9% year-over-year in the third quarter, while margins have remained resilient, supported by labor market conditions that are in balance and continuing to moderate. In credit, our noninvestment-grade private credit strategy reported a gross return of 2.6% in the quarter and 12% for the LTM period, reflecting healthy underlying credit performance. Default rates across our noninvestment-grade holdings overall ticked up slightly but remained minimal. In our direct lending portfolio specifically, realized losses were only 12 basis points over the last 12 months. BXMA reported a 2.9% gross return for the absolute return composite in Q3 and 13% for the last 12 months. Notably, BXMA has delivered positive composite returns due to the past 30 months, which is leading to strong inflows in the segment's fourth consecutive quarter of double-digit AUM growth in Q3. In real estate, values were stable overall in the third quarter. The core+ funds appreciated modestly, driven by the third straight quarter of positive performance by BREIT. The opportunistic funds declined slightly in the quarter with positive overall appreciation in the underlying real estate offset by the negative impact of foreign currency movement. In total, our real estate platform remains well positioned, 3 of our highest conviction sectors, which are supported by very positive long-term fundamentals, data centers, logistics and rental housing; comprise approximately 75% of the global equity portfolio and nearly 90% of BREIT. Overall, our investors have continued to benefit significantly from the firm's position with leading platforms to address many of the most important market opportunities globally, including the largest data center business, leading energy infrastructure platform, the largest third-party focused private credit business, one of the largest private market secondaries platforms, a leading life sciences business and what we believe is the largest alternative business in India. These platforms have powered our investment performance and our growth, and we expect will continue to do so in the future. In closing, Blackstone is exceptionally well positioned, supported by both cyclical and secular tailwinds. The breadth and diversity of our global portfolio is a source of strength, while the firm's culture of innovation continues to drive us forward, leading to outstanding financial performance for shareholders. With that, we thank you for joining the call. We'd like to open it up now for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We'll take our first question from Dan Fannon with Jefferies. Daniel Fannon: I wanted to follow up just on the private credit market given all the headlines and uncertainty. Can you just discuss in more detail any changes in credit quality across your portfolio? And then potentially also just in terms of what you maybe have done differently here, given some of the news and the recent bankruptcies we've seen in recent weeks? Jonathan Gray: Well, I would go back to the idea that this really isn't private credit story that what occurred here were bank-led, bank originated, bank syndicated credits. It also was a bit idiosyncratic as it appears that there was at least according to the reporting fraud involved. So I don't think there's much look through to private credit per se. None of these are what happens -- these are not directly related to the private credit market. And given the idiosyncratic nature, I don't think it really speaks to credit overall. I'm not sure anything really changes in our model. Steve spoke about the way we underwrite in private credit, which is doing deep due diligence, underwriting, what we're doing to hold. In terms of defaults today, they remain minimal realized losses date still almost nonexistent at these levels. You would expect as you get deeper in the cycle, you could see a little more over time. But when we look in aggregate at our business and what we think we'll deliver to our investors, we think it will continue to be quite strong. So I would say, given the underlying strength of the economy, what we've seen with margins we just don't see a lot of credit issues out there. Operator: We'll take our next question from Craig Siegenthaler with Bank of America. Craig Siegenthaler: Hope everyone is doing well, and congrats on the 40-year anniversary. This is the first quarter following President Trump's executive order for privates and 401(k)s. And just last week, I saw that you launched your defined contribution business. So I wanted to ask an open-end question. What are your plans? And do you do this alone? Or can you leverage your partnership with Vanguard and Wellington? Jonathan Gray: Well, we're obviously starting to move. I think the announcement was important. We were already heading in that direction, building up our capabilities, but we thought it was important to have a dedicated group of senior people focused on it. And between Heather, Tom, Paul, the individuals we announced, we've got a great lineup of people. I think this is an area where we will work with others. It's a broad market. You've got a lot of constituents involved. Certainly, there are large corporate plan sponsors where we already have deep relationships. Some of this will be done through some of the large financial institutions, who have platforms. There's going to be a range of partnerships here. Yes, we would intend to work with some of our existing partners. But it's still early. Obviously, this has been announced by the administration. There needs to be the rule making, Of course, with the government shutdown, that's been slowed. But I think everyone's expectation is that individuals and retirement who are in defined contribution plans, should have the opportunity to invest in alternatives just like their counterparts and defined benefit plans have. And we continue to believe, given the scale of our offerings and the breadth of our offerings, we can really provide holistic solutions. So I would say it's an area we're going to spend a lot of time on. Obviously, it will take some time to build. But again, the benefits of returns and diversifications, I think will really resonate with plan sponsors with consultants once the right legal frameworks in place, we will do this. And yes, I think we'll work with others along the way. Operator: We'll take our next question from Michael Cyprys with Morgan Stanley. Michael Cyprys: Wanted to ask about your brand strategy and how that's evolving as you extend further into the private wealth channel. Globally, understand you had, I believe, your first TV advertisement in Japan. So I was hoping if you could talk about your approach to marketing, advertising, brand, how that's evolving as you pursue opportunities from 401(k) to private wealth globally? And might we see a Blackstone stadium anytime soon? Jonathan Gray: I don't expect a Blackstone stadium anytime soon. What we do is fairly targeted, of course, we did do a launch in Japan, which we think is a very important market. I think it's the country in the world with the second most in savings. And the leadership there has done, I think, a really terrific job of pivoting just their citizenry from being savers to being investors, and they've opened up alternatives, both offshore and onshore and that's really important. Because Steve, going back 40 years, has thought about Japan as a key market. We've got a really strong brand there, made a big difference. He was recently there. There's a lot of enthusiasm, I believe, for Blackstone and our products. And making it more top of mind does make sense. Doing advertising, I think, for us, will be targeted. Obviously, we're pretty focused on who we're talking to in private wealth, financial advisers and customers who these products are appropriate for. So I think you will see us with a broader footprint over time. It makes sense as we grow to hundreds of thousands of customers. But at the same time, I think we'll do it in a targeted way in markets and in sectors where we think we can have a real impact. What's promising is just the growth in the private wealth area. The fact that we had this doubling in fundraising in the third quarter year-over-year and that the number of products we have, where we're going to expand to is very promising. So when we look out, we love our positioning in this space. And yes, we're going to do it on a global basis. And yes, it will involve a little more advertising versus what we've done historically. Operator: We'll take our next question from Bill Katz with TD Cowen. William Katz: Okay. Thank you very much. I apologize for the hoarse voice here this morning and our condolences for you loss as well, tragic. Just thinking about -- maybe Michael, a question for you. As you think about the interplay between the margin outlook ahead and also what seems to be a pretty healthy pipeline for realizations. Any thoughts on how we should think about the comp within the FRE versus the comp on gross realizations? Michael Cyprys: Bill, thank you, and thank you for your remarks. No, I think in terms of what the overall FRE margin dynamics, obviously, they continue to be healthy, Bill, and I think the bottomline is, over time, we'll continue to see operating leverage. We're obviously pleased with our year-to-date performance. With performance revenue fee margins, especially it relates to carry, as you know, those comp ratios can vary quarter-to-quarter based on sort of the mix of realizations, vintages of realizations. And overall, in terms of the relationship between the two, I think we've said before that, that we're happy with our basic approach. We have the ability and some control on a year-to-year basis to allocate compensation between the two in a way that we talked about before. But so while we have that lever, I think the overall approach is one, we're going to stick with. Operator: We'll take our next question from Brian McKenna with Citizens. Brian Mckenna: So I had a question on wealth. Retail investors today, they have access to a number of different strategies within private markets. But there are some parts of the market where the risk rewards are better than others. So for example, lower base rates and spreads are a bit of a headwind for direct lending. Returns are likely moving lower there, but it's generally a positive for private equity and real estate and performance should be accelerating there, all else equal. So I'm curious, how much time is being spent with your counterparts on education, just in terms of what you view as the proper allocations within private market portfolios through the cycle? Jonathan Gray: Well, we spend a lot of time at the home offices and in the field and then large-scale Zoom calls talking about how we see the markets. What we try to remind our wealth clients is that they should think about this similar to institutional investors. And it shouldn't be, "Hey, I'm going to just flip from here to there." If you went to a large state pension fund or a sovereign wealth fund, they would have allocations to real estate to private equity, to credit to infrastructure. They may modulate them a bit, but they take long-term approaches. And we think that is very prudent. Yes, there are moments in time where certain asset classes outperform relative to others. But we think all of the areas today actually look pretty good. You mentioned private credit. Yes, we have seen -- we're in an environment where base rates are coming down, but the premium relative to liquid credit, that endures, that is a real value to investors when they think about incremental return, so valuable, the farm-to-table model. And yes, in our equity-oriented strategies, there's a benefit lower rates, no question in real estate, in private equity, in infrastructure. But I think the biggest message to our investors is take a long-term approach, have a balanced portfolio so that you get the benefit of diversification and then the long-term compounding from each of these asset classes. Operator: We'll take our next question from Ben Budish with Barclays. Benjamin Budish: One of the questions we get a lot on your investing strategy around data centers is how do we know we're not in the bubble. So just curious your response to that question. And then maybe you could help us understand a little bit, what are the key drivers of returns for that strategy? Is there a cash flow component? Is it valuations? I know you talk a lot about supply and demand dynamics. To what extent might cap rates matter? So that would be helpful just to get a sense of what is sort of driving the excellent returns we've been seeing there. Jonathan Gray: Yes. Well, I think the key thing for us in our data center business is how we do the business. The vast majority of our investing and the vast majority of return comes from building, developing, leasing these data centers. We do it now in the U.S. We do it in Asia. We do it in Europe. We have leading platforms around the globe. And the key to what we do from a risk standpoint is we make sure we have an investment-grade counterparty. Today, I would say, in general, the largest companies in the world with roughly $1 trillion to $4 trillion market cap, and we get lease terms of 15 to 20 years. And that's when you start to deploy capital at real scale. And to us, that seems like a very prudent way to do this. The returns come from the differential between the cost of doing those projects and then what their worth is stabilized assets. So when you have a high investment-grade company and a long-term leased asset, that is quite valuable. So I think this -- when you think about what's happening in AI, the demand for compute, I think this is a very good sector to be in. I think it's also worth noting that the demand for data center space continues to grow. In fact, in our portfolio, in Q3, we saw a doubling in our leasing pipeline globally versus Q2, to give you a sense of the acceleration we're seeing. Obviously, some people may be concerned about that, but compute power and compute needs are going up. The key for us on behalf of our investors, primarily in real estate and infrastructure where this exposure sits; is to make sure we do this in a prudent way, long-term leases, credit tenants, we continue to do it that way. And by the way, similarly, we're doing this at scale on our credit business. There, we're also lending to entities where there's equity, plus they have these long-term leases as well. And so this is a huge need. It's one of the reasons why private equity and alternatives as a segment are growing so much this reindustrialization, the AI infrastructure requires large-scale capital, and we as a firm who does this on the debt and equity side with real expertise has a big competitive advantage. So I think this will continue to grow, but we'll keep doing it in a very disciplined way. Operator: We'll take our next question from Alex Blostein with Goldman Sachs. Alexander Blostein: Jon, I wanted to go back to the wealth discussion for a second, and I apologize for the two-parter, I guess, on this. So on credit, totally hear your point around the relative premium to liquid markets. But how important is the sort of 10-ish percent gross return to the retail channel? So does the point you make, does that resonate or it's really viewed as an absolute product? And any sort of color you can give us on the ground today, what the response in either gross sales or redemptions has been to BCRED's dividend cut from a couple of weeks ago? And then zooming out, I was intrigued by the multi-asset comment you guys made around launches for next year. Could you maybe just expand on that, what that could look like, what parts of the market you're trying to attract with these vehicles? Jonathan Gray: Sure. So I think, Alex, the key, of course, is relative returns. When we launch BCRED now, I guess, 5-plus years ago, we were targeting, I think, 8-plus percent returns given where base rates were and the product has done very well. As we go from a 5.5% short rates to now low 4s, probably a year from now low 3s. I think what investors will be looking at is how does that size up relative to what I can get in other forms of fixed income, particularly liquid fixed income. It could have some impact. But I think generally, the key will be this relative premium. To date, we've continued to see healthy gross sales. This quarter to date on pace in BCRED in a good way. We have not as of yet seen any sort of elevated redemptions, we haven't seen material changes. And I think the key is we continue to deliver for customers, deliver that relative premium, have a healthy portfolio from a credit standpoint. I think if you do that for investors, that's what matters. And by the way, it's not just in the wealth channel. Think about our growth in insurance. There actually, as rates come down, there's some spread compression, the need for private assets, comparable risk, investment-grade comparable risk, but with higher returns becomes even more important in that context. So I think the key for us is to deliver premium returns over base rates, be they long rates or short rates. If we do that, I think our private credit business will grow a lot. Michael just about multi-asset credit. Let me just quickly hit that. Our multi-asset I would say what's happening in the wealth channel is we have a scale now where we can do some interesting things. We obviously have the collaboration with Wellington and Vanguard. And if we do something there, it would be not surprising that involve potentially multiple of our products. We have the ability, we have some of our partners who are seeking things with different mixes of products based on incoming growth. And so creating those offerings is something that's pretty unique to Blackstone because we're not just in private equity or infrastructure credit or real estate. We can offer I think, unique combinations, unique solutions to investors. And as this industry matures, those kind of comprehensive offerings, I think, will be more attractive. Sorry, next question. Operator: We'll take our next question from Brennan Hawken with Bank of Montreal. Brennan Hawken: I wanted to circle back on Alex's question. So totally get, Jon, that this is not a private credit issue that we've seen public markets have a tendency to overreact and certainly, we've seen that. But curious about, you guys just recently had a dividend cut in BCRED. What I'm really curious about is what is the feedback you're hearing from the wealth management channel, given the big reaction in the public markets around some of this? Are you seeing -- are you hearing similar things from the ground within your wealth management counterparts and partners? And what can you tell us about the flows since October began and how they're looking in the credit vehicles? Is there any sort of pullback with the dividend cuts and maybe some apprehension around credit, albeit misplaced? Jonathan Gray: Well, we expect strong flows in BCRED in November. So that's all we know as of today. I would say the reaction in the wealth channel is a realization that these products and credit are 97% floating rate. So by definition, when rates come down, that impacts yield, and they want us to be responsible managers in terms of where we set the dividend level. So I just think that's the reality of the world we live in today. And again, the key is a relative premium over what you can get in liquid credit, and that continues to be enduring. And so I think the conflation of declining short-term rates with credit issues supposedly from these three nonprivate credit-related situations is odd. And I think investors understand that with floating rate products as floating rates come down, that has an impact, but you're still getting that meaningful premium I keep talking about. Operator: We'll take our next question from Glenn Schorr with Evercore ISI. Glenn Schorr: So the big banks and brokers are all giving very supportive cover for you on the forward M&A and IPO calendar that's upon us, you were able to replace whatever you monetize with some more accrued carry. So $6.5 billion, as you mentioned, I think 80% of it is across private equity and secondaries. So I guess my question is, if the deal calendar comes to fruition over the next handful of quarters the way just about everybody is saying it's going to be, how does the maturation of your assets fit? Meaning, should we see an incremental pickup in line with overall volumes? Is it more IPO dependent? Because it's pretty spread across all your products. Jonathan Gray: I don't know if -- we certainly don't want to get in the business of forward projections here, but I would say, Glenn, just directionally that as M&A markets pick up and as IPO markets pick up, our ability to monetize a crude net carry goes up. And you certainly saw some of that this quarter, you would expect as you move into '26, you'll see more of that. So directionally healthier markets, more liquid markets, better credit markets, better IPO markets; that's healthier for realizations, and it does accelerate the time frame. That being said, it takes time to get IPO it's done, it takes time to get sales processes done. But the overall outlook, which you keep hearing from us is getting better. This deal dam is breaking, and it should lead to more realizations over time. Operator: We'll take our next question from Brian Bedell with Deutsche Bank. Brian Bedell: Great. Great. You answered a lot on the private credit, but maybe just -- Jon, but maybe just one more area. And that would be like just the competition that you're seeing with banks or seeing banks. Are you seeing banks become more competitive in the direct lending business, how is that impacting spreads? And then related to that, obviously, credit insurance has been a huge growth driver from a fundraising perspective, accounting for more than half of your fundraising over the past 2 years. Do you see that dynamic continuing? And then if I could just squeeze in one more to Michael, and that's just the outlook for base fee growth for 4Q on a year-over-year basis, just wanted to -- I think you may have talked about that earlier, but just wanted to reaffirm that. Jonathan Gray: You got a lot in there, Brian. So on banks, the banks I think, are feeling healthy. They are in the marketplace. There is this sort of constant set of choices, should you do a bank-led deal or direct lending deal. That's been going on for a long time. And even for us on the private equity side, each deal is a little bit different. So to me, that dynamic is a little more of a constant. I would point out one of the benefits of the market is getting better as deal volume goes up. So you need, I think, both the private credit and the bank market because I do expect that volumes, certainly next year in the deal business, will go up, which creates a healthier supply-demand balance for capital. On the insurance front, there, it's pretty limited in terms of the number of people with an open architecture model not competing in the insurance space and who can do this at real scale. And that, I think, has been very beneficial for us. I think that's why you continue to see our rapid growth. I would say the momentum we have in our insurance business is pretty exceptional today. Clients are recognizing that this is a favorable risk, return trade-off that they have long-duration balance sheets and getting an average of 170-plus basis points of incremental return on investment-grade credit makes a ton of sense in doing with us, with our scale and our brand and our open architecture model really works. So that is an area where I think you will continue to see a lot of growth. Michael Chae: And Brian, on the management fee outlook, I mean, I would just step back and reiterate that we've been talking for some time about how the launching and scaling of our platforms in these for key growth areas is leading to an expansion of firm's earnings power. And you certainly saw that in the results this quarter and third consecutive quarter of double-digit base management growth. As it relates to Q4, we'd expect continued top line momentum, That would note, we expect slower year-over-year base management fee growth in Q4 versus Q3, primarily given multiple private equity flagship step-ups in the prior-year period and some sequential slowing in real estate. But in terms of that and the outlook for 2026, we're very positive. Operator: We'll take our next question from Steven Chubak with Wolf Research. Steven Chubak: So I wanted to ask on the real estate outlook. The performance indicators admittedly have been a bit mixed. On the positive side, monetization revenues tripled sequentially. Performance has also improved, but the pace of fundraising has moderated and the absolute return still remains tepid despite the interest rate tailwinds. So I was hoping you could speak to the performance outlook, both for opportunistic and core+ in 4Q and looking ahead to next year And just thoughts on the timing of an inflection in real estate fundraising and what would inform that expectation. Jonathan Gray: Well, we've been pretty consistent. We said at the beginning of '24, we thought real estate was bottoming. We said it would be a slow non-V shaped recovery. That has certainly been the case. It's hard to say exactly when things turn, but a number of the tumblers are falling into place for real estate. First off, we've seen cost of capital come down pretty meaningfully. The 10-year back down here at 4%. Spreads have come down quite a bit. That is very helpful for the sector. The CMBS market, volumes they are picking up. I think they're up about 25% year-to-date. We're also seeing this very constructive decline in new supply, which you heard about in our prepared remarks, which starts to set a foundation for cash flow growth as you look out over time. I would tell you, qualitatively, we are seeing some good signs in the sense that in the last couple of weeks, we announced 2 large transactions, big office building here in New York City, and then that we were selling and then we sold some logistics in the U.K. to a public company. These sort of transactions were very hard to get done 12 months ago. And I would note that during one of a recent transaction we've been involved in, I got multiple calls from buyers asking if they could be positioned to win. And I joked internally that was the first time in 3.5 years, that has happened. So I think we're at a point here, the combination of a capital markets recovery and a sharp downturn in construction sets the groundwork for getting closer to that inflection point. And I think when you see that, obviously, it will be very helpful to our business given the exposure we have. And that's why you see us trying to deploy capital at scale to capture this before people start to feel more comfortable. I will also say the sentiment amongst global investors. I was in Europe, in Asia in the last couple of weeks; is definitely moving to a better spot. But in general, investors want to see a little more positive performance, and that will make a difference. Now in BREIT, we've had 9 months of positive performance. I think that will begin to have an impact there on flows. So it will take some time. But at some point, I think investors will recognize, "Wow, this is a sector that's been out of favor." It's not going away. People are still going to live in apartments. They're going to order logistics. These things are long-term asset classes, and I can invest in them at discounts to replacement costs at attractive prices. I think that will start to make a difference. And I definitely think we're getting closer to that point. Operator: We'll take our next question from Ken Worthington with JPMorgan. Kenneth Worthington: You talked about a greater focus on the RIA channel for wealth. Maybe to help level set us, what is -- or how much of your wealth AUM is RIA sold at this point versus the broker wirehouse channel. And is this focus about adding more in different sales personnel? Or does the product need to be adjusted as well in terms of fees and structure? Jonathan Gray: So Ken, I don't know -- I don't think we disclose or have certainly not the information here now, about where the different forms of distribution. But I would say the RIA channel is very large, but it's harder to access, as you know. I mean, at the bigger wirehouses, you can work at the top of the house, it can get distributed out. One of the advantages we have as a firm is having 300-plus people on the ground, and that enables us to go out there and talk to people. And I think for us, we recently put -- brought in a new senior person to run that area for us. And we're really trying to do a concentrated outreach. Obviously, the marketing, the advertising, those things matter when you're going to a more distributed market. But the underlying pricing of the product, that doesn't really change, but it requires a lot of effort. I will say we did create an interval product in multi-asset credit, which was our first rail interval product, which we launched in the RIA channel specifically. So I think for us, it's about going after it. It's a little bit like foreign markets, where you have to put a concentrated effort, if it's Japan or Australia or Canada, Asia, it's the same sort of thing here. And again, given the track record of our products, the performance we've delivered, the strength of our brand, if we put the right resources on the ground, I think we can build big relationships and large AUM in the RIA channel. So I think that's an area of major opportunity for us. Operator: We'll take our next question from Patrick Davitt with Autonomous Research. Patrick Davitt: A different angle on Brian's question. Maybe it's a bit too early to know, but had some wobbles in the bank loan market, to your points earlier, seen some deals pulled and/or reprice which I think you could argue was actually good for direct lending dynamics. So curious if you're seeing any signs of the banks are rethinking how aggressive they've been in that channel potentially getting less competitive because of what's happened and/or any sign new origination spreads could get a little bit wider on the back of those bank loan blow-ups. Jonathan Gray: The bank market obviously has to be sensitive because they're in the distribution business. So when you see what happened in the last couple of weeks, not a surprise, you could see a little bit of hesitancy. But I think market participants have concluded that this was pretty isolated and it is not a sign of something bigger. And as a result, I don't think we would say today, we're really seeing any sort of pullback from the banks. Operator: We'll take our next question from Crispin Love with Piper Sandler. We'll take our final question then from Arnaud Giblat with BNP. Arnaud Giblat: In credit and insurance, your dry powder has close to doubled in the last 12 months. I was wondering if that was the case as well in direct lending, private debt, given how tight the spreads have become and lose the covenants or with the competition with both in the syndicated loan market? And specifically, if I could just follow on that specific point into BCRED, how do you see capacity developing? I mean is it -- if conditions remain really hot and tight, do you start worrying perhaps a bit about capacity and the speed at which you're deploying capital, assuming that flows remain strong? Jonathan Gray: Well, I'll just comment -- Michael can comment on where the dry powder sits in credit. But I think there's a bit of mischaracterization here as to how hot the markets are overheated. Loan-to-value that we originated in our direct lending in Q3 was at 38% loan to value. That's probably half the level it was if you went back to '06, '07. So -- and spreads are sort of in line with historic levels. So yes, it's a business that has grown a lot, but it's taken a significant amount of share. And we just haven't seen sort of the erosion of credit standards. And we actually have had a very strong deployment year. I think we've had a record year this year, first 9 months in terms of deployment. So we feel good about the business. In terms of... Michael Chae: And Arnaud, I just want to point out, dry powder, as you probably know, is largely about drawdown funds. And our direct lending capital obviously sits in a lot of different vehicles, including perpetual ones. So direct lending, just sort of structurally, is a smaller fraction of our dry powder. Operator: Thank you. With no additional questions in queue. At this time, I'd like to turn the call back over to Weston Tucker for any additional or closing remarks. Weston Tucker: Great. Thank you, everyone, for joining us today and look forward to following up after the call.
Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Hello, and good morning, and a very warm welcome to Elkem's Third Quarter Results Presentation. My name is Odd-Geir Lyngstad, and I'm responsible for Investor Relations here in Elkem. In today's presentation, we will go through the highlights for the quarter and give an update on the markets before we go through the outlook for the fourth quarter. CEO, Helge Aasen, will take us through this first part of the presentation before CFO, Morten Viga, will present the third quarter results in more detail. We will open for Q&A after Helge and Morten's presentations. So with that, I give the word to CEO, Helge Aasen. Helge Aasen: Thank you, Odd-Geir, and good morning, everyone. Very nice to see the turn up today. Yes, we seem to be repeating ourselves when it comes to describing the markets we operate in. The story about weak and challenging conditions doesn't seem to go away. And the market does actually remain much the same as it has been for a while now. However, despite challenging macroeconomic environment, Elkem's results are relatively good, but of course, below our financial targets. The EBITDA for the third, I'm sorry, the EBITDA for the third quarter ended at NOK 829 million, which gave an EBITDA margin of 11% for the group. If you exclude silicones, the operating income ended at NOK 4.1 billion with an EBITDA of NOK 586 million, which then represents a margin of 14%. This result is to a great extent, explained by good operational performance and ongoing cost improvements. Silicon Products was impacted by low silicon and ferrosilicon prices in the third quarter. But Specialty segment as Foundry alloys and Microsilica, which is a silica powder, delivered improved results. Carbon Solutions continued to deliver good margins, but the operating income and the following EBITDA is impacted by the lower sales. Silicones has improved on cost and market positions and delivered a higher EBITDA compared to the same period last year. The strategic review is ongoing. We gave an announcement some weeks ago, and I can just confirm that this is moving ahead as planned with an exclusive sales process, and we are still aiming for closing this transaction within the first half of next year. So before we go on to the market update and the results, I'd like to say a few words about our ESG work. It's built on two main pillars: reduce CO2 emissions and to supply the green transition with critical materials. Our aim is to reduce and ultimately remove fossil CO2 emissions from the smelting processes. Elkem supports the green transition through the supply of critical raw materials, and we work systematically to cut emissions and reduce waste throughout the entire value chain. Circularity is also playing an increasingly important role in this world. And we have introduced a new, actually a breakthrough method for recycling silicones through a mechanical recycling. And this then goes back into what used to be waste now is going back into new formulations. Our efforts within ESG are also recognized with strong ratings from EcoVadis and CDP. And in the third quarter, we received a gold rating from EcoVadis, and this puts us among the top 5% of all the companies they are assessing globally. And over the past years, Elkem has consistently received either gold or platinum ratings from EcoVadis, which places us among the top of the companies they are rating. Here, we show a couple of examples from Silicon Products and Carbon Solutions, illustrating some of our strong cost and market positions. I mentioned Microsilica initially. It's SiO2 silica powder, a byproduct from the ferrosilicon and silicon metal smelting processes. And over decades, we have developed this into a portfolio of specialty products, which go into quite a wide range of end applications. To mention some of them, construction, well drilling, cementing, refractories and also polymers. Over the past years, this product area has consistently grown and shown stable high margins. And I think it's a very good excellent example of how we are able to specialize on the basis of commodity production capacity. We're also a leading producer of electrode paste, electrodes and refractory materials coming from Elkem Carbon. This goes into the metallurgical industry. And these products are probably not very familiar to you, but they are critical consumables and lining materials, which are very important for stable operations and lifetime in furnaces and electrolyser cells in the aluminum industry. Also here, we are focusing on product development, and we have developed a more environmentally friendly product. With bio-based binders, which greatly improves working conditions. This solution has a proven performance record, and we have installed the product in more than 15,000 aluminum electrolytic cells. And we are gaining market share. Competitive cost position can, of course, be explained by many factors, operational knowledge, operational excellence, economies of scale, upstream integration, et cetera. However, electric power is another, of course, very important cost factor in the production of most metals. We have long-term supply agreements for renewable hydropower in Norway, Iceland, Canada, Paraguay. And access to long-term competitive energy contracts is a prerequisite for achieving competitiveness and also, of course, predictability in order to plan investments, et cetera. And renewable sourcing of energy also gives us a low carbon footprint, which clearly is, if not gaining or achieving premiums on end products, it gives us a preferential supplier status. CRU, a global business intelligence company, have published their analysis of the 2025 cost curve, which is illustrated on the graph here. This is for silicon 99, silicon metal. And as you can see from the chart, this puts our Salten and Thamshavn plants in Norway among the lowest cost producers in the western part of the world. Then coming to another important frame condition, which is trade barriers. That's affecting several markets and industries these days. And as you know, a highly dynamic and quite unpredictable environment. We are affected by this directly and indirectly. Two relevant examples are EU's ongoing safeguard assessment on silicon and on ferrosilicon and potentially silicon metal and also a U.S. countervailing duties assessment on silicon metal imports. EU safeguard measures could come into effect from November 19th. It's so far unclear how this is going to affect Elkem and how it will be structured. The potential measures will be aimed at raising prices, obviously, and protecting internal production within the EU, but we don't know how Norway and Iceland will be positioned in it. The regulations appear to focus on ferrosilicon and foundry alloys in this round, and there's no clear indication if silicon will be included. But most likely, silicon will be subject to another process at a later stage. The U.S. has imposed countervailing duties on silicon imported from several countries, including Norway with a preliminary rate of 16.87%. The basis for these duties are the CO2 compensation and CO2 quotas that the Norwegian companies receive under EU's carbon schemes. And our position on this is that these policies are a compensation for CO2 tax and do not constitute countervailable subsidies harming the U.S. domestic industry. We have had similar cases in the past. And each time we have been able to document that there was no injury to U.S. industry. So, we don't know the outcome of this round. It's now introduced as a preliminary measure, and then it will be followed by a permanent decision later on. Unclear when, partly because of the shutdown of the U.S. government at the moment. A few more words on the strategic review process. It's underway, as I mentioned, and it is going according to plan. We cannot say much more about the process beyond the status update that we gave during the third quarter. We are in an exclusive sales process with a major industrial player with a significant presence in the global chemical industry. The process is well aligned with the strategic review and represents an important milestone. And in a challenging market environment. But we are confident that the potential transaction will represent the best possible outcome for the silicones division in Elkem. And we're also confident that this process will be the best outcome for the rest of Elkem and as such, benefit to all stakeholders.Subject to further negotiations, final agreement and necessary approvals, the closing of the transaction is, as mentioned, expected to happen during the first half of next year. Now let's have a look at the markets. Automotive continues to be an important sector for Elkem, driving demand for many of our products. The growth in this sector remains weak with the exception of China, where the production is up in 2025. This is mainly the case for electrical vehicles. During the first half of 2025, the overall production in the EU is characterized by weak order intake and consequently low number of new registrations. Forward-looking forecasts have been revised upwards as markets adapt to ongoing trade and structural changes. Europe's outlook is up, supported by improved expected demand in Germany, France, Austria and Turkey. China's forecast has increased due to incentives and export growth. But overcapacity and price competition clearly persist, especially for electrical vehicles. North America is also seeing upgrades driven by tariff relief and higher production. In South America, the gains are so far limited by very high import pressure. So, any improvement in the automotive sector will definitely have a positive impact for Elkem. Several markets have been impacted by weak demand and various trade regulations and governmental initiatives. In the EU, the silicon reference price dropped by approximately 20% in late June. This was mainly due to low import prices from China, which suffer from, I would say, a severe oversupply. Prices in the EU then recovered modestly again in September due to improved market balance. This was a result of capacity being taken out in Europe as well as higher prices in China. U.S. silicon prices have increased in the third quarter. This is expected to continue to rise due to trade regulations. And in China, we have seen some price recovery from very low levels, mainly due to signals that the government will launch initiatives to curb overcapacity. Discussions are ongoing there regarding new energy consumption standards for the industry, which seems to be aimed at reducing overproduction. The ferrosilicon markets have many of the same drivers as silicon. Also here, we have a market impacted by trade regulations and possible safeguard measures in the EU, which have resulted in price fluctuations. The market sentiment is still characterized by weak demand and downward price pressure. However, based on the expected safeguard measures in the EU in August, we saw ferrosilicon prices jump up. This didn't last very long. It dropped back down again when it became clear that no preliminary measures would be announced. Prices in the U.S. increased towards the end of the third quarter. This was mainly driven by trade regulations. And in China, we've also seen some recovery from very low levels, partly due to this government focus on reducing excess production capacity. It's also somewhat linked to higher raw material costs in China. The market for carbon products is much smaller than silicon and ferrosilicon. We don't have reference prices to compare with here. Quite a big difference between regions when it comes to demand. But obviously, the underlying driver is the production of steel, which again triggers ferroalloy demand and then, of course, the aluminum industry. Global steel production in the third quarter remained quite stable compared to the same quarter last year. Europe experienced a 3% decline, whereas North America saw a 3% increase, largely due to tariffs again.The steel and ferroalloys markets continue to face challenges. Carbon Solutions specialized product offering and wide geographic presence is, however, proving to be resilient and creating a stability in earnings. Then moving on to silicones. Also like in silicon metal, overcapacity is significantly hampering any meaningful price recovery in the commodity part of the business. Producers are actively trying to increase the prices, and we've seen quite a lot of fluctuations in China, in particular, during the quarter. DMC prices first rose from a level of around RMB 10,400 per tonne to up to RMB 12,250. This was a result of a fire at one of the bigger players. But due to the overcapacity, that was a very short-lived price uptick and prices subsequently lowered again because other producers are ready to fill the gap quite quickly. So, the current price level is around RMB 11,050 per tonne and quite sensitive to changes in raw material costs, where silicon metal obviously is one of the big input factors. Demand in China continues to be weak, especially in construction. Demand for commodity silicones in the EU and the U.S. is also negatively impacted by changing tariff policies. But I would say, in general, there's quite good and stable demand for specialties. So, coming to the outlook. Silicon Products are still going to face quite challenging conditions and low demand on a historical basis. But as mentioned in the presentation, our leading cost position and good performance in more specialized part of the business are mitigating the negative impact. Carbon Solutions benefits from good cost positions and geographical diversity, and continued weak demand will have some impact on the results. Silicone producers are actively trying to increase prices. But as mentioned, the markets are still hampered by overcapacity. Potential trade regulations and protective measures are expected to impact our markets going forward. And of course, we are very eager to see the safeguard measures in the EU and how that's going to play out. It's not yet concluded, and very hard to say the overall impact on Elkem from this. So I think with that, I'll give the word to you, Morten, and take us through the financials. Morten Viga: Thank you very much, Helge, and good morning, everybody. So it's a pleasure to go through the financial numbers for Q3. Our operating income for the quarter amounted to NOK 7.5 billion, and that's down 7% compared to the third quarter last year. All divisions had a decline in operating income this quarter, mainly explained by lower sales prices. Elkem's EBITDA for the quarter was NOK 829 million. This was also well below the third quarter last year, but it's slightly higher than Q2 this year. The reported group EBITDA margin for the quarter amounted to 11%, which is somewhat below our long-term target of 15% to 20% EBITDA margin. Having said that, we should also emphasize that the EBITDA margin for the continuous operations, i.e., excluding silicone's was 14%. And it is important to bear in mind that these margins are generated in a situation where sales prices in key markets are at or close to historical low levels. And as such, the EBITDA is not supported by market conditions, but it's held up by good operational performance and a very strong underlying cost position. There were no particular one-offs affecting the EBITDA in the third quarter. As usual, we provide an overview of some of the main financial numbers and ratios. I will not go into detail on all of them, but it's important to note that the Silicones division has been reclassified as discontinued operations and assets held for sale. In this presentation, we mainly focus on the financial numbers, which include silicones. However, the regular financial statements, including the profit and loss statements, reflects Elkem's results excluding silicones. And in the table to the right, you can see the comparable figures for Elkem with and without silicones. Including silicones, the group EBITDA amounted to NOK 829 million. The realized effects from the currency hedging program was minus NOK 16 million reported in the segment Other. Other items amounted to NOK 78 million and the main [Technical Difficulty] of minus NOK 17 million. Net finance expenses were minus NOK 34 million. And here, the main items related to net interest expenses of minus NOK 114 million, which was largely offset by currency gains on NOK 96 million, mainly related to translation effects on our external loans. The income tax was minus NOK 96 million, and this gives a very high effective tax rate of 65%. And the reason for that is that the Silicones division had a loss before income tax, which is rather high, and there is no tax in a major part of that division. Let's then take a look at the divisions and start with the Silicon Products division. So, the silicon and ferrosilicon markets remained difficult, but the division's EBITDA for the third quarter was supported by good operating performance. Total operating income amounted to NOK 3.4 billion, representing an 8% decrease compared to the same quarter in 2024. And the decline in operating income is mainly driven by lower sales prices for the commodity segments in silicon and ferrosilicon. EBITDA amounted to NOK 389 million, representing an EBITDA margin of 12%. The EBITDA is higher than the previous quarter, but significantly lower than Q3 '24, and this is explained by significantly lower sales prices, particularly for silicon. This is partly countered by good and stable results from the specialty segments, particularly foundry alloys. And as I said, in addition, the EBITDA is supported by strong operations and good cost improvements. Sales volume increased by 13% compared to the third quarter last year, mainly due to improved sales of specialty products. So, if we look at the Carbon Solutions, this division is once again presenting a good margin, and it reached an EBITDA margin of 28% in the third quarter despite very challenging market conditions. Total operating income amounted to NOK 822 million, which was down 7% from the third quarter last year. And this decline here is mainly explained by lower sales prices. The EBITDA was NOK 231 million, which represents an EBITDA margin of 28%. The EBITDA margin is in line with the previous quarter, but it's somewhat lower than Q3 '24, mainly explained by lower sales prices and somewhat higher raw material costs. The sales volume for the third quarter was in line with the previous quarter, but is negatively affected by low steel production, particularly in the EU. As mentioned, and very well known, the Silicones division is under strategic review. The division has a good portfolio of specialty products, which provides to a large extent, stable sales and margins. But also, the division's exposure to the commodity market is still very significant. And particularly in China, we have seen strong price pressure hampering our margins. The division has, however, been able to compensate for lower commodity sales prices in the quarter through higher sales volumes and good cost improvements. Total operating income amounted to NOK 3.6 billion, which was down 6% from the third quarter last year. Higher sales volume in the third quarter was more than offset by lower commodity sales prices. The EBITDA amounted to NOK 248 million, representing an EBITDA margin of 7%, and this is in line with the previous quarter, but it is significantly 23% higher than the third quarter last year, mainly driven by cost improvements and better sales volume. Sales volume was up 10% compared to the third quarter last year, mainly due to higher sales volumes in the Asia Pacific region, where we also have introduced a new production line, higher capacity, and significantly stronger underlying cost position. Let's now take a closer look at some of Elkem's key financial ratios. The earnings per share, EPS were quite low also in the third quarter with NOK 0.05 per share, and that brings the EPS year-to-date to minus NOK 0.77 per share. And we are, of course, not satisfied with this, and we are working on further cost reductions and other improvements to mitigate the market situation. The EPS was also this quarter negatively impacted by net losses from the Silicones division, which is under strategic review. And if you exclude the Silicones division, the EPS for the third quarter would have been NOK 0.34 per share plus, and it would have been a positive NOK 0.40 per share year-to-date.The balance sheet remains very solid. Total equity amounts to NOK 24 billion by the end of third quarter, which equals an equity ratio of 50%, very stable level. Elkem's financing position is well managed, and we have a very good and robust maturity profile. However, as you can see, the interest-bearing debt has continued to increase, and the current leverage is above our target level of 1 to 2x EBITDA last 12 months. By the end of the third quarter, our net interest-bearing debt amounted to NOK 11.7 billion, and that's up by NOK 0.3 billion from the previous quarter. And based on the last 12 months EBITDA, the debt leverage ratio is now 3.1. Our target is clearly to bring down the leverage, and Elkem has a plan to deleverage the company after the strategic review process has been concluded, which we plan to achieve during the first half of next year. By the end of the third quarter, Elkem's interest coverage ratio was 6x, which is well within the covenant of 4x, which is the covenant in our loan agreements. The cash flow from operation was NOK 526 million in the third quarter. We have a high emphasis on preserving and generating a good cash flow despite underlying market weaknesses. And this was a clear improvement from the previous quarters. It's explained by lower reinvestments and also positive working capital changes. As already mentioned, the markets are weak, and we will definitely continue to focus on a very disciplined capital spending as long as the weak market conditions prevail. In the third quarter, total investments were down to NOK 312 million and reinvestments were NOK 244 million, which amounted to 39% of depreciation. Strategic investments are very much down and amounted only to NOK 68 million as we have completed all major strategic CapEx projects previously. So let me take the opportunity to wrap up this presentation by summarizing the main headlines and takeaways from the quarter. We will continue to focus on cash generation and a very disciplined capital spending in response to the challenging market conditions. We're very happy to see that Silicon Products has leading cost positions and strong performance within the specialty segments. And I think this is very important to bear in mind when the markets are really, really, really tough out there. Also, Carbon Solutions is in a very good position, and we benefit from good cost positions and a very geographically diverse customer base. Silicones, also a very tough market, but we have improved our cost and market positions based on specialization and also based on new and more modern production lines, both in China and in France. The safeguard measures for ferrosilicon and ferroalloys in the EU and a new trade defense regime for steel in the EU could lead to improved market conditions if these measures are successfully supporting increased industry production in the EU, which is the intention. The strategic review process is progressing as planned with an exclusive sales process ongoing. And as we said, we expect to have the transaction closed within the first half of 2026. So I think that summarizes the presentation, and then I hand back the word toOdd-Geir for the Q&A session. Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Thank you, Helge, and Thank you, Morten. We have a good audience here today. So I think we will start and see if there are any questions from the audience. There is Marcus? Marcus Gavelli: Marcus Gavelli, Pareto Securities. So you talked about the safeguard measures, and clearly, we have no visibility right now. But could you try to provide some color on how you think about potentially worst-case scenario with higher tariffs and with Elkem potentially not being as competitive in the EU market. What sort of flexibility do you see having to redirect volumes and do other sort of measures to fight that? Helge Aasen: I think if we are left on the outside of this and have to compete on the same basis as everybody else, EU is a big net importer of ferrosilicon. And I would claim that Norway and Iceland are among the best position to continue to supply that market. So I don't think we will have to redirect volumes. Obviously, we are very uncertain about how the price protection mechanism will be constructed or put together. But that could, of course, I would say, I don't see a big downside, but there is quite a significant upside if this is done in a way that favors us. Marcus Gavelli: And also just to follow up on the, you mentioned the cost reductions that you're currently looking at. Could you also provide some color on what sort of measures that is? Is it, we've seen some ferrosilicon production now being curtailed? Is it more trying to optimize the production? Or is it actual larger reductions you're looking at? Helge Aasen: This is a wide range of different measures. Obviously focusing on fixed cost reductions continuously, but it's also linked to a lot of optimization in production, producing campaigns where we have the best cost position in different plants and furnaces, and yield improvements. And yes, there's no one particular program that's yielding this, but a very big effort ongoing, and it's giving results over time. Magnus Rasmussen: Magnus Rasmussen, SEB. You have an improvement in the Silicon Products EBITDA Q-on-Q despite lower silicon metal prices, as you said in Q2. Our understanding is that after the decision that you were to be allocated more CO2 quotas, which you reported in early July, you have to purchase less CO2 quotas on a running basis to cover what was previously a deficit. Has that been a positive driver this quarter, and by how much? Helge Aasen: Sounds like a CFO question. Morten Viga: Yes. You're absolutely right. We have got the ruling from the Norwegian Ministry, securing equal treatment with our European competitors. And that's very important. We have not yet received any additional quotas. Such things takes a bit of time, but we are very sure that we will receive a good amount of new quotas. And of course, that will put us in a much better position. There are no particular significant, let's say, CO2 quota P&L elements in our Q3 results. Magnus Rasmussen: When you, on a running basis, start to receive quotas on equal terms as your peers in Europe, then I assume you will not have to purchase quotas to cover that deficit as you've done in the past. Doesn't that imply that you will get a cost saving? Morten Viga: That is correct that in the future, there are 2 important things about this. First of all, equal treatment that's very important as a principle. And certainly, we will have significantly lower CO2 quota costs in the future when we receive those quotas, either late this year or early next year, we assume. So for our long-term competitiveness, it's good news, very good news. Magnus Rasmussen: And also, I see that your net interest-bearing debt in silicones is increasing by about NOK 375 million quarter-on-quarter. And it seems to me like more or less half of that is driven by you repaying what you label as bills payable in your balance sheet, and bills payable has come down by more than half over the past year. So, I'm just wondering why you are repaying that working capital financing ahead of the sale of the division? Morten Viga: No, that is kind of a working capital management done by the Chinese operation. So, I'm not able to give a precise answer to that. But they're managing this position. And as you rightly say, they have decided to repay some of that and reduce some of the bills outstanding. Magnus Rasmussen: Should we expect bills payable to be repaid ahead of the sale? And/or should we look at bills payable as interest-bearing debt when the sales price? Morten Viga: You should not look at bills payable as interest-bearing debt. So, it's part of the working capital management done locally in China. Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Are there any further questions among the audience? If not, I think the questions are quite well covered from what I see here, but one additional question maybe that could, and that is how long you expect curtailments at Rana in Iceland to last, and also if any of our competitors are reducing capacity to the same extent? Helge Aasen: Yes. We had an idle furnace in Rana, and we decided to postpone starting it up again. We are closely monitoring what's happening now. It's obviously inventory management, but it's also in anticipation of what will be the outcome of the safeguard decision in November. And then we have, we're going to stop one furnace in Iceland in mid-November, and that will be idle for 2 months, approximately, and what was the other part of the question? Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Competition. Helge Aasen: Yes, competition. Interestingly enough, Ferroglobe, which is our biggest competitor in silicon products in the conference, I think a couple of weeks ago, announced that they are now stopping all production in Europe. So, it says something about Elkem's competitive position. Odd-Geir Lyngstad: Very good. Thank you very much. And that also concludes our presentation here today. So, thank you very much for attending. Helge Aasen: Thank you.
Operator: Welcome to the FTI Consulting Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note, today's event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Mollie Hawkes, Head of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Mollie Hawkes: Good morning. Welcome to the FTI Consulting conference call to discuss the company's third quarter 2025 earnings results as reported this morning. Management will begin with formal remarks, after which they will take your questions. Before we begin, I would like to remind everyone that this conference call may include forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act, including the company's outlook and expectations for the full year 2025 based on management's current beliefs and expectations. These forward-looking statements involve many risks and uncertainties, assumptions and estimates and other factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from such statements. For a discussion of risks and other factors that may cause actual results or events to differ from those contemplated by forward-looking statements, investors should review the safe harbor statement in the earnings press release issued this morning, a copy of which is available on our website at www.fticonsulting.com as well as other disclosures under the heading of Risk Factors and forward-looking Information in our annual report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2024, our quarterly reports on Form 10-Q and in our other SEC filings. Investors are cautioned not to place undue reliance on any forward-looking statements, which speak only as of the date of this earnings call and will not be updated. FTI Consulting assumes no obligation to update these forward-looking statements whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as required by applicable law. During the call, we will discuss certain non-GAAP financial measures, the discussion of any non-GAAP financial measures addressed on this call and reconciliations to the most directly comparable GAAP measures are included in the press release and accompanying financial tables that we issued this morning. Lastly, there are two items that have been posted to the Investor Relations section of our website for your reference. These include a quarterly earnings presentation and an Excel and PDF of our historical financial and operating data, which have been updated to include our third quarter 2025 results. With these formalities out of the way, I'm joined today by Steve Gunby, our CEO and Chairman; and Paul Linton, our Interim Chief Financial Officer and Chief Strategy and Transformation Officer. At this time, I'll turn the call over to our CEO and Chairman, Steve Gunby. Steve Gunby: Thank you, Mollie. Welcome, everyone, and thank you all for joining us today. As I hope you've seen this morning, this morning, we reported once again, record results, with EPS and adjusted EPS of $2.60 per share, which is up over 40% over a year ago. As always, there are onetime factors that influence these numbers, and this quarter, they overall did happen to cut positively. So as we always say, during good quarters and in not-so-good quarters, one should never take one of our quarters and multiply it by 4. But even normalizing for the onetime factors, this was a record quarter, a quarter I would call spectacular and a set of results that to me was particularly gratifying given that we delivered these results in the face of major headwinds in two of our businesses and while continuing to invest in all of our businesses. So there are different ways that one can tell the story of this quarter. One is to go business by business to talk about the terrific performances we had in Corp Fin and FLC and Strat Com and how those performances more than overcame these areas of shortfall, and Paul will review the business in that way. With your permission, I'd like to see if I can put a higher-level lens on the quarter, a bit of a more holistic, integrated lens and try to tie the results of this quarter, some of the topics that we have talked about over the years, some of the underlying philosophies, the set of strategies that our teams have been driving not only business by business but as a whole, and not only quarter-by-quarter but now for close to a decade. Over the years, you've heard us talk a lot about organic growth, about focusing on high-valued areas where we believe we have a right to win. The problem with those words is that they could just be slogans. What we have tried to do in this company is to turn them into much more than slogans. What we've tried to do is to turn them into core philosophies, into approaches and approaches that have teeth, teeth that require actions in times that are sometimes comfortable but also operate in times when adhering to those values might not be so comfortable. For example, when adhering to those values might hurt the earnings for a particular business in a particular quarter. This goal of ours for organic growth reflects several core beliefs that we are committed to, that are tied to what we believe is necessary to deliver for all three of the critical stakeholders, the stakeholders that matter in our business. One is making a fundamental difference for our clients. The second is building a place where great people want to be at where great people can build great fulfilling careers. And doing both of those while, at the same time, delivering real value for you, our shareholders. There are a number of tenets underlying them. Let me summarize the key one. The first one is the easy one. It's the most obvious one. We are a client service business, which means at our core, we have to target being the best at helping our clients. That's a general statement for professional services. In our case, it means helping clients in key matters in high-stake situations. Aspiring to be the best in times of crisis or urgency requires us to make sure we have the right leading expertise. And it's important to define leading expertise right. It's not only defined as people who intellectually know what could be done or intellectually know what needs to be done, but people who have been on the front line of major crises and opportunities have actually been able to help clients deliver in those situations. The third point is maybe less obvious, but it's a consequence of those first two points, which is the core determinant of our growth and our experience is rarely whether there's a market out there. It almost always is. The challenge almost always is much more around eliminating supply side constraints which, in turn, means continually committing, continually in good quarters and bad quarters, committing to enhancing our team, supporting the growth and promotion of core committed professionals and making ourselves over time increasingly the most attractive place for terrific folks outside the firm. And of course, it requires not only getting the folks in or promoting the folks, but making sure when you do that, they feel supported, investing behind them as they have conviction about where they can double down on our core business or where they see they can find new adjacencies they can believe they can win in or where they find geographies they think they can seize. These principles, as we've discussed, are far from rocket science and they are easy to mouth. They're also easy to commit to when businesses are soaring. The rubber hits the road is what you do when the businesses are not soaring, when a business is down in a quarter or struggling. Let me take those principles and see if I can give some insight into what I think drove the quarter, first, for the businesses that soared this quarter and then for the two businesses that had some challenges. When you look at the results this quarter for Corp Fin, FLC or Strat Com, you can talk about the great things that happened in the quarter, the jobs won, the market conditions that helped and, of course, there are those. What that sort of short-term lens misses is just how much the current quarter reflects the activities and, I believe, the courage that was shown by key leaders in those segments and subsegments, not only this quarter or this year but last year and 2, 3 and 4 years ago, in quarters where certain businesses weren't soaring, but where the leaders and the individuals involved had conviction about the propositions we are driving and had confidence in the teams leading those efforts. Let me see if I can illustrate that first with Corp Fin. Corp Fin had another record quarter with multiple sub-businesses delivering double-digit growth year-over-year, and those results obviously reflect some things that happened this year. But importantly, at its core, my belief is that Corp Fin's powerful results, first, primarily reflect major convictions and did decisions made in quarters past, bold bets that the leaders bet behind in businesses that weren't performing at that time or on adjacent businesses that, at that point in time, we're unproven. There are so many examples of that in Corp Fin I can't possibly do them all justice, but let me touch on a few. In the U.K., we've always had a great Creditor Rights business, and we always support that business. But the team there also had a set of people there who believed they could add an adjacent business, a leader insolvency business. And they bet on that team, a set of bets that has turned out to be a great growth engine for us this quarter and, we believe, going forward. In Germany, it was around committing to and supporting and building on a terrific team in Andersch, which as you may remember, shortly after they came, faced significant headwinds when the German government launched the moratorium on bankruptcy during COVID. That confidence is being rewarded right now, yes, in terms of the terrific restructuring results in the quarter, but also with Germany now becoming a platform for a broader set of businesses that we can grow behind. We've talked about Australia a number of times, the transformation that happened there because we had confidence on the quality of the people on the ground and the vision they had, a vision that saw a way to get us from a distant player in restructuring to the #1 or 2 player in restructuring, but also that they saw that was a way to turn FTI as a whole into a destination of choice across segments for great professionals, a vision that I believe is fully underway to being fulfilled. These bets are in adjacencies and businesses that were struggling, the quarter's results also reflect the bets we've made in the last several years to continue to invest in businesses where we've always been strong. The teams have avoided the risk of being complacent or sitting on their laurels. They've doubled down in core businesses like restructuring, adding talent in verticals where we thought we could even be stronger like health care or airlines, all of which has led us to winning some of the biggest jobs in both of those industries over the last few years. There are so many other examples I could go to, but let me just pick one last one for Corp Fin, which is the key bets we've made in transactions, which were bets behind a terrific leadership team, and a belief that the quality of that team would allow us to gain significant market share in a market where we weren't as well-known as we thought we should be. As a result, that business has not only grown significantly over the last 4 or 5 years, it even grew in the first half of this year when transaction volumes generally in the markets were down. A point I think is important. None of those businesses, decisions in those businesses was automatically profitable. In the quarter, they were made. Most of those decisions actually cost us money initially. They were, of course, not decisions made lightly. We have disciplined teams that were made with discipline, with focus on questions like, do we have the right proposition? Do we actually have the right team that will take accountability and be able to deliver on those propositions? But where we had those teams and the right proposition, our leadership had the courage to bet and support those bets, yes, in good quarters, but also in the quarters that were not so good. The results we are showing this quarter reflect those commitments. And in my mind, they celebrate the commitments that these folks made. Let me talk about some analogous moves that the FLC leadership team has made. Some of you will remember that FLC's adjusted EBITDA was essentially flat for a while or rather it was zigzagging around a relatively flat line for a fair number of years. And during those years, we often talked on calls like this about investments we are making, overseas in certain businesses and in the United States. And during many of those years, it was hard to see the effect of those investments on bottom line performance. The reality was that within those investments were some investments that didn't work, and we had to take corrective action. What I think it was harder to see, however, was that within those investments were also powerful investments that were working, that were building on the historical strengths of FLC and helping liberate and make more visible to the market some of the underlying power of what we have always had in FLC, for example, the buildup of a much more prominent and much more well-known financial services practice, which today is not only winning some of the biggest jobs in the market but is now also a key destination for leading people who want to join us, including 15 new SMDs and MDs this year. We're continuing to build on our cybersecurity practice, not only in the U.S., but now also overseas and to broaden it into adjacencies where we believe we have the right to win such as the national security practice. We're building our risk and investigations practice more generally, not only by investing in great promotions and terrific lateral hires to enhance our capabilities, but also by figuring out ever better ways to link our deep R&I experts with our experts in financial services and other regulated industries and leverage one of our most critical assets, our core data and analytics team that has always been on the leading edge for core data and analytics services and increasingly is on the leading edge with respect to AI. Year-to-date, FLC's revenues are up double digit, and adjusted segment EBITDA is up more than 60%. Some of that is due to great things that happened in the quarter. Most of it, to me, is due to the vision, the power and the courage of the investments that FLC has made not just this year or last year but in the last 2, 3 and 4 years. Turning to Strat Com. Strat Com, as some of you may remember, was the first business that we had to turn around a decade ago. And the team, if you want to -- if you don't remember, it turned it around almost immediately. And it has been a great growth story since. But of course, just because it's a great growth story doesn't mean there haven't been zigs and zags. And Mark and the team will note we've had a lot of zigs and zags over these 10 years, including a slow period in '24. This year, Strat Com's revenue is up also double digit and its segment EBITDA is up 34%. Some of this year's results have to do with disciplined action Strat Com took in areas where it didn't think it had all the ingredients to win. But a huge amount of the growth has to do with the team's multiyear commitment to increasing our power in the core areas that aspires to win at high stakes areas like public affairs or corporate reputation, places like crisis communications or cyber communications. Strat Com has had multiple ways it's invested behind that vision over the last few years. But the primary one has been to add talent wherever it is founded a bit from the outside but actually a lot inside committing to promote that talent. When the talent was ready, even if that happened to be in a quarter that was slow. If you look at the SMD headcount in Strat Com today, 2/3 of the SMDs are new within the last 5 years, promoted during good times but also with conviction during slow periods. It is that sort of conviction that has allowed us through the various flat periods and the zags to always return this business to its powerful growth trajectory and why we have so much conviction in it going forward. Let me try to take the same principles and apply them to the businesses that have faced challenges this year. As you know, Tech is having a tough year and the Compass Lexecon business and E Con has been hit substantially this year on the top line but even more on the bottom line. The questions we look at always when we have base businesses like that or two. First, do we have confidence in the team? Do we have confidence in the propositions that, that team is driving? And then second, depending on the first one, what did we do? And when Andersch was struggling in Germany, we looked at it. And we ended up saying, wow, this is a great team. Yes, okay, there's moratoria in bankruptcy. This is a great team. So we move to second question which is, okay, how do we support this great team and get it back on the growth trajectory that it deserves? And we have the same sort of discussions and questions when we looked at Australia and many of these other situations I talked about. So we applied those lenses to these businesses. When you look at the Tech business and you apply that lens, you say, wow, we've had the fastest organic growth in the industry in the last 5 years. You find a team that for a long time has been an early adopter of the most advanced technologies, machine learning and AI technologies, topics that are critical for the future. When you talk to our clients, particularly our most prominent clients, you hear people and they see us ever more as their go-to partner for the highest stakes, most complicated investigations, litigation, M&A-related second requests. I walk away from those thoughts and those conversations with the sense that this is a business that even if a quarter is slow, we should be not only investing in but be excited to invest in. When you look at Compass Lexecon, you see, yes, we look lots of rainmakers this year. But you also say that Compass Lexecon is still by far the leading brand in the industry. I think just 3 weeks ago or 4 weeks ago, we had 66 Compass Lexecon professionals named to Lexology's 2025 competition guide, of course, once again, by far the most of any firm. We see that no firm has the global scale that we have, not only in the U.S. and Europe but in Latin America and China. And when I talk with Dan Fischel in the European and American and Asian leadership teams, people acknowledge, yes, we've lost some rainmakers. I think collectively, the belief is that today, we have the best set of experts that this firm has ever had. We believe we do, by the way, we need to get out there and introduce some of these experts to the market, something Compass Lexecon has never been that focused on. But I think everyone in Compass Lexecon is extraordinarily excited about the talent we've been able to attract to the firm and its prospects. And so when we looked at these two businesses, we come to the conclusion that these are businesses, these are teams of propositions that are worth investing in. And so then you have to figure out what those investments look like. In the Tech business, it's meant first that we continue to go after talent. A number of our competitors in this industry are stressed and that always creates a good opportunity to go after talent, and use that talent to support geographical expansion or further movements into AI topics or other relevant business expansions. But in this case, at this point in time, it is clearly also meant continuing to make sure we are investing in Tech's leadership position in AI. And so this year, we've done those sorts of investments. We are on the course of the year, and we will continue to do so. In Compass Lexecon, the most important initial investment was in retaining our staff in the face of competitive pressures. More recently, what we found is a lot of terrific people wanted to join us. And so in addition to retaining the bulk of our staff, we've announced 28 new senior hires in Compass Lexecon this year, by far a record for Compass Lexecon. And a move that, of course, is a very positive thing for the medium term, but we also all know how that works out in the near term, which is the cost comes first and the revenue comes later. the set of results that you clearly see reflected in this quarter's P&L. We make these sorts of investments in Tech and Compass Lexecon and previously in Corp Fin and FLC and Strat Com for multiple reasons. We have three core constituents we have to make sure we'll keep in our minds. And so we make these investments for all three. First of all, it's important for our clients. Our brand position is to be the leaders serving our clients. So we have to continue to invest behind leading experts in leading-edge technologies. So we make our investments for clients. We also do it because it's important that our best professionals who are killing themselves in the market, know that we're willing to support them not only when the quarters are good, but during quarters that are challenging. We also do it with a view towards our shareholders, where we believe we have fabulous businesses or sub-businesses, where making these sorts of investments will allow them over time to resume what they've been in the past, great businesses who do have zigs and zags, but have zigs and zags around fundamentally upward sloping lines. Paul is eager to do his first CFO report, so let me close in a minute here. And let me close by coming back to the quarter if I can. $2.60 of EPS. $2.60 in the face of all the investments we are making and all those headwinds I talked about. Guidance for the year that suggests notwithstanding all those investments, notwithstanding all those headwinds, unless something goes unexpectedly wrong in the fourth quarter, this team will deliver the 11th year in a row of adjusted EPS growth. It's, of course, great to have a great quarter and it's nice to have another up year. As nice as those results are. And they're nice in and of themselves, of course, right? To me, what's far more significant is when you think about what we just discussed, the mechanisms that allowed us to get here. Because the power of those mechanisms that we've now seen across all of those segments, and not just this year but across all of those years and across multiple geographies, to me, suggests more than a good quarter or a year. They suggest resilience. They suggest underlying power and they suggest lasting power and extendability. To me, they leave me ever more convinced and, probably I didn't need that much convincing, but ever more convinced about the incredible potential of this enterprise going forward. It leaves me, and I hope, you believing that we are so much closer to the beginning of this journey that the company can be on than we are to the end. With that, let me turn this over to Paul. Paul? Paul Linton: Thank you, Steve. Good morning, everybody. I am pleased to take you all through a record quarterly performance during my first earnings call as interim CFO. But before I do that, before I turn to our results and updated guidance, I want to take a moment to thank my talented colleagues across the globe for their tremendous efforts that contributed to the quarter. And I also want to thank our strong finance team for their support and for making my transition quite smooth. As Steve said, we delivered spectacular results, record results on the top and bottom line at the company level with record performance in Corp Fin and FLC and solid -- as well as solid revenue growth in Strat Com, which more than offset year-over-year declines in E Con and Tech. You may recall in February when we shared our initial revenue guidance, we said that to meet the midpoint of our range, we would need to have strong revenue growth in each of our four other business segments because of the headwinds we expected in E Con. This quarter, we delivered on that. We reported double-digit year-over-year organic revenue growth when you combine revenue across Corp Fin, FLC, Tech and Strat Com. Year-to-date, we have delivered record top and bottom line performance in Corp Fin, FLC and Strat Com. And despite the headwinds Steve described in E Con and Tech, our adjusted EPS and adjusted EBITDA are up 9% and 8.3%, respectively, year-to-date, demonstrating the breadth and resiliency of our platform. Turning to our third quarter results in more detail. Revenue of $956.2 million increased 3.3% compared to the prior year quarter. Earnings per share of $2.60 increased 41% compared to the prior year quarter. Net income of $82.8 million increased 25% compared to the prior year quarter. SG&A of $199.5 million compared to SG&A of $206 million in Q3 of 2024, the decrease was primarily due to lower compensation and the gain related to a legal settlement, which was partially offset by higher bad debt. Year-to-date, our SG&A has fluctuated quarter-to-quarter due to some onetime benefits, particularly in the first quarter of 2025 and to a lesser extent this quarter. We currently expect our Q4 SG&A to be more in line with Q2 2025 level. Third quarter 2025 adjusted EBITDA of $130.6 million or 13.7% of revenue, compared to $102.9 million or 11.1% of revenue in the prior year quarter. Our third quarter effective tax rate of 25.9% compared to 25.1% in Q3 of 2024. For the full year, we expect our effective tax rate to be between 22% and 24%. Weighted average shares outstanding, or WASO, for the third quarter ended September 30, 2025 of 31.8 million shares compared to 35.9 million shares in the prior year quarter. Billable headcount decreased 3%, and non-billable headcount decreased 0.8% compared to the prior year quarter reflecting, in part, headcount actions we took in the fourth quarter of 2024 and the first quarter of this year. Sequentially, billable headcount increased 4%, which included 331 new joiners from university campuses, our largest class ever. Now I'll share some insights at the segment level. In Corp Fin, revenue of $404.9 million increased 18.6% compared to the prior year quarter. The increase was primarily due to higher demand for restructuring and transaction services and higher realized bill rates for our transformation and strategy services. We delivered double-digit revenue growth across all three of Corp Fin's core businesses with restructuring up 18%, transactions up 30% and transformation and strategy up 10% compared to Q3 2024. Adjusted segment EBITDA of $96.4 million, or 23.8% of segment revenue, compared to $57.9 million or 17% of segment revenue in the prior year quarter. This increase was primarily due to higher revenue, which was partially offset by an increase in variable compensation and SG&A expenses. In the third quarter, restructuring represented 46%, transformation and strategy represented 27%, and transactions represented 27% of segment revenue. This compares to 47% for restructuring, 28% for transformation and strategy and 25% for transactions in Q3 of 2024. Sequentially, Corp Fin revenue increased 6.8% driven by double-digit top line growth in transactions and transformation and strategy, while restructuring revenue was up 1%. Adjusted segment EBITDA increased by 18.1%, primarily due to higher revenue, which was partially offset by an increase in variable compensation and SG&A. Notably, year-to-date, our restructuring revenue is up 11% as our long-term commitment to investing behind the best professionals has allowed us to extend our position as a global leader. We are winning major mandates in key geographies, including the U.S., U.K., Germany, Spain, France and Australia, among others. We're also seeing increased activity with commercial banks and other types of lenders as some recent alleged fraud has created pockets of stress. These are situations where our strong restructuring relationships and leading investigation position in FLC mean that our experts get more than our fair share of calls for the largest, most complex mandates. Equally important, our transactions revenue was up 16% year-to-date, even though transaction volumes globally are down slightly. And because of the investments we've made over the last 5 years, we have broadened our services, and we are seeing, on average, much larger engagements than we had even a couple of years ago. Turning to FLC. Revenue of $194.7 million increased 15.4%, compared to the prior year quarter. This increase was primarily due to higher realized bill rates for risk and investigations, data and analytics and construction solutions services and a higher demand for risk and investigation services, which includes particularly strong growth in our EMEA region. Adjusted segment EBITDA of $42.6 million, or 21.9% of segment revenue, compared to $20 million, or 11.8% of segment revenue, in the prior year quarter. The increase was due to higher revenue primarily driven by higher realized bill rates and lower SG&A expenses, which was partially offset by an increase in variable compensation. Sequentially, revenue increased 4.4% primarily due to an increase in risk and investigation revenue. Adjusted segment EBITDA increased 36.6%, primarily due to higher revenue and lower SG&A. Year-to-date, FLC revenue is up 11% and adjusted EBITDA is up 62%. This improvement has been driven by leadership team efforts to bring a broader set of product offerings, including our ability to analyze complex data sets for our clients' most pressing problem. This is a leadership team that is committed to investing behind the best people, a team with an incentive structure, which you may recall we introduced last year that's closely aligned with driving profitability and, most important, a team that is partnering side-by-side with our clients as they navigate major disruptions that are often found on the front page. Our E Con segment revenue of $173.1 million decreased 22% compared to the prior year quarter. The decrease was primarily due to lower demand for non-M&A-related antitrust and M&A-related antitrust services, which was partially offset by higher realized bill rates for non-M&A-related antitrust services and higher demand for financial economic services. Adjusted segment EBITDA loss of $4.6 million compared to an adjusted segment EBITDA of $35.2 million, or 15.9% of segment revenue, in the prior year quarter. The decrease in adjusted segment EBITDA was primarily due to lower revenue and an increase in forgivable loan amortization, which was partially offset by lower variable compensation and salaries, which includes an 8.2% decline in billable headcount. Sequentially, revenue decreased 9.7%, primarily due to lower M&A-related to antitrust, international arbitration and non-M&A-related antitrust revenue. Adjusted segment EBITDA decreased $18.7 million, primarily due to lower revenue. We issued $18 million in forgivable loans net of repayments this quarter following $72 million and $162 million in forgivable loans to existing and new employees and affiliates net of repayments in Q2 and Q1, respectively. The majority of these loans are in our E Con segment. Forgivable loan amortization generally ranges from 3 to 6 years. As Steve said, our E Con business has faced significant headwinds this year. And 9 months into the year, the headwinds have been even more challenging than we expected at the start of the year for several reasons. First, the cost to retain professionals was even more competitive than we anticipated. Second, we attracted even more great professionals, which had a larger cost impact than we expected. Third, the antitrust market has been weaker than we expected this year, particularly in EMEA, where we have had some large jobs continue to wind down, but we have not been impacted by competitive pressures. And fourth, we have legacy revenue that continues to ramp down at a time when revenue from new professionals is ramping up more slowly. From a cost perspective, we believe we have stabilized the business as the cost of retaining and attracting new professionals is now reflected in our P&L. In Tech, revenue of $94.1 million decreased 14.8% compared to the prior year quarter. The decrease was primarily due to lower demand for M&A-related second request and information governance, privacy and security services. Adjusted segment EBITDA of $13.6 million, or 14.5% of segment revenue, compared to $16.5 million, or 14.9% of segment revenue, in the prior year quarter. The decrease was primarily due to lower revenue, which was partially offset by a decrease in compensation, which includes lower as-needed consultant costs, as well as lower SG&A expenses. Sequentially, revenue increased 12.5% as we saw an uptick in demand for M&A-related second request services. Adjusted segment EBITDA increased $8.4 million, primarily due to higher revenue and lower SG&A expenses, which was partially offset by an increase in compensation. Worth noting, nearly all of the revenue decline year-to-date in our Tech segment has been driven by lower demand for M&A-related second request services. As a reminder, we delivered record second request services in the first 3 quarters of 2024 before we saw a sharp drop-off of activity in Q4 2024. Revenue in our Strat Com segment of $89.4 million increased 7.4% compared to the prior year quarter. The increase was primarily due to higher demand for corporate reputation services with particular strength in our crisis, people and transformation and cyber services, reflecting increased demand for our expertise during these times of disruption and pain. Adjusted segment EBITDA of $16.9 million, or 18.9% of segment revenue, compared to $12.1 million, or 14.6% of segment revenue, in the prior year quarter. The increase was primarily due to higher revenue and lower SG&A expenses, which was partially offset by an increase in variable compensation. Sequentially, revenue in Strat Com decreased 12.9%, primarily due to an $8.3 million decline in pass-through revenue and lower financial communications and public affairs revenue. Notably, adjusted segment EBITDA only declined $1.6 million as the decline in revenue was largely driven by lower margin pass-through revenue. This was partially offset by lower compensation and SG&A expenses. Year-to-date, Strat Com has delivered record revenue and adjusted EBITDA. Let me now discuss key cash flow and balance sheet items. Net cash provided by operating activities of $201.9 million for the quarter compared to $219.4 million for the prior year quarter. The year-over-year decrease in net cash provided by operating activities was primarily due to lower cash collections and an increase in income tax payment, which was partially offset by lower operating cost expenses. During the quarter, we repurchased 1.426 million shares at an average price per share of $164.18 for a total cost of $234.1 million. After quarter end, we repurchased 469,610 shares at an average price per share of $160.23. As you may have seen in our earnings press release, our Board of Directors authorized an additional $500 million for share repurchases. Cash and cash equivalents of $146 million at September 30, 2020 compared to $386.3 million at September 30, 2024 and $152.8 million at June 30, 2025. Total debt, net of cash, of $364 million at September 30, 2025 compared to $317.2 million at June 30, 2025. The sequential increase in total debt, net of cash, was primarily due to share repurchases. Now turning to our guidance. Given the stronger-than-expected performance in the third quarter, we're updating our full year 2025 guidance for revenue and EPS as follows. We now estimate revenue will range between $3.685 billion and $3.735 billion, which compares to our previous range between $3.66 billion and $3.76 billion. We now estimate EPS will range between $7.62 and $8.12. And we now expect adjusted EPS will range between $8.20 and $8.70, which compares to our previous range of $7.80 to $8.40. The variance between EPS and adjusted EPS is related to the special charge in the first quarter of 2025. Our guidance is shaped by several key considerations. Fourth quarter is typically a weaker quarter for us because of a seasonal business slowdown as our clients and professionals may take time off during the holidays, especially after such a busy year in many of our segments, particularly Corp Fin and FLC. Second, while we believe we have stabilized our E Con business from a cost perspective and we expect a gradual return to revenue growth over the next several quarters, the timing of this improvement is not yet certain. Third, we continue to welcome top-notch senior professionals, and we expect to build teams behind them. Year-to-date, we have announced 79 SMD and affiliate hires, which compares to 33 and 39 announced hires in 2024 and 2023 over the same time period, respectively. And finally, our assumptions define a midpoint and the range of guidance around that midpoint. We recognize that actual results can be beyond that range. Before I close, I want to reiterate four key themes that I believe continue to underscore the strength of our company. First, as the result this quarter demonstrate, we have a set of businesses that are uniquely diverse and resilient. Despite the major headwinds we've had this year in E Con and Tech, our company as a whole delivered not just strong but record performance this quarter. Second, we believe that the deep expertise of our professionals is what sets us apart. The expertise of our people allows them to be ever more in demand by our clients as they navigate complex and ever-increasing dislocation globally. Third, we remain committed to attracting the best people when they are available, irrespective of short-term headwinds. These key senior hires span across the company including antitrust, transactions, financial services, cybersecurity, risk and investigations and corporate reputation. And fourth, our balance sheet remains strong. We have the ability to boost shareholder value, first and foremost, through organic growth, as we have shown, through acquisitions when we find the right fit and, of course, by repurchasing shares as we have done this year. With that, let me turn it back over to Steve. Steve Gunby: Thank you, Paul. Before we go to the questions, just in case some folks on the call don't know Paul. Paul has been here for 11 years. He's been a key member of the Executive Committee, one of my right-hand folks. We hired him in 11 years ago, shortly after I joined, I guess, as the Head of Strategy, and he's been a key contributor in 11 years since as this company has soared. I was so pleased that he volunteered to serve as Interim CFO, although he does claim I voluntold him. But either way, Paul thank you for taking on the role. Let me also take one moment to thank Ajay Sabherwal for 9 years of real dedication here at FTI. He has contributed a lot and his commitment to this firm and helping it reach its potential was always evident. I'm looking forward to seeing him tonight and seeing him going forward, and all of us wish him best in his next endeavors. With that, let me open the floor for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Today's first question comes from Andrew Nicholas with William Blair. Andrew Nicholas: I wanted to start on Economic Consulting, and I apologize, a multi-parter here. I guess trying to understand if you could unpack how much of the top line performance in the quarter was maybe market-driven versus some of the talent dynamics that you mentioned. Also with costs having now stabilized, is there still conviction in EBITDA for that segment bottoming in the second half of this year? And then lastly, any impact that you expect from the U.S. government shutdown? Steve Gunby: Okay. Let me -- got the U.S. government shutdown, EBITDA bottoming. Remind me the first one there, Andrew, by the time I wrote it... Andrew Nicholas: Yes. How much of the revenue kind of decline you'd attribute to just broader market conditions versus some of the talent transition going on this year? Steve Gunby: Yes. If I had to guess on the first one, it'd probably be, I'm guessing, 2/3 to the talent transition and 1/3 towards market conditions, but that's a guess. We can -- if I'm way off, we'll correct that, but I think that's close enough to I guess in a different place, Paul. U.S. government, very hard to say. We are getting in our businesses still leads for things. I think whether that is because people believe that government will not be shut down long or whether -- so if there's an extended shutdown, you have to believe it starts to affect things. But so far, we haven't seen much effect is what I would say. Has the EBITDA bottomed out? I think you correctly got a sense that the bulk of the costs are now reflected in this. I think what we have is a war going on between the runoff of the legacy work and how fast we can generate new work and how fast the markets that were slow come back. I would say I'm cautious about that. I don't think we can commit to this having been a bottoming out yet. I think we've done a great job of adding talent. It turns out that Compass Lexecon has never really marketed itself before. And so we're finally starting an effort to make sure that the market knows all the talent is out there. And then the market has to know that the talent is with us now and then you have to get the initial lead and then there's senior time, and then eventually you get the big work with the junior time that you make a lot of money on. And so that's a multi-quarter type of thing to get the realization on all the new people. I would say a lot of the legacy work has run off, but there's still stuff to run off. And so the war between those two, I'm not quite sure. It could be trumped by whether the markets come back faster or slower than us. So I think you don't want to count on an immediate turnaround in EBITDA, although there's always fourth quarter effects also in Compass Lexecon because the law firms collect at the end of the year and we get collections and so forth. So there's a lot of noise in the fourth quarter. The way I'm thinking about this business is I am fundamentally really positive over it in the multiyear time frame. Now what the first half of next year looks like and how fast it starts to turn around is still a question where we're working through. Does that at least give you a sense, Andrew? Andrew Nicholas: Yes. No, that's helpful. I appreciate you handling or responding to all the different pieces of my question. Next one is just on the transactions practice. Could you unpack that strength a bit further? How much is market-driven versus some of the operational or execution momentum that you described in your remarks, because I think that's one of the higher quarters in that practice that certainly we've seen. So any more color there would be great. Steve Gunby: Yes. That one, and maybe Paul has better data than I do. My sense qualitatively is the bulk of that is our bloody team. I got to tell you, it's really fun to see. And certainly, the bulk of it over the last few years, when the markets weren't growing and we were is because of really good leadership and just leadership throughout the ranks of the team, not just the guy running it was terrific, but also throughout the ranks. Just it's a great team that has conviction in their propositions. They've been out in the market. And where we've gotten trial with people, people want to buy more. And then as I think Paul mentioned, what we have done is, as we first -- years ago, we had no credibility in this space. And then you build credibility. And as you have credibility, it gives you the opportunity to introduce other services. And so that's what's happened this year. I mean, I'm not sure whether the jobs are up as much as the size of the jobs because we're now credible with people, and we introduce other services. And people say, wow, you're good at that too. Look, there's going to be zig-zags in that business because it's driven by market, but I am fundamentally bullish about that over the next years. Andrew Nicholas: Great. And then maybe last one for me. Just on FLC, another really good quarter despite what I think are maybe some more challenging end market conditions. As I understand it, some of that is incentive driven and some of the changes that you made internally, also price realization. On the price piece specifically, is that something that you think can continue into next year or even multiple years from here? Or should we think about that kind of rate increase dynamic being more kind of specific to '25? Steve Gunby: Let me answer that two ways. I think, look, we have rate potential across our business, across every segment still there. I mean, if you look at the major law firms that we have been working with, they over the last 5 years have raised their rates way more than we have. And so we are engaging in catch-up. Having said that, I would say the FLC team this past year made a major catch-up. So I wouldn't want people to say, oh, that sort of catch-up is something that we can do every year. What we can do is to continue to build on it, but it would be more likely in a more modest way than it's shown up in the numbers this year. Does that help? Andrew Nicholas: Yes. Operator: And our next question today comes from James Yaro at Goldman Sachs. James Yaro: Steve, I wanted to touch a little bit on the impact of AI on your business. Perhaps you could just touch on which businesses are impacted. And then if you could possibly maybe differentiate between positive and negative impacts when you discuss the various businesses. Steve Gunby: Yes. Look, can I maybe frame that a little bit at a higher level and then come back to your question? Look, I've gotten into AI as any CEO has. And one of the most interesting quotations I ever saw was by Bill Gates about all new technologies. And what Bill said 30 years ago was that every new technology -- fundamental technology has followed the same pattern. It's ignored for a while, then there's immense hype. The hype is overhyped for a lot of people. It's going to change your life, James, and how you raise your children in the next 2 weeks. And then the disillusionment sets in 18 or 24 months later. And I think we're seeing that pattern with AI. Now the other point that he made is, and it's when the disillusionment sets in that the real revolution begin. And you saw that in the Internet when the initial Google and Facebook and Uber, these were not things in the first few years. These were things for people who persisted and rethought and rethought and rethought that created the world. It's a big -- I think this is what's happening with AI now, the disillusionment setting in. It's obviously been transformative for NVIDIA. But I think the standard statistic is for 80% of companies out there right now, they're not seeing any impact, positive or negative from their investments in AI. We are seeing impact and we're seeing positive impact. We haven't found much tremendous impact yet on our internal operations and cost out, that sort of stuff that people search. Where we're finding it is in our client work. And it's different types of things. We've developed some tools that are powerful tools that help enhance our position in large-scale investigations. These are tools that we call Ariadne and IQ.AI, and that's just really part and parcel of us being able to deliver on what we've historically been able to deliver and just do it in superior ways. We have started to get some major new work, some of it is small, but some of it is major new work, where we have been called on to help investigate where AI algorithms have potentially been used by major institutions in ways that violate regulatory stature. And I think we are leading edge in our ability to do that sort of work. And we've had some pretty big assignments in that. And then we are being called more smaller early-stage things to help do like either communications around AI strategies or early-stage assessments of what AI could do to the strategies of various businesses. It's not yet, I would say, cumulatively across the whole enterprise. It's not transformative as a part of these economics, but I think it is the prelude for transformative going forward. And we're pretty excited about our position in -- by making sure we're staying attached to it, but also as our Tech team has done really well of trying to position ourselves as the people who can demystify it and find the real applications, the real use cases that make a difference and avoid the pitfalls. And I think that's where we're trying to take it. Does that help, James? James Yaro: That's really helpful. Just maybe one clarifying question there as this is a question that I do receive a lot. So I think you walked through a lot of the positives that AI could potentially generate for the business over time. I just want to make sure that I understand and get your thoughts. So you're not seeing today or expect in the future much in the way of any sort of negative impact on billable hours across the business. Steve Gunby: Look, I think you would expect, of course, look, I think back in the day, and this is before your time but also before mine, James, when accountants were totaling up spreadsheets and then Excel was created, the number of accountants needed to total down the column and across went away. Any new technology changes the work required and changes some of the commodity elements of the work. And we are constantly monitoring that across our business. I will say that I would feel more worried about that if I had 25:1 leverage businesses with primarily junior people. Our business is experts in court testifying or experts doing like the Red Adair stuff, flying on a -- Doyle -- I think it was analogous to Red Adair, the guy who flew on oil derricks when they're on fire and put out the fire. That's not a commodity while maybe building an oil derrick is. And so I think we're going to be positioned really well. But of course, we're always looking for ways to substitute technology for hours and create efficiencies and figuring out ways to price those things for our clients. Does that address that part of the question, James? James Yaro: That's really helpful. Just one last one for me. Maybe just on the restructuring side of things. I think if I calculate it correctly, you reached another all-time high this quarter, which is obviously very positive. Maybe you could just help us think about the outlook for this business going forward. Bankruptcies have continued to tick up modestly off admittedly a low base and your business continues to grow. Paul Linton: Yes, maybe I'll take that one. So yes, quarter-over-quarter, we were up about 1%. So the business continues to be quite strong and we continue to see, as I said, strength in multiple geographies, which we think will continue to position us for some of the larger mandates, both creditor side as well as company side. So I think we think the market will continue to benefit us as we continue to maintain or grow share there. Operator: And our next question today comes from Tobey Sommer with Truist. Tyler Barishaw: This is Tyler Barishaw on for Tobey. I want to go back to Economic Consulting. How should we be thinking about the margin level for next year in that business? Steve Gunby: We should think about it hard. This is what I would say, Tyler. Look, there's so many dynamics of that business. I can't give a prediction next year. I mean, I don't think we typically give predictions at the segment level and certainly not now for next year. I think it's so much the right question. I think what I would say is I have a lot of confidence in the multiyear trajectory of that business. We wouldn't have been making all these investments this year. How quickly we turn it around is a real question. And I wouldn't get overly bullish. But I wouldn't be overly cautious about the multiyear trajectory for that business either. Does that at least help a little bit, Tyler? Tyler Barishaw: It does. What about headcount growth? Should we expect similar levels of headcount growth across the whole business for next year as well? Or maybe some trends you're seeing into fourth quarter would be helpful. Steve Gunby: Look, I think this year, the headcount growth year-over-year is lower than we have historically done. I mean, we are -- we have had the same strategy, but different years, different things happen. And if you remember here in the fourth quarter and the first quarter, we stressed some certain underperforming positions and so forth. And so I think our headcount growth year-over-year here is among the lowest since I've been here. We haven't changed our fundamental headcount growth story. I think if you heard my -- I hope you heard my opening and I hope you communicated a sense of conviction and bullishness about the future of this company. So we have to grow heads. Now how we differentiate that among segments and subsegments by geography depends a lot on individual circumstances and whether we're long in some headcount or short in some headcount. So I probably can't go into the individual subpoints. But if you wanted to go back to our longer-term history to project headcount growth for the majority of the world, that's probably a better prediction than using the last 12 months. Does that help, Tyler? Tyler Barishaw: It does. Steve Gunby: Let me say thank you all. I think we went over a couple of minutes. Thank you all for your continued attention, and we look forward to taking this company forward. Thank you. Operator: Thank you. This concludes today's conference call. We thank you all for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect your lines, and have a wonderful day.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to World Acceptance Corporation's Second Quarter 2026 Earnings Conference Call. This call is being recorded. [Operator Instructions]. Before we begin, the corporation has requested that I make the following announcement. The comments made during this conference call may contain certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 that represent the corporation's expectations and beliefs concerning future events. Such forward-looking statements are about matters that are inherently subject to risks and uncertainties. Statements other than those of historical fact as well as those identified by the words anticipate, estimate, intend, plan, expect, believe, may, will and should or any variation of the foregoing insular expressions are forward-looking statements. Additional information regarding forward-looking statements and any factors that could cause actual results or performance to differ from the expectations expressed or implied in such forward-looking statements are included in the paragraph discussing forward-looking statements in today's earnings press release and in the Risk Factors section of the corporation's most recent Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended March 31, 2025, and subsequent reports filed with or furnished to the SEC from time to time. The corporation does not undertake any obligation to update any forward-looking statements it makes. At this time, it is my pleasure to turn the floor over to your host, Chad Prashad, President and Chief Executive Officer. Chad Prashad: Good morning, and thank you for joining our fiscal '26 second quarter earnings call. There are a lot of great things to report in the portfolio. But before I get into those, I want to spend some time discussing a few unusual and one-off events that impacted this quarter, and then we'll open up to any questions you have. First, we had a $3.7 million onetime expense from the early redemption of our bonds. This is approximately a $0.57 earnings per share impact after tax within the quarter. Second, even though we discontinued and disposed of our Mexico operation years ago, we had a $1.3 million discrete tax-related expense this quarter. There are no additional items related to our prior Mexico operations that we expect to impact any future business or financials. But this $1.3 million expense represents approximately $0.26 per share after tax this quarter. We had the most new customer growth in the last 4 years this quarter, and this growth primarily in new customers, which are our riskiest customer segment, resulted in a new customer portfolio at the end of Q2 that is 35% larger year-over-year. This marginal increase in provision is solely due to the increased new customer base is approximately $5 million, solely due to new customers in the portfolio at the end of the second quarter. This represents approximately $0.78 per share after tax. These 3 unusual events in this quarter have a total impact of around $1.61 per share after tax on the quarter. Additionally, our long-term incentive comp changes make for year-over-year comparisons rather difficult. Last year, we reversed around $18.1 million in long-term comp from a prior plan, which benefited that quarter. Conversely, this quarter, we expensed around $5.8 million of long-term comp plan, which is about a $23.9 million net increase in our long-term incentive comp expenses when you're comparing year-over-year quarters. As you think about future quarters, the long-term incentive expense is front-loaded and will remain around $5.8 million for the third quarter before reducing by around $2 million in the fourth quarter and the following 2 quarters before reducing further. All right. That covers the major one-off and unique impacts within the second quarter. Now turning to the portfolio. Our new customer origination volume is up around 40% year-over-year at the end of the second quarter. Year-to-date, our new customer origination volume is up 35% and back to pre-COVID levels, actually in line with the first half of both fiscal year 2019 and 2020. This is a remarkable feat given the last few years of shrinking reduced growth. Additionally, the first pay default rate, slow file or delinquency rate of these new originations are in line with our fiscal 2019 and 2020, new bar originations. We're very grateful for all of the hard work by so many folks within our teams and very pleased with these results. They are able to return to healthy growth with good credit quality, maintain low first payment default rates while also increasing our portfolio yield by over 130 basis points year-over-year. When we include our returning former customers and look at all non-refinance originations, originations increased 15% year-over-year in the second quarter, making it the highest volume second quarter on record with the exception of fiscal year 2020 -- 2022. Year-to-date, the first half of the fiscal year had 14% higher loan volume than last year. Again, the highest volume on record for the first half of the fiscal year with the exception of fiscal year 2022. This is especially important for our portfolio of health as our repeat customers are lower credit risk, have a lower cost of acquisition and servicing and help with overall retention, yield and lower delinquency. All of this has helped us grow the portfolio nominally by 5.5% more this year relative to last year. We ended the second quarter with our portfolio up 1.5% year-over-year, compared to a starting position of being down 4% at beginning of the year on April 1 year-over-year. Other great improvements to our capital position include, as we previously mentioned, this quarter, we repurchased and canceled the remaining $170 million of our bonds and stood up a $175 million warehouse facility. Also in the quarter, we completed a new credit agreement, increasing commitments to $640 million and allowing for stock repurchases of up to 100% of net income which is an increase from 50% of net income in our prior agreement, and an additional $100 million of upfront repurchase allowance in addition to the 100% of net income, which begins January 1, 2025. For that repurchase potential, we've already repurchased 9.1% of our shares so far year-to-date, which is around $80 million, with additional capacity repurchased another $77 million this year, or approximately 8.6% of outstanding shares at yesterday's price for a total potential repurchase of around 17.7% of outstanding shares, again at yesterday's share price. We're excited about the current portfolio and this trajectory, which includes substantial customer base expansion, strong loan growth, improved loan approval rates while maintaining credit quality, stable and improving delinquency, lower cost of acquisition, improving yields, declining share count and ultimately returning enhanced value to our shareholders through strong EPS growth. At this time, Johnny Calmes, our Chief Financial and Strategy Officer, and I would like to open up to any questions you may have. Operator: [Operator Instruction]. And your first question comes from John Rowan with Janney. John Rowan: My apologies, the phone broke up -- my phone broke up a little bit when you were talking about the 3 discrete items, I got into $0.26 from Mexico, but what were the other 2 to get to the $1.61? Chad Prashad: Yes. So we had $0.26 in Mexico. We had $0.57 due to the $3.7 million early redemption of our bonds and approximately 78% -- or $0.78 EPS impact from around right at $5 million increase in our provision solely due to more new customer growth this second quarter than last second quarter. John Rowan: Okay. So I just want to make sure I understand a little bit more about the -- some of your operating expenses going forward. So you had $25 million, an increase of $25.4 million in personnel expense because of the grants, right? But I'm assuming that that's up $25 million versus the $18.5 million reversal last year. So is it safe to assume that there's like $6.9 million, the net difference of that in personnel expense this year -- this quarter, going down to $5.8 million next quarter and then down to $3.8 million a quarter, for that $1.8 million a quarter after that. Does that sound correct? Chad Prashad: Yes. Sounds good. John Rowan: Okay. And then kind of 1 last housekeeping question. So obviously, you had a GAAP loss for the quarter. I'm assuming the diluted share count is just the basic share count. Can you tell me what the -- but the period end diluted share count was? Or the period end share count and then what the dilution is, we can maybe get an idea of what the diluted share count is with positive earnings? Chad Prashad: Yes. So the quarter ending share count is up $4.8 million. And the dilution usually runs in the 100,000, 200,000 shares, depending on obviously where the share prices and other factors. Operator: Your next question comes from Kyle Joseph with Stephens. Go ahead. Kyle Joseph: Just want to get your sense for the health of the underlying consumer and kind of any changes since the last time we talked. Obviously, there's been a lot of headlines, primarily in the auto space and concerns about the consumer. And I recognize you guys have some portfolio mix shift going on. But just stepping back and talking about the health of the underlying consumer and how that's impacting both demand and credit? Chad Prashad: Yes, it's a great question. So we do track how our consumer is performing on other loans. And yes, we have seen the same sort of weakness that you're reading about the papers, especially in the auto loans. However, for us, we haven't seen any major signs of weakness. We have proactively tightened our credit box for new customers multiple times so far this fiscal year, very marginal tightening typically on the very low end. Nothing really substantial in terms of overall approval volumes. But in terms of performance, we haven't seen anything major that would impact the portfolio today. Kyle Joseph: Got it. And then you guys talked about originations growth and new customers and just kind of want to get an update on marketing efforts that have been driving that and where you guys have been having success in kind of an update on the competitive environment as well. Chad Prashad: Yes. So on the marketing side, we've done a number of things that have, I think, been very successful. We are very much a test-and-learn sort of environment. We have brought some modeling in-house on the -- for solicitation models, propensity to respond and couple those with overall performance expectations. We have a couple of very successful tests this past quarter that have dramatically reduced our cost of acquisition for pre-approval campaigns, primarily new customers. This fiscal year, we have made some substantial changes to the way that we market to our former customers in order to increase our repeat business. We've seen substantial reductions in overall cost of acquisition here as well. Now with that being said, we haven't anticipated returning back to the $20 million-plus sort of marketing budget that we used to have in marketing. We're, for now, looking to aim for modest growth, somewhere in the mid to low single digits on the portfolio side, which is mid to high single digits on the customer base side. So all that is kind of tailwinds in terms of growth, but we're still maintaining sort of smaller budgets on the marketing front. We are seeing increased demand and sort of increased application volume from customers in general. So maybe that's also helping to fuel our lower cost of acquisition. Kyle Joseph: Got it. Very helpful. Thanks for taking my questions. Operator: There are no further questions at this time. This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Mr. Prashad for any closing remarks. Chad Prashad: In closing, I want to thank our absolutely amazing team across the country as well as those here in Greenville. I'm very grateful for their commitment to their customers and to our team members every day. They are helping our customers to establish and rebuild credit while meeting their immediate financial needs. Thank you for taking time to join us today. This concludes the second quarter earnings call for World Acceptance Corporation. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Alexander Bergendorf: Good morning, everyone. This is Alexander Bergendorf, Head of Investor Relations at Axfood, and welcome to the Axfood Third Quarter 2025 Telephone Conference. So with me today, I have Simone Margulies, President and CEO; and Anders Lexmon, CFO. In the Investors section of our website, you will find the presentation materials for today's call, and we encourage you to have that presentation at hand as you listen to our prepared commentary. After the presentation, we will be taking questions. And a recording of this call will be made available after the end on our website. So with that, I will now hand over the words to Simone. So please go to Page #2. Simone Margulies: Thank you, Alex, and good morning, everyone. Axfood summarizes another strong quarter with high customer traffic, volume growth and increased market share. With increased loyalty and growth in our store chains as well as improved efficiency and solid cost control, earnings increased in all operating segments. In addition, we continue to invest in strategically important areas to become even more efficient and further improve our competitiveness. In recent year, our logistics structure has been developed to enable continued profitable growth. And during the quarter, we announced plans to establish a new highly automated logistics center in Kungsbacka in Southern Sweden. In sustainability, we presented the Food 2030 report, our proposal for a more sustainable food strategy for Sweden. We also continued to phase out fossil fuels in all our transports, had our new solar park in full operations and launched innovative new products focused on sustainability and health. Following that introduction, let us now turn to Page 3 and the agenda for today's presentation. I will start with a brief market overview, and then I will give you a review of our third quarter performance and some of our strategic priorities. Following that, Anders will take you through the financials. And lastly, the outlook for the full year and a brief summary to conclude for me before we open up for questions. Turning to Page 4, but let's go straight to Page 5 and take a look at the quarterly development. As in previous quarters, market conditions in Swedish food retail during the third quarter continued to be characterized by intense competition and high price awareness among consumers. Overall market growth amounted to 5.4% and Statistics Sweden reported that the annualized rate for food price inflation was 4.4%. This was somewhat lower than in the second quarter this year. However, in absolute terms, compared to the second quarter, the price development was relatively stable. Axfood is successfully navigating a changing end market dynamic by leveraging the strength of our business model of strong and distinctive concepts working in collaboration. Thanks to affordable and attractive offerings, more and more consumers are choosing to shop with us. Having maintained our momentum, we delivered a strong performance in the quarter. Growth in our retail sales amounted to almost 20%. Excluding City Gross, which was acquired in November last year, growth amounted to just over 6%. As such, our growth again was above the market rate, both including and excluding City Gross. Volume growth from increased loyalty, customer traffic and new store establishment was the main driver behind this development. In e-commerce, we grew 11%, which compared to the market growth of 8%. Excluding City Gross and the discontinued business Middagsfrid, sales were up 6%. Turning to Page 6. Consolidated net sales for Axfood grew almost 7% in the quarter, driven by continued strong momentum in Willys, Hemköp and Snabbgross. We also saw a positive trend for City Gross. In all, City Gross net sales amounted to just over SEK 2 billion. However, on a group net sales basis, the contribution from City Gross was SEK 345 million due to internal eliminations in Dagab. Please go to the next page, #7. Group operating profit increased to just over SEK 1 billion, and the operating margin was stable at 4.8%. Operating profit included items affecting comparability of minus SEK 39 million related to City Gross. Adjusted operating profit, which excludes these items, also increased to SEK 1.1 billion, and adjusted operating margin was higher at 4.9%. In all, the absolute growth in group operating profit was driven by Willys and Dagab. However, Hemköp and Snabbgross also reported increased profits year-on-year with strong growth in percentage terms. So the earnings performance was once again very well balanced this quarter across our operating segments. City Gross had a negative impact on the group's profit development, however, to a less extent than in the previous quarters. Let's now go deeper into the development in each operating segment, starting with Willys on Page 8. Willys continued to outperform the market in the third quarter with a growth of 6%. Growth primarily came from higher volumes as a result of an increased number of customer visits and new store establishments. A higher average ticket value also had a positive impact on the sales development. Willys is Sweden's most recommended food retail chain and has a unique position on the market. The rate of increase of new members in the Willys Plus loyalty program continued to be on a high level. And in addition, loyalty among existing members remained strong. Earnings grew and amounted to SEK 587 million, which corresponds to a stable operating margin of 4.9%. The increase in operating profit was primarily driven by the increased sales volumes, a stable gross margin development and good cost control. Leveraging its position as Sweden's leading discount grocery chain as well as its liking among households, Willys is continuing to develop its offering. Among many initiatives, stores are continuously being upgraded to a new Willys 5.0 store concept. Willys 5.0 entails a significant improvement to the customer experience through a substantial upgrade of store layout and design. The assortment is key, and here, the focus is really on enhancing the offering of fresh products. Willys 5.0 is a scalable concept, which gives flexibility and opportunities to establish more stores. Because establishing new stores, this is exactly what Willys wants to do as the store chain is currently accelerating its expansion pace to reach even more consumers. In October, Willys reached a significant milestone when it opened store number 250 in RosengÃ¥ard in Malmö. Over the past 10 years, Willys had expanded store base with more than 50 stores on a net basis. And now the aim is to open at least 10 new stores each year in the coming years. Moving on to Hemköp and Page 10. Hemköp's retail sales growth of 6% in the quarter exceeded that of the market and like-for-like growth was also strong at almost 5%. Hemköp demonstrated volume growth driven by customer traffic, a higher average ticket value also impacted the sales development positively. Total net sales for Hemköp increased 7%. Operating profit was higher at SEK 103 million and operating margin was 5.1%. The increase in operating profit was mainly driven by the increased sales, a stable gross margin and good cost control. Turning to Page 11. I just talked about Willys modernizing its store base, and Hemköp is also modernizing stores at a rapid rate in order to enhance the customer meeting. In addition, its offering is continuously being developed with a focus on price value, fresh products and meal solutions. Hemköp's performance in the third quarter was strong, representing a continuation of its momentum for some time now. This development is despite them operating in traditional grocery, which is a segment that while being the largest on the market, has seen its share of the market decline in recent years. It's important to take this into account when analyzing Hemköp. And it is quite clear when you look at the customer data such as development in penetration, in loyalty and purchases, that Hemköp is clearly outperforming their main peers. We are now on Page 12. We acquired City Gross nearly a year ago to create new growth opportunities for our group. The organization is working according to a clear plan and has a comprehensive development agenda in place to reverse the chain's weak performance in recent years. This year is a transitional year, and we are today reiterating that we expect to reach profitability at some point in the second half of 2026. While total growth for City Gross in the third quarter was impacted by store closures, like-for-like growth amounted to slightly more than 3%. City Gross reported on an operating loss on an adjusted basis of minus SEK 4 million. The loss was less negative than in previous quarters with positive effects from like-for-like growth. In addition, structural measures and efforts to streamline operations also contributed to the development. On a reported basis, operating profit amounted to minus SEK 43 million, which corresponds to an operating margin of minus 2%. This included items affecting comparability of minus SEK 39 million pertaining to structural measures, including discontinuation costs for the store in Kungens Kurva in Stockholm, organizational changes and sales currents within the nonfood assortment. In August, the new communication concept and the improved more affordable customer offering was further developed. Also, the City Gross store in Borlänge was closed ahead of concept change to Willys. Turning to Page 13. The 3% growth in like-for-like sales for City Gross represent a positive trend. The chart on this slide shows comparable sales on a rolling 12-month basis, each quarter from the third quarter 2022. As you can see in the chart, after a couple of years with declining sales, City Gross is now back to growth, which, of course, is encouraging. That said, we are still in early days on our journey with City Gross and maintain a high activity level to enable the chain to become a competitive player on the market once again. City Gross has excellent potential as a pure-play hypermarket operator, an attractive segment that is continuing to account for a growing share of the market. With a long-term perspective, we are leveraging our knowledge and experience to develop and strengthen the chain for the future. Moving to Slide 14. Our restaurant wholesaler, Snabbgross, delivered growth of 6% in the quarter on both a total and like-for-like basis. Higher volumes through increased customer traffic had a positive impact on sales in addition to a higher average ticket value. Operating profit was higher than in the prior year and amounted to SEK 101 million, corresponding to a higher operating margin of 6.3%. The increase was mainly driven by higher sales, a stable gross margin and good cost control. Next Page #15 and Dagab. Dagab's quarterly net sales increased by 5%, driven by sales to Willys, Hemköp and Snabbgross. Operating profit increased to SEK 341 million, and the operating margin was higher at 1.7%. The performance was primarily due to the sales growth and a lower cost level with increased productivity in logistics. Operating profit was, however, negatively impacted by a lower gross margin. Dagab is continuing its effort to optimize the flow of goods and streamline the group's new logistics structure. The logistics center in BÃ¥lsta, the fruit and vegetable warehouse in Landskrona and the recently expanded and automated highway warehouse in Backa, Gothenburg are all contributing to the group's capacity and efficiency. In addition, and we are now on Page 16, work on establishing a new highly automated logistics center for Southern Sweden has been initiated to ensure increased capacity and efficiency. As previously communicated during the third quarter, letters of intent were signed with our automation partner, Witron and with Kungsbacka Municipality. The logistics center, which will span approximately 90,000 square meters and be environmentally certified, will handle picking and deliveries of goods in all temperature zones to grocery stores. Total capacity is expected to increase at least 20% compared to current volumes in the Southern Sweden. The facility is expected to be put into operation starting in 2030. Turning to Page 17. Now it's time for Anders to take you through the financials. So please go to the next page, Page #18. And Anders, please go ahead. Anders Lexmon: Thank you, Simone. During the first 9 months, net sales for the group increased by 6.6% to approximately SEK 66 billion. Including City Gross, retail sales increased by 19.3% and excluding City Gross, the increase was 6%, which was more than the food retail market in total, where growth amounted to 4.5%. Operating profit, excluding items affecting comparability, increased 5.8% to just over SEK 2.8 billion. The operating margin, excluding items affecting comparability, slightly decreased from 4.3% to 4.2%, where the City Gross acquisition impacted the margin with minus 0.3 percentage points. Next, Page #19. During the third quarter, the cash flow was minus SEK 40 million, which was SEK 380 million higher compared to last year. We saw a strong underlying operating cash flow, both for the third quarter and the 9-month period, mainly due to a less negative contribution from net working capital compared to last year. The negative calendar effect was higher last year. The negative cash flow from investment activities of SEK 421 million in Q3 was somewhat higher compared to last year, but in line with previous quarters. We have a higher pace in our investments in our retail operations and a lower pace in automation investments compared to last year since we now are through with our investment in the fulfillment center in BÃ¥lsta. By the end of the third quarter, Axfood utilized approximately SEK 3.1 billion of the group's credit facilities compared to SEK 2.5 billion by the end of Q2 and SEK 3.2 billion at the end of Q1. The increased utilization compared to Q2 was due to the dividend paid out in September. And then please turn to Page #20. Net debt has increased since the acquisition of City Gross in Q4 last year. In addition to the loans raised for the acquisition, net debt also has increased with the City Gross leasehold debt of approximately SEK 2 billion. As we communicated in the Q2 report, Axfood has successfully refinanced the existing revolving credit facility in the beginning of Q3. The new RCF amounts to SEK 4 billion, where SEK 1 billion have a tenure of 3 years and SEK 3 billion have a tenure of 5 years. And the conditions in the new agreement are in all essentials unchanged compared with the old facility. The equity ratio amounted to 20.4%, which was lower than December 2024, but above the actual year-end target of 20%. The lower equity ratio compared to Q3 last year was also a result of the City Gross acquisition. Total investments, excluding leasehold and acquisitions for the first 9 months amounted to SEK 1.3 billion. Year-to-date, we have established 7 new group-owned stores, the same number as in the prior year. We have, however, increased our store modernization rate compared to last year. And then please turn to Page #21. When we look at the capital efficiency, we have a negative development of our rolling 12-month net working capital as a percentage of sales. As I have mentioned before, the impact of City Gross acquisition is expected to increase this KPI with approximately 0.3 percentage points on a rolling 12 months' basis. Capital employed has increased over the last years, mainly due to both the acquisition of Bergendahls Food and City Gross as well as the investments in BÃ¥lsta. The level of capital employed increased slightly during the first 9 months, mainly as a result of increased leasehold debt and utilization of credit facility. Due to the increase in capital employed, return on capital employed decreased somewhat compared to last year to 16.4%. And thereby, I have come to the end of my presentation, and I hand over to you again, Simone. Simone Margulies: Thank you, Anders. We are now on Page 22, but let's go straight to Page 23. While we maintain our full year outlook for capital expenditures, our store expansion plan is slightly revised. Due to a slight delay, the number of new group-owned stores opened during the year will amount to 9. In addition, the store network is expanded with 3 retailer-owned stores joining the network from competing retail chains. As for items affecting comparability, structural costs in City Gross are now estimated to amount to SEK 150 million. As a reminder, the outlook for next year 2026 will be presented in conjunction with the release of our year-end report. Please now turn to Page 24. So let me summarize. We are summarizing a strong third quarter with higher growth than the market and improved earnings in all operating segments. Just over a month ago, we held a Capital Markets Day at which we discussed how our business model and structure create opportunities. We also laid out our main competitive advantages, and I would like to mention them here again. First, with our brands, both in-store concepts and private labels and a high-quality affordable assortment, we are well positioned to meet consumers' diverse and evolving needs. Second, we have attractive store locations and a significant potential to expand. Third, our integrated value chain provides the right conditions to quickly adapt when customer behaviors or market conditions change, and it also gives us efficiency. Fourth, to us, the key to drive long-term growth and profitability is based on customer traffic, loyalty and volume growth. We have seen a strong development in all these areas over a long period. And with our scale, we can further strengthen our competitiveness. Our performance in the third quarter really shows how we drive growth in all segments on the market, both organically and through expansion and how our integrated value chain gives us efficiency. The strength of our business idea enable us to continue to challenge and grow. We are maintaining a high rate of development, and I am convinced that we are poised to strengthen our market position in the years ahead. That was all for today. Now please turn to Page 25, and I hand over to the operator to open up the line for questions. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from Fredrik Ivarsson from ABG. Fredrik Ivarsson: I have 2 questions. First, if we could dig into the margin profile in Willys a little bit. So I guess Q3 tends to be quite a bit stronger than the other quarters, especially Q1 and Q2, but now it's been almost in line with the previous 2 quarters for 2 consecutive years. And I know you took some price investments last year. But in addition to that, I guess, has the market been -- has it been even more campaign-driven during the summer months? Or do you see anything else that sort of explains why the normal margin uptick that we usually see in Q3 didn't really materialize this year? Simone Margulies: Yes. Thank you for your question. As you said, there are some seasonal effects and also the mix effect also have an impact on the margin on Willys. But I would say, to start with Willys had a stable margin development, even though there's a really high competition in the market. And we have a customer that is pretty much in the same behavior as we've seen in the last year with a strong focus on price and with a high price activity level in the market. So by that, we still have -- we continue to have a stable margin development in Willys, which we are really happy to see. And one thing that is also affecting a little bit on the bottom line for Willys is that we have a high expansion rate in Willys. This year until September, we have opened up 7 new stores for Willys compared to 4 last year. And by that, we see some -- the margin gets some -- it dilutes in the margin because we get higher personnel costs when we open stores. And then it usually evens out after a couple of months. But when we open many stores, we have some more personnel costs -- staff cost for staff during the first -- until you get up in a growth rate in the stores. Fredrik Ivarsson: Okay. That makes sense. And second one on City Gross. You have been talking about your earnings getting back to black figures during the second half of 2026, and now you sort of reiterated that statement. But you were almost there already in Q3 this year, although on an adjusted basis. Has the progression in City Gross been stronger than you expected before? Or was this more or less according to plan, so to say? Simone Margulies: I would say we are working according a comprehensive plan to turn around City Gross, both to create growth since it all starts with a growth in like-for-like sales. So I would say we're pretty much following our agenda for City Gross. There are some seasonal effects also in the hypermarket segments during Q3. So I would say, since we are -- this is a journey, and we see something, it will go up and it will go down. We are here in the long run to create a really strong format in the hypermarket segment. So I would say we are not ahead of our plan. We are following our plan. So we reiterate our guidance for the second half of 2026. However, we are really happy to see these positive signs, primarily on the like-for-like sales, I would say, because that's where it all starts. And then, of course, that we see the result of the initiatives that were made to decrease the cost level. It's -- of course, we're really happy to see that we see these positive signs. But we are according to plan, I would say. Fredrik Ivarsson: Okay. And maybe a short follow-up on the like-for-like growth in City Gross. I recall you did some price value investments. Would you care to give sort of a ballpark figure on the volume growth in the quarter? Simone Margulies: I would say we have a comprehensive agenda regarding the growth, and it's all about developing the offering, both the assortment, but as you said, also to strengthen the price position. It's also about how we do the marketing, the campaigns, it's about operations in store. And I would say that it's a mix of growth and price. But as you said, we are strengthening the price position in City Gross. And by that, the majority is driven by volume. Operator: The next question comes from Gustav Hagéus from SEB. Gustav Sandström: I'll take over from that last statement of yours that you had primarily volume growth in City Gross in the quarter. And if I read correctly, that was the case also for Willys and Hemköp, which is a bit contradictory to the market growth, which appears to have been 4 out of 5 percentage points in the quarter and the market was inflation. And you say that you've primarily driven your growth through volume, given that you're 25% or so of the market then, it appears then that you've price invested compared to the market quite a bit here in Q3? Or are we talking different numbers that don't really add up here? Simone Margulies: Yes. I understand it's difficult for you to see because what you can see is the SCB figures on inflation, and that consists of a basket that is set once a year and it's not -- I would say it's not changes over the year. So they set the basket once a year and then they could, I would say, differentiate the volumes. However, when we look in the price factor internal figures, it's a gap between those figures. And I will not be able to say our figures, but there -- and that has been the issue for all times that we don't really see the same internal figures on pricing than SCB's reporting. Gustav Sandström: Okay. But then on a general topic question then, given that the margin seems a bit under pressure and also your comments on much price action in the market and price competition, is your view that you've lowered prices in the quarter and more so than competitors regardless of what the SCB figure is? Simone Margulies: No, I would say -- I mean, I normally don't go into details about our price strategy. But for us, it's always about securing our price positions in the market where Willys, of course, is the cheapest on the market. And also Hemköp, it's important to be really price attractive, and we see really good, how you say, development in the -- that's what I wanted to show you also, the customer figures about Hemköp really taking notice of the price position that they have changed during the years. So the only way, of course, it's about for us always to be competitive in the market, but within City Gross, we made the price investment that we talked about, both in August and in April. So for the other formats, it's all about always to be competitive in the market. So I would say the margin for both Hemköp and Willys has been stable during this year. Gustav Sandström: Sure. But turning then to Dagab, just help us understand what the underlying development is here. If I recall correctly, you called out SEK 11 million extraordinary costs for Middagsfrid and another SEK 20 million or so for ramp-up costs of the new facility last Q3. Just to understand, when looking at Dagab's development here, EBIT year-over-year, if you were to add back those figures to the comparable, EBIT is flat or actually a little bit down year-over-year. And you have called or guided the market for up to SEK 300 million in savings on a yearly basis once fully ramped up in Dagab. I understand you're not there, but it would be very helpful if you can help us understand, first of all, if that base is correct, so that operating earnings are basically flat to slightly down for Dagab? And secondly, if you have, how far you've come on that journey towards SEK 200 million to SEK 300 million savings on an annual basis for Dagab and where that money went. We note that margins in City Gross, for instance, are quite much better than consensus here today. Simone Margulies: Yes. Thank you. For Dagab, we are realizing the efficiency gains, both in BÃ¥lsta and also in Landskrona, our fruit and vegetable warehouse. So we see that the productivity is increasing, and we are realizing the efficiency gains. So we early communicated the spend from SEK 200 million to SEK 300 million on a yearly basis, and we are in the lower spend, i.e., SEK 200 million. However, we both have a negative margin development in Dagab due to mix effects, the gross margin, I mean, gross margin development in Dagab due to mix effects. And that is because Dagab is supporting the chains in the role in the market. And also, we have some product mix that is affecting the gross margin negatively for Dagab. So we see the positive effect in Dagab in realizing the efficiency gains and the productivity, and then we have a negative effect on the gross margin. Gustav Sandström: But is the mix effect explaining then the SEK 50 million negative underlying development for Dagab? You have volume growth, right? So it should be some type of uplift? Or is that going into some of the other retail concepts like City Gross? It would be, I think, very helpful since you have that breakeven target on City Gross, I think it would be helpful to understand how much of that is actually just transferral from Dagab and how much is sort of underlying improvement for City Gross? Simone Margulies: So the gross margin development in Dagab consists of different part, as I explained. First, the mix effect, which is a negative because we had deflation in fruit and vegetable that is affecting the gross margin in Dagab negatively. Dagab is also supporting the chains, and that is what we see on the negative side. We're realizing the efficiency gains in Dagab, both in BÃ¥lsta and the fruit and vegetable warehousing up till now. Gustav Sandström: Okay. So last one, sorry to dwell on this, but I think it's quite important since you have the target to go breakeven in City Gross and you have guided for up to SEK 300 million savings in Dagab. Do you expect Dagab to showcase any of those savings into Q4 next year? Or is that going to go into the other concepts? And how do you distribute them then between you think Dagab and City Gross and Willys, just to get a feel of what's going on underlying. Simone Margulies: For us, it's about leveraging our business model, and that's about growing as a group in a whole. And we do that by having strong store concepts, growing like-for-like and total sales. That gives us volume in the behind and then we become more efficient. So for us, it's really important to do the long-term investments we do in our logistics structure so we can be competitive over time. The efficiency gains, you don't -- maybe we don't see them in Dagab as well. You have to look at us as a group and a whole. So for us, it's really important to grow like-for-like sales in City Gross and then to have growth in all our segments. And this quarter, we show growth in all segments. We show increased operating margin in all our segments, which is really positive, and that make us summarize a really strong quarter. So for us, it's about leveraging our business model and also playing the game where our competitive edge is. And that I think that this quarter shows really that we're doing. Operator: The next question comes from Magnus RÃ¥man from SB1 Markets. Magnus Råman: I'd just like to ask on the price and inflation topic again because now you state that you see a bit different numbers internally. But if we just relate to the SCB stats, we had a food price inflation that rose in the early spring this year, an index level that came up and thereby also year-on-year inflation. However, this index level and the inflation rate has come down sequentially in the recent 2 months. And if we look ahead and if we just assume an unchanged index level, we will, of course, then come to very low inflation rates entering next year, and then we have the halving of the VAT in April. But from this perspective of food prices, I'd like to ask, firstly, if you see -- I mean, those price changes can be driven both from changes in your procurement cost and also from competitive pressure. Do you view that the decrease in prices that we've seen in recent months have been driven by reduced sourcing costs? Or is it an increased price pressure that you see in the market? Simone Margulies: I would say that the inflation -- even though we don't see the same figures at SCB, we see the same trends within our internal figures. I'd just like to clarify that. But the trends that we see is driven by the, how to say, the sourcing, the price fluctuations that we see in our sourcing. So as you said, we have a shortage in the market on red meat, also in dairy, and that increased the prices in the beginning of the year and continue during the year. And then we have deflation in fruit and vegetable that has come down because of the sourcing prices. And I would say that it's pretty much what you see in the market changes in the pricing. And then if you look into the VAT, as you asked, of course, we see positive on the VAT because we have a consumer that has been under pressure for many years. So by reducing the VAT in Sweden, we create a consumption spend for the consumer. And of course, that will be positive. How that will affect us volume-wise, it's really, really difficult to make any forecast on. So we better come back to that when we implement the new VAT level in April next year. Magnus Råman: Right. But there was a question also previously about underlying volume. And I guess that maybe it's good to clarify that underlying volume growth could not only be driven by sort of an increase in the number of units, it could be a mix shift when people trade up if they buy more meat sort of more -- yes, higher quality type of meat, then you get an implied volume growth, but it could mean that it's not more calories consumed, it's a higher sort of -- it's a shift up in mix towards the premium end. And I mean, with the halving of the VAT, I guess it's fair to assume that we would see some type of mix shift that could contribute to your end margin and profitability. Yes. Simone Margulies: It's difficult to make forecast about that. But I would just say that when we talk volume, we talk volume and when we talk mix or price, it's a different thing. So when I say volume, I don't talk about mix. I would just clarify that. But of course, we're hoping, as we see that the volume goes up within fruit and vegetables when the prices comes down, we are hoping to see a little bit more -- I would say, the share of the more sustainable food to increase, we hope for that, but it's very difficult to make any forecast about it. It's really positive for the consumers to have a larger consumption share. Magnus Råman: Right. But so to conclude, the overall gross margin improvement that we see clearly on the group level, both in year-on-year terms in Q3 and in year-on-year terms on the 9-month rolling or 9 months-to-date basis is, in your opinion, predominantly driven by a relief in the sourcing costs rather than a relief in the price pressure in the market. Simone Margulies: Now you said the development of the margin, that was not -- you asked about the price. So to start with the -- Anders, sorry. Anders Lexmon: Yes, sorry. Magnus, the gross margin that you see in our report is not the same as the gross margin that we see in our chains and in our stores because it's how to -- we disclose and report the COGS. It's a different way. Yes, I know that we have to wait for the annual report to get the product margin. But yes, what I'm trying to get at is that there should be -- if you look at the overall sourcing costs from an [ SAO ] index perspective, for example, we see that we should not expect an increasing pressure, rather a relief in the sort of pressure. And with the items that you mentioned that goes into the gross margin, for example, diesel prices and for transportation and so on, that is also points to a relief rather than an increased pressure. Magnus Råman: But this leasing pressure also obviously affects the prices in the stores. I mean they follow the way out in the stores. Anders Lexmon: Yes, exactly. And I mean the indexation of rent should be flat, if anything, entering '26, I guess, with the inflation rates we have now. Magnus Råman: Yes. What happens in '26, we have to come back to... Anders Lexmon: Right. Okay. I'm happy with that. Operator: [Operator Instructions] There are no more questions at this time. So I hand the conference back to the speakers for any closing comments. Simone Margulies: So I would like to thank you all for joining us today, and I hope to see you in next quarter.
Maria Caneman: Good morning, and thank you for dialing in this morning. I am Maria Caneman, Head of Investor Relations here at Swedbank. Welcome to our third quarter results presentation. With me today is our CEO, Jens Henriksson; and our CFO, Jon Lidefelt. Jens and Jon will start with the presentation, and then there will be an opportunity to ask questions. Jens, I hand over to you. Jens Henriksson: Thank you, Maria. Swedbank has once again delivered a strong result in uncertain times. The geopolitical situation, continued uncertainty about tariffs and trade and the increasing concerns about weak public finances across the world are slowing down global growth. Twice a year, the world's economic policy decision-makers meet at the IMF. The starting point for their discussions is the world economic outlook, which was published a week ago with the headline, "Global economy in flux, prospects remain dim." With that said, our four home markets have healthy fundamentals, strong public finances, low government debt, innovative companies, profitable banks and low interest rates. In Sweden, we see signs of improvement. Our economists forecast growth of 2% next year, while the Swedish government is more optimistic and projects 3%. In Estonia, economic development is still subdued, and we are seeing some recovery in Latvia and the development in Lithuania continues to be strong. In these uncertain times, Swedbank stands strong and is well positioned for sustainable growth and profitability. We can today report a return on equity of 16% and earnings per share of SEK 7.53 for the third quarter. During the quarter, income increased while cost decreased. Our cost-to-income ratio was 0.35. Strict cost control is producing results. We have a conservative and thorough lending process and, during the quarter, we saw credit impairment reversals. We have a robust ability to generate capital, and we have a very strong capital and liquidity position. During the quarter, Standard & Poor's upgraded Swedbank's credit rating. In their decision, they highlight the bank's improved governance, regulatory compliance and risk management. Furthermore, during the quarter, the U.S. authority, SEC, ended its investigation into the bank's historical shortcomings without enforcement. We are delivering according to our plan, Swedbank 15/27. And as you know, it focuses on three areas: strengthen customer interactions, grow volumes and increase efficiency. Our customer focus is producing results. We have further improved our availability during the quarter, and now 70% of incoming calls in Sweden are answered within 3 minutes, and we are thereby getting closer to our target of at least 80%. We consistently work to improve our digital offerings, and we see that more and more customers do their everyday banking through our app or the Internet bank. We have also increased our efficiency. Our employees can spend more time meeting customers and less time on administration using new AI tools, and the number of advisory sessions per employee has increased. During the quarter, we lowered mortgage rates due to lower policy and market rates. Mortgage loans increased by SEK 5.2 billion, and mortgages in Sweden distributed through our own channels accounted for SEK 4.2 billion. Deposits from private customers are stable, and we continue to be close to our customers and give them advice. Strengthening their financial health is an important task for the bank. Savings and pensions continued to develop positively. Swedbank Robur saw a net inflow of SEK 9 billion in our four home markets. As announced in August, we want to acquire the remaining part of Entercard, thereby, Swedbank will have the largest card business in the Nordic-Baltic region. This will develop our business and strengthen our customer offering. In Lithuania, the business climate remains strong. In Sweden, Estonia and Latvia, economic activity is improving, but from low levels. During the quarter, corporate lending increased by SEK 7 billion. Our customers are showing a high demand for sustainable investments. 36% of the bonds arranged by Swedbank during the quarter were classified as sustainable, and our Sustainable Asset Register has now surpassed SEK 150 billion. We now own 20% of the investment bank, SB1 Markets. And during the quarter, they started up in Sweden. It's an important step in further developing our offering to corporate customers. In addition, our customers will get access to an expanded range of equity research. In the Baltic market, we launched the card payment feature, Click to Pay, a secure and convenient service that simplify payments. Jon, it's your turn now to deep dive into the financials. Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Jens. We delivered a strong result in the third quarter with volume growth across markets and increasing income. We have continued our work with focus on long-term shareholder value through business growth and cost efficiency. Cost-to-income ratio was 35% and return on equity, 16%. Lending volumes grew in the quarter and the increase came mainly from Baltic Banking, where we continue to see solid growth on both the private and corporate side. Mortgage volumes in Sweden sold through our own channels increased by SEK 4.2 billion, while the savings banks reduced their mortgage volumes on our balance sheet by SEK 1.6 billion. We see continued result of our increased efforts on customer interactions and availability as we're capturing a larger share of the market. In August, our front book market share through owned channels was 16.4%, still below the back book market share of 17.8%, but the development continued in the right direction. Also for the corporate business in Sweden, the positive development continued with increasing volumes, though somewhat offset by repayments related to a couple of larger exposures. Customer deposit volumes were stable in the quarter. In Sweden, private deposits decreased somewhat from a high level as the second quarter was impacted by seasonal inflow of tax returns. In Baltic Banking, deposit volumes were overall stable. Net interest income decreased by 0.9% compared to the previous quarter, driven mainly by lower mortgage rates. Lower deposit rates impacted NII in Q3 with a full quarter effect, while lower rates on the lending side were gradually rolled in during the quarter. Higher business volumes had a positive impact of SEK 94 million in the quarter. Wholesale funding costs continued to decrease in the quarter. Liquidity was, however, reallocated from the markets business increasing liability volumes, but also positively impacted Central Bank placements. and, hence, had an overall neutral NII effect. Day count and FX effects impacted NII positively in the quarter. The Swedish Central Bank cut policy rates effective as of the 1st of October and ECB cut rates effectively as of the 11th of June. Hence, there are further repricing dynamics in play. Reminding you that the positive effect on the funding side materialized ahead of the negative effect on the asset side, furthermore, that it takes approximately 3 months in Sweden for a rate cut to roll in and 6 months in the Baltics. We will continue with our pricing strategy on both sides of the balance sheet and maintain focus on the balance between volumes and long-term profitability. Net commission income increased in the quarter, driven mainly by strong asset management commissions. Mutual funds had a net inflow of SEK 9 billion and combined with the positive stock market performance, increased asset under management to SEK 2,471 billion. Card commissions were seasonally higher in the quarter following higher spending abroad during the summer months, while brokerage and corporate finance commissions were seasonally lower. In addition, we saw positive development in commissions from insurance products. Net gains and losses remained at a high level in the quarter and amounted to SEK 847 million. Income was strong, driven by high business activity, mainly within fixed income. Positive revaluations supported the treasury result. Other income increased by 2.7%. Net insurance decreased driven by both normalized levels of claims compared to the low levels we saw in the second quarter and the effects from revaluations of future cash flows. One-off transfer, in connection with the establishment of SB1 Markets on the 1st of September, also contributed. The results from partly owned companies supported as well as increased income from services to the savings banks. As a reminder, our collaboration with the savings banks include cost sharing for IT development and administrative services. The savings banks' share of the cost is included in Swedbank's total cost, and you can see the corresponding income as services to the savings banks here under other income. Total expenses were 1.4% lower. Fewer employees, together with seasonally lower staff costs, IT maintenance and consultancy costs contributed. As announced in conjunction to the Q2 presentation, a VAT recovery of SEK 197 million related to the year 2016 was received in the beginning of the third quarter. In line with previous patterns, costs will be seasonally higher towards the end of the year. Costs for the full year 2025 is expected to be around SEK 25.3 billion at current exchange rates. This includes the already received VAT recoveries related to the year 2016, '17 and '18 amounting to SEK 576 million. It also includes SEK 200 million lower temporary investments this year and an estimated SEK 300 million lower costs due to FX. Asset quality is solid. During the quarter, there were reversals of credit impairments amounting to SEK 398 million, which corresponds to an impairment ratio of minus 8 basis points. The reversals are mainly driven by improved macro scenarios, and we have continued to reduce the post-model adjustment, which now stand at SEK 364 million. Individual assessments resulted in a SEK 568 million increase, driven by a few larger corporate exposures. At the same time, repayments and reversals of previously written-off exposures resulted in a release of SEK 451 million. I feel comfortable with our strict origination standards and the solid collaterals that secure our lending. Our CET1 capital ratio was stable at 19.7%. In the 2025 SREP, our Pillar 2 requirement was lowered by 40 basis points, and our CET1 capital requirement now stands at 14.8%, meaning we have a buffer of around 480 basis points above the requirement. The reduction by the Swedish FSA stems from two parts. Firstly, 20 basis points are related to the new CRR3 risk weights for standardized credit risks. This has an impact on the Pillar 2 add-on that we shall hold until the new Swedish IRB models are approved. Thereby, approximately 20 basis points of the expected capital relief of at least 50 basis points from the new IRB models has now materialized. We continue to expect most of the remaining impact from the IRB model updates to materialize during next year. The Swedish FSA also approved parts of our nonmaturing deposit model, resulting in 20 basis points lower capital requirement for interest rate risk in the banking book. To conclude, we continue to focus on growth and efficiency. We deliver strong profitability while maintaining prudent underwriting standards, strong liquidity and capital positions. Back to you, Jens. Jens Henriksson: So let me now sum up the quarter. Swedbank once again delivered a strong result in uncertain times. Income increased, cost decreased, and we saw credit impairment reversals. Return on equity for the third quarter amounts to 16%, cost-to-income to 0.35. Our credit quality is solid and our capital buffer is very strong at 4.8 percentage points. Swedbank is well positioned for continued sustainable growth and profitability, and we continue to deliver according to our plan, Swedbank 15/27, with a focus on strengthening customer interactions, growing volumes and increasing efficiency. We create value for our customers and our shareholders, and our customers' future is our focus. With that said, back to you, Maria. Maria Caneman: Thank you both very much. We will now begin the Q&A session. A kind reminder to please limit yourself to two questions per turn. Operator, please go ahead. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We have the first question from Martin Ekstedt, Handelsbanken. Martin Ekstedt: Can you hear me? Jens Henriksson: Yes, we can. Martin Ekstedt: Excellent. So could you just give us a bit more on the SB1 Markets initiative? You mentioned it launched in Sweden in the quarter. Is it now fully staffed up on the Swedish side? And are all the business lines up and running? That's the first one. Jens Henriksson: To be honest, I don't know if it's really fully staffed up. A lot of persons have gone over and I think they're doing some great jobs. So I think they're fully running. And the key point is that this is a partnership that offer our corporate customers a strength and offer through access to a larger set of investment banking services and sector expertise. And both corporate and private customers can also benefit from access to a broader range of equity research. So this is great. Martin Ekstedt: Okay, okay. And then second question, if I may then. I'm looking at your NII sensitivity on Page 20 of the presentation deck. So in the past, the NII elasticity, so to speak, or rate shifts have been balanced around plus/minus side. But your calculation example is now tilted towards seeing a larger impact if rates come down than if they go up. And I just wanted to confirm, this is due to some deposit rates now having reached 0 and therefore, are not able -- at least commercially able to go any lower, right, i.e., it's the floor of 0% rates that you mentioned on the page coming into effect. Is that correct? Jon Lidefelt: You're perfectly correct, Martin. That is the reason. Operator: The next question from Magnus Andersson, ABG. Magnus Andersson: My first question is how you view the prospects of potentially being able to increase the thin household mortgage margins in Sweden now that short-term rates are no longer expected to fall? And related to that, what market growth rate you think is necessary for this household mortgage margin pressure to ease? And secondly, just how -- you have lending growth now 4% quarter-on-quarter in the Baltics FX adjusted. How you view the sustainability of lending growth in the Baltics now that the deleveraging that's been going on for nearly 20 years finally seems to be over? And related to that, how you tame the inflationary tendencies, the impact on the cost base there? Jens Henriksson: Thank you for that. Two good questions. First one is, let me say a few words of the overall situation in the mortgage market, and reminding you that we are the market leader in all four home markets. And first, just me repeat that in the Baltics, we see continued strong growth in mortgage volumes. In Sweden, we've seen that the housing market remains muted, although we see some gradual increasing mortgage market growth during 2025 and you see that we're now picking up some momentum. And the reason for that is that we are more active. We have shorter waiting times and quicker to resolve questions. There is a strong competition out there, and we want to grow. And when that competition abates, we do not know. I don't think the competition will go down. I think it will be continued competition there. Then when you move over to the Baltics, we have seen quite a large volume growth in that. Reminding you that these are steady and stable economies, and we now expect Estonia and Latvia to pick off as well, while Lithuania has been doing very good. Magnus Andersson: Okay. So are you saying that you think the household mortgage margins we have in Sweden currently are here to stay? My question was whether you think there will be a potential to increase them going forward and what the trigger would be able to drive how you would be able to achieve that. Because I think it's a concern to all of us. Jens Henriksson: Well, I won't do any forecast on that. There is a tough competition. But I think when you see higher volumes, I think that we can grow in that environment. Magnus Andersson: Okay. And the inflationary impact on costs, in the Baltics? Jon Lidefelt: Magnus, I think as we've talked about before, I mean, in the Baltic Banking, we have lived with higher inflation for many, many years, even before the inflationary shock. So that is something that we are constantly working with to make sure that we can increase our efficiency to mitigate that. If you look at the societies as a whole, then I mean, our concern, as we have been talking about, generally, it's very stable and healthy. But of course, if the salary inflation continues, then that will eventually lead to a problem since it's going to be hard to pick up on the productivity in line with the current salary levels', increased levels. Operator: The next question from Andreas Hakansson, SEB. Andreas Hakansson: So first question on costs. You mentioned the three VAT refunds you had during this year. Could you tell us how many years have we got outstanding? And just to confirm that you don't assume one of those reversals to appear in the fourth quarter. Jon Lidefelt: You're correct. We have assumed no VAT recovery in the SEK 25.3 billion guidance that I gave you. If that will come, it will come as a one-off extraordinary thing that we will not take into account when we run our ordinary business. So no further VAT in the SEK 25.3 billion. We have, as I think I mentioned in the previous quarterly presentation, requested VAT return recovery for year 2019 up until 2023. It's in the hands of the tax authorities, and I have no visibility in the numbers, and we'll not speculate if and when we would get anything more back there. Andreas Hakansson: Are the cases similar? Or I mean, it seems like you won three cases. So are the other cases different? Or wouldn't the outcome be likely to be the same or... Jon Lidefelt: Sorry, I said '19 to '23. I should have said '19 to '24. But it depends a lot on the interest rate levels since this is sort of depending on the turnover that we have in the parts of our business that is non-VAT related and the one that there is VAT, i.e., mainly the leasing business. So it depends a lot on the interest rate levels for the years, and that's why I don't want to speculate in any numbers or if we would get it back before we have the answer from the tax authorities. Andreas Hakansson: All right. That's fine. Then on the Baltic NII, I mean, you talked about the 6 months' time lag. But could you just confirm that when you talk about that NII should trough 6 months after the loss rate cut, that's with a static balance sheet. And we saw already that NII grew Q3 with Q2 on the back of very strong volume. So if volumes continue at the current pace and, if anything, it seems to be picking up. Is there any reason why the NII shouldn't continue to grow even though you have that underlying pressure driven by interest rates? Jon Lidefelt: First of all, yes, you're correct. When I talk about the 3 and 6 months, then I mean the same margins, the same volumes, and then you'll have to make your own assumptions on that as well as some further central bank rate cuts. When it comes to the NII development in the Baltics, it's impacted by FX in this quarter. So underlying, the NII in the Baltics is stable quarter-over-quarter. Andreas Hakansson: With 3% volume growth, right? So those are the two components there, margin pressure and the volume growth. That's up to 0 in this quarter. Jon Lidefelt: Yes. Operator: The next question is from Gulnara Saitkulova, Morgan Stanley. Gulnara Saitkulova: So on capital, given your solid capital buffer, could you remind us of your latest thinking on how to deploy the excess capital between ordinary dividends, special dividends, buybacks or potential M&A? And how should we think about your approach to excess capital in a theoretical scenario where the AML resolution is still delayed by several years? Would you still aim to be around the midpoint of your targeted management buffer range? Or would you adopt a more cautious stance in that case? And if you were to pursue M&A opportunities, which areas or markets would be of the greatest strategic interest for you for potential acquisitions? Jens Henriksson: Well, thank you for that question. Let me be very short here. And that is that we have a capital buffer range between 100 and 300 basis points. In our 15/27 plan, we target the middle of it, i.e., 200 basis points. We now have a buffer of 480 basis points with a dividend policy of 60% to 70%. And the timing of further capital release continues to be a judgment call depending on the many uncertainties, where the long-running U.S. investigations is the largest one. And we have no intention to hold more capital than necessary. When you look into M&A activity, reminding you that we've had seen quite a lot of M&A activity during the last quarter. We want to acquire Stabelo. We want to acquire the remaining part of Entercard, and both those two are still subject to approvals. And then we've gone into SB1 Markets, which was the first question. As a CEO, I always need to look out for new opportunities. Operator: The next question is from Markus Sandgren, Kepler. Markus Sandgren: I was just going to follow up on Gulnara's question when it comes to Entercard. Can you just give some more flavor of your thinking about the acquisition? And what do you think or what's your planning in terms of asset quality for that company? Jens Henriksson: Well, straightforward, we've had a business cooperation with Barclays, and we own roughly 50-50 each. And they wanted to sell it, and we wanted to acquire it. It's that simple. And the reason we want to do that is that we want to become the largest card business in the Nordic-Baltic region with scale benefits and, of course, benefits also from increased efficiency. And I think Jon will get back later when we have more information when that's fulfilled and tell you the effects on the bank at large. What we will do is we'll do a strategic overview. And when we look on Entercard, we've seen that we think that the risk level is a bit too high, and we wanted to reduce it a bit more to a more appropriate level for Swedbank. Markus Sandgren: And what does that reduction mean? Is it getting rid of loans? Or how do you plan to do it? Jens Henriksson: We -- let us get back to that when hopefully, this goes through all the sort of processes. Operator: The next question from Shrey Srivastava, Citi. Shrey Srivastava: It's actually on the 20 basis points benefit to your sort of capital requirements that you've got from being able to model the contractual maturity of nonmaturing deposits. My question is twofold. The first is, is this all we can expect to see in terms of benefit? And secondly, does this open up the possibility of you sort of investing these nonmaturing deposits in potentially sort of high-yielding, long-dated assets going forward? Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Shrey. First of all, we have gotten a partial approval for our modeling of nonmaturing deposits. So all things equal, if we would get the full approval, that would be a little bit more to come. When it comes to our NII -- or sorry, non-NMD hedging, I have said in previous quarters on questions from you and your colleagues that we have had some hedges. It's been an important tool for us to have in the toolbox. So we wanted to test it and try it out. But it is and has been immaterial from an NII perspective so that you can discard the impact of the hedges that we have in place when you forecast our NII. The approval that we have gotten, it still means, to make it simple, that our liability side is still shorter than our asset side. So if we would add further hedges to prolong our asset side, which is what we want to do in order to smoothen out NII when the timing is right, it would still mean that our capital for IRRBB, our Pillar 2 charge, will go up even with this approval. It might go up a bit smaller than before, but there still will be an increase. We will come back should we do more or should our hedges be material to make sure that we are transparent should that be in the future. Shrey Srivastava: And a very brief follow-up. You said you received partial approval. Should you receive full approval, what sort of capital benefit can we expect there? Jon Lidefelt: Unfortunately, as long as the Swedish FSA do not change their view on this, even a full approval will lead to the same thing, that if we prolong our asset side, our capital charge will still go up. There is a difference between the Swedish FSA's view and the view that banks under ECB supervision have. They can do this hedging much more efficiently than we can do. Shrey Srivastava: And a final one for me. Have you noticed a sort of softening of the Swedish FSA's view? Because it seems sort of that way, looking at the partial approval you received. Or is that inaccurate? Jon Lidefelt: No, I have not. Operator: The next question from Namita Samtani, Barclays. Namita Samtani: My first one, I just wondered what measures you're taking in the Baltics to bulletproof your ROE of above 20%. I saw an announcement that Revolut is now offering mortgage loans or something similar to that in Lithuania. And in time, that will probably become a full offering. And clearly, the deposit rates they offer better than banks. So what initiatives is Swedbank taking to protect itself from competitive threats? And then secondly, I appreciate the 2025 updated cost guidance. But we're almost through 2025. Could you please qualitatively talk us through the main moving parts of costs going forward or what we should think about going into 2026? Jens Henriksson: Well, the key thing about Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, these are growing economies, and when compared to Sweden, they will grow with, let's say, 1%, 1.5% more. So it's a very attractive market. And it's also a market that doesn't have the same financial inclusion as there is in Sweden. So that means that we see many possibilities. And I think we went through very much this when we had Swedbank 15/27. In the end, it's about being close to our customers. We are the most loved brand in the Baltic region for the seventh year in a row. We want to grow volumes, continue to grow with the countries. We want to increase financial inclusion. We want to be -- have more customer interactions and want to make sure that we keep costs contained and work in an efficient way. So in that sense, it's not different from the other markets. Is the competition tough? Yes, it is tough. Will it be tougher? Yes. But that's life. Keep on and be close to your customers. Do you want to say a few things about the costs? Jon Lidefelt: I think your question was about 2026 costs, and we will come back in conjunction to the Q4 presentation on that. But principally, we tried to explain how we work with cost efficiency with the headwind and investment and so forth when we had the 15/25 presentation. But more details, I'll come back with when we present the Q4 results. Operator: The next question is from Tarik El Mejjad, Bank of America. Tarik El Mejjad: Just quick two questions, please. First, on costs. I mean you had quite impressive, good cost control here with cost/income really at very low levels. I just questioning the strategy of sustained hiring freeze, which -- how long that you can be sustained and especially in the context of potentially a recovery of growth. But also, we just had a call with one of your competitors and the approach is this hiring freeze or control could be sustained as long as we invest in AI and technology and be able to question each time, can we replace or hire or invest in some technologies that would be more cost efficient? Where are you in this thinking and these investments in AI and technology? And the second question is on the U.S. on money laundering litigation. I mean I've been following those with the German, French banks and so on in the past with the OFAC. How the conclusion from the SEC, you think are correlated to what would come for DOJ? Or is it -- because usually it's bundled within one decision. How do you read that? Are you more optimistic about the outcome? Jens Henriksson: Well, thank you. Two important questions. The first one when it comes to the personnel, we steer the bank on costs, not on FTEs. But what happened a year ago was that we saw that FTEs increased too much due to change of churn. And what we did then was that we implemented an external hiring freeze but sort of possibility for people to make exceptions. I gave quite a few exceptions but it worked. And then last quarter, we decided to take that away. And we now have a process where Jon take that sort of those kind of decisions together with the Head of HR. So we do not have a hiring freeze anymore. That's the first thing to say. The other thing is to say that we see quite a lot of use of AI. We work it both on the individual level and on a structure level. We work with AI for a very long time. And what we want to do is we want to decrease administration so that we can see more time with our customers. So to give you an example is that right now, we are seeing that the waiting lines or sort of the time waiting, if you call into a Swedish customer center, it's much shorter than before. So we've reached 70% of the call answered within 3 minutes. Why? New technology. And then we can use call summary, so that means you can have more time to meet the customers rather to do the administration, and we can do more things like that. When it comes to the U.S. investigation, first thing to say is that when it came to OFAC, that was closed quite a while ago. And as I said in my introduction, during the quarter, SEC decided to close their investigation without any further actions. That said, still have two other investigations by U.S. authorities. And now I need to sort of repeat myself. But I've told you many times when I was new as CEO, I met and called around and talked with colleagues that have been in similar circumstances. And they told me that a process like this usually takes 3 to 5 years. Now more than 6 years have passed, but the time line is fully owned by the U.S. authorities. I can just repeat what I say, and that is I still do not know whether we will get any fines. And if we do get the fines, I cannot estimate the size of those. And we've been as transparent as possible during this long-running process. And when something material happens, we'll continue to adhere to that principle. Thank you. Operator: The next question is from Nicolas McBeath, DNB Carnegie. Nicolas McBeath: I had a question on the deposit volumes. So after the most recent rate cut in Sweden, your deposit rates on some of your most popular savings account like eSavings have been cut to 0. So I was wondering how are deposit volumes behaving on these accounts. Have you seen any increased tendency of withdrawals since the rates were introduced, either to your own Swedbank players or migrations to competitors' deposits with above 0 rates? That's my first question. Jon Lidefelt: Well, thank you, Nicolas. The volume or the mix has been stable in that sense. So we have not seen any mix shift. And over time, the deposit beta has been around 1 on accounts with interest rate and where the sort of distance to 0 has been enough to reduce it. So then as we have talked about before, sometimes, we have for business reasons, taking a little bit of time lag between doing different rate changes. But over time, it has been one, and we have not seen mix shifts lately. Nicolas McBeath: All right. And then I had a question on levies for next year. What's your expectation there? And could you confirm whether the cost for interest-free deposits at Riksbank, will those be taken on the levies line or reduced NII? Jens Henriksson: Well, let me start with saying that if you see overall loan demand in Sweden from both corporate and private customers is subdued. In the Baltic, demand is stronger. And just to be blunt here, but we have an appetite for healthy loan growth while sticking to our conservative lending standards and focusing on profitability. You want to follow up, Jon? Jon Lidefelt: On your question on the Swedish Riksbank, we will have to deposit SEK 6 billion for which we will not get an interest rate for now for 9 months, I think it is. I think the jury is still somewhat out on exactly how to account for that. But my assumption or belief is that, yes, it will be under the bank tax row. And then the discussion is will it be a one-off now in Q4 or will it be spread out for the period? But most likely under the bank tax rule. Yes, I think that was the answer, right? Nicolas McBeath: Yes. And then just also if you could comment what your expectations for bank taxes are for 2026? Jens Henriksson: Bank taxes, don't get me started. But let me say a few words. And then as always, I want you to remind you that banks are an important part of our societies. What we do is we channel our customers' hard-earned deposits to lending, thus empowering people and businesses to create a sustainable future. And to do that, we need to be profitable. And a sustainable bank is a profitable bank. And we are proud taxpayers that contribute to the financing of welfare and security in our home markets. What we do not like are sector-specific taxes, retroactive measures and an unpredictable regulatory environment. What we do like is equal treatment, a rule-based system and an investment climate that fosters growth, financial stability and sustainable transformation. With that said, I need to say that. Then let me do a quick tour across our four home markets. First, Estonia, general corporate taxes are increasing as we see, but there is a political debate on that. In Lithuania, corporate taxes are also up. And then remind you that on top of this, since 2020, there is a 5% extra tax on banks, and the extra investor tax on NII further on top will be phased out during the year. In Latvia, we will have 3 years with a similar investor tax. There are some discussions on excluding new lending from the tax. If that would materialize, it would be positive for the Latvian economy. In Sweden, the government has proposed a base deduction to the bank tax while delivering the same tax revenues. And the tax rate is therefore proposed to be raised from 6 to 7 basis points in 2026. And now there is a government inquiry of some kind that will look into the specifics. And then as Jon talked about, let's call it what it is, it's another tax on the banking system, is that the Riksbank has decided that credit institutions from the end of October this year will need to place an interest-free deposit with them. And as Jon said, it amounts to around SEK 6 billion that will earn 0 interest. Operator: The next question from Sofie Peterzens, Goldman Sachs. Sofie Caroline Peterzens: Here is Sofie from Goldman Sachs. So my first question would be on net interest income. When do you expect net interest income to trough? One of your competitors this morning said that it will be 3 to 6 months after the last rate cut? Do you think that's kind of fair? Or do you have a different view to this? And then my second question would be on the VAT refund that you continue to get. It was SEK 197 million now in third quarter and SEK 174 million, sorry, in the previous quarter. Like when should we expect these VAT refunds to come to an end? Or should we expect still some VAT recoveries in 2026? Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Sofie. If I start with the NII, then if we assume no further rate cuts, to make it a bit simple, then ECB did their last one. It was effective on the 11th of June; and the Swedish Riksbank, it was effective as of 1st of October. And then if you take 3 months roughly in Sweden and 6 months roughly in the Baltics, that means that around year-end these rate cuts will be priced in, and the first quarter next year then will be the first quarter where you have a full quarter effect. Then as I've said before, you'll have to add your own assumptions on potential further rate cuts from the central banks, volume growth and margin development. When it comes to the VAT, then I don't know. There is a discussion from the Swedish government to change the VAT legislation. And everything around the VAT recoveries is due to that there has been a clash between the Swedish VAT law and the European regulation around that. So I would expect in a couple of years that there will be a new Swedish law in place. I don't know how fast or when it will come or what it will mean. So I don't -- we don't know. We'll have to see what happens. But we have so far then asked back for '19 to '23. Now it's clear '23, I've been a bit back and forth on it. But '19 to '23, we have asked recoveries for. And then let's see for the years after how things play out. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question from Riccardo Rovere, Mediobanca. Riccardo Rovere: Just a quick follow-up, again, on NII. Do you think that the pickup in lending volumes in general, and also deposits could somehow offset the last leg of pricing that you've just mentioned, 3 months in Sweden, 6 months in the Baltics. It should be visible by the end of the year, the same volumes can offset that? Jens Henriksson: We lost you. But thank you, Riccardo. Riccardo Rovere: Can you hear me? Jens Henriksson: Okay. Sorry. Now we can. Do you want to... Riccardo Rovere: Can you hear me now? Jon Lidefelt: Yes. Jens Henriksson: Yes. We hear you. Okay, please repeat. Riccardo Rovere: Okay, fine. Just wondering whether you think the volume growth, deposits and loans could somehow offset the last legacy repricing that you've just mentioned, 3 months in Sweden, 6 months in the Baltics, so to say that the last cuts done should be visible by the end of the year because that is the margin part of the equation in NII. I was wondering whether the volume side of the equation can somehow offset it. Jon Lidefelt: Thank you, Riccardo. Yes, I mean you're perfectly right, but I do not sort of forecast the NII. So I can leave that to you to do your own assumptions on volume growth, margin development and so forth. But of course, there is an offsetting effect on this. I said that in this quarter, higher volumes has had a positive impact of SEK 94 million on the NII. So of course, growth do offset. But I'll leave you to do your own assumptions on how that will develop going further. Operator: This was the last question. I would like to turn the conference back over to Maria Caneman for any closing remarks. Jens Henriksson: Well, I'll take that, Maria, if it's okay with you. So thank you for calling in, and thank you for always asking tough and knowledgeable questions. I now look forward to meeting you and many of your colleagues in our dialogue on Swedbank. Thank you for calling in. Bye.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to Ladder Capital Corp.'s Earnings Call for the Third Quarter of 2025. As a reminder, today's call is being recorded. This morning, Ladder released its financial results for the quarter ended September 30, 2025. Before the call begins, I'd like to call your attention to the customary safe harbor disclosure in our earnings release regarding forward-looking statements. Today's call may include forward-looking statements and projections, and we refer you to our most recent Form 10-K for important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from these statements and projections. We do not undertake any obligation to update our forward-looking statements or projections unless required by law. In addition, Ladder will discuss certain non-GAAP financial measures on this call, which management believes are relevant to assessing the company's financial performance. The company's presentation of this information is not intended to be considered in isolation or as a substitute for the financial information presented in accordance with GAAP. These measures are reconciled to GAAP figures in our earnings supplement presentation, which is available in the Investor Relations section of our website. We also refer you to our Form 10-K and earnings supplement presentation for definitions of certain metrics, which we may cite on today's call. At this time, I'd like to turn the call over to Ladder's President, Pamela McCormack. Pamela McCormack: Good morning. During the third quarter, Ladder generated distributable earnings of $32.1 million or $0.25 per share, delivering a return on equity of 8.3% with modest adjusted leverage of 1.7x. Credit performance remained stable and the quarter was marked by 3 notable developments, a significant acceleration in new loan originations, continued progress in reducing office loan exposure and the successful closing of our inaugural investment-grade bond offering. These results reflect our disciplined business model and conservative balance sheet philosophy, positioning Ladder for continued earnings growth and greater capacity to capitalize on investment opportunities across market cycles. Loan portfolio activity. Origination activity accelerated in the third quarter with $511 million of new loans across 17 transactions at a weighted average spread of 279 basis points, our highest quarterly origination volume in over 3 years. The spread reflects the mix of assets originated, which were predominantly multifamily and industrial, consistent with our focus on stable income-producing collateral. Net of $129 million in paydowns, the loan portfolio grew by approximately $354 million to $1.9 billion, now representing 40% of total assets. Year-to-date, we originated over $1 billion in new loans with an additional $500 million under application and in closing. Notably, the full payoff of our third largest office loan, a $63 million loan secured by an office property in Birmingham, Alabama, reduced office loan exposure to $652 million or 14% of total assets. Approximately 50% of the remaining office loan portfolio consists of 2 well-performing loans secured by the Citigroup Tower in Downtown Miami and the Aventura Corporate Center in Aventura, Florida. Securities portfolio. As of September 30, our securities portfolio totaled $1.9 billion, representing 40% of total assets. During the quarter, we acquired $365 million in AAA-rated securities, received $164 million in paydowns through amortization and sold $257 million of securities, generating a $2 million net gain. Paydowns and sales exceeded purchases, resulting in a modest net reduction in securities holdings this quarter. This reflects our disciplined approach to capital allocation as we did not replace certain securities that ran off, consistent with our view that spreads may widen in the mortgage market given recent volatility and the Federal Reserve's ongoing runoff of mortgage-backed securities. Consistent carry income from our real estate portfolio. Our $960 million real estate portfolio generated $15.1 million in net operating income during the third quarter. The portfolio primarily consists of net lease properties with long-term leases to investment-grade rated tenants and continues to deliver stable, predictable income. Capital structure and liquidity. During the third quarter, we closed our inaugural $500 million 5-year investment-grade unsecured bond offering at a rate of 5.5%, representing 167 basis point spread over the benchmark treasury, the tightest new issuance spread in Ladder's history. The offering was met with strong demand and the bonds have since traded tighter in the secondary market, reaching spreads as low as 120 basis points. This transaction validates the strength of our conservative balance sheet philosophy and disciplined business model. As one of our premier debt capital markets bankers noted, it also firmly planted Ladder's flag in the investment-grade market. The continued tightening of our bonds positions us for lower borrowing costs, stronger execution and improved shareholder returns. As of quarter end, 75% of Ladder's debt consisted of unsecured corporate bonds and 84% of our balance sheet assets remain unencumbered. We maintained $879 million in liquidity, including $49 million in cash and $830 million of undrawn capacity on our unsecured revolver, which provides same-day liquidity at highly competitive rates. Outlook. Ladder's unique investment-grade balance sheet, disciplined use of unsecured debt and robust origination platform positions us to capitalize on investment opportunities, while maintaining prudent credit risk management. We expect fourth quarter loan originations to exceed third quarter production. Recent credit rating upgrades and our successful inaugural investment-grade bond issuance have lowered our cost of debt and expanded our access to a deeper, more stable capital base that remains consistently available across market cycles. Over time, we expect our strong balance sheet, modest leverage and reliable funding profile to position Ladder alongside a broader set of high-quality peers, including equity REITs rather than solely within the commercial mortgage REIT space. As investors increasingly recognize the strength of our senior secured investment strategy and conservative capital structure, we believe our equity valuation will reflect this alignment. Combined with our disciplined credit risk management and ability to deploy capital with speed and certainty, these attributes reinforce our capacity to deliver strong, stable returns for shareholders across market cycles. With that, I'll turn the call over to Paul. Paul Miceli: Thank you, Pamela. In the third quarter of 2025, Ladder generated $32.1 million of distributable earnings or $0.25 per share, achieving a return on average equity of 8.3%. In the third quarter, we closed our inaugural investment-grade bond offering of $500 million 5-year bond at 5.5%. The proceeds were partially used to call the remaining $285 million of bonds that were maturing in October and fund loan originations. As of quarter end, $2.2 billion or 75% of our debt is comprised of unsecured corporate bonds across 4 issuances with a weighted average remaining term of 4 years and a weighted average coupon of 5.3%. Our next corporate bond maturity is now in 2027. The offering strengthened our balance sheet and affirmed our commitment to the investment-grade bond market as our primary source of capital. We're encouraged by the bond's strong trading performance in the secondary market and believe our bonds offer attractive relative value to fixed income investors with [ meat on the bone ] to tighten further as the market continues to recognize Ladder's distinct long-standing investment strategy, anchored by conservative lending attachment points, AAA-rated securities and high-quality real estate equity investments. As of September 30, 2025, Ladder's liquidity was $879 million, comprised of cash and cash equivalents and our undrawn capacity of $850 million unsecured revolver. Total gross leverage was 2.0x as of quarter end, below our target leverage range. Overall, our balance sheet remains strong and primed for continued growth as our investment pipeline continues to build. As of September 30, 2025, our unencumbered asset pool stood at $3.9 billion or 84% of total assets. 88% of this unencumbered asset pool is comprised of first mortgage loans, investment-grade securities and unrestricted cash and cash equivalents. As of September 30, 2025, Ladder's undepreciated book value per share was $13.71, which is net of a $0.41 per share CECL reserve established. In the third quarter of 2025, we repurchased $1.9 million of common stock or 171,000 shares at a weighted average price of $11.04 per share. Year-to-date in 2025, we've repurchased $9.3 million of common stock or 877,000 shares at a weighted average price of $10.60 per share. As of September 30, 2025, $91.5 million remains outstanding on Ladder's stock repurchase program. In the third quarter, Ladder declared a $0.23 per share dividend, which was paid on October 15, 2025. As of today, our dividend yield is approximately 8.5% with a stock price that we believe has been pulled down by the broader market concerns around private credit. We'll note that our dividend remains stable and our asset base continues to turn over into freshly originated loans, AAA securities, high-quality real estate equity investments. With a stable earnings base complemented by our investment-grade capital structure, we believe there's ample room for our dividend yield to tighten, specifically when compared to other investment-grade REITs with similar credit ratings to Ladder. We continue to expand our investor outreach efforts now as an investment-grade company, and we look forward to further educating the market on our story. Building on Pamela's overview of our performance, I'll highlight a few additional insights to how each of our segments fared in the third quarter. As of September 30, 2025, our loan portfolio totaled $1.9 billion with a weighted average yield of approximately 8.2%. As of quarter end, we had 3 loans on non-accrual totaling $123 million or 2.6% of total assets. In the third quarter, we resolved 2 non-accrual loans, first through the payoff at part of a $16 million loan through the sale by a sponsor of 2 mixed-use properties in New York City; and the second be a foreclosure of a loan collateralized by an office property in Maryland with a carrying value of $22.7 million. No new loans were added to non-accrual in the third quarter. Our CECL reserve remained steady at $52 million or $0.41 per share. We believe this reserve is adequate to cover any potential losses in our loan portfolio, including consideration of the ongoing macroeconomic shifts in the U.S. and global economy. As of September 30, 2025, our securities portfolio totaled $1.9 billion with a weighted average yield of 5.7%, of which 99% was investment-grade and 96% was AAA-rated, underscoring the portfolio's high credit quality. As of quarter end, approximately 80% of the portfolio of almost entirely AAA securities were unencumbered and readily financeable, providing an additional source of liquidity, complementing our same-day liquidity of $879 million. In the third quarter, our $960 million real estate segment continued to generate stable net operating income. The portfolio includes 149 net lease properties, primarily investment-grade credits committed to long-term leases with an average lease term of 7 years remaining. For further information on Ladder's third quarter 2025 operating results, refer to our earnings supplement presentation, which is available on our website and our quarterly report on Form 10-Q, which we expect to file in the coming days. With that, I will turn the call over to Brian. Brian Harris: Thanks, Paul. The third quarter was a particularly gratifying one, highlighted by the successful completion of our first corporate unsecured issuance as an investment-grade issuer. We now have access to a much larger investor base in the investment-grade market than the high-yield market where we had issued our prior 7 offerings over the last 13 years. Having access to this larger pool of capital should allow us to further optimize our liability management in the years to come. We believe that by being a regular issuer in the investment-grade corporate bond market, we will be able to lower our overall interest expense to a greater extent than what we could expect in the secured repo and high-yield markets. We prioritized getting to investment-grade ratings several years ago. So having that distinction today from 2 of the 3 major rating agencies is very satisfying, and we plan to maintain or improve our ratings over time. While Ladder has historically been grouped into a peer group of other commercial mortgage REITs, we believe we are more properly comped against other investment-grade rated property REITs who finance their operations like we do, primarily with the use of corporate unsecured debt and large unsecured revolvers. If we succeed in curating an equity investor base that views us more in line with investment-grade property REITs, we think our stock price will start to reflect a lower required dividend yield more in line with how these investment-grade property REITs with lower leverage are valued. In the fourth quarter and beyond, we expect to continue adding to our inventory of higher-yielding balance sheet loans, while staying nimble enough to pivot into securities acquisitions during periods of high volatility when these investments provide extraordinary opportunities to add safer, more liquid investments as market turbulence flares up. We are hopeful that the yield curve will steepen much more next year as the Fed makes good on market predictions of several cuts to the Fed funds rate. This in turn should pave the way for more regular contributions to securitizations. We are always on the lookout for opportunities to own more real estate, but we expect most of the lift to earnings next year to come from organic growth of our loan portfolio. We're expecting to finish this transformational year on a positive note as market conditions do appear to favor our business model as we head into 2026. We can take some questions now. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Jade Rahmani with KBW. Jade Rahmani: I'm interested to know if you're doing anything differently on the origination side from prior to the IG rating. Perhaps that has opened you up to deals that are closer to stabilization or perhaps larger in size. Clearly, the IG rating might give you a competitive advantage over non-bank lenders. So if you could provide any color on that, it would be helpful. Brian Harris: Sure. Thanks, Jade. Yes, I would say, we're looking at some slightly larger transactions and it's just a lot more stability around it financing it this way. You don't have to go about trying to figure out if an individual lender will see the assets the same way you do. But I wouldn't call it anything wholesale indifference. Slightly larger, yes, everything is a little bit more profitable when your cost of funds go down. But for the most part, the one real change that I see in this part of the cycle versus the last time is the assets on which we're lending are of much, much better quality than the garden apartment buildings and older warehouse properties. So we seem to -- when I take a look at the assets that we're lending on, they're really newly built Class A apartment complexes, resort style almost. And a lot of the industrial portfolios are also quite new as a result of all the onshoring that took place. Jade Rahmani: And on the origination side, I noticed a difference between fundings and commitments upfront that seemed, at least from the outside, a little larger than historically. Were there any construction loans in there or any large CapEx projects in those deals, if you could provide any color? Brian Harris: I wouldn't say as a rule, but we generally don't write construction loans. So there are no construction loans in that portfolio that you're looking at. And as far as heavy CapEx work, I think if you're gravitating towards a slightly wider spread than maybe you're expecting, I don't think it's as a result of a higher construction component or a lot of TI hammer swinging. It really is just -- we're just getting a little bit better. I think the portfolio doesn't look like it's changing meaningfully. Right now, it's most of the assets are industrial and multifamily. I'm not sure it will stay that way. And we haven't been avoiding hotels. We put one under app recently, but we just haven't run across too many of them. And as I said, a lot of the -- we try to focus more importantly rather than property types is on acquisitions where the borrower is buying something usually at a reset basis. Some of these resets are quite remarkable. But as opposed to cash out refinances. The only real cash out refinances that we're doing is if a guy is coming off a construction loan on an apartment building, and he's only 50% leased now. So those oftentimes have 30% or 40% equity in them. And sometimes there's a cash out refi because the property is now complete and half leased. So other than that, it's pretty straight down the middle lending on apartments and industrial properties. Operator: Our next question comes from the line of Steve Delaney with Citizens JMP. Steven Delaney: Congrats on the strong quarter. Curious, let's start with lending. You seem to like the market. You have plenty of capacity. But let's talk about just the $1.9 billion rather than the $5 billion overall portfolio, focusing on the loan portfolio because you appear to be increasingly active there. Do you see -- looking at that portfolio, if we were to look out over the next year, do you see further growth and meaningful growth in that $1.9 billion loan portfolio? And can you give us some idea of a range with your current capital base, how large the loan portfolio might be able to grow? Brian Harris: Sure. Thanks, Steve. let's start with capital first because if you remember, in the second half of 2024, we took in over $1 billion in loan payoffs. And while we began originating loans more frequently, we were not originating at that pace. So what was happening is each quarter, the loan book would get a little bit smaller. This is really the first quarter in a while where we've originated more than has paid off, and we expect that to continue. So the fourth quarter is off to a very good start. I would expect or as I said originally, the organic side of growth will come from just building up the bridge book. I think that's the place where we're focused right now. And we're pretty happy with where spreads are. They're a little bit less competitive than they were really, I would say, just a couple of months ago, which tends to happen after you hit the midpoint of the year. But -- so I would expect that $1.9 billion portfolio to go up by $1 billion in all likelihood. Maybe I would -- if I had to take the over-under on that $1 billion, I would take the over. We're quite active right now and business begets business. So I think that when we had a pretty strong origination quarter, that gets noticed by borrowers as well as brokers and the phone rings a little bit more. As Pamela mentioned, we have over $500 million in loans under application right now. You never really know how many of these are going to close depending on what happens with the volatility sometimes coming out of the political picture as well as the geopolitical side of things. But generally, I would expect that we -- I think we had that loan book up to around $3.4 billion a couple of years ago, and I would like to get back there. And I think that will come from a few places. One, we have a larger revolver that's mostly undrawn. We have a lot of securities. Securities are paying off at a much more rapid clip than loans right now. And I think that's a testimony to the payoffs that have been coming in and the capital markets becoming more welcoming to single asset transactions. So as you pay down those AAAs in a CLO, the financing becomes quite unpopular. So they've been calling a lot of those bonds, and we'll expect that to continue. I think that our securities portfolio will, through attrition pay off, but also we will sell them. As we said in the quarter, we sold a little over $250 million. We own over -- I think we own over $2 billion today. I would expect that number to go down, but I would expect the loan inventory book to go up. Steven Delaney: That's really helpful color, Brian. In terms of [ specialty ] comparison, you mentioned the property REITs and their valuation is something that you would be envious of on a -- whether it's on a PE or a dividend yield. Looking at the ROE at 8.3%, I would say, it kind of strikes me as being solid, but in terms of valuation and where the stock is trading relative to book that some improvement to that, maybe something in the 9% to 10% range might be very beneficial to the stock price, and therefore, your valuation relative to book. Is that improving the ROE in a prudent manner? Is that part of your vision for the next 1 to 2 years? And do you think the strategy you have in place will necessarily take your ROE some higher? Brian Harris: I would say yes to all of those parts of that question. The game plan is to write more loans and we'll get through the cash component of our liquidity. As you remember, we had a lot of T-bills when T-bills were yielding 5.5%, and that kept us away from very tight mortgage loans because if it wasn't at the margin worth sacrificing the liquidity and safety of the securities, we really didn't do it. But now with the Fed cutting rates and promising to cut further, we have a nice mix of floating rate and fixed rate liabilities. So we would expect our cost of funds to be going down. That revolver, I'll remind you, is now priced at SOFR plus 1.25%. So if I am of the opinion the Fed is going to cut rates 100 basis points, usually probably bridging over Powell's last few stance as well as the next Fed official that comes in. And if that happens, you get SOFR down around 3% we can borrow unsecured at 4.25% at that point. So that should all bode well. We've got floors in our bridge loan portfolio up around 6%, 6.25%. And so the loan -- the rates we're able to write loans at these days have actually gone up not down in the last quarter anyway. So we're going to continue doing that. And after we get through the cash component of our liquidity, we'll then begin to sell down or pay down the securities. And the way it comes out on paper, we're hoping to add $1 billion to $2 billion of assets net on the balance sheet and we're hoping to pick up 3% to 4% of profit margin. So if we can take a security that we're earning 5.5% on and get it and pay that loan -- pay the security off and then redistribute, reinvest that money into a loan portfolio that's earning 8.5%, we think that bodes very well for dividend, ROE as well as earnings. So it's not a hard ping-pong ball to follow. That is going to be what we're going to do. It's what we've been saying we're going to do. The one thing that has really masked all the work that we've done has been the very rapid pace of payoffs. And those are high-yielding instruments and we hate to see them go. But when they've been around a little bit past their expiration date, you do want them to pay off, and we've been pretty successful at that. So credit, very stable. We like what we're seeing. The quality is good. The borrowers are good. They've been patient. They're not in difficult financial binds as a result of owning too many over-levered properties. So it looks strong. And you got the stock market at an all-time highs, you got spreads low, rates low, Fed cutting. These are all good conditions on the weather map for a successful lending business at Ladder. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from the line of Tom Catherwood with BTIG. William Catherwood: Brian, I just wanted to go back to something that you said in response to Steve's question, and I want to make sure I heard it right. Did you mention that -- I thought you said rates we can get on loans have gone up, not down. Did I hear that right? Brian Harris: The ones we're looking at, yes. I think -- well, you're seeing -- I mean, I'm not immune to looking at corporate spreads, credit spreads, mortgage spreads. But there's a couple of things going on more recently in the -- literally the last 60 days, I would say. The Fed is letting the mortgage-backed securities portfolio run off. So the agency securities market is actually not as tight as you would think on spread. And the reason why is the Fed is effectively letting $30 billion roll off. I think it's $30 billion. I'm not a Fed watcher. So if I have that wrong, please don't send me a bunch of e-mail. But the other -- after April, when the tariff talk started and now the back and forths that go on, the commercial sector was -- as it always does, and I've said this to you probably several times. In January, every year, we go to a convention down in Miami called CREFC. Everyone is a bull. Everyone comes out, it's going to be its best year ever, and they put a carry trade on until the middle of June. Around the middle of June, they think maybe we paid too much for these things and they start to sell them and they're less aggressive. At Ladder, we have found a nice little theme I think in loan sizes. We traditionally like loans at $25 million to $30 million on middle market lenders by choice. However, we dabbled occasionally in larger loans. The banks are not really writing loans in the $100 million range. That's a little too small for them to put on their balance sheet and then try to securitize. They'll write $1 billion loan with a consortium of banks, but $100 million loan is under their radar and $100 million is probably a little too big for a lot of the CLO issuers that are out there that we mainly compete with. So we're actually very happy in our $50 million to $100 million range right now and we'll try to stay there. And so don't think that we've changed our stripes if we start picking up loans that are a little larger than average. We're still doing plenty of smaller loans, too. But the $100 million type loan is a better asset. It's newer. It's got better financial characteristics to it. And it is higher rate because the competitive landscape is just not as bad as it was. And keep in mind, I'm talking about the last 60 to 90 days. The first half of the year was very, very tight and we were not originating a lot for that reason. In fact, we were buying a lot of securities. Another good proxy, Tom, if you want to take a look at it, is the CLO market. So there's a lot of CLOs coming to market. And they're in the 145, 155, 160 area for AAAs. That's wider than they were just a few months ago. It's not extraordinarily wider. But you're also seeing the VIX tick up. I think it was around 25 the other day after being at 15 for a month. So when you see the VIX ticking up like that and all the volatility around the rhetoric and the political circles, we're able to find things that are pretty attractive. Again, I also think we have a reputation as being very reliable. So as we get to the year-end here, we tend to do -- we always do better in the second half of the year than the first year -- first half of the year when it comes to production. That has been something that has followed me around through my whole career. And I think it has more to do with seasonality and what happens. As you know, insurance companies, they allocate money into fixed income. Usually, by June or July, they're fully invested. So even that competitive force kind of backs off a little bit, too. So we actually prefer to fatten up going into the end of the year. William Catherwood: Got it. Really appreciate that answer, Brian. And then if I think about then sources and uses -- and again, I know you laid it out before, how you think about funding things. But if the spreads and securities are somewhat widening and the revolver is priced at S plus 125, wouldn't it make sense to then just put everything on the revolver and then term it out with unsecured once you get to $400 million, $500 million and just keep wash rents repeat that? Or is -- do you think selling down securities along with using the revolver gives some other benefit? Brian Harris: Well, I think it's almost like we have several companies at Ladder with the products that we dabble in. But on the floating rate side -- I'm sorry, on the securities side, I mean, if you take a look at the rating agency REITs, the agency buyers like AGNC and Annaly and a couple of others, these guys are throwing off dividends of 14%, 15%. And they're levered, I don't know, 7x, 8x in many cases. That's way too hot for us on leverage, but with government-guaranteed paper, with a lot of duration, I think your risk is in the duration side of that. But at where we are, these securities, there -- if we levered them up and easily can, the financing cost is around SOFR plus 50 on a AAA. If we're buying things at 150, you can figure out that there is a pretty good spread in there. So we can lever those up to about 15%, but it's a lot of leverage. And the road we're on is not to just have a low cost of funds so we can lever things up. The game plan is to focus more and more in the years ahead on unsecured debt that we extend. But the game -- the change at Ladder versus before we were IG, we would normally be thinking about issuing another bond here because we're growing rapidly, we're going to need more capital. We've got sources of ability to get capital, but we might think about that. But if you really think the Fed is going to cut rates by 75 or 100 basis points, it would not go out and do a bond deal right now because that revolver is going to get down to a low-4% rate. And that's what we think will happen. It doesn't have to happen. But if it does, that's probably the first thing we'll do is draw that. We don't want to draw all of that because that's not what the agencies and investors want to see on the bond side. So -- but my guess is we'll probably -- I don't think securities were ever meant to be a long-term hold for us. They're kind of a parking spot for us while we're waiting for better opportunities to come by on the loan side. And I think our patience has been rewarded because I think Paul mentioned that our spread on the loans we wrote in the $500 million or so was around $279 million. I think the spread on what's coming in the fourth quarter is going to be wider than that. Operator: Our next question is a follow-up from Jade Rahmani with KBW. Jade Rahmani: Just curious if you would contemplate launching a securities fund, if you can deliver 15% type returns with leverage, you could put the leverage in the fund, not on Ladder's balance sheet and create value for investors looking for that type of return profile. And of course, comparing to residential mortgage securities, commercial has a lot more predictable duration. So you don't have the prepayment volatility that the agency REITs deal with. Brian Harris: Yes. I mean, we've done that before. When we first opened, we ran a few investment portfolios even some individuals that we knew because sometimes securities get cheap, but most people with the first and last name don't know how to go buy them. And so oftentimes, we'll get a call and say, why don't you buy these? So we have an asset that's yielding, as I said, a levered yield of around 15% I think. So that's generally attractive, but it does come with a lot of leverage. We've historically looked -- we've looked at that. We've looked at stapling on a residential mortgage arm of things because we all understand that business also, but haven't done it. And the last thing we've looked at too is possibly spinning off our triple net portfolio because we don't get much for that in valuation. So this is going to be -- 2026 is going to be a year about really fine-tuning the columns and what the right cap rate should be on those things. We have an internal manager that has no value apparently. So there's lots of things we can do now around the edges, but the first step is going to be becoming an investment-grade company. And we still like the -- given where we are in the cycle right now, we like the commercial mortgage business better than the residential side. The residential side could get very interesting though, not from a loan, but from a standpoint of if there's too much supply due to the absence of the Fed. So those are very attractive, but as I said, they do have a lot of duration on them. So -- but we're probably -- we're agnostic as to holding on to things that yield 15% or selling things that make 1 to 2 points and then recycling the money. And I think that, that is an option open to us right now, as you saw in the small sales that we did in the third quarter. Jade Rahmani: And then the New York office equity investment you made, how are you feeling about that? Is that a long-term hold? It looks like it was pretty prescient in terms of timing. But could you also remind us the size of that? Brian Harris: Sure. Our investment -- we're a minority participant in the equity on that. But we may very well get involved in the debt side of that situation later on, but we have a loan from an insurance company for now. But that building, 780 Third Avenue, by the way, if anybody cares, is -- we put in a $13 million or $14 million investment. At the time, the building was about 50% occupied. I don't know where we are on free rent, but I do believe we've now -- the building is leased over 90% in just a short -- under 1.5 years. So we do like that one. Again, that's a very high-quality building. Third Avenue is not known for high-quality buildings, but a lot of the lower quality is becoming residential. And a lot of those poorly occupied office buildings that are becoming residential, those tenants are looking for space. The real benefit we picked up was between JPMorgan and Citadel, Park Avenue is being just gobbled up on space and a lot of those tenants are also moving. So we didn't -- we thought we were going to get Third Avenue tenants looking for an address. We wound up getting Park Avenue tenants that were being displaced by JPMorgan's expansion. So all going well. I wish we had done more of that. And do we like that? We are looking at another situation right now of larger size than the one we did at 780 Third Avenue, and we like it. These transportation hubs in New York City tend to do better. They come out a little bit quicker, especially when people have concerns around safety on mass transportation. I think that situation has largely corrected itself with the return of people. Our offices are full. We haven't ordered anybody to be in 5 days a week, but most of them are. So we generally like pockets of the office market, but we do understand the obsolescence associated with some of the older ones. So yes, we like where we are. We're happy to do more of those investments. And that long-term hold is the last part of your question there. I would say, we're going to hold that for a while, yes. Operator: We have no further questions at this time. Mr. Harris, I'd like to turn the floor back over to you for closing comments. Brian Harris: Thanks, everybody, for listening and those who dialed in afterwards. And good year 2025, we're in the fourth quarter. The reason I say that now is because we're not going to talk again until after the new year comes and we get through the audited financials. But a lot of this is just falling into place the way we largely expected it. The only real surprises were the rapid paydowns that took place in the second half of last year, but we're catching up quickly. We've had an inflection point here in the last quarter where we originated more than paid off, and we think that, that is going to be a consistent theme over the next 4 or 5 quarters. So thank you for tuning in, and we'll catch up with you after the new year. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this does conclude today's teleconference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation, and have a wonderful day.
Henrik Sjölund: Good morning, and welcome to the interim report presentation for the Holmen Group. Today, it's me, Henrik Sjölund and Stefan Loréhn. We will go through the presentation, and then we're happy to take any questions you might have. I know it's a busy day for you, so a special thank you for taking the time also to discuss with us. Well, the third quarter, challenging market conditions, a bit the same message as we actually had after the second quarter, this quarter, well, low demand for wood products. We also have -- despite low utilization rate and very expensive wood, we have, again, a very good result from wood and paper. All in all, a bit over SEK 700 million, a decent result when it comes to Holmen. If you look at our industry, not only wood products, but also wood and paper together, so far this year, during the first 9 months, we've been able to deliver 15% return on capital employed. And if we look at our financial position and what we have done, Stefan, we have distributed a bit over SEK 3 billion in dividend and buybacks during January to September. And if you look at 5-year period, we have roughly the same debt-to-equity ratio today as we had 5 years ago. We have distributed SEK 13 billion in total during the 5 years. Changing subject to forest and wood market. This time, we do see that pulpwood prices start to decline due to lower activities from the mills. We don't see that sawlog prices still or have started to come down. On this chart, it looks like they have. But in our case, it's because we -- there are also big differences in price still between southern parts of Sweden and northern parts of Sweden. And when we buy less in South and a bit more in North, then it has an effect on the graph, which is what we mean by mix effect wood cost. Pulpwood, on the other hand, the prices are going down. In our case, it's a lag before lower cost reaches our industry and our P&L sheets. Prices are high, Stefan? Stefan Lorehn: Yes, they are. And the result from the Forest division was SEK 538 million during the third quarter. That is an increase by some SEK 20 million compared to second quarter and some SEK 50 million compared to the first quarter this year. The gradual higher profit is due to price increases during the year. Looking at the harvesting levels, we harvested 660,000 cubic meters during the third quarter this year. That is approximately 100,000 cubic meters higher than the corresponding period last year. Year-to-date, the harvesting levels is still 100,000 cubic meters lower than what we saw last year at this point in time, but we anticipate that we will be on par with last year when we closed the books for 2025. Henrik Sjölund: So back on track soon. Stefan Lorehn: Hopefully. Henrik Sjölund: All right. Changing to renewable energy. A very special situation or we've had this situation for quite some time now where we see that prices in northern parts of Sweden, where we have not all, but almost all our production of electricity, well, prices are simply very, very low. And it's not easy to make money when prices are that low. And I think we can just -- well, we know that electricity is locked in, in the northern parts of Sweden, and there is a lack of transmission capacity. How long it will be like that? That's difficult to answer. There are so many things affecting whether the price should go up or if it will stay where it is, tables to, for example, Finland, Norway, et cetera. Stefan, we have said that we have produced with premium to market price. Does it help? Stefan Lorehn: Not that much when we have these low prices in the northern part of Sweden, as you mentioned, Henrik, but still we got some premium above the market price. Maybe we can also comment on the wind power production that we have curtailed during the third quarter, and that is due to the low prices that we see and also the high risk for imbalancing costs. So when we add up the financials, we are still loss-making in this segment, and it's, of course, due to these low prices that Henrik mentioned. Can also comment on the hydropower station in Junsterforsen that is now back into production after the rebuild that we have done there. Henrik Sjölund: Yes. Thank you. Okay. Moving on to Wood Products. I said in the beginning, weak demand, and that's obvious when we look at some charts. If you look at U.S., it's not picking up. It's quite weak. China, very clear, even going down, I would say. And if you look on the production side, well, especially Western Canada, producing less, Eastern Canada, more or less on the same level. Germany coming down quite a lot after we have the spruce bark beetle infestation that had an effect on how much that was produced a couple of years ago, but now on quite low levels. It's only one place where people seem to run the sawmills more or less full still, and that's in Sweden or in the Nordics, but especially in Sweden, but not in the southern parts of Sweden where we have our sawmills, we have curtailed production, especially at the Braviken sawmill. And I think that part of Sweden has also been the most affected by, well, the drought we had and also later on, the infestation from bark beetles. Tough situation for sawmills in south of Sweden, and I think especially where we are. Price-wise, well, in the beginning of the year, as it normally happens, prices went up a bit during spring time. And now when we came into the third quarter, we see that there is price pressure and prices are down some 5% to 10%, depending on which market you look at. And as we speak, it's still some price pressure on wood products prices. A lot of negative things, Stefan. Stefan Lorehn: Yes. And it can also be seen in the result, which deteriorated to SEK -91 million during the third quarter. That is due to the lower selling prices that Henrik mentioned. They are down 5% to 10% quarter-over-quarter. That also meant that we needed to adjust the value of our finished good stocks, which had an impact on the result by some SEK -30 million during the third quarter. Henrik Sjölund: Thank you. Clear. Changing to Board and Paper. Finally, something positive to talk about, Stefan. Now to be honest, if you look at demand, it's not so rosy. We are hovering on a level where we are quite far below actually where we were during the pandemic, and we are still below where we were before the pandemic. And also at the same time, we know that there is more capacity in the market. So it's quite challenging when it comes to board. In this case, it's board. We take paper afterwards. When it comes to prices, well, they are always stable, at least in our segment, we used to say, of course, there are changes over time, but it takes time to change the price. In this case, prices are stable. But when you look for marginal volumes to fill up your order books, then there is quite a lot of price pressure. In our case, our order books are -- they are okay, but not even we are running absolutely full. We take some market-related downtime and in line with most players in the market right now. And as I said in the beginning, cautious consumers not spending to fill up order books in the industry. Paper, we have been used to a low utilization ratios. They are really low in board now with all the new capacity. But here, we have been more -- we talked about it for so long. Capacity has been partly closed and converted, but still also here, it's quite a lot of overcapacity. We have been doing well in this market for a long time. Also now we are doing, I would say, really well. We are not running full. The idea is not to run totally full either, but maybe 80%, 85% suits us better given the situation with very volatile electricity prices we think we use to our favor as well. Prices also here, roughly the same, fairly stable. But when you look for marginal volumes, there is a lot of competition for the volumes and some price pressure in the market. Stefan? Stefan Lorehn: Yes. The result for the third quarter were on par with what we reported in the second quarter. In Q3, we had the annual maintenance shut in the Iggesund mill that took a toll on the result by some SEK 150 million. Despite a small increase in energy cost, our energy cost in the division is still very much lower than normal this quarter, and that is due to our ability to adjust to the volatility in the electricity market, as Henrik mentioned. We also had some tailwind from seasonally lower personnel costs in Q3. Henrik Sjölund: And given the circumstances, a really good result, I must say. All right. Just remember what kind of a company we are. We are a forest-owning company or land-owning company, and we do everything we can in order to extract as much value as possible from the land we own in different ways. Thank you. And by that, we are happy to take on any questions you have. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from the line of Charlie Muir-Sands with BNP. Charlie Muir-Sands: I had a few short ones. Firstly, on the timing of the pulpwood costs coming down, can you just clarify, was that a -- that was clearly a headwind to profitability of the Forest segment. Was that already simultaneously a tailwind to profitability in the consumption segments like board and paper? Or does that come through with a lag? And can you give any sort of quantification for what you're seeing kind of right now on a kind of year-on-year basis, for example? And then secondly, you mentioned on board and paper, lower energy costs. Can you just clarify, were you talking both year-on-year and quarter-on-quarter? And then just finally, on the tax ruling, can you clarify, would that create a cash inflow? Or does that just release a provision for you? Henrik Sjölund: I think it's all questions for you [indiscernible]. But maybe the first one, yes, there is a lag when pulpwood prices come down. It takes like 6 months before it reaches the industry. Stefan Lorehn: Yes. And if we take the other one when it comes to our lower electricity cost, it's approximately in Q3, SEK 250 million lower than normal. In Q2, we had even lower electricity cost than we had in Q3, but still much lower than normal in Q3. Regarding the tax item, we anticipate that, that will turn into cash flow during the fourth quarter. Charlie Muir-Sands: Okay. Great. Sorry, just going back to the first one. So you said a lag when prices come down on pulpwood but you already face that headwind in the forest segment? Or there's a lag -- further lag and those further headwinds come in the forest segment and further tailwind in the industrial segment? Stefan Lorehn: The prices are moving quite slowly in the forest segment as it does for the industry, as Henrik mentioned. So we have not seen that kind of headwind yet in the forest. How it will turn out, we'll see going forward. Charlie Muir-Sands: Okay. And yes, is there any quantification you can put around the scale of the movements you've seen so far? Henrik Sjölund: Maintenance? Stefan Lorehn: No, I think it's too early -- the wood cost. I think it's too early to comment on and quantify the effects going forward. We've just seen that the pulpwood prices are starting to come down, and we need to come back on the quantification in the next quarter, I think. Henrik Sjölund: But there is quite a big difference how you -- how the market feels when it comes to pulpwood and sawlogs where it's still quite a lot of competition, as you saw on the slide for sawlogs in Sweden. But pulpwood definitely on its way down. Operator: Mr. Linus Larsson with SEB, can you hear us? Linus Larsson: I can hear you now. Could you please dissect the Wood Products result in the third quarter that you already mentioned the SEK 30 million of impairment? And also what to expect in the fourth quarter in terms of product price and sawlog cost delta and other moving parts, please? Henrik Sjölund: Can you take... Stefan Lorehn: The first one with the write-down of the stock, maybe didn't catch you right there, Linus. But we did a write-down of SEK 30 million in the third quarter, and that is due to the lower prices that we've seen in the market. Then we needed to adjust the stock value. So it's as simple as that. Henrik Sjölund: And when it comes to the pulpwood prices and the sawlog price, as I said before, pulpwood prices, well, they are on the way down. But remember, it takes some time before we get a lower cost in our industry. And we buy roughly half of what we make use of comes from our own forest. But also remember, we have a lot more forest up in the north where prices are, especially for sawlogs, they are lower than in the south of Sweden. But also when it comes to sawlogs, still a lot of competition. And so far, prices have not come down, at least not as we see it. Linus Larsson: Okay. So I mean, in terms of direction for the fourth quarter compared to the third quarter, are you still expecting higher sawlog costs and lower finished product prices? Or what's the direction, if you don't want to quantify what's the direction of the both? Henrik Sjölund: Sawlog prices are more or less flat from where we are now. Stefan Lorehn: And selling price is hard to comment, but the market is quite soft. So we need to see where things are going when we sum up the fourth quarter, Linus. Henrik Sjölund: Wood Products in general, still, Linus, it's -- I'd say it's price pressure in the market. Linus Larsson: Right, right. Okay. And maybe a similar question for Board and Paper, what you're seeing in terms of delta Q4 and Q3 in terms of price and cost, at least directionally? Stefan Lorehn: It's -- we don't comment that often going forward, Linus. What we had in Q3 that is exceptional is, of course, the maintenance shut in the Iggesund mill and as always, lower personnel cost during Q3 that will increase then quarter-over-quarter when we look into Q4. But comment on pricing and other cost factors we did. Henrik Sjölund: It's always more difficult to fill up the order books at the end of the year when the new contracts are being negotiated at the same time. Normally, demand is a bit lower, but that you know from before. Linus Larsson: And any initial thoughts on price negotiations going into next year? Stefan Lorehn: No. We don't comment on that, Linus. But as I said before, both when it comes to Board and Paper, our prices are fairly stable. But when you look for new volumes that you don't have a contract with right now, then also now we feel a bit of price pressure. It's not easy to get marginal volumes. Regarding discussions for next year, it's too early. We'll see what happens. Linus Larsson: And maybe just one final on the market dynamics and pricing and like we've now been discussing geopolitics and tariffs for the past couple of quarters. What's the latest on that in your market segments? And how are you seeing that? And how are you feeling that? Henrik Sjölund: If you take the tariff question, I think you already know. But for wood products now, there is a 10% tariff on wood products going into the U.S. And for Board and Paper, it's 15%. We don't have that much volumes going to the U.S. And of course, it's also an ongoing discussion who should take the cost, the one selling into the market or the one importing to the market. And right now, in board, it's roughly 50-50 and paper roughly the same. It's something that's ongoing. Linus Larsson: Got it. And also like dynamically in terms of trade flows, et cetera, are you seeing that whole discussion impacting supply-demand balances in your various segments? Henrik Sjölund: If you look at indirect effects, for example, Chinese board coming into Europe, we cannot see it yet. Might happen, but so far, we don't see any drastic or big volumes coming into Europe. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Ioannis Masvoulas with Morgan Stanley. Ioannis Masvoulas: Three questions left from my side. The first, when it comes to the graphic paper segment, we've seen several curtailments across the industry in Europe year-to-date, but mostly on the mechanical grades, less so on chemical grades. Can you talk about the dynamic? What do you think is driving that? Is it more of a different demand dynamics between the 2? And also, can you talk about how you see that materializing, whether we're going to see more capacity cuts in the coming months or majority of what you expect in the short term is already announced? And then secondly, again, on Wood Products, which was, I guess, the main weakness on the results today, you've only trimmed deliveries by 2% quarter-over-quarter. Is that a function of potentially destocking and production is actually lower? And how should we think about deliveries going into Q4 and early '26? And lastly, you mentioned curtailments on the wind side, given the challenging margin dynamics. Can you give an indication on maybe the yield that your wind mills are running at or maybe a mix between wind and hydro generation and how that's evolved over the past 12 months? Henrik Sjölund: So let me start with paper and graphic papers. We are in the mechanical segment, but we also compete with wood-free paper with some of our products. So we see everything from newsprint to wood-free uncoated more or less as one market when we look into the business we do. It's overcapacity. Demand is dropping. You are absolutely right. There are some capacity taken out. Whether there will be more taken out in the future, we don't know. We only look at what has been officially stopped, taken out or at least announced. And to have a good balance, we need to do, but the market need to take out a lot more capacity, a couple of more million tonnes, to be honest. But on the other hand, it's also -- as we have -- we are quite flexible and we have learned to also operate in an environment where you can't run absolutely full. Nobody can run absolutely full. You have to be a bit more flexible today. So I think the rules of the game have changed a bit as well. But we need to take out more to have a good balance. That's clear. And we are fairly happy with our operating rates, slightly higher than average in the market at least. Stefan, next one... Stefan Lorehn: Trying to remember them. I think it was about the delivery volumes from the Wood Products segment in Q3. Yes, there is a destocking, but that is mainly due to seasonality, lower production in Q3 during vacation periods. If we look at production volumes so far this year compared to last year, we are down some 10%, which partly is explained by the rebuild in the Iggesund sawmill that we did in the first quarter. But also, as Henrik mentioned, we've taken down production in the southern part of Sweden due to the high log cost that we see there. Then I think it was curtailment on wind towers. We have used our wind power turbines to approximately 50% during the third quarter, and that is due to both low prices in combination with high risk for imbalancing cost when you run the wind farms. Hydropower stations, we run as normal, try to maximize the profit we can get from them producing when the prices are as high as they can be for the moment and reduce production when prices are low. Henrik Sjölund: Which wasn't very high. Which wasn't very high. No. Stefan Lorehn: No, I think it was -- hopefully, Ioannis. Did we catch it all? Ioannis Masvoulas: Yes. That was very clear. Maybe a quick follow-up on the graphic paper side. So you mentioned the SEK 250 million, again, gain from better electricity management and therefore, lower power costs. If we were to add it to assume that you didn't have that gain, can you talk about profitability in the graphic paper segment for Q3, like leaving boards aside, just looking at graphic, would it be EBIT positive? And would it be EBITDA positive? Just to get a sense on the underlying profit trends. Henrik Sjölund: Yes, it's -- the underlying business is EBIT profit, even if you extract the effect from the electricity. Stefan Lorehn: Maybe we would have been running it slightly different, but yes. For sure, profit. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Lars Kjellberg with Stifel. Lars Kjellberg: Most of them have been answered, but I just have a couple of follow-ups. On China specifically, of course, we have a significant excess supply, and I appreciate your comments about not reaching European shores. But we did see, for example, Brazil now asking for tariff protection from China. So I guess, directly for the European perspective, how are you seeing the Asian markets in general as an export destination? You do have some volumes going into that market. And I can only assume it's not great. So are you seeing sort of repatriation of tonnes back to Europe and equally so, given the tariff situation and weak demand in the U.S., is that an issue with, again, repatriation of tonnes that normally would have been exported from Europe? Is that a topic that you're seeing in your business and in general for the industry? The last point is really on sawlog pricing. You've commented many quarters now, of course, that they're insanely high relative to the underlying demand trends and pricing for wood products and the pressure is pretty acute as we can tell from your numbers. So what does it take for this market to give on the log price side? Henrik Sjölund: So we start with geopolitics and how it affects our business. You almost answered the questions, I think. Yes, it's much more difficult to sell into Asia, especially for marginal business to find add-on business, so to say, because it's a lot of competition. If you compare to a number of years ago, we have had capacity in China for a long time, but they are both good, and it's more now than before. And the market is not picking up, as we have said. So that's more difficult. When it comes to how much of the volumes that will come into Europe, according to statistics I see and when I speak to our people, I don't see a big change, at least not yet. But you're right, there is a risk, of course, that it could be shifts in volumes between different parts of the world. And then with U.S., you are right again, yes, we are a bit dependent as Europeans on exporting not only to Asia, but also to the U.S. to have a decent supply-demand balance. Roughly 20% when it comes to board should be sold somewhere else than in Europe. That's kind of the European business idea. Second? Lars Kjellberg: And on the specifics around European volumes returning, you can't sell it abroad. Does that put incremental pressure on Europe? I can only assume that the pricing still is better in Europe than it would be overseas. Henrik Sjölund: So far, not much has happened, but there is a risk that, that could be the case, absolutely. But we haven't really seen it yet, to be honest. I think the big issue here is whether we can export as much as we need to export to different parts of the world because the total capacity in Europe is simply too big for Europe. It needs to be shipped both to the U.S. and to Asia in different ways. We ship more to Asia than -- let's say, we do the business in the U.S., for example, but we've shipped the volumes to Asia to be converted, et cetera. So it's different kind of business also in Asia. Not all of them are up to competition with the Chinese producers. Stefan Lorehn: Second question about the sawlogs and the dynamics, I think it was what needs to be -- to happen to the sawlog prices to come down. Well, we have done what we can do so far. We have taken down production in the southern part of Sweden, where the log costs are simply too high for us to get the financials in line with our expectations. How other people will treat their sawmills, we will see going forward. Not much we can do about it in the short term. Henrik Sjölund: Normally, the sawmills when they -- you need to come down quite a lot in profitability also to variable cost more or less before they stop. That's what has happened in the history. And then the wood market changes, sawlogs become cheaper. But obviously, right now, they are simply too expensive and prices for wood products is under pressure. So very tough situation. Different though in northern parts of Sweden, where sawlogs are cheaper. Lars Kjellberg: There's no downward pressure on logs today at all. Henrik Sjölund: Of course, all of us try to get it down. But so far, we haven't seen it happening, to be honest. That's what we had to. That's where we are right now. And in our case, to take down production if it's too expensive, that's the first thing you do. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Christian Kopfer with Handelsbanken. Christian Kopfer: Just 2 questions from my side. Firstly, you talked a little bit about the power prices, the big differences in the North versus the South and maybe it has been even more substantial differences in the last couple of quarters. From your perspective, I mean, you are active in both areas, especially in the North and maybe [ Area 3 ], right? So the big differences, are those only driven by the bottlenecking in transmission? Or what do you see? Henrik Sjölund: That's the main cause. But also, we have seen quite a lot of water in the system up in the north that have put pressure to produce hydropower during the first 9 months of this year. Now the situation is a bit more normal when we look at the levels in our reservoirs at least. Stefan Lorehn: Yes. But if you look at third quarter, I think you answered the question more or less because if there would have been sufficient transmission capacity, situation would have been different as well with lower prices in SE3 and higher in SE2 and 1. That's clear. Christian Kopfer: Has it been bigger differences with the new flow base, you think? Stefan Lorehn: It's quite a short period of time, and it's a combination of factors when it comes to cables being out of operation, lots of water in the system. So it's quite early to say that it's the flow base that has created this situation. Also, when you have revision of nuclear, you have to take down the transmission capacity a bit, which has had an influence, that's clear. But exactly, there are so many different factors now to understand how things are going to be. So let's wait and see a bit. Christian Kopfer: And then we heard from another paper producer or packaging business this morning mentioned that they start to see some, call it, light in the end of the tunnel when it comes to customer behavior, not exactly for Q4, but maybe a little bit better on the demand side going into next year. Is that something that you start to see on your customer base as well? Henrik Sjölund: You mean consumption in general for forest industry products? Christian Kopfer: Yes, demand from your customers -- starting to be a little bit better or how do you see it? Henrik Sjölund: It could be. But if you look at the statistics so far, what has happened and also if I look into our order books, I can't really say that things have changed. I'd say that we have more overcapacity, especially in board than what we have been used to for many years. So demand really needs to pick up quite a lot before we get a healthy demand -- supply-demand balance again. I think it will take some time. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Cole Hathorn with Jefferies. Cole Hathorn: Just a follow-up on the pricing commentary being stable. I mean we're seeing a lot of the folding boxboard price indices and graphic paper price indices decline. So I'm just wondering how Holmen sits within that. Could you talk a little bit around on the paper side, the book paper business, which I imagine is kind of longer contracts and slightly different to the index pricing? And then on your folding carton business, could you just remind us how much is more premium longer-term contract versus traditional folding carton of your business? And when you look into 2026, you talked about spot pressures, but should we be assuming that some of the annual contracts, there will be a little bit of pressure on those into 2026? Henrik Sjölund: Would you like to start? Stefan Lorehn: I leave that to you, Henrik. Henrik Sjölund: First of all, when it comes to negotiations for next year, we don't want to comment that. We are starting to negotiate soon. But -- and when it comes to prices in Europe in board, as I said, especially you mentioned folding boxboard, and we are a lot -- we have bigger volumes in solid bleach board where you are even more into a niche where prices tend to be very stable over time. They do change, but it takes time. And that's the case also right now for us that most of our business, they are stable when it comes to board, slightly more pressure in general in folding boxboard than a solid bleached board. The challenge is more when you need marginal volumes to take on new business, then there is price pressure. What that means for next year, it's too early to say. And then it was how many of our contracts are longer term for 2, 3 years, et cetera? Stefan Lorehn: It's a mixture. Some shorter ones, some 1- to 2-year tenders. Henrik Sjölund: We have some slightly longer contracts, but not that many. And when it comes to paper, we don't have any long-term contracts, maximum 1 year. It's gone the other way, some contracts quarterly or half year as well. Book paper is a good segment where we've been extremely -- we have done well, and we are doing well. Prices have been a bit more stable than graphic paper in general. But also there, a lot of contracts will be renegotiated from 1st of January and second quarter, et cetera. It's no big difference in that sense, but a more stable segment, both when it comes to demand development and also pricing and fewer producers, of course. Cole Hathorn: And then maybe just a follow-up on the Canadian producers in wood products. They're under a lot of pressure considering the duties that have impacted them, and you've showed some good charts on wood staff, particularly around British Columbia sawmills coming down. Are you starting to see better ability to compete with the Canadians in the U.S.? Or any commentary you can provide on the Canadian sawmill side and how that's impacting your business? Henrik Sjölund: Normally in the U.S., they consume like 100 million cubic meters. 20 of those come from Canada and roughly 5 from Europe. And now when the Canadians have 35%, 40%, 45%, well, they have a different wood cost as a base. So it's not really comparable to tariffs we have with 10% in Europe. But normally, when you have increased tariffs and you have that much of import into U.S., you would see prices going up in the U.S. But so far, we haven't seen much of that. And if you look at the future prices, well, they go up and down quite a lot week-to-week almost. Right now, if I would say something, I would say, well, they are up 5% something, but that's last week, et cetera. So, so far, demand and the balance in the U.S. has not made prices come up to cover for the tariff cost, not for the Canadians, not for the Europeans, not to be fully compensated. No, it hasn't happened yet. Cole Hathorn: Fair enough. So in absence of housing demand, is it really kind of sawmill closures in Canada, which might be the supply trigger? Henrik Sjölund: Supply is down, but not enough. Demand is even lower as it looks right now. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Pallav Mittal with Barclays. Pallav Mittal: Most of my questions have been answered. A couple of follow-ups. So firstly, can you comment on the number of transactions in the Swedish forest and how our transaction pricing looking this year because last couple of years, it has been flat to down. So any comment on that would be helpful. And then secondly, can you just talk about the profit split for the Board and Paper business? Is it still broadly 50-50? Stefan Lorehn: Well, if we start with the forest transaction market, most of the transactions are being done during the second half of the year. There's also a lag in the system when they are to be registered, et cetera. So it's quite limited of transactions so far this year as we can see. So it's hard to draw the conclusions for the full year already now. But what we have seen so far is no major changes in the property prices in Sweden. The next question is the split of profitability between Board and Paper. Well, board is heavily affected by the maintenance shuts that we have had both in Q2 and Q3. So it's hard to comment on the exact numbers in Q3. Henrik Sjölund: But both profitable. Stefan Lorehn: Both profitable, of course, yes. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Ladies and gentlemen, that was the last question. I would now like to turn the conference back over to management for any closing remarks. Henrik Sjölund: Thank you very much for good questions, good discussion. Look forward to see you soon again. Thank you.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to CenterPoint Energy's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call with senior management. [Operator Instructions] I will now turn the call over to Ben Vallejo, Director of Investor Relations and Corporate Planning. Mr. Vallejo? Ben Vallejo: Good morning, and welcome to CenterPoint's Q3 2025 Earnings Conference Call. Jason Wells, our CEO; and Chris Foster, our CFO, will discuss the company's third quarter results. Management will discuss certain topics that will contain projections and other forward-looking information and statements that are currently based on management's beliefs, assumptions and information currently available to management. These forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties. Actual results could differ materially based on various factors as noted in our Form 10-Q and other SEC filings as well as our earnings materials. We undertake no obligation to revise or update publicly any forward-looking statement other than as required under applicable securities laws. We reported diluted earnings per share of $0.45 for the third quarter of 2025 on a GAAP basis. Management will be discussing certain non-GAAP measures on today's call. When providing guidance, we use the non-GAAP EPS measure of diluted adjusted earnings per share on a consolidated basis referred to as non-GAAP EPS. For information on our guidance methodology and reconciliation of the non-GAAP measures used in providing guidance, please refer to our earnings news release and presentation on our website. We use our website to announce material information. This call is being recorded. Information on how to access the replay can be found on our website. Now I'd like to turn the call over to Jason. Jason Wells: Thank you, Ben, and good morning, everyone. On today's call, I'd like to address 3 key focus areas for the quarter. First, I will briefly touch on the 10-year financial plan update we introduced just weeks ago. Second, I will walk through our strong third quarter financial results. And lastly, I'll discuss our announcement from earlier this week regarding the sale of our Ohio gas LDC. Last month, we introduced an ambitious 10-year plan focused on supporting economic development, delivering strong customer outcomes, reducing O&M through operational efficiency and driving value for our investors. Our capital investment plan of at least $65 billion is supported by some of the fastest-growing demand for energy anywhere in the country. Importantly, we also have visibility to at least $10 billion of incremental capital investment opportunities over the course of the plan, particularly in Texas, given the dramatic growth the communities we serve continue to experience. Specifically, in our Houston Electric service territory, we forecast peak load demand to increase by 10 gigawatts in 2031. This forecasted growth would represent a nearly 50% increase in peak demand over the next 6 years. Additionally, through the middle of the next decade, we estimate the electric load demand on our system will double to approximately 42 gigawatts. This level of demand will continue to support a strong investment profile. Our capital investment plan through 2030 drives a projected rate base CAGR of over 11% through the end of the decade and the potential for double-digit rate base growth through the middle of the next decade. The Greater Houston area is thriving, powered by what we believe is the most diverse set of growth drivers in the sector. It is not relying on any single industry and the results speak for themselves. This growth isn't aspirational. It's already here. Notably throughput in our Houston Electric business were up 9% year-to-date. This strong growth is anchored by our surge in industrial customer class throughput, which are up over 17% quarter-over-quarter and up over 11% year-to-date. This incredible growth provides a solid foundation for our earnings guidance. Specifically, we have strong conviction in our ability to achieve non-GAAP EPS at the mid- to high end of our 7% to 9% annual growth guidance from 2026 through 2028, and 7% to 9% annually thereafter through 2035. I continue to believe we have one of the most differentiated plans in the industry because of our unique combination of the diversity and pace of electric demand growth, a derisked regulatory and financing profile and our ability to continue investing affordably for the benefit of our customers. These attributes set us apart from our peers and enable us to continue to deliver value for all our stakeholders over the next decade and beyond. Now moving to our strong third quarter financial results. This morning, we reported non-GAAP EPS of $0.50 for the third quarter, representing a 60% increase over the same period last year. As we signaled last quarter, 2025 earnings reflect a more back-end weighted profile for the year, consistent with our return to traditional capital recovery mechanisms now that the bulk of our rate case activity is behind us. I'll let Chris cover the details in his section, but we remain well positioned to execute on our recently increased 2025 non-GAAP EPS guidance. As such, we are reiterating our full year 2025 non-GAAP EPS guidance range of $1.75 to $1.77, which would represent 9% growth over 2024 delivered results of $1.62 per share. Additionally, we are also reiterating our 2026 non-GAAP earnings guidance we initiated a few weeks ago. As a reminder, we are targeting at least the midpoint of $1.89 to $1.91 per share. At the midpoint, this range would represent an 8% increase over the midpoint of our 2025 non-GAAP EPS guidance range. Further, we continue to expect to grow non-GAAP EPS at the mid- to high end of our 7% to 9% long-term annual guidance range from 2026 through 2028 and 7% to 9% annually through 2035. As a reminder, our guidance is based on actual delivered results as we continue to execute and deliver value for our shareholders each and every year. I'd now like to discuss the recent announcement regarding the sale of our Ohio gas LDC. Earlier this week, we announced the signing of our Ohio gas LDC transaction, which is expected to generate approximately $2.6 billion in gross proceeds, representing a significant milestone in executing our 10-year financial plan. The strong valuation of approximately 1.9x 2024 rate base underscores the exceptional demand for U.S. natural gas LDCs. This outcome once again demonstrates our ability to efficiently finance our growth investments, this time by recycling the transaction proceeds of a high-quality business at nearly 2x book value and reallocating capital into our remaining portfolio at 1x book value. The after-tax net cash proceeds of approximately $2.4 billion will be redeployed into higher growth jurisdictions to efficiently fund our capital investment plan. Importantly, the proceeds should also provide additional flexibility in funding for future incremental capital investments. The transaction is expected to close in the fourth quarter of 2026. Chris will go into the details of the transaction, including its structure, which will allow us to more smoothly redeploy capital while maintaining a strong earnings profile. It has been a privilege to serve the customers and communities in our Ohio gas business, and we are committed to a smooth transition for our customers. This is a tremendous business with fantastic employees, and we know they will continue to provide great service to the 335,000 meter customers in Ohio. This transaction reflects our continued commitment to disciplined capital allocation as we seek to further enable growth, especially in Texas and long-term value creation for all stakeholders. Our growing capital investment opportunities are supported by accelerating and diverse set of load growth drivers. This, coupled with our ability to efficiently finance our plan continues to support our conviction that we have one of the most tangible long-term growth plans in the industry. And with that, I'll hand it over to Chris. Christopher Foster: Thanks, Jason. This morning, I will address 4 key areas of focus. First, I will review the details of our third quarter results. Second, I'll discuss the transaction structure of the recently announced sale of our Ohio gas LDC. Third, I'll highlight our progress on the execution of our 2025 capital investment plan. And lastly, I'll provide an update on where we ended the third quarter with respect to the balance sheet. Let's now move to the financial results shown on Slide 5. On a GAAP EPS basis, we reported $0.45 for the third quarter of 2025. On a non-GAAP EPS basis, we reported $0.50 for the third quarter of 2025 compared to $0.31 in the third quarter of 2024. Our non-GAAP results removed $0.03 of charges, primarily consisting of tax true-ups related to the sale of our Louisiana and Mississippi businesses and transaction costs in connection with our announced Ohio gas LDC sale. In addition, it removes $0.02 related to our temporary generation units as these units are no longer part of our rate-regulated business. These strong results give us confidence in meeting our positively revised 2025 non-GAAP EPS guidance of $1.75 to $1.77. Now taking a closer look at the drivers of our third quarter earnings. Growth and rate recovery when netted with depreciation and other taxes were a favorable variance of $0.07 when compared to the same quarter of last year. This positive variance underscores the strength of our interim capital tracker mechanisms, which continue to support the efficient recovery of our investments. We expect these tailwinds to continue driving earnings through the remainder of the year. During the quarter, we filed for our second set of interim capital recovery trackers at Houston Electric, the TCOS and DCRF mechanisms, which support the timely recovery of transmission and distribution investments, respectively. Our TCOS filing, which included a $15 million annual revenue requirement increase was approved and reflected in customer rates on October 10. Our DCRF filing, which includes a $55 million annual revenue increase is on the PUCT open meeting agenda for later today with updated rates expected to take effect in December. Weather and usage were $0.01 favorable when compared to the comparable quarter last year, driven by fewer outages across our Houston Electric service territory related to storm activity. O&M was $0.12 favorable compared to the third quarter of 2024. This significant improvement in O&M is primarily driven by last August vegetation management and other storm-related costs, where we spent approximately $100 million to accelerate work and improve customer outcomes. Additionally, we had $0.03 of favorability in other, which is primarily driven by an income tax remeasurement. This reflects our continued efforts to optimize our tax structure to align with the evolving composition of our portfolio, which after the closing of our Ohio transaction, will skew more heavily towards Texas. These favorable drivers were partially offset by $0.04 of higher interest expense and financing costs, primarily due to incremental debt issuances since the third quarter of 2024. Next, I'll go through the details of our recently announced Ohio gas LDC sale. As many of you may have seen earlier this week, we announced the sale of our Ohio gas LDC, which is expected to generate gross sale proceeds of approximately $2.62 billion, garnering a multiple of nearly 1.9x 2024 year-end rate base. We anticipate total net proceeds of roughly $2.4 billion after taxes and transaction costs. This is an outstanding outcome. This result exceeds what was contemplated in our financing plans, underscoring the conservative approach we take to our planning process. As such, the transaction will be accretive to both our plan and alternative financing sources. In the near term, these proceeds will serve to further strengthen our balance sheet. And over the long term, as Jason alluded to, this transaction will allow for greater financing flexibility and may enable us to fund incremental capital investments with less equity than the 47% rule of thumb we provided at our September investor update. Transaction proceeds will be redeployed into higher growth jurisdictions to support near-term capital investments in our Texas Electric and Gas businesses. Notably, after the close of this transaction, Texas will represent 70% of our investment portfolio. In connection with the transaction, we will enter into a 1-year seller's note with a 6.5% annual coupon, which will help support earnings in 2027. As a reminder, last quarter, we announced an increase to our 2025 investment plan as we continue to make targeted system enhancements. These incremental investments will help partially offset the loss of Ohio investments upon the close of the sale. The transaction is expected to close in the fourth quarter of 2026, aligning with our financing plans and long-term value creation goals. Next, I'll touch on our capital investment plan execution through the third quarter, as shown here on Slide 7. For the quarter, we are right on track to meet our positively revised 2025 capital investment target of $5.3 billion. In the third quarter, we invested $1.3 billion of base work for the benefit of our customers and communities, which, combined with the $2.4 billion we invested in the first half of the year, represents approximately 70% of our total year target. In short, we remain well positioned to achieve our investment targets for 2025. Now moving to an update on our balance sheet and credit metrics. As of the end of the quarter, our trailing 12 months adjusted FFO to debt ratio based on the Moody's rating methodology was 14% when removing transitory storm-related impacts. We anticipate these credit metrics could be further improved by early next year as we expect to issue securitization bonds in connection with Hurricane Barrel in the first quarter of 2026. We continue to target 100 to 150 basis points above our Moody's downgrade threshold of 13% as we remain laser-focused on efficiently financing our robust capital investment plan. Earlier this month, we once again illustrated our commitment to a strong balance sheet through our $700 million junior subordinated note issuance, which provides 50% equity credit. Our common equity guide through 2030 remains unchanged at $2.75 billion. As a reminder, we have derisked over $1 billion of these equity needs through the forward sales we executed earlier this year, and we do not anticipate common equity needs beyond those forward sales from now through 2027. We believe we are well positioned to execute the remainder of the year and beyond, and we are reaffirming our 2025 non-GAAP EPS guidance range of $1.75 to $1.77, which equates to 9% growth at the midpoint from our delivered 2024 non-GAAP EPS of $1.62. Additionally, we are also reiterating our 2026 non-GAAP earnings guidance we initiated a few weeks ago at our investor update from the midpoint of our new and higher 2025 range. For 2026, we are targeting at least the midpoint of $1.89 to $1.91. At the midpoint, this would represent an 8% increase over the midpoint of our 2025 non-GAAP EPS guidance range. Looking ahead, we expect to grow non-GAAP EPS at the mid- to high end of our 7% to 9% range from 2026 through 2028. After 2028, we will target growing earnings annually at 7% to 9% through 2035. We look forward to executing our plan that delivers on the most diverse growth drivers in the country, fueling economic development for years to come. And with that, I'll now turn the call back over to Jason. Jason Wells: Thank you, Chris. I'm proud of the team's continued execution over the past quarter and the results that firmly put us on track to deliver our guidance this year. This management team will work to not only execute the ambitious targets we set forth in our new industry-leading 10-year plan, but we will also work to enhance the plan for the benefit of all of our stakeholders. Ben Vallejo: Thanks, Jason. Operator, I'd now like to turn it over to Q&A. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question is from Nick Campanella of Barclays. Nicholas Campanella: I just wanted to ask, Chris, you talked a little bit about it in your prepared remarks on balance sheet capacity here from the Ohio transaction. How are you kind of viewing it on like an FFO to debt improvement basis versus the plan? You mentioned financing maybe less than the 47% equity assumption. Is that now 30% or 15%? Is there any kind of way to further quantify that? Christopher Foster: Sure. Nick, if I could just maybe take a step back. And as you look at the transaction, there's really a couple of things going on. One is, over time, you've seen us continue down this path of increasing really the focus on the portfolio where we're reducing also earnings and cash lag where we can. So maybe that kind of goes to your FFO to debt point. As you look at the total outcome as we do sources and uses, you'll probably see us initially step into reducing the OpCo debt that's there. So that's roughly $800 million if you base it on a year-end '26 rate base of $1.6 billion. And then as we look at our plan overall, you're probably looking on the order of $400 million of benefit net to plan. So ultimately, what this puts us in a position to do, as you can imagine, is we'll evaluate both the improvement to the balance sheet here in the near term. And then as we go forward, it could allow us to deploy additional CapEx to the plan in an accretive way. Nicholas Campanella: Okay. Great. Appreciate it. And then just maybe on the deal, just any update on how local feedback has been on the ground and reception to the deal from state leadership since it was announced? Jason Wells: Yes. Nick, it's Jason. Reception has been great so far, very supportive. Don't anticipate any challenges and obviously going to work with our counterparty to successfully transition this business and continue the track record of great service in Ohio. Operator: Our next question is from Steve Fleishman with Wolfe Research. Steven Fleishman: Just maybe, Jason or Chris, more color on the sales growth in Texas, which obviously that's very strong. Just what sectors are driving the industrial sales so much higher this year? Jason Wells: Steve, thanks for the question. I think the throughput growth quarter-over-quarter, year-over-year really reflects the diversity of drivers that we have here in the Greater Houston area. We've already connected this year alone over 0.5 gig of data center activity. Much of that is on the transmission sort of industrial rate side. We continue to see very strong demand from energy, refining, processing and exports. And I think what we really saw as a differentiator this quarter was the increase in activity at the Port of Houston. It's the largest port by waterborne tonnage in the world. And we saw about an 18% increase quarter-over-quarter in exports. So it's really just a diversity of drivers. This isn't growth that we're anticipating coming down the line. This is growth across a number of different industries that we're experiencing today. Steven Fleishman: Okay. Great. That's helpful. And then just any update on prospects of data center activity in Indiana. And I don't know if you want to share any thoughts on how you're feeling about the regulatory environment in Indiana. I know you don't have any cases there right now, but just thoughts there. Jason Wells: Yes. We continue to actively work on data center opportunities in Indiana and feel well positioned to deliver on that. As we've talked about in the past, I think we're pretty uniquely positioned in the fact that we've got excess capacity today in the system that allows us to move quickly. It's an area that is very constructive, both from a cost of and availability of land, water, et cetera. And we've just brought online our simple cycle plant that was built to be easily converted to combined cycle that would allow us to efficiently increase the level of capacity available. So we continue to feel good about the prospects of bringing data center activity to Southwest Indiana. Stepping back on kind of a broader basis, we are all focused on affordability of our service up there. We, like many of the other Indiana utilities had a fairly significant step-up in rates last year as a result of a long-term trend of closing some very old generating facilities. As we project forward, though, we don't -- we see our rates growing in line with inflation over the remainder of this decade. We've taken some steps to help kind of mitigate the impact. We've canceled about $1 billion of renewable projects and we'll push out the retirement of our third and final coal facility a few more years. And so I think at the end of the day, we, like other utilities, are taking proactive steps to make sure that we moderate the pace of rate increases, but working constructively to bring economic development activity to the state. And I think that's very much aligned with the state leadership goals. Operator: Our next question is from Jeremy Tonet with JPMorgan Securities. Jeremy Tonet: Chris, thanks for the comments there on the asset sale. I was just wondering if you might be able to expand a little bit more. It sounds like a nice credit accretive properties to the final deal terms versus expectations. I'm just wondering if you could expand a bit more, I guess, on whether you see this being accretive to the earnings over time or any thoughts on that side? Christopher Foster: Sure. I think, Jeremy, a couple of ways to look at this. We do see it as directly beneficial to the financing plan, as I mentioned, and helpful from an earnings standpoint, too. A thing to keep in mind is, as we looked at the sale here of Ohio specifically from a -- as we reallocate spend, we're going to be in a situation where we're experiencing 25% to 30% less cash lag just on a historical basis. So I think that's certainly helpful as well. Going forward, we'll be putting those dollars to work, as Jason mentioned, certainly heavily in our Texas Gas and Electric business, including in a set of Texas gas projects that we're excited about really for years to come, where it really is a great business, as you know, coming out of the rate case last year there. So I think well positioned both financing-wise and from an earnings standpoint. Keep in mind, I alluded to this in my prepared remarks, but I would just emphasize here, too, as we're stepping into making sure that we were managing any otherwise earnings impact, we've already deployed about $500 million this year that we expressed in our plan. And keep in mind, as I mentioned earlier, this is about $1.6 billion of year-end '26 rate base. So you should assume that we're also going to accelerate another roughly $1 billion in 2026. That means that here, we're going to fully replace that rate base by the beginning of 2027. So overall, positions us well going forward. Jeremy Tonet: That's very helpful. And just one more, I guess, on the seller's note as you guys are receiving in the deal as far as how you think about how that helps facilitate the plan and what value, I guess, that brings to CenterPoint here being able to layer that in and how that allows you, I guess, to manage earnings going forward, but it sounds like the capital plan, as you said, really is a big offset there. Christopher Foster: Yes. Certainly, from a capital allocation plan, we've been prefunding thoughtfully. What I would say on the seller note is it's a pretty straightforward instrument there where we'll have that opportunity for the second year to 2027, having that 6.5% coupon associated with it on just over $1 billion. And so it allows us, again, to have good clarity. It also settles on a quarterly basis, I think, which is nice, too. So there's no real lag there. So straightforward instrument, one that it's a helpful component of the plan as well. Operator: Our last question comes from the line of Julien Dumoulin-Smith with Jefferies. Julien Dumoulin-Smith: Jason, quickly, a couple of things to follow up on. First off, I know you alluded to it a few weeks ago here, but how do you think about the AMI and rollout and the time line on that front? I mean, certainly, it seems like this is a multiyear project here. But certainly, within the scope of the 5-year plan, how do you think about the cadence of that rolling in? When do we start to get some visibility around that and contributions? Jason Wells: Yes, Julien, thanks for the question. This next generation of AMI investments really will start to fold into the plan in '26. Maybe taking a step back for a second, as we released the new $65 billion 10-year CapEx plan we identified more than $10 billion of upside. I would consider one of these projects as one of the upside opportunities to that plan. I think coming back to the timing, the most important thing that we can do is run a pilot in '26 to prove the use case and benefits for our customers. And then I would really look at that once we have that pilot in hand, making a filing with the PUCT and really starting to kind of work this project in earnest beginning in 2027 and beyond. I think there are very real benefits for our customers. As we've talked about in the past, when we experienced Winter Storm Uri, because of the generation of meters we had at the time, we could not use those meters for load shed-related activities. Instead, we had to shed load at the circuit level. This next generation of smart meters would allow us to do that at the home and I think would allow us to be much more targeted and allow for even more rolling of power if an event like Winter Storm Uri was to occur again. So a number of benefits to our customers. We need to prove those out with a pilot in '26 and then look towards more fulsome deployment beginning in '27. Julien Dumoulin-Smith: Excellent. And then if I could pivot in a slightly different direction, obviously, kudos on the transaction here. The other item, if I were to think about like what's not in terms of included in the formal guidance on cash flows is mobile gen. I perceive that the economics and price points there continue to improve as evidenced maybe by some of the folks out there like Fermi talking about this. But how would you characterize today where you are around that and the opportunities that exist more in the longer term, obviously, is that it's less committed in terms of the existing units and your exposure to some of that improved market pricing? Jason Wells: Yes. There's really 2 aspects to that, Julien. There's first, we've got what we call medium-sized units, just a little bit larger than 5 megawatts a piece, 5 units, 5 megawatts a piece that currently we have the ability to market and are actively doing that. The market for those units remains very strong and would be a potential cash flow tailwind to the plan. On a larger basis, we have 15 units that are roughly kind of call them, 30 megawatts a piece that are now actively supporting the grid outside of San Antonio until either kind of late '26, early '27 at the latest, at which time then we'll be able to remarket those units. As you said, the market remains strong. If anything, it is improving modestly. That will become a cash flow tailwind when we can release those units from the support of the ERCOT grid in San Antonio and remarket those again probably likely around spring of '27. So we continue to work with brokers, third parties to keep a pulse on the market and think about how we can kind of derisk and take advantage of this growth. But obviously, more to come here as the quarters unfold and as we get closer to those -- the release of those units. Julien Dumoulin-Smith: Excellent. Sorry, nothing to, but one final detail here. HB4384, right? So that's -- your peers in the state, your peer gas utilities in the state have been talking a good bit about this. I know that you all in the interim have talked up even more gas investments in your plan a few weeks ago. Is the scope of the contribution from that legislation fully included in the plan? And to what extent is there anything else that we should be considering here given your expanded investment in gas in recent weeks? Jason Wells: Yes. We think that was a very constructive piece of legislation to help sort of reduce regulatory lag. What I would say is the benefit of that legislation is incorporated in the plan that we released with respect to the investments that we have identified as we continue to look at enhancing the plan, and we've alluded to the $10 billion plus outside, there is opportunity as we fold gas-related capital in that the plan could be enhanced further with the benefit of that legislation. So partially in the plan has the opportunity to be improved as we fold more capital in. Ben Vallejo: Thanks, Jason. Operator, this concludes our call. Thank you all for joining. Operator: This concludes CenterPoint Energy's Third Quarter 202 Earnings Conference Call. Thank you for your participation.
Unknown Executive: Good morning, and welcome to TGS Q3 2025 presentation. My name is Bård Stenberg, Vice President, Investor Relations and Business Intelligence in TGS. Today's presentation will be given by CEO, Kristian Johansen; and CFO, Sven Børre Larsen. Before we start, I would like to draw your attention to the cautionary statement showing on the screen and available in today's earnings release and presentation. For those of you on the webcast, you can start typing in questions during the presentation, and we will address those after management's concluding remarks. So with that, I give the word to you, Kristian. Kristian Johansen: Thank you, Bård, and welcome, everyone. So I'll start with the Q3 highlights. And before I go through the numbers, I just want to say I'm very pleased that we have a solid recovery after a very weak Q2, and I want to thank all our employees for pursuing sales opportunities aggressively in a challenging market and at the same time, being extremely focused on our cost base, which you will see from the numbers that we have a solid beat on EBITDA and EBIT due to lower cost in the quarter. So starting with the numbers on the top line, we had revenues of $388 million. That compares to $308 million in the second quarter of this year. So sequentially, that's a 26% increase. As I said, our EBITDA was strong at $242 million. That's a 62% profit margin and again, driven by a very strong cost focus of the organization. We had a Q3 EBIT of $105 million. So it's the first time in several quarters that we're over $100 million in EBIT, and that represents a 27% profit margin. We had an order inflow of $436 million, and that takes our total order backlog up to $479 million -- sorry, total order backlog of $473 million at the end of Q3. Our cash flow was strong, and that means that with a free cash flow of $81 million and $30 million dividend payment, we managed to reduce our net debt from $432 million or down to $432 million, and this compares to $479 million in Q2 of 2025. We're maintaining our dividend of $0.155 per share, and we have also adjusted our CapEx guidance down. So that's been reduced to $110 million versus previously $135 million. So overall, strong numbers and strong -- slightly stronger than we expected for Q3, which is always good after, as I said, a very disappointing Q2. On the business update, and I'm not going to cover all the projects that we had in the quarter, but what you can see here is that Q3 is usually dominated by a strong North Sea season. So we have almost half of our assets working in the North Sea during the summer season and into Q3. You see we had 2 vessels in Brazil, and we're probably going to keep vessels in Brazil for the time being due to strong interest for data acquisition and even our existing data library. We also have OBN operations, so 2 OBN operations in the U.S. Gulf. And then you see we have 1 vessel in Egypt and 1 vessel in India during Q3 of 2025. I'll also cover the business units. So starting with multi-client. We had multi-client sales of $226 million in the quarter that compares to $277 million in Q3 of 2024. And the difference there is pretty much explained by higher transfer fees in Q3 that we -- in last year than we had in Q3 this year. Multi-client investments of $86 million this quarter compared to $129 million in the same quarter of last year. And again, that corresponds to a sales to investment for the last 12 months of 2.1. That's similar to what we had last year. But again, it's above the historical average of about 1.9. So very pleased about continued strong sales investments of our multi-client data. In terms of new awards and key projects that we were executing in Q3, we had PAMA Phase II offshore Brazil. This is a streamer survey in the Equatorial margin area. And then we had another project in the same area called Megabar Extension Phase I. And it was a pleasure for us and for TGS, Petrobras and Brazil to see that Petrobras finally got environmental approval to start drilling in this area. And this is an area where TGS has been acquiring lots of data over the past 12 to 18 months. So again, extremely excited to see that things are moving on. And for those of you who remember the last lease sale in Brazil, you also saw companies such as Chevron and Exxon picking up blocks in that area. So this is a --probably one of the last frontiers and one of the most exciting frontiers in Brazil for sure. So great interest from clients on both surveys that we've been carrying out for, yes, over the past 18 months. Then last but not least, we had a project called Amendment West 1 in the Gulf of America in the quarter. So this is an ultra-long offset OBN survey over legacy streamer data, and this is a TGS-only project with no partners. If we move on to the historical multi-client performance, just to put the quarter in the perspective, and this looks at -- last 12-month sale is a light blue and then dark blue is investments. And then the line there, the gray line is last 12 months sales over investments. And you see it's coming up from about 1.9 in the previous quarter to about 2.1 now. So really where we want to be in terms of profitability of our multi-client business, which historically has been yielding returns of somewhere between 1.9 and 2.0. Our internal goal when we start a new multi-client project is always around 2. Marine Data acquisition, relatively weak quarter as we expected, and we guided the market after Q2 that Q3 would be relatively low in terms of activity level, and then we came in slightly above what we expected. We had contract revenues for OBN of $87 million versus $127 million last year. Our streamer contract revenues in the quarter were $127 million, and we had total gross revenues of $215 million. And as you see, a strong EBITDA margin of about 36% for our assets in Q3. In terms of new awards and key projects executed during the quarter, we had -- we were awarded a streamer contract in the Mediterranean, as you all know, commenced acquisition of that in Q3. And then we have secured a large streamer contract offshore Indonesia in the quarter, and this is scheduled to start in Q4, has a duration of 8 months. It's a big contract. And again, it's mostly 3D, but the last month of the 8 months is going to be a 4D over some existing production. We've also been awarded a streamer acquisition contract in Africa. So this is a Q4 start, and it has a duration of about 50 days with some options to extend. And then we have an OBN contract in the Gulf of America. This is also due to commence in Q4, and it has a duration of 4.5 months, a quite large contract for our OBN crew in the Gulf of America. In terms of our new Energy Solutions business, we had contract revenues of $18 million. It's up from $16 million in the same quarter of last year. Multi-client revenues of $5 million versus $3 million last year. So total revenues of $23 million, which is up from $19 million in Q3 of 2024. And again, as with the other business units, a stronger EBITDA margin year-on-year as compared to Q3 of 2024. We've been awarded a UHR-3D contract offshore Norway. This commenced acquisition in early July, and we were acquiring that data going into Q3. We acquired also a CCS contract offshore Norway. And then we continue our collaboration with Equinor through our --subsidiary, Prediktor through something called Prediktor Data Gateway solution, and this is delivered to Equinor's Empire Wind Project. Also happy to see that Imaging & Technology continues a strong growth with good margins. So on the gross imaging revenues, we're $32 million versus $26 million last year. But if you look at the external imaging revenues, they are about $20 million. So it's a doubling of revenues compared to last year. And you've seen that we've been on that kind of growth track for quite some time. We have a -- yes, $20 million this quarter. We're going to be slightly short of $80 million for the year. And again, next year, our goal is for imaging to be above $100 million in external revenues with strong EBITDA margins. So we continue to take market share in the Imaging & Technology space. And part of that -- part of the reason for that is a strong strategic focus on the external market. TGS used to be more focused on the internal market and processing of multi-client projects. But now we made a strategic choice that we're going to go after the external imaging market, and you see the results of that with significant growth and good margins. We see a significant reduction of HPC costs from added scale. So TGS is a big customer of the big cloud compute providers such as Google, AWS, et cetera. And we see obviously great benefits and synergies from the combination of TGS and PGS in that regard. So again, as I said, we expect continued growth in external imaging revenues, and you've already seen a substantial margin improvement on the imaging side. With that, I'm going to hand it over to Sven Børre, and then I will be back talking about the outlook shortly. Thank you very much. Sven Larsen: Thank you, Kristian. Good morning, everyone. It's always a pleasure to report strong financial numbers. So although the revenue numbers are not that strong in a historical perspective, highlighting the upside potential in the longer term, they are quite strong in a relative perspective and relative to where we've been in -- particularly in Q2, of course. But more importantly, we have a very strong performance on all other parameters, including cost and cash flow parameters. So we are very, very pleased about that. So let me take you quickly through the numbers. On the revenue side, we came in at $388 million. That consisted of $217 million of multi-client revenues and $171 million of contract revenues. The multi-client revenues were particularly strong in the quarter, mainly driven by strong sales from the Vintage library. The prefunding of new projects were actually lower this quarter than we have seen in some of the previous quarters. So library sales, very strong in the quarter. Then going to net operating expenses. I'll come -- go into more detail on that on a later page here. So let me just mention that the net operating expenses were $147 million versus $221 million in the same quarter of last year. So a significant reduction there, of course. Depreciation and amortization. Depreciation, $61 million continues to be reasonably stable, around plus/minus $60 million, as you can see on a quarterly basis. Amortization was quite low in the quarter. The straight-line amortization is stable, whereas the accelerated amortization is quite low in the quarter. That's partially explained by the lower prefunding rate, as I talked about, but I'll -- and also, of course, explained by the mix of the different types of projects that we have in the portfolio right now. This gave us an EBIT of $105 million in this quarter, corresponding to an EBIT margin of 27%, slightly ahead of the operating result in the same quarter of last year despite having significantly higher revenues last year. Then as I promised, I'll go -- in more detail through the cost base and how the cost has developed during the quarter and how it is likely to develop going forward. On the chart here on the left-hand side, you see Q3 specifically, this Q3 compared to the Q3 of 2024. So as you can see on the left-hand bar in both those 2 charts, you see the gross operating expenses. And you can see it's at $217 million is significantly down compared to the $289 million we had last year. It's -- the decline is particularly visible, obviously, on cost of sales. And it has to do with several factors. First of all, of course, we have gone through, as we have talked about in previous presentations as well, we've gone through quite a bit of efficiency -- efficiency projects internally. We have realized a lot of cost synergies, of course. And also, after the integration project has been more or less completed, we have continued to look at different efficiency gains, and we've been quite successful in that. But I also have to admit it's also, of course, partially related to lower activity, particularly on the OBN side, where utilization of the crews that we got is a bit lower in this Q3 relative to the Q3 of last year. And finally, there is also some, call it, nonrecurring items in the quarter, which reduced the cost of sales by a little bit more than $10 million. It's probably-- it's not genuinely nonrecurring items. They are nonrecurring in this quarter, but it's -- most of it is a reversal of costs that have been expensed previously. So over time, it's not a nonrecurring cost, but in this particular quarter, it is nonrecurring. And as you can see, if you compare to the same parameters of last year, we are significantly down even when adjusting for the one-off costs we had related to the merger integration process in last year. So you see that last year, we had $162 million of cost of sales. There were no merger integration costs in that number. On personnel cost, we had $95 million, where we had $11 million approximately of merger integration-related costs. So the underlying costs in that quarter were $84 million, still well -- still well above the $69 million we have in this quarter. And on other operating costs, we had approximately $5 million of -- or $6 million of merger integration-related costs. So the underlying cost there was $25 million in the previous quarter. So we're actually a little bit up this quarter compared to last quarter on an underlying basis, and that has to do with compute. We are using more high-performance compute resources now than we did last year. And that obviously has to do with higher imaging activity and more use of AI and machine learning and algorithms that require more high-performance computing, and that's an -- a deliberate development, of course. If you look at the right-hand chart or the right-hand side of the page, you see a chart showing the cost development on a last 12-month basis over time here. And as you can see, the last 12 months as of end of Q3, we had $982 million of gross cost. Our guidance remains firm at -- around $950 million for the year as a whole. So you see the trend there. We have come significantly down, and we expect to come further down in -- when we report Q3 -- Q4. In fact, we -- if anything, we expect to be below $950 million and not above. So we're quite happy with the development on the cost side, and you can also see the evolution of our guidance through the year on the right-hand side of the chart there with the dark bar where we have -- where we're down basically $100 million relative to the original gross cost guidance. So we have done a lot on the cost side, which is obviously helping us quite a bit in terms of delivering a strong EBITDA in this quarter. Looking at the profit and loss statement, we had $388 million of total revenues consisting of $217 million of multi-client revenues and $171 million of contract revenues. I've talked about cost of sales, personnel costs and other operating costs, which already. This gave us an EBITDA of $242 million compared to $280 million in the same quarter of last year. Straight-line amortization was $60.5 million, where its roughly where it has been on the --on the previous quarters. As I mentioned, accelerated amortization, quite low this quarter related to the mix of projects we were doing and a lower prefunding rate. We had a small impairment on one of the multiclient projects that we do. That's not uncommon. As you can see, we had something similar in the same quarter of last year. And depreciation of $61 million, which gave us this operating profit of $105 million. We had financial income of $4.3 same level as last year. We had financial expenses of $19.4 million, which is slightly above last year, which may surprise people because we did a refinancing that reduced the interest cost quite significantly in Q4 of last year. However, bear in mind that we took a lot of that interest saving in the PPA. So we wrote up the PGS debt in the PPA, which reduced the interest charge in the PPL -- P&L already ahead of the refinancing. So that's the main explanation for that, call it, not so intuitive development. And this gave us a result before taxes of $85 million compared to $97 million in the same quarter of last year. Cash flow, as Kristian alluded to, quite strong in the quarter. We had cash flow from operations of $242 million in the quarter, almost the same level as the $265 million we had last year when you subtract the multi-client investment and CapEx and adjust for timing and working capital movements. We had cash flow from investment activities negative by $94 million compared to $59 million in the same quarter of last year. And then -- if you then subtract the cash flow items related to financing of $97 million, we end up with a net change in cash and cash equivalents of $50 million in this quarter compared to $82.6 million -- or $83 million in the same quarter of last year. So looking at cash flow in a slightly different way, looking at the evolution of our net debt, you can see that we reduced that quite significantly in this quarter. So the cash flow before dividend, which is a key measure that we are looking at internally was $77 million in this quarter. We paid the dividend of $30 million, which helped us reduce net debt from $479 million to $432 million at the end of the quarter. Let me -- and this is to be compared with our net debt target of $250 million to $350 million. That's the range we are aiming at, and we're getting down there. It takes a little bit longer time than we initially planned for, and that has to do with the market development, but we are still firm in our belief that we will get there in -- in due course. Let me also mention that in Q4, you should expect a somewhat negative development in net working capital items. So it's a seasonal thing. And so you shouldn't expect the cash flow after net working capital adjustments to be as strong in Q4. Balance sheet, not many significant developments worth mentioning here. The only thing I'm going to mention is the goodwill. You can see that it's down by $4 million. That has to do with the PPA adjustments that we did. So when you do an acquisition as we did with PGS, you can do PPA adjustments up until 12 months after the acquisition closed. And -- and what we have done here is that -- we have increased our long-term receivables by $4 million and reduced the goodwill by a corresponding number. And apart from that, the balance sheet, of course, remains very strong and even stronger than it was at the end of Q2, given the net debt development. This allows us to continue to pay a dividend of USD 0.155 per share, corresponding to NOK 1.56 per share in this quarter. The ex-date is 1 week from now on the 30th of October, and we will pay the dividend to the shareholders on the 13th of November. So by that, I'll hand the word back to you, Kristian. Kristian Johansen: Thank you, Sven, and we're going to touch on the outlook, and I'll start with a slide that we find very interesting, but it's a bit challenging to understand. So I'll take you through it very slowly. But if you start on the left-hand side, you see the chart there, you see that the light gray color shows the current decline curve. So that is debated whether it's 8% as we show here, and these are numbers from IEA or whether it's 15%, which is Exxon's number that they publicly state that the real decline curve is. But anyway, if you use 8%, 8% is then equivalent to losing more than the current production from Brazil and Norway every year for the next 10 years. It's quite steep even at 8%. But then in order to satisfy demand going forward, then the big question is how much do we need to invest and how much does the E&P sector need to invest? So if I take you to the right-hand side and you go all the way to 2025, you see that we as an industry or the E&P industry globally invest around $600 billion in CapEx. That's a total CapEx of the entire industry. And that's been pretty much the average. It's just -- right now, it's about $575 million, and it's been $600 million pretty much on average for the past 3 or 4 years. If you take that information, the $600 billion and you take it back again to the left-hand side, you see that $600 billion is the second blue color from the top. That's where it's going to take us in terms of continuing to invest at today's level, which basically is flat. It's a flat demand compared to today. So today's or the current investments are probably going to satisfy a flat demand development going forward. But if you think that demand for oil and gas is going to continue to grow in the future, we need to invest more. And we actually need to invest probably somewhere around $750 million because that takes us up to the expected demand going forward. So it's a very powerful slide in terms of understanding that today's investment level is not sufficient to satisfy any growth in demand. And I think most of you and most other readers would argue that there will be growth. There will be continued growth in demand. We've seen that, and we've been wrong several times. Demand has surprised on the upside, and it will continue to do so. So again, today's investment level from the industry is not sufficient in terms of satisfying any demand growth going forward. And that is further backed by the second slide we have. So last week, I attended something called Energy Intelligence Forum in London. And I think 8 out of the 10 -- 8 CEOs of the 10 largest oil companies in the world were there. And I just included some quotes from 4 of the CEOs that were there and attended the conference. And the first one from Darren Woods who said that the oil market oversupply is likely to be short term with demand from emerging economies set to make meeting global energy demand more challenging in the medium to longer term. I mean, Nasser was very clear that we had a decade where people didn't explore. It's going to have an impact. If it doesn't happen, there will be a supply crunch. And then Patrick Pouyanné from TotalEnergies, this non-OPEC supply, which today is impacting the market from Brazil, Guyana and shale oil will plateau. There is a limit to this growth. And then finally, Vicki Hollub from Occi said that discoveries have gone way down. Investment in exploration has gone way down, but it's not just investment that's a problem. We just aren't finding big resources anymore. So very much backing the statement that we had on the first slide that the industry needs to invest more if you believe in demand growth for oil and gas and I think most of us are now convinced that there will be continued growth in demand for both oil and gas. Going more to the micro level in terms of streamer contract tenders, it's down, and it's down for 2 reasons, mainly the fact that there's been quite a few awards recently. So TGS has been awarded a couple of streamer contracts quite recently. And also on the OBN side, we have announced 2 contracts recently. But the market is not great. There is nothing that indicates that 2026 is going to be a great year for contract tenders. I have to be honest and state that. But keep in mind that this does not include multi-client. And we have big projects in Brazil. As I said, we have 2 vessels in Brazil as we speak, probably going to keep those 2 vessels there for the time being. And we have -- we see great -- or a great uptick in activity in Africa in terms of multi-client. So the fact that multi-client is not part of this means that this slide gives a very skewed picture in terms of how the market for TGS actually is. So I feel like with the recent increase you've seen in our order backlog, which is mainly and very much driven by multi-client prefunding, I think we see a future that is far brighter than this slide will indicate. On the OBN market development, 2025 will be back to 2023 level in terms of activities or total revenues for this sector or segment, and that is down from 2024. So that significant growth trajection that we saw in 3 years that has stopped and has come down slightly. This is partly due to some big projects in Brazil that have been awarded, but they have not been acquired yet. So they haven't started yet. And these are big projects that TGS was unsuccessful in winning and some smaller competitors won big projects in Brazil that again has not yet started. So we’ll wish them good luck on that. In terms of the guidance for the 2025, obviously we're entering the last quarter of the year. So our multi-client investments, we keep our guidance of $425 million to $475 million. We're probably going to be in that kind of mid-range of that investment guidance. We're going to have approximately 70% of the investment expected to be acquired with our own capacity. In terms of CapEx, as we've said a couple of times today, we're reducing our CapEx guidance from $135 million to $110 million. And on the gross operating cost, we again target $950 million for the year. So that's unchanged from the previous quarter. In terms of utilization, we expect improved utilization year-on-year of our 3D streamer fleet and again, partly helped by multi-client. And then we expect lower OBN acquisition activity, which you have seen, especially over the past quarter or so. So that will be down compared to 2024. And to give you slightly more flavor on that, so we'll start with the order backlog and inflow. So again, as you see, the order inflow was strong this quarter at $430 million -- or above $430 million and that leads to a backlog of $473 million. Again, very weak numbers in Q2 this year, but a relatively solid comeback in Q3, where you see quite significant growth in the order inflow with the resulting increase in the total order backlog. And then you see on the right-hand side, you see the pie chart, and you're obviously familiar to that, and it gives you some guidance in terms of expected timing of recognizing this backlog as revenues. We also provide you with a summary of our booked positions. So basically, this is where our fleet and OBN crews are booked for the next 2 quarters. So you see on the streamer side, you see that we have about 16 months booked for Q4 and you see the composition of contract versus multi-client. And again, as I alluded to you see more multi-client there than contract. And again, if I look into the 2026, that's probably going to be the case. It's going to be more than 50% as we can tell today on multi-client because of good prefunding and a healthy backlog in terms of some of our big multi-client projects, particularly in Brazil. And then on the OBN schedule, you see that we're just short of 2 crews working for Q4, and it's going to be approximately the same for Q1, and it's pretty much 1 crew for multiclient and 1 crew for contract, and it's close to being fully utilized for 1 quarter. In terms of geomarkets, we're going to have contract work for our streamer fleet in Africa, Asia and then multi-client in Brazil. For the OBN, we're going to have contract work in Gulf of America and we're also going to have 1 crew working multiclient in the Gulf of America. We expect total multiclient investments in Q4 of $120 million and utilization, as I said on the left-hand side, you see pretty much how it's going to be for the next quarter. And then obviously, there is still time to book more capacity for Q1 of 2026. So with that, I'm ready to summarize the presentations. Again, pleased to announce solid performance on financial key figures. We had net debt reduced to $432 million based on a free cash flow of about $80 million and $30 million paid in dividends. We've been very disciplined in terms of cash outflow, meaning that we're reducing our 2025 CapEx by $25 million, and this has been reduced several times during the year. So the latest number now is about $110 million for the full year. Obviously, there is -- the short-term market development is sensitive to oil price, but the long-term market outlook, as you've seen from this presentation, remains very positive. And we're maintaining a dividend of $0.155 per share. With that, I want to bring Sven up here and the Bård is going to take you -- take us through some Q&As, and we'll take it from there. Thank you very much. Unknown Executive: Thank you, Kristian. We have a nice audience here in Oslo. So we can start with questions from the audience. Yes, John? Unknown Analyst: Yes. May I ask a little bit of detail on Sven Børre on the OpEx. You mentioned that the gross OpEx is $217 million was $217 million in Q3. And if I add the $10 million that you mentioned as nonrecurring, it will be $227 million. But what did you say -- were there any merger costs included in that $227 million? Sven Larsen: No, no. The merger costs I talked about were just for the comparable ‘24 number. Kristian Johansen: Right. Unknown Analyst: And going forward, what's still the running quarterly cost base in TGS? Is it $227 million? Sven Larsen: I mean we've guided for $950 million annualized. Unknown Analyst: That includes higher OpEx in the first quarter. What's the running on the quarterly basis? Sven Larsen: Yes, it's a bit lower than that. And it will depend a little bit on the activity level. But if you take a little bit lower than $950 million and divide by 4, you should be at an approximately right level. Unknown Analyst: It's not too far away from $227 million then? Sven Larsen: No, it should be reasonably representative. Unknown Analyst: And then a question on multi-client sales in the quarter. You want to specify or give an indication of the transfer fee? Did you book a transfer fee for the Chevron Hess deal in Q3? Kristian Johansen: No, we're not allowed to be specific on which transfer fees we booked, but I think the market has been pretty right in terms of there were a big transfer fee this quarter, and that was related to one transaction. We probably had 2 or 3. We have transfer fees in every given quarter, but there was one that was particularly large. I think the market has speculated that in total, we had transfer fees around $25 million, $30 million. So that's pretty much where it was. Unknown Analyst: And that means that other late sales were probably not too bad either. So I just wonder the key driver -- I assume one of the key drivers in Q3 was the U.S. Gulf -- the American -- the Gulf of America lease round in December. Is that correct? And also more specifically, did you see all the sales that you expect or most of the sales that you -- late sales that you expect in connection with the December round, did they come in Q3? And was there a significant impact on that? Or will you also see it in Q4? Kristian Johansen: Yes. There were a couple of drivers. And number one, you're right. I mean, our late sales was pretty strong regardless of whether you adjust for transfer fees or not. And our transfer fees were far lower in Q3 this year than they were last year, where the transfer fee was very high. I think one driver of the strong late sales in Q3 was a weak late sales in Q2. And I think that's a reminder to the market that when you looked at it, particularly late sales, but overall, the multi-client performance of TGS, you probably have to look at it in a slightly longer perspective. So if you look at the average of Q2 and Q3, you're more back to normalized level and Q2 was embarrassingly low and Q3 is back where we should be. So that was one driver is that Q2 was very low. Transfer fees, we've been discussing that. And the third one, yes, we had impact from the lease sale in the U.S. go that is coming up in Q4. Was that significant? Not really. I mean we're talking 10 to 20 rather than 40 to 60, right? Is there more to be sold? Absolutely. But we don't know when that's going to happen, and we don't know if it's going to happen. I mean it's obviously uncertainty around that. Sven Larsen: What we can say to add to that is that in the licensing round in '23, most of the sales related to that round happen after the round. So the dynamic around this is a bit uncertain, of course. Kristian Johansen: And we have talked about that multiple times that the licensing round, particularly in the U.S. haven't really had the same impact as it used to have. So now we do more of the sales beforehand. So we have much higher prefunding of the surveys that we do in the U.S. GOM today than we used to have historically. And then as Sven Børre said, we have some of our sales after the round is taking place rather than lining up for the licensing round. So it's probably more evenly distributed now than it used to be. In the past, it was always you shot without prefunding and then you had a significant kicker at the -- before the licensing round. And then after that, there was nothing. Unknown Analyst: And my final question before I give the word to somebody else. You mentioned that it's too early to expect a great year for contracted streamers in '26. What do you think it will take? What kind of oil price levels do we need to see to see a great year for streamers in seismic? Kristian Johansen: We've been doing some internal analysis in that regard and looking at the dilemma of an oil company today or an energy company today is that they have this dividend obligations, they have buyback obligations and then they have CapEx and seismic is obviously part of that discretionary CapEx. And with the oil price dropping from $70 and down to $60, although it's higher today, then you obviously put a lot of strain on that kind of dilemma. So are they going to cut the dividend? Probably not. Are they going to cut back on the buybacks? Potentially, yes. Total has already announced that. Are they going to start spending more on exploration? Well, if you listen to what they say and if you listen to what they told me last week, they are, but we haven't seen it yet. And I think with the current oil price, we should be a bit cautious expecting that to kick off in 2026. So we're planning for a market that is going to continue to be quite challenging in that regard. But saying that, when we talk about the contract market, and it is important to say that we should be using at least 50%, perhaps up to 70% of our fleet on multi-client projects. And that's where I'm probably more optimistic today than I was 3 months ago in terms of the backlog that we see building up on the multi-client side. So we're not too concerned about the utilization of our fleet in 2026. But obviously, if you look at the contract market per se, it's not great. There is no reason to question that. Unknown Analyst: And what oil price is needed to change that? Kristian Johansen: We've been saying that you probably need somewhere between $70 to $75 to see a significant increase in exploration. But again, back to what I heard from the CEOs last week and the oil price was $60 at the time. They're saying that we have -- we've been -- we've done a terrible job in terms of exploration, and we need to get better and we need to spend more. Yes Lukas. Unknown Analyst: You said that multi-client performed better than what you expected in Q3. So I guess you had a view on the transfer fees. So what exactly was better than what you expected? Kristian Johansen: You know how it is when you get really beaten up like we did in Q2, you set expectations slightly lower for Q3 and I think that was partly what happened. And we pretty much knew the range of the transfer fee at the time. And obviously, there are always tough discussions on -- and it goes back and forth in many, many iterations before you end up with a number. But that pretty much came in as we expected. I think the market probably estimated that to be bigger or more significant than it was, but we pretty much came in where we thought we would be. Unknown Analyst: And what are your expectations related to the licensing round in Brazil? Kristian Johansen: Yes, there was one yesterday with five-blocks where we had data in most of those areas. And obviously, we see some opportunities related to that. I think the news of the environmental permit to Petrobras is very good for TGS. I mean this has been the area where we have invested more than anywhere else in the world over the past 18 months. Obviously, we've taken some risk on that environmental assessment. And obviously, it's great to see that, that had a positive outcome. So I think -- yes, I think that's as specific as I can be. Okay. Unknown Analyst: And your EBITDA margin on the contract business was nicely up. Is that better pricing, lower costs? Sven Larsen: Yes. We probably don't see better pricing. I think that's fair to say. It's not significantly down either, but it's not kind of the right environment to increase pricing to put it that way. So it's cost control and cost efficiency and obviously also partially these reversals that I talked about in this particular quarter. But that has to be seen over time where it's basically mostly related to costs that have been charged previously. Unknown Analyst: And you are cutting your other CapEx guidance with $25 million. What is that... Sven Larsen: No, we've been working constantly on our cost base and our cash outflow base, so to speak, during this year. And CapEx obviously has been under a lot of scrutiny to try to work that down. At the same time, we need to invest in the business, and we need to be maintaining our fleet well and keep it up to the highest standards, and we need to replace streamers. But we have worked on that streamer replacement program and how we can maintain the current streamers in a better manner and keep them longer and or push or spend more time on that replacement program than we initially planned for. That's essentially what's doing it. And of course, there are a lot of -- we are cautious on all other types of CapEx spending for the time being. Kristian Johansen: There's not a lot of peers to TGS in the streamer space. But if you look at the peer or peers, you will see that our CapEx is far higher. And it's been a reason for that. But of course, there are things we can do in terms of getting that down, and that's what we've done. Unknown Analyst: And if you break down the $110 million between streamers, computing power, vessel maintenance and other, what would the split be? Kristian Johansen: Almost half is related -- purely related to streamers. Unknown Analyst: Can I ask on the CapEx? What should we expect going to '26? Is it fair to assume the same level? Sven Larsen: Yes, we will come back to that when we guide in February. But our ambition is to continue to keep that at a lower -- significantly lower level than what we initially guided for this year, of course. Unknown Analyst: Yes. And did I see an offshore wind contract that you're going to do in July? What vessel will you use for that? Is Ramform Vanguard still going to be stacked? Or do you think you will take that out to do that work? Kristian Johansen: Yes. We haven't made that decision. And again, we stacked it and we're going to stack it and keep it stacked until we see improvements in the market, and we have 6 vessels who can do the job if we need to. But that's something we consider at any point of time, and we're not ready to make that decision today. Unknown Analyst: And one last technicality about how you allocate your streamer vessels. You talked about at least 50% doing multi-client and then also maybe up to like 17%. If you can help us a little bit in '26. What’s… Kristian Johansen: It's too early. What I mean by saying that is that we have that flexibility, and we're not totally dependent on the contract marketing for our fleet. We should be in a position to use at least 50% to 75% on multi-client. We will guide you on -- on a rolling basis for two quarters going forward, but we're not going to give you any more clarity than that. Unknown Executive: Okay. We have a couple of questions from other people on the web. Jørgen Lande in Danske Bank. You mentioned prefunding was a bit lower. Do you expect prefunding levels to trend downwards compared to what you have indicated? Sven Larsen: Probably not a trend, but we are -- we have had, call it, quite high prefunding levels over the past quarters, and it's probably almost naturally high for -- some periods. So I would think that we're -- yes, we think it will be at that 80% to 90% level over time, give or take, but it may vary from quarter-to-quarter depending on the mix of the different projects that we're doing. Kristian Johansen: It also has a lot to do with how much risk do we want to take in terms of if we believe that we're at the bottom of the cycle, and we believe that these CEOs who talk about the need for more exploration. Is this the time to go out and do some frontier work with lower prefunding. I mean that's discussions that we have with the Board at any point of time. And similar discussion to what all companies have in terms of are they going to invest more in exploration for the long-term. Yes. So we have those discussions, and that will obviously have an impact on the prefunding rate. But there is no indication in the market that it's harder to get prefunding than it's been before. Not at all. Unknown Executive: And we have a question from Mick Pickup in Barclays. You talk of advanced multi-client levels, yet consensus that you supplied has investments down in '26 versus '25. This doesn't seem consistent. So without giving guidance, can you talk directionally about '26 multi-client investment levels? Kristian Johansen: Yes. I'm not going to do that. But of course, the consensus is not -- we don't make consensus. We just collect consensus. So if consensus is lower in '26 than it's '25, it doesn't necessarily represent what we plan to do. But it's too early for us to say what we're going to invest for '26. We're in that period right now where we're looking at our investment level. I would be very surprised if it differs significantly from what it does this year. And especially on the downside, I would be very disappointed if we see a much lower number. Unknown Executive: Next question comes from Ole Martin Rødland in Pareto Securities. While order intake was good this quarter, backlog is still at low levels. Based on best expectations, do you assume lower external streamer and OBN revenues in 2026? And will that possibly be offset by higher multi-client investments and revenues? Kristian Johansen: Yes, it's too early to say. What we have been saying today is that we have that flexibility, and we can do it -- if we need to. And the beauty of our business model and the beauty about being fully integrated as we are, and we're the only company in our space that can claim that is that we have the flexibility at any point of time to switch between contracts and multi-client. And there's been speculation as to our price is down in the contract market, how bad is the contract market, et cetera. Well, if it is bad and if pricing is down, then we just do multi-client if we can get funding for multi-client projects. And I think we've delivered today, and we've shown you today, and we even showed you in the past four or five quarters that we generate a return of 2x on our multi-client project. So if pricing is low and if we see that we sacrifice too much on our margins by doing some of those contracts, we don't do that. Sven Larsen: And another point to bear in mind in our multi-client investments in 2025, we have – we still have quite a bit of external investments where we're using external vessels and external providers. It takes -- following the merger, it takes a little bit of time to in-source everything. So you should probably expect more or less 100% of the capacity that we source to be internal in '26. So even if you, for the sake of argument, assumed flat multi-client investments, you could see higher utilization of our own assets on multi-client. Unknown Executive: Okay. Then we have another question from Steffen Evjen in DNB Carnegie. Do you have any leads to sign more OBN contract work over the winter season on top of the current book positions that you disclosed today? Kristian Johansen: Yes. I mean the sales cycles in OBN are longer than streamer. We like to say they're typically 5 or 6 months at least. So that gives you an indication in terms of when you will see new contracts. We have a number of leads. Some of these leads are related to single contracts and some of the leads are related to what we call capacity agreements or bigger long-term agreements with some of our customers. So there are negotiations going on. And obviously, we're going to announce that to the market as soon as we have contracts to announce. Unknown Executive: We don't have any further questions from the web. Any last questions from the people here in Oslo? If not, that concludes the Q&A session. So I give the word to you, Kristian, for your concluding remarks. Kristian Johansen: Yes. Thank you very much for your attention today. And again, as I said initially, it was a relief to come back with better numbers than we had in Q2. We were obviously as surprised and disappointed as you were in Q2, and it's good to see not only that we have a revenue growth of 26% compared to the last quarter, but we see a very strong profitability and all key metrics are very positive compared to previous quarters. So I wish you all the best and looking forward to see you at our Q4 presentation. Thank you very much.
Operator: Good day, and welcome to the Allegion Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note this event is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to Vice President of Investor Relations, Josh Pokrzywinski. Please go ahead. Joshua Pokrzywinski: Thank you, Betsy. Good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining us for Allegion's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. With me today are John Stone, President and Chief Executive Officer; and Mike Wagnes, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Allegion. Our earnings release, which was issued earlier this morning, and the presentation, which we will refer to in today's call, are available on our website at investor.allegion.com. This call will be recorded and archived on our website. Please go to Slide 2. Statements made in today's call that are not historical facts are considered forward-looking statements that are made pursuant to the safe harbor provisions of federal securities law. Please see our most recent SEC filings for a description of some of the factors that may cause actual results to differ materially from our projections. The company assumes no obligation to update these forward-looking statements. Today's presentation and commentary include non-GAAP financial measures. Please refer to the reconciliation in the financial tables of our press release for further details. Please go to Slide 3, and I'll turn the call over to John. John Stone: Thanks, Josh. Good morning, everyone. Thanks for joining. Q3 was another strong quarter as we execute our long-term strategy and steadily deliver on our commitments to shareholders. I'm proud of our team's performance as we've remained agile in a dynamic operating environment. The double-digit revenue growth for the enterprise and continued segment margin expansion speaks to the resiliency of our model, our broad end market exposures and the depth of our relationships with channel partners and end users. We continue to take advantage of our business' strong cash generation, returning cash to shareholders and growing our business through accretive acquisitions. Year-to-date, we have allocated approximately $600 million to acquiring businesses consistent with the priorities we outlined at our Investor Day. As we approach year-end, the key market trends supporting our outlook are largely unchanged. Our team continues to execute well, and we are allocating capital for the long-term benefit of our shareholders. As such, we are raising our 2025 full year outlook for adjusted earnings per share to $8.10 to $8.20. I'll be back later to discuss the outlook and share some early views on markets for 2026. Please go to Slide 4. Let's take a look at capital allocation for the third quarter, starting with our investments for organic growth. In September, the Allegion team launched a new mid-tier commercial product line for Schlage, our Performance Series locks. These locks bring Schlage quality to more price points in nonresidential applications, giving us more ways to win in the aftermarket and building on the success of the mid-price point Von Duprin 70 Series exit devices released last year. Turning to M&A. Since we spoke at Q2 earnings, Allegion has announced 2 more acquisitions, UAP and Brisant. These U.K.-based businesses strengthen our product portfolio, including electronic locks in addition to enhancing our cost position. As discussed previously, the acquisitions of ELATEC, Gatewise and Waitwhile closed earlier in the third quarter. Allegion continues to be a dividend paying stock, and in the third quarter, this amounted to $0.51 per share or approximately $44 million. We did not repurchase shares in the quarter. And you can continue to expect Allegion to be balanced, consistent and disciplined with capital deployment over time with a clear priority of investing for profitable growth. Mike will now walk you through the third quarter financial results. Michael Wagnes: Thanks, John, and good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining today's call. Please go to Slide #5. As John shared, our Q3 results reflect continued strong execution from the Allegion team, delivering double-digit revenue growth for the enterprise. Revenue for the third quarter was over $1 billion, an increase of 10.7% compared to 2024. Organic revenue increased 5.9% in the quarter as a result of favorable price and volume led by our Americas nonresidential business, where demand remains healthy. Q3 adjusted operating margin was 24.1%, down 10 basis points compared to last year. Both our segments had margin expansion which was offset by higher corporate expenses relative to the prior year comparable. Volume leverage and mix were accretive to margins. Additionally, price and productivity, net of inflation and investment was a tailwind of $2.2 million. Adjusted earnings per share of $2.30 increased $0.14 or 6.5% versus the prior year. Operational performance and accretive acquisitions contributed 10.6 points of EPS growth. This was partially offset by higher tax and interest and other. We still anticipate the full year tax rate to be in the range of 17% to 18%. Finally, year-to-date available cash flow was $485.2 million, which was up 25.1% as we continue to generate strong cash flow. I'll provide more details on the balance sheet and cash flow a little later in the presentation. Please go to Slide #6. Our Americas segment delivered strong operating results in Q3. Revenue of $844 million was up 7.9% on a reported basis and up 6.4% on an organic basis, led by our nonresidential business. Organic growth included both favorable price and volume in the quarter. Reported revenue includes 1.5 points of growth from acquisitions. Pricing in our Americas segment was 4.6% in the quarter. This includes a combination of core pricing and surcharges as we cover inflation, including tariffs. Our nonresidential business increased mid-single digits organically and demand for our products remains healthy, supported by our broad end market exposure. Our residential business grew mid-single digits, primarily driven by volume associated with new electronic products that we launched in the quarter and price. However, we still consider overall residential market demand to be soft, consistent with year-to-date growth rates. Electronics revenue was up mid-teens and continues to be a long-term growth driver for Allegion. Americas adjusted operating income of $252 million increased 9% versus the prior year. Adjusted operating margin was up 40 basis points as volume leverage and favorable mix were accretive to margins. Price and productivity, net of inflation and investments was a tailwind of $10.2 million. Please go to Slide #7. Our International segment delivered revenue of $226 million, which was up 22.5% on a reported basis and up 3.6% organically, led by our electronics businesses. Acquisitions contributed 13.6% to segment revenue, consisting of the acquisitions John mentioned earlier, net of the previously announced divestiture of API. Currency was also a tailwind, positively impacting reported revenue by 5.3%. International adjusted operating income of $32.3 million increased 28.2% versus the prior year period. Adjusted operating margin for the quarter increased 70 basis points, driven by volume leverage and mix. Acquisitions were accretive to segment margin rates, although slightly dilutive to the enterprise rates. We continue to drive portfolio quality in the International segment through self-help and adding high-performing businesses where we have a right to win. Please go to Slide 8, and I will provide an overview on our cash flow and balance sheet. Year-to-date available cash flow was $485.2 million, up nearly $100 million versus the prior year. This increase is driven by higher earnings, lower capital expenditures and improvements in working capital. I am pleased with the strong cash generation in 2025. And based on year-to-date performance, we see upside to our previous cash flow outlook. We now expect conversion of 85% to 95% of adjusted net income. Working capital as a percent of revenue increased due to acquired working capital, which does not impact cash flow. Organic working capital improved compared to prior year. Finally, our balance sheet remains strong, and our net debt to adjusted EBITDA is at a healthy ratio of 1.8x. We continue to generate strong cash flow and our balance sheet supports continued capital deployment. I will now hand the call back over to John. John Stone: Thanks, Mike. Please go to Slide 9, and I'll share our updated outlook. With one quarter remaining in the year, our markets remain largely consistent with our prior outlook. And the Americas nonresidential markets remain resilient, and Allegion is performing well in the aftermarket. Our spec activity has grown over 2024 and year-to-date 2025, driven by our broad end market exposure, and this supports our outlook. Residential markets, however, remain soft. And as Mike mentioned, solid performance in Q3 was primarily driven by new electronic product launches. International markets have largely been unchanged year-to-date, and we continue to expect roughly flat organic performance. We expect approximately $40 million of surcharge revenue in the Americas related to tariff recovery, which does include the August 18 scope expansion for Section 232. Based on strong execution and the recent acquisitions of UAP and Brisant, we're increasing our 2025 adjusted EPS outlook to $8.10 to $8.20. You can find additional details as well as below-the-line model items in the appendix. As you know, we'll provide Allegion's formal 2026 financial outlook during our February earnings call. So please go to Slide 10. Today, we'd like to provide a preliminary view on our markets for next year. And I'd say, overall, we expect rather similar market conditions to 2025. In the Americas, our broad end market coverage and spec activity continue to support organic growth in our nonresidential business. Residential markets continue to be soft. The input cost environment remains dynamic with tariffs, and you can expect us to continue to drive price to offset inflation. Internationally, markets have been sluggish; however, we do expect to benefit from 2025 acquisition activity. For the enterprise, we expect carryover revenue contribution of approximately 2 points from acquisitions closed in 2025. Please go to Slide 11. In summary, Allegion is executing at a high level, while staying agile and steadily delivering on the long-term commitments we shared with you at our Investor Day. Our performance is led by an enduring business model in nonresidential Americas, double-digit electronics growth and accretive capital deployment as we acquire good businesses in markets where we have a right to win. I'm proud of the performance by the Allegion team in this very dynamic environment, which gives us the confidence to increase our EPS outlook for the year. With that, we'll take the questions. Operator: We will now begin the question-and-answer session. [Operator Instructions] The first question today comes from Joe Ritchie with Goldman Sachs. Joseph Ritchie: So I appreciate all the color and the initial look into 2026. John, maybe just pulling on that thread on spec writing continuing to be up and nonres specifically, I think you mentioned last quarter that you were starting to see some positive momentum on spec writing specifically as it relates to office. Can you maybe just give us an update on the key verticals and whether there's -- there were any kind of like discernible differences between how you feel today versus how you felt a quarter ago? John Stone: Yes, it's a good question, Joe. And I think the comments would be very consistent that our spec activity accelerated over the course of 2024 and has grown year-to-date 2025. Rather than picking and choosing this vertical or that vertical, I would just say Allegion's spec writers are very versatile in their expertise and one day could be writing a specification for an elementary school. The next day, they could be doing multifamily and the next day after that, they could be doing a data center. So they have that capability and that engine never turns off. I think the main thing we'd have you take away is that spec activity has continued to grow in 2025, broadly speaking. And spec activity supports our outlook as we talked about in the prepared remarks and gives us the confidence that we still see organic growth in non-res Americas. Joseph Ritchie: Okay. Great. Helpful. And then I want to also kind of just talk a little bit more about your M&A pipeline. It's been such a great part of the story, really over the last, like, 12 to 18 months. And recognize that you've kind of given us the 2 points as a placeholder for next year. Just talk about the pipeline as you see it today. And as you're kind of thinking about like the potential accretion from an earnings standpoint into next year based on what you already know, just any color around that would be helpful. John Stone: Yes, it's a great question, Joe, and it's something we're really excited about. I think the pipeline is still strong and strong in both of our reporting segments, so strong in International, strong in the Americas. And if you recall our Investor Day material, where we talked product categories that we're looking for, whether that's portfolio expansion in our mechanical business, whether that's electronics, whether that's complementary software, we've got activity in all of those categories right now. So very excited about the pipeline. And I'd say you can expect us to continue to be disciplined around the strategy and around the types of businesses we acquire and around the shareholder returns that we generate from these acquisitions. So I feel real good about it. And I think it continues to be an important part of Allegion's overall growth story. Michael Wagnes: Joe, with respect to the question on the EPS. In the appendix, we provide what the full year benefit this year is, which allows you to calculate what the EPS benefit on acquisitions is in the fourth quarter. And think about that as a carryover rate for the first 2 quarters of the year. The acquisitions were largely done early July. So that should provide you enough information for you to get a framework for the relative size of the benefit that we have. Operator: The next question comes from Joe O'Dea with Wells Fargo. Joseph O'Dea: Can you just talk about conversations with building owners, architects, overall end users on the current kind of uncertainty impact in the macro, what they're looking for? Really just trying to get a sense for what your perception is of activity that's sidelined and just waiting for a little bit better visibility and what some of those key ingredients are to bringing that activity off the sidelines? John Stone: Yes, Joe, it's a good question. And I would say there's a couple of things going on. And as we are out with customers and end users quite frequently, our own channel checks would indicate comments very consistent with what we shared with you in the prepared remarks, that nonres project activity is humming along pretty well. And I think some private finance came off the sidelines this year. A more favorable interest rate environment would certainly continue to be a swing factor that we would see to bring more of that private finance off the sidelines. But I would say, overall, positive environment and channel checks, our customers' backlogs are pretty healthy and has given them pretty good confidence about organic growth as well. And that's what we've tried to convey to you today. I think nonres overall is humming along pretty well. Joseph O'Dea: Appreciate that. And then on the International side, I think this was the first quarter of volume growth after 4 of declines, actually better volume growth in International than Americas even this quarter. So just kind of unpacking a little bit more what you saw in the quarter, how you think about any momentum behind a little bit of volume growth there? John Stone: Yes. I appreciate you noticing that, Joe. I mean we were certainly really happy to see that and proud of the International team to put those numbers up on the board this quarter. I would say our view on the end markets is still largely unchanged, that it's around flattish kind of organic growth. But I would also say you've had some of the market segments there really at historical troughs, and we don't anticipate that they trend negative in perpetuity. So I think the International team has executed well in a lot of pretty challenging environments. And like Mike mentioned in the prepared remarks, our electronics businesses are still performing very well. And you add to that, we're still really excited about the ELATEC acquisition, which is a pretty sizable deal for us that will continue to add momentum there in the electronic space. Operator: The next question comes from Julian Mitchell with Barclays. Julian Mitchell: Just wanted to start with maybe the adjusted operating margins. So those were flattish in the third quarter year-on-year. Just wanted to check, but it looks like perhaps you're assuming they pick up again with some margin expansion of a few tens of basis points in the fourth quarter. Just wanted to check if that was the right assumption and how we should think about the corporate cost movement into Q4 and next year in that context? Michael Wagnes: Yes. Thanks for the question, Julian. If you look at the third quarter, pleased with the segment margin expansion, did a really good job. We were negative in corporate. Part of that is just the year-on-year comp. Last year in the third quarter, corporate was low. This year, our third quarter is really consistent, slightly less than even what you saw in the second quarter. As you think about margin expansion for the year, you can back into it, we expect to have margin expansion for the year and in the fourth quarter. And then from a run rate perspective of corporate, the question you asked, you saw what we put up in the third quarter. Think of that as relatively what we've ran in the last couple. So you can kind of use that as a fine estimate. Julian Mitchell: That's very helpful. And just within the Americas segment for a second. You had a decent tailwind from that PPII bucket in the third quarter, and I think that was a good pickup from what you'd seen, that being flattish in the second. When we're looking out the next few quarters, should we assume that, that sort of gross price of about 4 or 5 points is a good placeholder and PPII stays as a decent tailwind? Just trying to understand operating leverage, you have that mid-30s placeholder from the Investor Day. Are we sort of on that path now leaving aside the corporate costs moving around? Michael Wagnes: Yes. If you think about the Americas, I talked about this earlier in the year. Inflation, especially associated with the tariffs, right, was a little quicker than some of the pricing benefits. We said that would improve as the year progressed. You see that in the third quarter. The big item for us on the pricing side is what is inflation and tariffs are a component of that inflation. Just look for us to drive pricing and productivity, and you've heard me mention this many times before. Pricing and productivity covers the inflation and the investment, and that helps drive the margin expansion. Overall, I feel good about the progress we're making in the Americas. I think we're doing a great job in combating a very dynamic environment of change when you think about tariffs and expect us to continue to drive that margin expansion that we talked about. Julian Mitchell: Got it. And that sort of mid-30s type rate based on inflation and mix and price, that should be achievable the next x kind of quarters. Nothing looks too out of line versus that. Michael Wagnes: Yes. Certainly, Q4 you could calculate. We'll be back in February to give you a '26 margin outlook. Think of that as a long term, right, to the long-term investors out there. Long term, we should be able to drive incrementals of 35%. Let us get to February of next year when we give our outlook and complete the annual operating plan. But certainly, for the fourth quarter, you could calculate the implied margin expansion. Operator: The next question comes from Jeff Sprague with Vertical Research. Jeffrey Sprague: I want to come back to the deals, really kind of maybe a 2-part question. First, just thinking about sort of everything that you've done here. It all looks like it makes sense and fits in and is nicely moving the needle as we've seen your results. But just thinking about kind of the margin entitlement of what you've acquired, where you might be on integrating these assets? Are they all truly being integrated or any of them sort of stand-alone? Just trying to kind of get my head around kind of the journey you're on here. John Stone: Yes, I appreciate the question, Jeff. And I think if you recall our Investor Day commentary, we talked about being disciplined. And I would say some of those guardrails around being disciplined would be consistent with our strategy, consistent with our geographic exposure and consistent with markets where we've got a right to win, meaning we've got brand strength, we've got human capital and talent, we've got distribution strength. And so yes, to specifically answer your question, all of these acquisitions are being integrated and being integrated rapidly. I think there are synergies across the board in revenue synergies, cost synergies. There are exposure to faster-growing segments that we've acquired. So I feel real good about the strategic alignment of every deal we've done and continue to feel the same way about the outlook on our pipeline there. So really good. But yes, I mean, we're not looking to acquire our way into adjacent spaces. We're not looking to expand geographic scope. We're staying in markets we know where we've got a right to win, and we're acquiring enhancements to our product portfolio in electronics and mechanical and complementary software and feel real good about it. So I think you can -- again, you can look for us to continue to be acquisitive but continue to be disciplined like we've shown. Jeffrey Sprague: And then I guess, discipline also includes the element of price paid. And I kind of appreciate like each individual deal, it's hard for me to press Josh or Mike for like specifics on multiples and all that. But is there a way to just step back and sort of collectively say, you gave us the dollars deployed, right, on a year-to-date basis, kind of what the average multiple has been? And when you think about the synergies, kind of what the -- maybe what the forward multiple would be looking out kind of 12, 24 months as you integrate these things? John Stone: Yes, Jeff, it's a good question. Very fair question. I think we've had some commentary around this in past quarters. So on the mechanical side, if we're expanding our mechanical portfolio, you would see something in the high single-digit EBITDA multiple would be a fair approximation. On the higher growth electronics and software, you're going to see a bit of a higher multiple there because we're expecting higher growth and higher longer-term returns. Michael Wagnes: Jeff, maybe also to help you out, the biggest acquisition is ELATEC. Clearly, that is the lion's share. So we gave that information when we released the -- when we made the acquisition and we issued the press release. You could see that and you get at least a pretty good idea of all the acquisitions, what's the biggest piece there from a multiple [ paid. ] Operator: The next question comes from Tomo Sano with JPMorgan. Tomohiko Sano: I'd like to ask you about the residential outlook for Q4 in America. So the residential revenue improved to up mid-single digit in Q3. And you mentioned no clear signs of the recovery of the market for 2026. But how do you see the residential segment performing in Q4? Could you share your current market outlook and also the new product contributions, especially for electronics in Q4, please? Michael Wagnes: Tomo, to answer your question on the residential. I apologize, we had some phone difficulties there. Overall, market demand for residential is soft. It's been that way for a while. In the third quarter, we did have that benefit associated with the new product introductions, the e-locks, that was the Arrive lock that we talked about in the first quarter earnings call. We launched it in the third quarter, and we had the benefit. As I said on the prepared remarks, overall, think of market demand consistent with year-to-date growth rates for residential, which is down slightly. So as you think about the fourth quarter, we would not expect a mid-single-digit positive growth. We would expect it more in line with market demand, which is that softer nonresidential market that we're in -- I'm sorry, residential. Tomohiko Sano: And my follow-up question is on tariffs and pricing. So you have demonstrated strong pricing power and agility in managing a tariff-related cost pressures. And are you seeing any signs of pricing fatigue or customer weakness? And how would you see the other market players reacting for pricing in the market, please? John Stone: Tomo, this is John. I would say -- I appreciate the comment. And yes, I think our teams and our customers have collectively responded well to the inflationary nature of the tariffs. I think our industry as a whole has moved up with price realization. And I'd say, just as Mike said in the prepared comments, as inflationary pressures continue, we stand ready to cover that with price. I would say the demand environment in nonres, as we mentioned, is good. It's healthy. Nonres is humming along pretty well. So I haven't yet seen something that we would call fatigue. Operator: We have one final question in our queue today. The next question comes from Tim Wojs of Baird. Timothy Wojs: Maybe just the first one, I'm kind of thinking bigger picture about kind of spec and spec writing and just kind of content within the spec. John, how would you kind of compare the content in the spec that you're kind of writing today versus maybe what you were doing 3 years ago? And I'm just trying to kind of get at how that spec is evolving, particularly as you kind of have done some of the, I'd say, ancillary product kind of M&A over the last couple of years? John Stone: Tim, that's a great question. I appreciate you asking. I would say a couple of things come to mind in terms of spec content. We're seeing electronics adoption accelerate, and that's evident in our specs. And I think evident in the electronics growth numbers that we've been showing lately. So very pleased with that. And I think the new product launches that we've been doing in nonres, in particular, are paying dividends there. I would also say we're starting to see -- it would be very small, but starting to see even opportunities to spec in some of the complementary software that we've developed organically into like a multifamily application. So that's very exciting for us to see as well. In terms of the new acquisitions, several of them, if you talk nonres Americas like Krieger Specialty Products, hand-in-glove fit with our spec engine, and we're excited to see the growth there. Because if you recall, that acquisition brought products that we didn't have in our hollow metal portfolio, high-margin, fast-growing niche products that we're finding great opportunities to spec into new customers even. So really good fit. Another good example from this year would be Trimco, makes high-end specialty hardware for commercial applications. If you had pulled channel customers of ours for the last couple of years, they would highlight something like a Trimco as one of the best acquisition targets for Allegion to go after. So really excited to have that team on board with us. And it's -- again, it fits right into the spec engine. So we're happy to see that momentum. Timothy Wojs: Okay. Okay. That's great to hear. And then maybe just on the modeling side. Just in International, kind of the opposite of Julian's question on PPII, that flipped negative this quarter. Is that just a timing consideration? Or is there anything kind of to read in there around price, productivity and inflation? Michael Wagnes: Yes. If you think about margins in International, good performance this quarter. It was slightly negative on the PPII. On a year-to-date basis, though, Tim, think of it as it's negative like $1 million if you add up the 3 quarters. So it's essentially covered. And look for us in International to cover that inflationary pressure. So I wouldn't look too much into the third quarter at all. Look at the year-to-date rate and you get an idea, we're doing a pretty good job there. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to CEO, John Stone, for any closing remarks. John Stone: Thanks very much, and thanks, everyone, for the very engaging Q&A. We look forward to connecting with you on our Q4 earnings call in February. Be safe, be healthy. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Leszek Iwaszko: Good morning. Thank you for standing by and let me welcome you to Orange Polska Q3 2025 Results Conference Call. My name is Leszek Iwaszko, and I'm in charge of Investor Relations. The format of the call will be a presentation by the management team followed by a Q&A session. Unfortunately, our CEO, Liudmila Climoc, couldn't join us today due to urgent private matters. So, the sole speaker will be Jacek Kunicki, CFO. So, I'm passing now the floor to Jacek. Jacek Kunicki: Good morning. I'm pleased to say that the third quarter was very successful for Orange Polska. The success is rooted in our strong operating performance. We've achieved very good commercial growth, especially on the consumer market, where both the customer bases and the ARPOs have increased at a healthy pace. Our wholesale line of business has delivered more revenues and more margins. This comes as a result of new business, that is, monetizing our fiber infrastructure. It will generate more value over the course of the next few years, allowing us to compensate some large wholesale contracts that are due to end in 2026. This should remind us that wholesale is our strategic asset, complementing our retail operations and reducing our risk profile. Successful commercial activity is the anchor of the Lead the Future strategy and our value creation. After 9 months of 2025, we are pleased with the developments in this area as they lay a solid foundation for the strategy going forward. This performance has translated into strong financial results, and let's take a look at that -- these on the next slide. I'm pleased with the financial results of Q3. We have increased revenues, profit and cash generation. Revenues were up by a steep 9.3% year-over-year, including a spike in IT&IS sales and also a strong consistent contribution from the core telecom services business. This solid expansion of the core business, combined with cost discipline, drove the Q3 EBITDA almost 3% up year-over-year despite a demanding comparable base. We're really happy with this result. Our eCapEx has amounted to just over PLN 1.1 billion year-to-date. It is at a comparable level to the same period of last year, and it is in line with our full year plans. This quarterly evolution reflects different timing of CapEx between the 2 years. Following a stronger Q3, the year-to-date level of organic cash flows is also stable year-over-year. This reflects higher cash from operating activities, driven by the EBITDA expansion, which compensated for less proceeds from real estate disposal. My takeaway from this is that robust Q3 results give solid support to our full year prospects. After 9 months of the year, we're confident to deliver on our 2025 objectives and to create further value for shareholders. Let's now look -- take a look at the commercial activity in more detail on the next slide. It came very solid across all core telecom services. What particularly stands out this quarter is Mobile. The net customer additions have exceeded 100,000 and were at the highest in more than 4 years. As you may recall, our B2C strategy is focused on reaching new households not yet using Orange Polska services, in order to unlock the growth potential for the future. We're pleased that it is bearing fruit, and we are enlarging our customer footprint. The robust growth of the customer base was coupled with an increase of the Mobile ARPO, a slight improvement versus the trend observed a quarter ago. This comes due to a strong ARPO development in the main consumer brand, partly diluted by an increasing share of the B-brand customers in the overall customer base. Growth in convergence and fiber was solid, consistent with previous quarters and in line with our strategy. It was a combination of 5% and 13% growth of the respective customer bases and a solid 3% to 4% uplift of the average revenue per offer. In spite of fierce competition in fiber, we are successfully competing in the local battles and growing well by addressing our customers' need for higher speeds and for more content. Commercial growth is essential for future value creation, and these results demonstrate that we have the right commercial strategy to prevail in the core telecom offering. Let's now take a look at how these translated into revenues. Our Q3 top line dynamic was exceptional, above 9% growth year-over-year. It reflects 3 main developments: first, an exceptional hike of the IT&IS sales; second, a consistent growth of the core telecom services revenues. And 3 -- third, the accelerated dynamics of wholesale. Let's now review them one by one in a little bit more detail. The IT&IS revenues went up by an extraordinary 47% in quarter 3. The key driver of this performance was resale of software licenses. It is a tool to create future upsell potential. Hence, despite the large top line, its immediate contribution to profits was negligible. Nonetheless, looking at this development and also at other wins in our pipeline, we are now more optimistic about the future prospects for the growth in IT&IS revenues and profits. What is most important in our top line performance this quarter is that revenues from core telecom services grew by 6.5% year-over-year, repeating their strong and consistent dynamics. You've seen the drivers of this growth: robust increase of our customer bases and solid ARPO development. Finally, the third factor, wholesale. Its growth has accelerated on the back of fast revenues coming from the new fiber optics backhaul business that I mentioned earlier on. It is a multiyear business development, and it gives us a solid baseline also for 2026 and beyond. We anticipate to further grow the value of our wholesale line of business activity in the future. To sum up on revenues, after 9 months of the year, the top line growth exceeds 4%. Revenues from core telecom services are delivering a rock-solid performance this year, supported by robust net customer additions and ARPOs. And three, the new business in wholesale significantly boosts its future prospects, once again demonstrating the value-add of this activity to Orange Polska. Obviously, the profitable revenue growth is the main driver of the higher EBITDA. Let's look at the latter on Slide 7. EBITDA for Q3 has increased by almost 3% year-over-year. It benefited both from growth of the direct margin and from less indirect costs. Direct margin grew by PLN 21 million year-over-year and its underlying increase was even greater. Please note that last year's results included a positive one-off related to capitalization of PLN 53 million customer connectivity costs. Obviously, excluding this one-off, our direct margin for Q3 would have grown by 4% year-over-year. This outstanding growth was driven by high margin from core telecom services and by an increased contribution from wholesale. Indirect costs were PLN 4 million lower versus the third quarter of last year. We benefited from increased efficiency of network operations, including savings in field maintenance. The transformation of the network activity is an important part of our strategy, and we're pleased that we can already report its first tangible results. Q3 indirect costs have also reflected lower growth of labor costs and less advertising expenses versus the previous quarters. To sum up on EBITDA, we are very happy with its growth in quarter 3. It stems from a healthy combination of high margin from core business and cost discipline. And obviously, this is our main recipe to deliver consistent and sustainable EBITDA growth throughout the Lead the Future strategy period. With 3.4% growth for the 9 months of this year, for the year-to-date, we are obviously well on track to deliver on the full year objective in this area. Let's now turn to cash flow on Slide 8. Year-to-date, we generated nearly PLN 670 million of organic cash flow. This is almost exactly the same level as last year, helped by a very solid quarter 3. The OCF benefited primarily from a very healthy growth of cash from operating activity. It increased by almost PLN 200 million year-over-year due to a higher EBITDA and also due to less -- lower working capital requirement. It was offset by higher cash CapEx and also by PLN 80 million less proceeds from real estate disposal than in the comparable period of last year. We're satisfied with cash generation so far and with robust sources of growth coming from the operating activity. We plan for a peak of property sales in Q4, and we anticipate a solid organic cash flow in the last quarter of the year. Our leverage has increased very slightly following the acquisition of the 5G spectrum license and a payment of the dividend in July. However, our balance sheet structure remains very sound. Let's now summarize Q3 on the next slide. So, for us, the underlying message is our commercial and financial results in Q3 were very solid. We're pleased with the performance to date and in particular, with the commercial developments. We have a well-performing core telecom services business. The prospects for wholesale operations have improved substantially, and we see initial signs of recovery on the business market. These demonstrate our strong fundamentals. We're confident to achieve our 2025 objectives and also to create further shareholder value by implementing the Lead the Future strategy in subsequent years. That's all for me and we are now ready for your questions. Leszek Iwaszko: [Operator Instructions] First question is coming from the line of Marcin Nowak. Marcin Nowak: Three questions on -- rather, issues for me. The first one, regarding this new wholesale deal, could you provide more details regarding how much it contributed in the first quarter to both the top line and EBITDA, for how many years this contract is signed, and if you believe that there are similar deals possible in the future with other parties? The second issue, could you provide maybe an update on those provisions for significant risk that Orange has created last quarter? And the third issue, could you provide more detailed plans about the marketing spending and how -- by how it has been lower than in previous quarters? And what are the plans for the following quarters, especially with this lower spending, the commercial performance has been quite good. Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much, Marcin. I guess I will start with your last question. For the marketing or for the advertising and promotion spend that we were mentioning. When I look at quarter 3, the spending was roughly PLN 8 million lower than in the quarter 3 of the – of last year. And that is -- well, it is much different if we compare to the second quarter where advertising and promotional expenses have actually grown by PLN 12 million year-over-year. So, the difference to the Q1 was not that great. But obviously, quarter 3 was with a different timing of advertising campaigns and spendings versus last year. So that is regarding the costs. On the efficiency of those marketing spendings, I think it's fair to say we're very happy with those. Looking at the level of our net additions, both in postpaid and prepaid as well as in the convergence and fiber, we are very happy with the direction of the -- both advertising and overall the efficiency of the commercial period that we had for the back-to-school activity. And that is -- that has really delivered on our plans. So, we're now focusing definitely on the peak commercial season of Q4 and especially the second part of November and December to make sure that we are able to replicate a successful commercial activity. Then regarding your second question, well, I will not be able to help you much. We have created a provision for risks, claims and litigations of PLN 45 million in the second quarter of this year. And obviously, we've described as much as we can in the notes to the financial statements, but we are unable to provide you with the exact detail as this is commercially sensitive. We do not want to prejudice the outcome of any activities that are covered by the provision. And then regarding wholesale, well, it is a multiyear deal. Again, I will not be mentioning the specific commercial conditions because that is commercially sensitive. But definitely, we did see a much greater contribution of wholesale to the margin creation this quarter versus what we've seen in the previous quarters. I would say it's fair to say some of it was already -- so that was more than PLN 20 million better than in the previous quarters. Some of it was helped by the particular development that I have mentioned, and part was simply due to other business reasons because we do need to remind ourselves that wholesale is an important part of our activity, and it's not driven just by this one deal. And this is something that -- well, we've tried flagging for quite a long time. It enables us to monetize our infrastructure by selling data transmission, by selling FTTH access, by being an active player on all the interconnect market in Poland. It also enables us to decrease the risk profile of our retail activities because we are able to grasp some of the profits on the wholesale market. Getting back to this particular business development, it's obviously a long-term business development that we have, such as they usually are in wholesale. I would guess that the peak of the value will be the next 4 years. And I think we will see a more visible contribution of wholesale or of this business development already in quarter 4. And what I mentioned is when we take a look at 2026, we were aware, and we are aware that some important wholesale contracts are coming to an end and this particular business development should help us to offset the impact of those contracts ending. So, we're back to the state where we expect the contribution of wholesale towards our [ EBIT ] to actually be able to grow year after year. I think that is what I would mention regarding this particular activity. Thanks. Leszek Iwaszko: Our next question is coming from the line of Nora Nagy from Erste Bank. Nora Nagy: Two questions from my side, please. Firstly, could you give us, please, more update on the B2B segment? And what is your outlook for the coming period? And secondly, approximately when shall we expect the next Social Plan to be released? Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much, Nora. Very relevant questions. So, on the B2B line of business, I think it's fair to say that while this line of business has been extremely successful for us in the past, and the success of the previous strategy was -- B2B was a significant contributor towards that success, we did see the B2B under a greater pressure this year, both from the connectivity business and also from the slowdown on the IT&IS market. Some of it results from a very high comparable base of last year, where we benefited from some specific activity on the wholesale SMSs. Some of it results basically from a slower -- a softer IT market. I think it's fair to say that while we are not back to robust growth yet, so, the B2B trends, I would say, remain relatively fragile. If I'm comparing what we're seeing right now in terms of the amount of deals that we are able to win and the profit margins on the deals that we're able to win, we're getting, I would say, the first signals that could lead us to believe that we could be going back to growth in the next 2 or 3 quarters. That would be my outlook for the B2B. And that is something that we really need. You know that the Lead the Future strategy and generally, the value creation in Orange Polska, it starts with the top line and with a profitable top line, so with a direct margin. And we need the 3 engines of commercial activity to be delivering results. We see the B2C engine really going ahead full steam. We do see an acceleration in wholesale and improved prospects versus the ending contracts of 2026. So, between the last quarter and this quarter, we are more confident about the level of wholesale activity next year. And then I think the next step is we need B2B to get back to solid, consistent growth as it used to deliver in the past. And this is when we will be really happy with our ability to grow the EBITDA, to grow the cash flows on the back of a profitable expansion in the commercial activity. And then getting to your second question, before the year-end I would expect we will close the discussions with the social partners for the next round of Social Plan, which I anticipate it will cover 2026, 2027, and we should come back to you before the year-end with a current report whenever we do finalize it. And then probably this current report will also include some early estimate of the provisions that you would see in the income statement for the fourth quarter. Obviously, the final ones might be -- will be reported when we will report the quarter 4, but stay tuned for the next few months, and I'm sure that we will get back to you with the news on the Social Plan before the year-end. Leszek Iwaszko: Thank you. We have no more voice questions. Two questions that came online. First question, they cover topics we've already discussed, but maybe in a slightly different angle. So, a question from Pawel Puchalski from Santander. Wholesale segment, are you pleased with Q3 2025 Wholesale segment growth pace? And should we expect its further acceleration in coming quarters, years? What are wholesale margins? What is wholesale’s cash conversion? May we consider Q3 '25 wholesale pickup to represent likely driver of 2026 DPS increase? Jacek Kunicki: So, thank you, Pawel, for your questions. And you've rightly spotted wholesale as a point of focus. I think it's very relevant. Yes, we are pleased with the wholesale acceleration in Q3, definitely pleased. I do expect that we will have good value contribution from wholesale also in quarter 4. So that is something that will help us before the year-end, and it makes us even more confident in our ability to post a nice EBITDA growth this year. I think that is definitely a big help. When it comes to the next years, well, you are aware that we were previously anticipating that due to some contracts ending in 2026, wholesale might be under pressure in that year. I think that situation is much easier now, and we would be looking at ourselves actually getting a positive contribution from wholesale year-over-year because of this new business development. So that is definitely improving the prospects for wholesale going forward. And then in terms of margin and cash conversion, what I would say, it really depends on the level -- the margins really depend on the level of -- on the revenue line of wholesale because if you take some interconnect, the margin might be thin when we are looking at the interconnect coming in and going out, like some transit activities. But overall, the relation of revenues to margin is extremely high on those services where we are monetizing the existing infrastructure. And likewise, when we look at the cash conversion ratio, because we are treating wholesale as a way to monetize mostly existing infrastructure, then yes, the conversion of revenues to cash is extremely high, much, much higher than on the retail activity. It is because we are using and monetizing whatever infrastructure already exists. So obviously, wholesale has its limit when it comes to the size because by nature, it is filling up the needs of our competitors in this area. But the -- our ability to extract margin and cash from whatever revenues we get is extremely high. And that's why wholesale is a very important contributor to our results. On the DPS, I think it's -- stay tuned and we will talk about that in February because that is the moment that we make the decisions, and we are in a position to make some recommendations. What I keep on repeating throughout this year is that our primary focus with all the months except February, is to create conditions to allow us to be generating more profits and to be in a position to share more value creation with our stockholders, shareholders. And so, I do believe that the growth of profit and cash generation in quarter 3 is an important step in the direction of further value creation for the shareholders of Orange Polska. Leszek Iwaszko: We have another voice question coming from the line of Dawid Górzynski from PKO BP. Dawid Gorzynski: I have 2 questions actually. First on net customer additions in Mobile segment. It was particularly strong in the third quarter. And I wonder if there were some particular large clients that entered the base this quarter or it was like just a successful marketing activity from your side? So, this is the first question. And the second question is about organic cash flow outlook. Right now, we are flat after 9 months of the year, we are flattish, like organic cash flow is flat year-on-year. Last year was particularly strong. And I think that the expectation was that this year, CapEx -- sorry, organic cash flow should be lower. I wonder if you still think this is the true or maybe you see some upside potential? And you think that like exceeding PLN 1.1 billion of organic cash flow this year is at hand? Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much for your questions. I think starting from the net additions, yes, we did have a support of 2 large accounts in the Q3 numbers. And so, this was -- this is something that we are quite happy about. You could have read in the press that we took over 15,000 sim cards from the Polish Post. But this -- even if you were to take out those larger deals, it's still the best quarterly result in the last 3 years. So, I think -- I'm looking at the data right now for B2B, for B2C, for all the brands of both B2B and B2C, and it's -- across the board, we are very, very happy with all the results. If I take a look at the main Orange brands, the best results in a few years, new brands, new mobile, very good results, flex brands, very good results. It's across the board, good performance. And I would say both in postpaid and prepaid. So, this is particularly strengthening. And it reflects a good offering that we've had. It was supported by the family offer that we launched. It was supported by, I think, quite good advertising and a straightforward messaging for this commercial period. So, I know that my colleagues in marketing were happy with the results. And also, throughout this year, we do see simultaneously a good increase of the prepaid base. And when we take a look at, again, at the actions of this, it's about the quality of the promotions and the advertising. It is about us strengthening the position in some of the key distribution channels that we have had. And it enabled us to have a volume growth despite the fact that we've significantly increased the ARPO in prepaid and that we've gained a substantial amount of revenues and margin from prepaid as a result of that. So generally, mobile activity, very good in quarter 3, and I would not say it's a one-off driven activity. Obviously, everyone is now focused on the key period of November, December, where we need to be smart about the level of retentions that we make. But equally, we want to get as much as we can from the market when the availability comes in. So that is on the net additions. For the organic cash flow, I believe the PLN 1.1 billion that you mentioned was 2023. And last year was PLN 980-something million. I do agree this was quite a strong comparable base, which is something that we had mentioned. We are stable after 3 quarters. We are heading into quarter 3 with quite good operating performance dynamics, quite good from the perspective of the EBITDA and the ability to convert the EBITDA on to operating cash flow. So that is definitely supporting quarter 4. I think the main unknown today is how much real estate will we sell in Q4. Obviously, we're planning for a peak of real estate sales. That is directly helping our cash position. And so that remains, I think, the main uncertainty. But we are relatively confident about posting a good result, both in Q4 and for the full year. Leszek Iwaszko: And we have one more text question from Piotr Raciborski from Wood & Co. Congratulations on strong Q3 2024 results. Could you please again comment on strong ICT sales growth? Do you expect similar growth trends in the upcoming quarters? Do you see an increased demand on IT services from public institutions? Jacek Kunicki: Okay. Thanks a lot. Well, we don't expect that 47% year-over-year in quarter 4. It was quite an exceptional event. And I did mention it's -- it was driven by resale of licenses with a small margin. But it is important that we conduct these deals for the sake of the future upsell that we are able to do on the back of these deals. So, I would really not disregard the resale of licenses and our ability to then monetize on them over the next 4, 5 or 6 quarters. That is definitely worth doing, and we will continue doing that. Then regarding the future prospects, I think for us, it's not only a matter of Q4, but it's a matter of getting the right momentum to grow the revenues and margins from IT&IS or from ICT over the next years. I think when we take a look at the long-term potential, we are very optimistic. There is growth that is there to be had over the next years, both for revenues and for margin creation. And that is definitely the case. When it comes to IT, yes, it includes IT. I think that the IT market, while it was relatively soft this year, I do believe that it has still a lot of growth potential. And so, we definitely count on ICT revenues and margin growth in the next periods to come to help us to increase the EBITDA, increase cash generation and deliver value for shareholders. Leszek Iwaszko: Thank you. It appears we have no further questions. Thank you very much for participation. Please let us know if you'd like to meet us and then talk to you in February. Thank you. Jacek Kunicki: Thank you very much. Bye-bye.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. My name is Jordan, and I'll be your conference operator today. At this time, I'd like to welcome everyone to the Bankwell Financial Group Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Call. [Operator Instructions] I'd now like to turn the call over to Courtney Sacchetti, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Please go ahead. Courtney Sacchetti: Thank you. Good morning, everyone. Welcome to Bankwell's Third Quarter 2025 Earnings Conference Call. To access the call over the Internet and review the presentation materials that we will reference on the call, please visit our website at investor.mybankwell.com and go to the Events and Presentations tab for supporting materials. Our third quarter earnings release is also available on our website. Our remarks today may contain forward-looking statements and may refer to non-GAAP financial measures. All participants should refer to our SEC filings, including those found on Forms 8-K, 10-Q and 10-K; for a complete discussion of forward-looking statements and any factors that could cause actual results to differ from those statements. And now I'll turn the call over to Chris Gruseke, Bankwell's Chief Executive Officer. Christopher Gruseke: Thank you, Courtney. Welcome, and thank you to everyone for joining Bankwell's quarterly earnings call. This morning, I'm joined by Courtney Sacchetti, our Chief Financial Officer; and Matt McNeill, our President and Chief Banking Officer. We appreciate your interest in our performance and this opportunity to discuss our results with you. Bankwell delivered another strong quarter with GAAP net income of $10.1 million or $1.27 per share, up from $9.1 million or $1.15 per share last quarter. Pre-provision net revenue return on assets was 1.7% for the quarter, up 27 basis points from the prior quarter. Our results reflect the continued expansion of the company's net interest margin as well as growth in noninterest income generated by our SBA division. We've also made further progress in reducing our nonperforming asset balances during the quarter and continue to have a positive outlook on credit for the quarters ahead. Our NIM continued to expand this quarter as we forecast for the last several quarters. This is the result of the combined impact of repricing approximately $1 billion of time deposits, increased asset yields and the growth of our low-cost deposit balances. Low-cost deposits include noninterest-bearing deposits as well as NOW accounts at rates of 50 basis points or lower. These accounts average balances collectively grew by $20 million over the prior quarter and $64 million or 16% since the fourth quarter of 2024. Loan originations remained strong. During the third quarter, we funded $220 million of loans, bringing our year-to-date fundings to just over $500 million. Our SBA division increased its momentum as gains on sale rose to $1.4 million for the quarter. SBA originations totaled $22 million for the quarter, bringing our year-to-date total originations to $44 million. The government shutdown has potential to temporarily impact our SBA results for the remainder of this year. While there may be potential for short-term impact, the SBA division has been a strong performer, reaching nearly 90% of our full-year origination goal of $50 million within the first 3 quarters of this year. Year-to-date noninterest income, including SBA gains on sale, totaled $6 million. Credit trends in the portfolio continue to improve. Nonperforming assets as a percentage of total assets fell to 56 basis points compared to 78 basis points last quarter. This improvement was driven by the collection of $5 million on 3 SBA guaranteed loans and the sale of a $1.6 million commercial real estate loan. Additionally, Special Mention loan balances decreased by $30 million. Finally, our efficiency ratio improved to 51.4% in the quarter, down from 56.1% last quarter as we continue to balance growth with fiscal discipline. Now I'll ask Courtney to provide a more detailed review of our financial results. Courtney Sacchetti: Thank you, Chris. For the third quarter, pre-provision net revenue totaled $13.9 million or $1.77 per share, representing a 21% increase from the second quarter. Net interest income reached $26 million, while noninterest income increased to $2.5 million, driven by $1.4 million in SBA sales gains. Net interest margin expanded to 3.34%, up 24 basis points over the prior quarter. This growth was driven by a 13 basis point rise in loan yields, with approximately 3 basis points of both margin and yield attributable to onetime interest income from resolved SBA loans. Deposit costs also improved 10 basis points now at 3.30%. Improvement in both deposit costs and loan yields have contributed materially to our NIM expansion this year, up 74 basis points from the fourth quarter of 2024. Interest-bearing deposit costs are down 37 basis points from the fourth quarter of 2024. Loan yields widened, with our year-to-date average originations yield approximately 136 basis points higher than the runoff yield, generating a 41 basis point increase on yield for the total portfolio from the fourth quarter of 2024. These results do not reflect our response to the September rate cut made by the Fed. In response to the rate cut, we reduced our CD rates by 25 basis points and repriced approximately $0.5 billion of non-maturity deposits. We expect $1.25 billion in time deposits to reprice favorably over the next 12 months by approximately 27 basis points. The annualized incremental benefit of this repricing is approximately $3.4 million. Please refer to Page 10 of our investor presentation for more detail on our time deposit maturity schedule. Although we expect to realize the benefit of lower cost time deposits over the next 12 months, we also have approximately $800 million in loans tied to prime that repriced at the end of September. We anticipate the short-term impact of these recent rate changes to hold our net interest margin relatively flat in the fourth quarter. However, as term deposits mature, we expect our margin to improve as liability repricing aligns with assets. For a future 25 basis point rate cut, we would anticipate a modest annualized increase in our net interest margin of approximately 5 basis points. Since the start of the year, we have strategically increased our proportion of variable rate loans from just over 20% to 35%. As we have constructed a more neutral balance sheet, the impact of future interest rate changes on our results is expected to diminish. Noninterest income of $2.5 million increased 24% versus the linked quarter, largely driven by $1.4 million of SBA gain on sale income, an increase of $0.3 million over the last quarter. As you can see on Page 14 of our investor presentation, noninterest income now represents 8.8% of total revenue compared to 4.6% in the fourth quarter of 2024. Total revenue grew 10% compared to the prior quarter, while noninterest expense increased just 1%, resulting in positive operating leverage. While our noninterest expense to average assets was 180 basis points, our efficiency ratio improved to 51.4% for the quarter. We're pleased with this progress and expect further improvement in our efficiency ratio as profitability expands. Turning to credit, third quarter results reflect continued positive trends. We reduced our nonperforming assets by $7 million, bringing our NPA to assets ratio to 56 basis points. We recorded modest recoveries and a small provision of $372,000 in the quarter. Our allowance for credit losses remains at 110 basis points of total loans, while our coverage of nonperforming loans increased to 177%. A few final thoughts on our financial condition. Our balance sheet remains well capitalized and liquid with total assets of $3.2 billion, up slightly versus the linked quarter. The holding company and bank both saw expanding capital ratios during the third quarter, with our consolidated common equity Tier 1 ratio now at 10.39% versus 10.18% in the prior quarter. Our tangible book value also increased, reaching $36.84. I'll now turn it over to Matt to provide an update on loan originations. Matthew McNeill: Good morning. As Chris mentioned, loan fundings in the first 3 quarters remained strong. The bank has funded $500 million in new loans as of 9/30. 2025 year-to-date loan fundings have already outpaced full year 2023 and 2024, respectively. Payoffs have been at record levels and are projected to remain high through the end of the year. Despite our strong origination numbers, net loan growth only increased $49 million in the quarter and $12 million year-to-date. I would like to point out that some of our payoff activity is being encouraged by the bank, where we would like to exit some less attractive credits. Overall, we believe the recycling of the loan book is a sign of good health, and it provides the bank the opportunity to make new loans at more favorable yields. Now I will hand it back to Courtney to summarize our guidance for the remainder of the year. Courtney Sacchetti: Thanks, Matt. Due to our elevated payoffs, we are revising our low single-digit loan growth guidance to flat for the year. We affirm our noninterest income guidance of $7 million to $8 million for the full year, and the resumption of the SBA program would be additive to that total. We also affirm our net interest income guidance of $97 million to $98 million, along with our guidance on noninterest expense of $58 million to $59 million. With our fourth quarter earnings in January, we will provide additional guidance on our 2026 outlook. I'll now turn the call back to Chris for [Technical Difficulty]. Christopher Gruseke: Thank you, Courtney. We've continued to make excellent progress and to deliver on our strategic objectives of diversifying our income streams, improving our deposit base and continuously attracting talented banking professionals who value the opportunities afforded by working with the team committed to constant improvement. Importantly, we've made significant strides on closing out some pandemic-era credits with no further losses. Nonperforming assets now stand at 56 basis points of total assets versus 207 basis points a year ago, and we look forward to further improvement in the quarters ahead. Thanks to everyone on the Bankwell team, whose commitment to excellence has enabled these results. This concludes our prepared remarks. Operator, will you please begin the question-and-answer session? Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Steve Moss from Raymond James. Stephen Moss: Chris, maybe just starting with the good originations this quarter, I think Courtney gave a loan yield number, but I'm sorry, I missed those, I was kind of hopping on the call a little late here. Just kind of curious, where is loan pricing these days? And do we continue to see elevated payoffs maybe carrying over into 2026? Courtney Sacchetti: Yes. So Steve, it's Courtney. On Page 10 of our investor presentation, we do give a little bit more detail. We -- year-to-date, our originations are a weighted average rate of [ 7.86 ]. That's on about $0.5 billion of originations, and that's the rate as of 9/30, so impact from any repricing or anything there. Matt? Matthew McNeill: Yes. Loan demand is very strong. That's reflected in that pricing. So [Audio Gap] pick and choose kind of where we want to move forward. The lack of material loan growth year-over-year is really related to the timing and the velocity of the payoffs. This is the strongest year of payoffs that we've experienced. And that's -- it takes a couple of months to get the loan pipeline to respond to be able to backfill those numbers, which we successfully did this quarter. And we anticipate the fourth quarter to have some similarly strong payoffs. So we think we'll be able to meet -- and Courtney had said earlier that we're going to stay flat, and that's how we're looking at it. But the loan demand is still there. It's just the timing of payoffs and trying to get the pipeline robust enough to respond to that. Christopher Gruseke: Stephen, with regard to next year, it is -- we have demands due to originate higher volume than we have. So it's a matter of lead time. So we'll just plan to be out in front of it. We can control it with pricing. Stephen Moss: Yes, I hear you there. And then in terms of an update on your core deposit initiative with the teams you brought over, just kind of curious, how is that developing? And if you have any update on that front? Matthew McNeill: So the teams, the first teams were hired in April, and we've hired some subsequent teams since then, including in the third quarter. We're bullish on the teams. They're already starting to produce and add deposits to the balance sheet. We don't think that we will have a -- their full production in place until sometime in '26. We did very carefully target teams that had large portfolios of noninterest-bearing deposits. So those are primarily [Audio Gap] accounts, which take longer to [ move ] than a high interest-bearing account where it's just money sitting around that's not being utilized in a business. So they're well within our time threshold for how they're performing, and we're [Audio Gap] full impact technical [Audio Gap]. Stephen Moss: Okay. And just kind of -- maybe just last one for me here in terms of just thinking about just the cadence of lower [ cuts ]. I hear you guys on CDs getting repriced 100% beta. Kind of curious on the nonmaturity deposits, how you're thinking about deposit beta with the Fed? Courtney Sacchetti: Right. So the most recent rate cut at the end of September, we have just rough numbers, approximately $1 billion of non-maturity interest-bearing deposits. About $250 million, $260 million of that we have indexed to Fed funds. So that will move that part of the relationship that we have. And then with this recent round, we did another $250 million or so of our exception rate pricing, 100% beta down. So we were able to achieve effectively 50% beta on $1 billion of deposits. Operator: The final question comes from the line of Feddie Strickland from Hovde Group. Unknown Analyst: This is Feddie's associate [ Anira ] on for him. The first question, we saw some strong SBA contributions in the quarter, and we wanted to know, how much more do you feel you can ramp up that side of the business? And in your opening remarks, you did mention that there may be short-term government shutdown effects. Will that affect the ramp-up or anything to do with that side of the business? Matthew McNeill: I believe the answer to the second question is it really depends on the duration of the shutdown right now. So Bankwell is a preferred lender. We're able to continue to underwrite SBA credits. We are not able to get in-place guarantees, and we are not [Audio Gap] our guaranteed [Audio Gap] previously originated. There is a temporary freeze to the SBA income. If the government opens up in a relatively short amount of time, it may not have a large -- or it may not have an impact on the business. We may be able to fluidly flow through it, but it's really going to depend on the duration of the shutdown. As far as the ramp, we hired Michael Johnston from ReadyCap, which was the fourth largest producer of SBA loans in the country in previous years. And we believe that the SBA division does have operating leverage able to further scale the business beyond $50 million in production, and we'll talk about that in the fourth quarter. Christopher Gruseke: And we'll just need the government to be open to do that. Matthew McNeill: Correct. Christopher Gruseke: This is Chris. I'll continue a little bit on that answer and say that we did note that in the 3 quarters' worth of activity, we pretty much hit our original goal of almost [ $50 million ]. So we've got almost a full year's worth of original expectations in the results. So the government opens, as Courtney had mentioned, there's [Audio Gap] it will be [Audio Gap] up to when the government [Audio Gap]. Operator: There are no further questions. This concludes today's meeting. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. At this time, I would like to welcome everyone to today's Carpenter Technology Q1 Fiscal Year '26 Earnings Presentation. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to turn the call over to John Huyette, Vice President, Investor Relations. John? John Huyette: Thank you, operator. Good morning, everyone, and welcome to the Carpenter Technology Earnings Conference Call for the fiscal 2026 First Quarter ended September 30, 2025. This call is also being broadcast over the Internet, along with presentation slides. For those of you listening by phone, you may experience a time delay in slide movement. Speakers on the call today are Tony Thene, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer; and Tim Lain, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Statements made by management during this earnings presentation that are forward-looking statements are based on current expectations. Risk factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from these forward-looking statements can be found in Carpenter Technology's most recent SEC filings, including the company's report on Form 10-K for the year ended June 30, 2025, and the exhibits attached to that filing. Please also note that in the following discussion, unless otherwise noted, when management discusses the sales or revenue, that reference excludes surcharge. When referring to operating margins, that is based on adjusted operating income, excluding special items and sales, excluding surcharge. I will now turn the call over to Tony. Tony Thene: Thank you, John, and good morning to everyone. I will begin on Slide 4 with a review of our safety performance. We ended the quarter with a total case incident rate of 1.6. As we continue to drive improvement in multiple leading indicators, I expect to see continued progress. As always, we remain committed to our ultimate goal, a 0 injury workplace. Let's turn to Slide 5 for an overview of our first quarter performance. First quarter was a great start to fiscal year 2026. Let me highlight the 4 major takeaways. One, record earnings. In the quarter, we generated $153 million in adjusted operating income, exceeding the fourth quarter of fiscal year 2025, which was then a record quarter. And it is a 31% increase over first quarter of fiscal year 2025, a meaningful step-up year-over-year. The earnings exceeded our strong first quarter guidance, driven by increased productivity, product mix optimization and pricing actions, a positive step towards our full fiscal year 2026 earnings outlook. Two, expanding operating margins. The SAO segment continued to expand margins, reaching an adjusted margin of 32% in the quarter. The 32% margin compares to 26.3% a year ago and 30.5% in the prior quarter. And we don't believe this is the peak margin level over the long term. Our ability to continue to expand margins can be attributed to our solid execution, strong market position and unique capacity and capabilities. As a result of the expanding margins, the SAO segment recorded $170.7 million in operating income, an increase of 27% year-over-year and an all-time record for the segment. Three, strengthening market demand. We continue to see demand environment strengthen, especially in the Aerospace supply chain as it gains confidence in the Boeing and Airbus build rate ramp. As a result, September was the highest order intake month in over a year. Specifically, in the quarter, we saw bookings for Aerospace and Defense accelerate, up 23% over the previous quarter. Four, pricing continues to be a tailwind. In this strengthening demand environment, our pricing remains elevated and consistently increasing as evidenced by our financial results. Our customers continue to be focused on securing their supply of our critical materials. As evidenced in the last quarter, we negotiated 5 large LTAs with Aerospace customers with significant price increases, reflecting their strong outlook on the market. If I were to write the headline for this quarter's performance, it would be Carpenter Technology delivers all-time record quarterly earnings, driving SAO margins to an impressive 32%, even in a quarter where they smartly completed planned maintenance activities. In addition, they shattered the narrative held by some of a seasonally weak quarter, a weakening demand environment and decreasing pricing power by achieving record earnings, strong sequential growth in Aerospace and Defense orders and negotiating 5 aerospace LTAs with substantial price increases. Let's turn to Slide 6 and a closer look at first quarter sales and market dynamics. In the first quarter of fiscal year 2026, our total sales, excluding raw material surcharge were up 4% over the first quarter of fiscal year 2025 and down 3% sequentially. As expected, the sequential sales decline was driven by the planned maintenance outages we discussed on the last earnings call, offset by increased productivity, improved product mix and pricing actions. Sales in the aerospace and defense end-use market were up 1% sequentially and up 11% year-over-year. Notably, sales in the engine submarket were up 14% sequentially. Our engine customers continue to be concerned about surety of supply as they navigate high MRO demand while managing the ongoing and accelerating build rate ramp. Across all submarkets, the aerospace supply chain continues to increase activity as build rates ramp and confidence grows in the OEM's ability to perform. As evidence of this, we saw Aerospace and Defense bookings accelerate in the quarter, increasing 23% sequentially. And as I mentioned earlier, we also completed 5 LTA negotiations with aerospace customers in the quarter, all with significant price increases. Moving on to the medical end-use market. Our sales were down 20% sequentially and 16% compared to the prior year first quarter. The large majority of the sequential decrease is from medical distribution customers as they continue to see quarter-over-quarter volatility. Recall that coming out of COVID, there was a rapid recovery in patient procedures, generating significant activity in the supply chain. As the medical field caught up on the backlog of procedures and growth rates normalized, the supply chain, especially our distribution customers, has been working to manage working capital levels. As we've highlighted in previous quarters, this has impacted a portion of our medical business and it is continuing longer than anticipated. Even so, we have still been able to produce record quarterly earnings and see the medical market as an increasing tailwind going forward. Our medical customers report a positive long-term outlook on the market as the fundamental demand drivers remain strong. Further, our broad portfolio of medical alloys is unique and critical to our customers' focus on improving patient outcomes. Shifting to the energy end-use market. Sales were down 5% sequentially and up 8% year-over-year. As discussed during our last several earnings calls, the energy market is currently driven by the accelerating demand for power generation, and we see this only getting stronger with order intake up 41% in the quarter. As we have stated before, sales in the power generation submarket will fluctuate quarter-to-quarter due to the frequency of orders and our practice of strategically slotting them into our production process. Of course, the key end-use market for our increasing profitability is Aerospace and Defense, where we see demand strengthening as evidenced by accelerating order intake and increasing pricing actions. Altogether, we are operating in a strengthening demand environment across the high-value end-use markets that we believe will drive meaningful growth in both the near term and long term. Now I will turn it over to Tim for the financial summary. Timothy Lain: Thanks, Tony. Good morning, everyone. I'll start on the income statement summary. Starting at the top, sales excluding surcharge increased 4% year-over-year on 10% lower volume. Sequentially, sales were down 3% on 5% lower volume. The improving productivity, product mix and pricing are evident in our gross profit, which increased to $216.4 million in the current quarter, up 1% sequentially and 23% from the same quarter last year. SG&A expenses were $63.1 million in the first quarter, essentially flat sequentially and up slightly from the same quarter last year. The SG&A line includes corporate costs, which were $26.6 million. This is flat sequentially and up slightly when excluding the special item from the first quarter of fiscal year 2025. For the second quarter of fiscal year 2026, we expect corporate costs to be about $25 million, which is in line with our quarterly average of fiscal year 2025. Adjusted operating income was $153.3 million in the current quarter, which is 31% higher than the $117.2 million in our first quarter of fiscal year 2025 and up 1% from our recent fourth quarter. As Tony mentioned earlier, this represents another record quarterly operating income result, breaking the previous record set last quarter. This is even more impressive considering we were able to deliver the results in a quarter with planned maintenance activities. Moving on to our effective tax rate, which was 15.4% in the current quarter. This quarter's effective tax rate was lower than anticipated and comparable to the same quarter last year due to discrete tax benefits associated with the vesting of certain equity awards in both quarters. For the balance of the fiscal year, we expect the effective tax rate to be between 22% to 23%, and the effective tax rate for the full fiscal year 2026 is expected to be on the low end of the full year guidance we provided of 21% to 23%. Finally, the earnings per diluted share was $2.43 for the quarter. Again, our recent first quarter was a record quarter for profitability. Our teams continue to drive higher profitability with the manufacturing organization's focus on increasing productivity while managing the product mix to optimize profit and realizing the benefits of pricing actions that we continue to pursue and capture. Now turning to more detail on each of the segments, starting with our SAO segment. Net sales, excluding surcharge for the first quarter were $533.9 million. Compared to the same quarter last year, sales were up 5% on 11% lower volume, reflecting the impact of product mix optimization and pricing actions. Sequentially, sales were down 3% on 5% lower volume. The sequential decline in volume was in line with expectations given the planned maintenance activities in the quarter. SAO reported operating income of $170.7 million in the first quarter. But I think the most impressive measure for the SAO segment is the adjusted operating margin of 32%. This marks the 15th consecutive quarter of margin expansion. The record margin is being driven by the growth levers that we consistently highlight, specifically the SAO team's ability to increase productivity at key work centers to drive an improving mix while realizing higher selling prices. These areas are as relevant as ever as we actively manage our production schedules to optimize the highest value margins while carefully managing costs and executing thoughtful planned maintenance activities. Tony will talk in detail about the pricing environment. Altogether, we continue to see opportunities to expand profitability and margin further as we execute against our growth levers. Looking ahead to our upcoming second quarter of fiscal year 2026, we anticipate SAO will generate operating income in the range of $168 million to $172 million, in line with the record first quarter. The SAO guidance for the second quarter considers our available effective capacity. This accounts for the impact of time off for the holidays, which is important to our employees and downtime associated with upgrades to key testing work centers. This is an area where it makes sense to spend modest capital to upgrade certain equipment to ensure capacity is available to support our highest value materials, which means we see significant payback on small investments. Now turning to Slide 10 and our PEP segment results. Net sales, excluding surcharge in the first quarter of fiscal year 2026 were $87.2 million, down 10% sequentially and down 6% from the same quarter a year ago. In the current quarter, PEP reported operating income of $9.4 million compared with $11.7 million in the fourth quarter of fiscal year 2025 and $7.3 million in the same quarter a year ago. The year-over-year increase in profitability despite lower sales reflects the impact of a favorable shift in product mix. We currently anticipate the PEP segment's operating income to be relatively flat in the second quarter of fiscal year 2026. A few additional comments to keep in mind. PEP represents roughly 6% of the company's overall segment profitability on a trailing 12-month basis. In other words, SAO dwarfs PEP and SAO will continue to be the growth driver for Carpenter Technology. From an outlook perspective, we anticipate PEP results will improve, but would point out that our total company outlook is based largely on our growth expectations for the SAO segment, which will continue to outpace PEP performance. With that said, the PEP business is a small but strategic part of Carpenter Technologies portfolio. We believe that PEP can be a growth accelerator in the future. Before we move to cash, I just wanted to pull together the pieces that make up our outlook for operating income in the second quarter of fiscal year 2026. We anticipate total operating income of $152 million to $156 million. This includes SAO at $168 million to $172 million, PET roughly at $9 million and corporate costs of $25 million. Now turning to the next slide to talk about our cash generation and capital allocation priorities. In the current quarter, we generated $39.2 million of cash from operating activities and spent $42.6 million on capital expenditures, which resulted in negative adjusted free cash flow of $3.4 million. For fiscal year 2026, we continue to anticipate generating between $240 million to $280 million of adjusted free cash flow, which includes $175 million to $185 million of spending for our brownfield capacity expansion project. To be clear, the brownfield capital expenditures are on top of the $125 million of annual capital expenditures to fund our normal maintenance and sustaining capital as well as smaller growth projects. As an update on the brownfield expansion project, construction activities are in full swing. Site work is underway, currently focused on building foundation work at our Athens, Alabama site. The project is currently on budget and on schedule. As the project progresses, we expect that capital spending will begin to accelerate in the second half of fiscal year 2026 as construction activities broaden and equipment delivery and installation begins in earnest. Moving on to our capital allocation philosophy. As we've discussed before, our primary focus areas for capital deployment are investing cash in attractive and accretive growth and returning cash to shareholders. Our commitment to investing for growth is evident in our brownfield expansion project I just mentioned. In terms of returning cash to shareholders, we continue to execute against our $400 million stock buyback authorization. In the current quarter, we repurchased $49.1 million of our shares, bringing the cumulative total to $151 million. In addition to the buyback program, we also continue to fund a recurring and long-standing quarterly dividend. Our capital allocation philosophy is enabled by our healthy liquidity and strong balance sheet. Liquidity as of the most recent quarter is $556.9 million, including $208 million of cash and $348.9 million of available borrowings under our credit facility. Our credit metrics remain very strong with net debt-to-EBITDA ratio remaining well below 1x. Altogether, we believe our strong balance sheet and outlook for significant cash generation positions us well to fund continued growth and deliver significant shareholder returns. With that, I will turn the call back to Tony. Tony Thene: Thanks, Tim. Over this past quarter, a couple of important topics have garnered the attention of the investment community. I would like to address them to make sure Carpenter Technologies position is 100% clear. There has been much written on the current pricing environment in the nickel-based super alloy market. We have 2 basic categories that we break our customers into, those that work with us under long-term agreements and those that don't have long-term agreements with us, which we call transactional. Customers in both categories are extremely important and strategic. The customers who do not work with us through a long-term agreement, our transactional customers in almost every case, are long-standing customers with highly specialized and exact specifications. Quoting for these transactional customers require significant time and effort with multiple levels of internal technical reviews and discussions with the customer. As a result, we do not entertain spot pricing as it is typically defined. There is not a moving daily price, and we do not typically quote for immediate or short-term delivery. In fact, our transactional business pricing is generally higher than LTA pricing. Certainly, we do not provide transactional customers with better pricing than our LTA customers as that would be illogical. For customers who work with us through long-term agreements, their primary focus during renewal discussions remains the surety of supply of our products. With each contract renewal, we have been able to realize price increases that demonstrate the value of our products in the supply chain and reflect the underlying supply-demand imbalance that is only expected to tighten in the future. I will note again to support our view of the pricing dynamic for our materials that in the quarter, we completed negotiations on 5 LTAs with aerospace customers with significant price increases. It is also important to note that, in turn, our customers also benefit greatly as they are getting surety of supply of our products, which is highly valuable to them in an extraordinarily high demand environment. You can see the results of our pricing actions in our SAO segment financials as our total sales dollars per shipment pound remained elevated and increased significantly year-over-year. For more insight, I will note that the year-over-year increase is 10 percentage points higher for the aerospace and defense end-use market. The results demonstrate we are consistently increasing the pricing level of our Aerospace products. If we were discounting Aerospace products are seeing immense pricing pressure, you would have seen a significant sequential decrease in the price per pound. Clearly, that is not the case. With that said, it is important to repeat something that I've said before. Price per pound may not move in a linear fashion quarter-to-quarter as the product mix in any given quarter influences results. However, we expect that the pricing trend will continue to be favorable. Final point on this topic. We have communicated publicly many times and state again today that we believe pricing actions will continue to be a positive tailwind into the future due to the supply-demand imbalance that exists today and that is expected to intensify in the future for nickel-based super alloys. In addition, another topic that has been written about is the Aerospace demand environment and more specifically, the potential weakness in the titanium market. Let me address the titanium portion first. Carpenter Technology does not melt titanium or produce large titanium forgings for aerospace structural applications. To be very clear, any current or future weakness in the titanium raw material or structural markets has no material impact on Carpenter Technology. In stark contrast to titanium raw materials, nickel-based superalloys, which is our primary focus, are in sharp supply, have only a few qualified producers globally with high barriers to entry and rapidly accelerating demand. As I mentioned earlier, our Aerospace and Defense end-use market orders have been steadily increasing over the last couple of quarters. In this quarter, they were up 23% sequentially. That is after a similar sequential increase in the prior quarter. This strong sequential growth in bookings was driven by increased volume, which is a very encouraging sign and continued pricing actions. Obviously, the accelerating bookings is a very positive trend developing and signals continuing expansion as the airframers drive for higher build rates. To support this position, let me provide more color on what we are seeing in each of the aerospace submarkets. I will start by saying that in general, the tone with all of our Aerospace customers is one of increasing positivity as they see large demand upticks on the horizon. Our Aerospace structural customers experienced the most disruption from the OEM build rate issues we have seen over the last 1.5 years. This is due to the relatively low MRO needs on structural versus engine parts. Over this period of time, they have been carefully managing their near-term working capital needs. Encouragingly, some have begun reordering on increasingly positive momentum from Boeing, while others state they are expecting more earnest ordering to begin soon. Collectively, our aerospace structural customers universally agree that strong demand is on the near-term horizon and are considering when and how to ramp activity back up. Our aerospace fastener customers report steady improvement in their demand. Some customers are already placing orders with us to cover all of calendar 2026. They are continuing to expect improvements in demand, and our quoting activity has increased notably over the last few months. Fastener customers are generally expecting very solid double-digit growth next year based on ongoing improvements in the aerospace OEM build rates. Our aerospace engine customers continue to remain busy as they generally have been over the last several quarters. Engine OEMs are very active across the supply chain, working to ensure material availability. Customers continue to report high MRO activity and a need for more material from us. In summary, our engine customers continue to be very positive as evidenced by the 14% sequential increase in aerospace engine sales in the quarter. I don't usually mention the space submarket as it is a much smaller portion of our business, but I will note that we have seen large increases in activity over the last few quarters, and our space customers report expectations for significant ongoing demand. Finally, I will mention our Defense customers because we have seen significant increase in activity here as well. Our Defense customers are expecting very strong increases in demand based on new programs being worked on as well as the expected fiscal year 2026 defense budget. With those insights, let me state where we believe the aerospace market stands today. The aerospace market has seen large cyclicality over many years, and we have seen the same pattern play out cycle after cycle. That is the supply chain gets a little ahead of OEMs and then decides to pull back or pause. That is followed quickly by a time when the supply chain realizes they do not have enough material on order, and there is an urgent scramble to place orders. This results in what the industry describes as the bullwhip effect, where there is effectively a run of material. In this case, I'm speaking specifically of nickel-based aerospace materials. This cycle we are emerging from right now is similar as before, except for one major factor. That is the total demand targets from OEMs are significantly higher than before. Our conversations over the last quarter with our closest customers have focused on advising them to ensure they have their orders placed now, so they are not last in line. The pattern I have described is not a surprise to our nickel-based customers who all understand the question is when, not if this run occurs. And then last week, we have the reporting of the FAA approving a 737 MAX rate increase from 38 to 42 per month, which we believe will support the bullwhip effect I just mentioned. Lastly, we have received questions about our confidence in our earnings guidance as the marketplace continues to move. To start with, just a couple of points on our earnings guidance philosophy. One, we believe it is important to provide. Two, we established challenging targets that we have line of sight to achieving with disciplined action plans in place. Three, we don't believe multiyear earnings targets should be back-end loaded. Therefore, we commit to meaningful earnings growth in the first year of multiyear guidance. And four, not only do we have a track record of achieving our targets, we exceed them. That philosophy should give you confidence in our future performance. Now specifically to address our guidance. As a reminder, at our February 2025 investor update, we announced our fiscal year 2027 operating income target of $765 million to $800 million. More recently, on our last earnings call, we provided additional insight as we guided to a strong fiscal year 2026, projecting $660 million to $700 million in operating income. As I stated then, this range for fiscal year 2026 represents a 26% to 33% increase over our record fiscal year 2025 earnings and as we believe the highest earnings growth trajectory among our industry peers, quite impressive. Now we have just completed the first quarter of our fiscal year 2026 and remain confident in our full year earnings guidance. Most importantly, we have line of sight to the high end of the range with increased volume, pricing actions and productivity, all contributing to higher profitability. As I just mentioned, the reporting that the FAA approved a 737 MAX rate increase from 38 to 42 per month is important. That was a material unknown that has now been revealed and should support a continued increase in Aerospace bookings. As we look at fiscal year 2027, we also remain committed to that level of profitability, which, by the way, would be an approximately 50% increase over our recently completed record fiscal year 2025. But let me be clear, as this aerospace market continues to accelerate, our focus is not on achieving the fiscal year 2027 guidance. The focus is on exceeding that lofty target. Now let's turn to the final slide to summarize this great story. Let me close with why I think Carpenter Technology is a compelling story for existing and potential shareholders. Specifically, let's take a look at the 3 major areas most important to shareholders. One, we have an enviable market position in the industry. We are in the midst of a significant acceleration in demand, especially in the aerospace and defense end-use market. Demand for air travel has never been higher, and OEMs are pushing to ramp production build rates significantly over the next several years, which is just the beginning. With accelerating build rates driving higher demand for our materials, a fundamental supply-demand imbalance in nickel-based super alloys will tighten even further. Our world-class collection of unique manufacturing assets and related capabilities are difficult, if not impossible, to replicate. Our leading capacity and capabilities are further differentiated by stringent qualifications necessary to supply advanced materials for aerospace and defense and other key end-use market applications. Two, we are committed to a balanced capital allocation approach. We have a healthy liquidity position and a strong balance sheet, combined with an impressive free cash flow generation outlook. We are focused on returning cash to shareholders via a long-standing dividend and a robust share repurchase plan. In addition, our strong performance allows us to invest in highly accretive growth projects like our recently announced brownfield expansion that accelerates earnings growth but will not materially impact the nickel-based supply-demand imbalance. And three, we have delivered impressive financial results with a strong earnings outlook. We have just completed another record quarter of profitability, driven by significant margin expansion in our SAO segment. Our outlook for fiscal year 2026 implies a 26% to 33% increase over our record fiscal year 2025, and we are well on our way to achieving and even surpassing the ambitious earnings target for fiscal year 2027. I don't know of anyone in our industry who can say they have a stronger earnings outlook than Carpenter Technology. Of course, fiscal year 2027 is not expected to be our peak. We have plans and line of sight to further earnings growth beyond 2027. In summary, I believe Carpenter Technology checks every important shareholder criteria box. We have created significant shareholder value to date, but we are only at the beginning of this growth journey. The best is still to come. As always, we remain focused on supporting our customer needs, operational execution and living our values as we drive to exceptional near-term and long-term performance. Thank you for your attention. I will now turn the call back to the operator. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And it looks like our first question today comes from the line of Gautam Khanna with TD Cowen. Gautam Khanna: Great results, guys. Tony, I did want to get your perspective on a couple of things, a, like what has happened, if anything, in your own jet engine alloy lead times? Are they still kind of fairly extended? And also just what is your best guess as to why some of those channel checks are so not representative of the business? If it is -- I mean, it's -- there's such a dichotomy with what you guys have continued to put up and some of the chatter out there. And then lastly, just on your comments on Boeing. You guys have already endured a number of quarters of, if you will, destocking. I just wanted to get a sense for like your perspective on had that not happened over the last year, whether you would have had even more profits? And if that's what we're pivoting to, we're starting to see that recovery in the Boeing orders. A lot there, take it anywhere you want. Tony Thene: Okay. Thanks, Gautam, for the questions. One, yes, on engine lead times, they're still extended. And in fact, I think we're at the point now where they're going to start pushing out again pretty quickly because the Boeing news, whereas, of course, many people say, well, that's what they expected. But it's a big deal for the FAA to come out and actually say that. So the discussions we've had with customers just in the last couple of days, remember that was just reported, I think, last Friday, has turned, and you've seen more push to start increasing orders. So I think that's a very significant positive for us. As far as the news around the industry, it's hard for me to speak to that. That's why we took even extra time on today's call to explain very clearly, and I appreciate that you recognize that. We take it really seriously. These earnings calls, we try to communicate very clearly. We believe we are different than other products, the capabilities, the capacity that we have, the broad customer base we have. So the best thing to do for us is listen to what we have to say, follow what we have to say, and I think we'll do a good job of guiding you there. The third thing you mentioned was really -- is really important because a lot of people missed the fact that starting back in early of calendar 2024 is really when you started seeing some issues in the Boeing supply chain. And we were able to maintain and, in fact, produce record quarters during that time because of the flexibility that we have. Airbus was still making planes. We had a very robust backlog that we were able to pull in and use. Power generation then stepped up with more demand. And even in that very difficult time where you had 1 of the 2 airframers, Gautam, effectively making 0 airplanes because remember then later in 2024, they had their work stoppage that we were able to produce record results during that time, I think, went a bit unnoticed and maybe underappreciated. And now here we are where you've got Boeing performing very well, but only at the beginning, Airbus, who has quite a bit further, they want to go, let's say, for example, on their A320 targets. And I think now as we go into the second half of FY '26, that's why you heard the confidence from me and then in terms of our guidance and then also for FY '27. I mean I think there's more opportunities for increase over that guidance than there are risks. Hopefully, I answered all 3 of them for you. Gautam Khanna: Yes. No, that was a very great answer. And just maybe a quick ask on fastener demand trends, how those tracked in the quarter? Tony Thene: Yes. Sorry about that. I know you usually asked about it. Fasteners for this quarter were down 7% sequentially, 40% up year-over-year. But as we look at the order intake coming in right now, as you well know, fastener orders can be a little lumpy. Those are strong coming into our second quarter. And like I said in the prepared remarks, which I think is a very important point, you're seeing a lot of these fastener companies already trying to place orders for the entirety of their calendar year 2026. So that's a big deal, and that's a really strong evidence of how they see the market playing out. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Andre Madrid with BTIG. thanks... Andre Madrid: You mentioned the 5 new LTAs. And I was just wondering if you could speak more to the duration of these and how we can maybe expect duration mix to shift moving forward. Tony Thene: On these 5 specific ones that I was referencing, they range between 2 years and 5 years. Andre Madrid: Got it. And I mean, obviously, these have come in from what you saw pre-COVID, pre-MAX, post-COVID booming. I mean, I guess just how do you expect the duration to -- yes, like what should it look like through the end of the decade, would you say? Would you say it's be consistent at these levels, pulling even further or push out a little bit longer? Tony Thene: Well, I think that contract lengths will stay at this range versus a historical 10-year contract. And that's all -- I mean, that should be obvious that, I mean, that's based on where you think the supply-demand imbalance is going to go. So I think it's interesting as well. I can provide a little bit more color of those 5 contracts, only one of them were a renewal from prior to COVID. So the other 4, this is the second time we've renewed them, if you will, since the post-COVID more robust ordering, especially now. So that's an important point to make as well. Andre Madrid: Got it. Got it. No, that's very helpful. And then I think if I could squeeze in one more. When you look at -- it's very clear on the aero side, what the moving pieces are, but can we maybe peel back what some of those pieces are for defense? I know you highlighted still strong demand there, especially inside of a strong budget request. So... Tony Thene: Well, we play across a lot of different areas in defense. I mean we offer products not just that are maybe traditional or historically been offered, but the next level where we're looking at alloys and tweaking those alloys to get better performance based on the outcomes that they're looking for. So you see us across multiple segments inside the defense market. And quite frankly, our relationship there has grown significantly over time, mainly because they're looking for increased performance. They're looking to operate at a higher level and our alloys and our innovations allow them to do that. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Josh Sullivan with JonesTrading. Joshua Sullivan: Tim, John, congratulations on the quarter. I think I had the title of my note wrapped up, but just had some other questions, Tony. On the aerospace backlog is up nicely, that bullwhip dynamic that just always seems to happen in this industry. Are customers receptive to that messaging to get in now? Or is it your sense that most of the industry is just going to get hit with the rush as it comes? Tony Thene: Well, that's a really good question. And you know this, you've been around long enough. Aerospace customers, there are differences based on whether they're an engine customer or structural, they're in the distribution side. I think that I can tell you they're very receptive to that message. The discussions we've had over the last couple of weeks, they're very receptive. Now all of them are in a little bit different point on where their working capital levels are. But clearly, you've seen an inflection point that says we see this demand coming. We see Boeing continuing to perform well. We see Airbus pushing higher and higher. And I think that has become a pretty uniform feel that now is the time to start increasing the order intake. You've seen that. I mean, 23% sequential this year on Aerospace. If I remember right, last quarter, it was -- Aerospace was up over 20% as well. So you might not get 20% sequentially, Josh, every quarter for the next 3 or 4 quarters. The point is that linear trend upward, I think, is going to be pretty strong as we go through the rest of this fiscal year. Joshua Sullivan: Got it. And then kind of relatedly, into your comments just on LTAs versus transactional customers, you got the 5 new ones signed up here. How should we think about that optimal mix for -- between the 2 customer sets and then how that layers into Athens? And I think you had mentioned at Paris, there's a lot of interest in Athens. Tony Thene: Yes, there's really nothing overly magic about that. I mean whether somebody is on an LTA or not has a lot to do with their point of view, certainly, our point is a view well. Is that what's best for them to have an LTA. Some customers prefer not to do that. On the distribution side, Josh, that's not their mode of operation. So I think the point that I was trying to make there is that there's really not a big distinction for us between an LTA customer and a transactional customer. This idea that a non-LTA customer walks in randomly from the street and orders a random aerospace alloy just doesn't exist. These are customers that we've had for decades that order very specific material. So -- and it commands the same type of price, as I said in my prepared remarks. So there's really not a percentage that I'm trying to get to. We manage each of our customers as individuals, and we'll keep doing it that way. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Scott Deuschle with Deutsche Bank. Scott Deuschle: Tony, do you already have line of sight to another quarter of sequential A&D growth in the quarter you're in right now? Tony Thene: Right. And that's what I just was telling, Josh. I don't -- I can't tell you it's going to be exactly 23%. But I think over these next several quarters, you're going to see continued growth in order intake for sure. Scott Deuschle: Okay. And then the EBIT per pound at SAO was up 42% year-over-year on down volumes. So if the volumes actually start to return to growth on the back of this order improvement, is there an upside opportunity in which you could have a repeat of the EBIT growth profile you experienced over the last couple of years? Tony Thene: Well, certainly, the math works out in our favor, right? If we're producing these types of numbers and you still have volume that's not at the point where we think it's going to go to, that's a pretty good equation. Scott Deuschle: Okay. And then last question for the LTAs that you said repriced this quarter, do we see that benefit hit in the fiscal second quarter? Or do those become effective in January for the third quarter? Tony Thene: I don't want to give specifics on each of the contracts, Scott. But as you know, it varies, right? Some of them will be more, what should I say, earlier, maybe in the second half of this fiscal year. Some of our customers will renegotiate a little bit further out. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And our next question comes from the line of Phil Gibbs with KeyBanc Capital Markets. Philip Gibbs: I think you mentioned it earlier in the call. Were the engine sales up 14% year-on-year? Or was that sequentially, Tony? Tony Thene: Yes. Thanks for mentioning that, Phil. It was 14% sequentially. It was about 20% year-over-year. Philip Gibbs: Okay. Excellent. And you mentioned in your prepared remarks on Space and Defense verticals, and you've had some Space business be a little bit more recurring over the last few quarters. Any sense or color you can provide in terms of how much maybe the combination of Space and Defense is of the A&D business? Tony Thene: Yes. Well, I mean, Space is small, right? But the reason I mentioned it is because it's a growing area. And I think it's just another example of our exposure to this very quickly growing market. And I think probably going forward, you'll see me or see us speak about space more. So it's very small, Phil, but I think it's going to be very strategic for us going forward. Philip Gibbs: And then lastly, on the brownfield, can you just give us give us an update in terms of what you expect in terms of the construction period in the second half and deliveries and then give us a view of the time line just as we try to envision the project. Tony Thene: Yes. I'll give that one to Tim since he's overseeing that project for us. Timothy Lain: Yes. Phil, in terms of time line, just high level, construction now expected to be complete beginning late fiscal '27, early fiscal '28. In my remarks, I said we're -- construction is underway. Most of the focus in these last several months has been about getting the site ready, so doing the land preparation -- site preparation, getting building foundations poured, things like that, getting the structure in place. Over the next several months, several quarters, we'll shift pretty quickly to more building infrastructure, getting the equipment delivered, set up, installed. So high level, we're on track in terms of budget and schedule. And just to reiterate the guidance for the capital, specifically for the brownfield expansion, we said $175 million to $185 million of CapEx this year, fiscal '26 on top of the normal CapEx of $125 million. Operator: And our next question comes from the line of Bennett Moore with JPMorgan. Bennett Moore: Congrats on another impressive quarter. I was hoping you can maybe delineate on the A&D bookings growth sequentially, what this look like between engines and structural. I think you had a comment in there that part of this was volume driven. So just trying to gauge if there's Boeing levered customers to what extent they're coming off the sidelines. Tony Thene: Well, I made the comment around that it was volume-driven as well because that's important, right? And it's -- certainly, price is a big driver. But the point there was it's not just a price increase. The volume is coming from the marketplace. So that was an important point. I don't think I'm not going to get into bookings for each one of the submarkets that would get us into a level of detail that probably is not helpful overall. I'll just keep it at the total Aerospace and Defense level for you and keep it there. Bennett Moore: All right. I guess as we think about the fiscal '26 guidance then and the revision towards the high end, what were the prior assumptions around when the structural activity would resume? And how has that changed now? Or is that really just what's reflected in this new guidance? Tony Thene: Well, I mean, the guidance is the same. We've just said we're very open about what we're feeling right now and saying that we see it at the high end, right? So we're always adjusting our forecast based on what we're hearing from our customers. And the takeaway there is that you're seeing, as I think I said in my prepared remarks, a higher degree of positivity coming from them. So based on that, we have line of sight that we'll be on the higher side of that guidance. But it's all based on what we're hearing from the market and from -- directly from our customers. Bennett Moore: All right. And then if I could real quick, are you seeing any acceleration in the incremental value being realized in these LTA renewals? Or is kind of the repricing similar to what we saw initially post-COVID? Tony Thene: Tough question only because it really depends on the submarket that you're in, Bennett. I would tell you at a high level that you are seeing continued increased percentages, not always the same for each submarket, if that makes sense. Operator: And it looks like there are no further questions. So I will now hand it back over to John Huyette for closing remarks. John? John Huyette: Thank you, operator, and thank you, everyone, for joining us today for our fiscal year 2026 first quarter conference call. Have a great rest of your day. Operator: And ladies and gentlemen, that -- again, that concludes today's call. Thank you for joining, and you may now disconnect.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. This is the conference operator. Welcome to the Rogers Communications, Inc. Third Quarter 2025 Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] The conference is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to turn the conference over to Paul Carpino, Vice President of Investor Relations with Rogers Communications. Please go ahead, Mr. Carpino. Paul Carpino: Thank you, Galyene, and good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining us. Today, I'm here with our President and Chief Executive Officer, Tony Staffieri; and our Chief Financial Officer, Glenn Brandt. Today's discussion will include estimates and other forward-looking information from which our actual results could differ. Please review the cautionary language in today's earnings report and in our 2024 annual report regarding the various factors, assumptions and risks that could cause our actual results to differ. With that, let me turn it over to Tony to begin. Anthony Staffieri: Thank you, Paul, and good morning, everyone. It's been quite a week for our Toronto Blue Jays, American League Champions, so I just wanted to say a few words about Canada's team. We're thrilled. The Blue Jays are in the world series, and it all starts north of the border tomorrow. As owner, our job is to give leadership the tools and resources to win. And as Canada's communications and entertainment company, we're about providing Canadians with the best sports and entertainment experiences. This is one of those moments, and this is what Rogers is all about. Let me now turn to the quarter. Q3 was another strong quarter for Rogers. We delivered industry-best combined mobile phone and Internet customer additions. We continue to grow our Cable business anchored by Canada's most reliable Internet. We again delivered the best Wireless and Cable margins in our sector, and we're seeing healthy revenue growth from our Media operations through organic growth and through now including MLSE revenue in our results. Overall, we executed with discipline and a clear focus on driving growth across our three main businesses. Let me start with Wireless. In the highly competitive Wireless market, we saw some pressure on service revenue and ARPU. Our priority continues to be on the consistent delivery of results. We added 111,000 total mobile phone net additions in Q3 and year-to-date, we added 206,000 mobile subscribers with the vast majority on the Rogers postpaid brand. We are leading the industry with innovative, transparent, feature-rich add-a-line plans. These plans meet the dual objective of providing customers with simple value-add options while targeting revenue growth opportunities to support strategic investments in our network. We are also leading the industry with satellite to mobile. This new groundbreaking technology connects Canadians in remote areas, and we now deliver 3x more coverage than any other carrier in Canada. Since launching our beta trial in July, we have seen terrific response from both our customers and Canadians. We recently extended the beta trial and will launch even more capabilities in the coming months. The launch of satellite to mobile reinforces our 65-year history of leading the industry and innovating for Canadians. Our customers are embracing the strategic approach. Our postpaid churn in the quarter was 0.99%, down 13 basis points year-on-year and the lowest churn in over two years. We are leading in innovation and delivering more value for our customers while maintaining industry-leading Wireless margins of 67%. In Cable, growth remains positive, reflecting a clear reversal of the negative trends seen in previous years. Retail Internet additions were 29,000 in the quarter, and we have delivered approximately 80,000 new Internet subscribers year-to-date across the country. This is in part driven by Rogers leading 5G home Internet technology. 5G Home Internet is one of many areas where we're leading. With the Xfinity road map, we're rolling out new features and plans that drive value and deliver new innovations on our world-class entertainment platform. We've launched Rogers Xfinity StreamSaver to bring together popular streaming services at a price point that's attractive to the consumer. We've launched more smart home devices and new features for Rogers Xfinity self-protection. We were the first Canadian Internet provider to introduce WiFi 7, the latest generation of WiFi technology. Our focus on execution, efficiency and discipline continues to drive industry-leading Cable margins of 58%. Finally, in Media, revenue growth was up 26% driven by a strong Blue Jays regular season and the consolidation of MLSE results. We are in the early stages of transforming our Sports & Entertainment business into one of the best sports businesses globally. This is our third pillar of growth beyond Wireless and Cable and will be meaningful to Rogers over time. With the acquisition of the additional stake in MLSE, we have added revenue and profitability growth to our core business. Taking a step back, in calendar 2025, we project Media revenue and adjusted EBITDA, including MLSE for the full year to be $4 billion and $250 million, respectively. Our collection of Sports and Media assets has a value in excess of $15 billion and is among the most impressive in the world. This value is not currently reflected in our share price. We are well positioned to surface this significant unrecognized value for Rogers shareholders over time. In 2026, we expect to acquire the outstanding minority state in MLSE as part of this process, so more to come on this. We are building a sports business at scale, and we are assessing multiple options to unlock additional value. We will take the time to be thoughtful, deliberate and get it right. In the meantime, we will continue to operate with financial discipline while providing team leadership with the tools and resources to build championships. Finally, on balance sheet and capital spending, we are effectively managing leverage down even as we scale up our exceptional asset base. In Q3, we continue to execute on our commitment to maintain a strong balance sheet. We reported a debt leverage ratio of 3.9x. This was achieved after completing the acquisition of the additional stake in MLSE. As you saw this morning, we now expect CapEx for the current year to come in at $3.7 billion. This is below our previous target of $3.8 billion and reflects the current regulatory environment. Free cash flow is now expected to be between $3.2 billion and $3.3 billion, higher than our previous target. In the coming quarters, we will maintain our laser-like focus on preserving a strong, investment-grade balance sheet even as we complete our transformational investments. As we pursue growth in our three core businesses, we will continue to align capital spending and free cash flow growth to the best growth opportunities and balance sheet deleveraging priorities. As we get ready for peak selling in the fourth quarter, we will remain focused on balancing execution discipline with revenue and subscriber growth. Thank you to our exceptional team for their continued commitment to drive growth long term. I will now turn the call over to Glenn. Glenn Brandt: Thank you, Tony, and good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining us. We are pleased to report that Rogers' Third Quarter results reflect another quarter of strong, disciplined and leading financial and operating performance. Once again, we have delivered industry-leading margin performance in Cable and Wireless, and our Wireless churn is the best we have seen in over two years. We have delivered positive Cable revenue and adjusted EBITDA growth, and we expect that our combined Internet and wireless loading will once again lead our peers. Media has once again delivered sector-leading growth driven by our added Warner, Discovery media content and by our Toronto Blue Jays' very strong regular season performance. As well, this is the first quarter in which MLSE results are now fully consolidated with our Rogers Sports and Media business segment. And so we are pleased to report that Rogers is delivering solid results across all three core businesses against the backdrop of a competitive environment and slower growth economy. Starting with Wireless. We continue to deliver solid market share supported by disciplined financials. Wireless service revenue was flat and adjusted EBITDA was up 1% year-over-year, primarily reflecting the ongoing competitive intensity in the marketplace, continued lower immigration and lower international roaming and wholesale revenue. Our sustained emphasis driving cost efficiencies has moved our industry-leading Wireless margin to 67%, up 60 basis points against the prior year and near our all-time high of 68%. As well, we have maintained strong market share for mobile phone net additions, adding 111,000 net new subscribers, consisting of 62,000 postpaid and 49,000 prepaid mobile customers. Across the entire sector, Wireless subscriber additions continued lower versus prior year, reflecting continued lower immigration levels. Against this lower growth backdrop, we have added a sector-leading 206,000 net new mobile phone customers year-to-date, with the majority of these subscribers added on our feature-rich Rogers premium service plans. Continued emphasis on responsive customer service and improved customer base management has lowered customer churn to a very strong 0.99%, our best churn performance in over two years. Blended mobile phone ARPU of $56.70 is down 3% from the prior year, reflecting the ongoing impact from competitive intensity, combined with lower international and wholesale roaming revenue, as mentioned earlier. Moving to Cable. Cable service revenue has once again grown 1% year-over-year, driven by retail Internet subscriber growth, combined with continued discipline in the face of ongoing market competition. Cable adjusted EBITDA is up 2% year-over-year, driven by the flow-through of modest service revenue growth combined with our ongoing cost efficiency initiatives. As a result, Cable margins have reached an industry-leading 58%, an increase of 70 basis points over the prior year. Internet net additions of 29,000 customers reflect our continued success expanding subscribers throughout our national footprint and includes our continued success with 5G Home Internet, expanding our bundled service offerings into every region from coast to coast. And finally, Rogers Sports & Media revenue of $753 million, was up by 26% over the prior year, reflecting the combined contributions of three key initiatives: Our added Warner Discovery suite of media content; stronger results for Sportsnet and the Toronto Blue Jays, particularly through September to close out the regular season and the consolidation of MLSE effective July 1. Media EBITDA was $75 million compared to $136 million last year, reflecting both the positive flow-through of Warner Discovery and the Blue Jays regular season, offset by the seasonally low third quarter EBITDA loss for MLSE, which is consolidated in 2025, but not in 2024. We expect MLSE will be substantially accretive to earnings in Q4 and for the second half of 2025. As well, the Blue Jays' very successful MLB playoffs and World Series run will provide further added growth in the fourth quarter. In terms of unlocking additional value from our Sports & Media assets, let me recap our current view on process and timing. To be clear, we remain determined and committed to delevering our balance sheet and to unlocking the significant unrecognized value in the RCI share price from these world-class sports assets. With the current estimated value of more than $15 billion for our Sports & Media properties, we continue our work to identify and execute on the best long-term strategy to surface value. And the way our Toronto Blue Jays World Series run is captivating this country is a very clear demonstration of the power of our iconic sports teams. We anticipate a transaction could occur over the next 18 months or so, likely coincident with or subsequent to us acquiring the remaining 25% minority interest in MLSE. In the meantime, as we assess multiple options, our Sports & Media operations remain highly successful. They operate at scale and are delivering sector-leading and growing financial results and investment returns. Finally, rounding out my comments on the third quarter. Our consolidated service revenue is up by 4% to $4.7 billion and adjusted EBITDA is $2.5 billion, down 1%. As mentioned earlier, the year-over-year changes in both service revenue and EBITDA reflect the flow-through of modest growth in Wireless, Cable and Media combined with consolidation of MLSE results starting this quarter. Capital expenditures were $964 million, which is relatively flat to last year, even as we absorbed some additional capital spending from consolidating MLSE. Free cash flow of $829 million was down 9%, driven by increasing taxable income and the timing of tax installment payments. We continued to delever in Q3 even as we acquired our additional stake in MLSE for $4.7 billion, roughly a 0.5 turn increase in leverage at acquisition. Immediate execution on driving operating synergies and MLSE EBITDA growth, combined with ongoing application of free cash flow and capital initiatives to delever, allowed us to close the quarter with debt leverage of 3.9x, down roughly 10 to 20 basis points in the first three months of the MLSE acquisition. Notwithstanding this notable progress, our third quarter leverage is up by 0.3x as a result of the MLSE acquisition. And so here, I will emphasize that we remain committed to strengthening our balance sheet further and to improving our investment-grade credit ratings. We are in regular contact with each of the credit rating agencies to communicate our plans and progress. This will be driven by continued prudent capital priorities together with earnings and free cash flow growth to pay down debt and lower leverage. Unlocking value from our Sports & Media Holdings is a very substantial part of that exercise. At quarter end, we maintained our very strong liquidity position with available liquidity of $6.4 billion. This included $1.5 billion in cash and cash equivalents and $4.9 billion available under our bank and other credit facilities. As you have seen in our Q3 cash flow -- free cash flow statement issued today, we are now reporting distributions paid by subsidiaries to noncontrolling interest, reflecting the distribution payment associated with the minority investment and a portion of our Wireless network infrastructure. The $14 million amount reflects the prorated timing for the transaction, which closed in late June, and so the Q3 distribution is for a partial prior quarter. In our Q4 results and going forward, the full quarterly amount of the distribution will be reflected, which we anticipate will be approximately $100 million per quarter. And as we discussed last quarter, a very substantial portion of this quarterly distribution is offset by the lower interest expense generated from using the proceeds from this transaction to pay down debt. The last piece I will touch on before we open up the call for Q&A is for affirmation and updates to our 2025 guidance, where we have improved our outlook for both capital expenditures and free cash flow for the rest of the year, reflecting our ongoing efforts to drive more efficient capital allocation and also reflecting the current regulatory environment. We now expect to end 2025 with capital expenditures of approximately $3.7 billion, which is a further $100 million reduction to our previous adjusted target of $3.8 billion and a full $300 million improvement from the previously anticipated high end of our guidance range announced in January, when we were targeting $3.8 billion to $4 billion. Notably, we are improving our targeted capital outlook even as we absorb the additional capital expenditures associated with MLSE. We have driven careful prioritization of our capital investments in 2025 and you should expect this determined prioritization to continue in 2026. As well, we now expect our 2025 free cash flow to be in the range of $3.2 billion to $3.3 billion compared to the $3.0 billion to $3.2 billion range previously estimated at the beginning of the year. As we prepare for 2026 and beyond, you should expect that we will continue to drive more efficient capital investment, improve free cash flow and further strengthen and delever the balance sheet. And so in summary, our Q3 results demonstrate that Rogers continues to successfully execute on its core Wireless and Cable strategies. We have achieved consistent strong performance for almost four years now, and we will continue to build on this track record in the quarters and years ahead. In Sports & Media, we continue to make progress on our very unique opportunity to surface significant unrecognized value from these assets for our shareholders. And in the meantime, we continue to pursue sector-leading growth and improved profitability for Rogers Sports & Media. Let me close by extending a very sincere and appreciative thank you to our employees who are the engine driving and sustaining our strong execution and who play a critical role in driving our future success. Thank you for your tremendous pride and determination. And finally, Go Jays. I will now ask Galyene to open the call for our Q&A session. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] First question is from Stephanie Price with CIBC. Stephanie Price: I was hoping you could talk a little bit more on the Wireless competitive environment as we head into the holiday season? And if you think the current pricing environment can be sustained here? Anthony Staffieri: Stephanie, thanks for the question. In terms of -- we approached back-to-school, with a view of having a very simple redefined value propositions for the customer. And so we streamlined our price offerings. We made it more clear on the differentiation amongst the plans with features that are beyond just data bucket sizes. And what we found is it resonated well. We focused on add-a-line construct so that we could increase the number of lines per customer, and that's trending well for us as well. And we recently introduced tiered hardware promotional discounts so that the amount of discount on our hardware is graduated depending on the plan that the customer comes in on Verizon, if they're in currently customers today. And what we're finding is that's resonating extremely well with customers, and you're seeing that in our subscriber performance. And that's been continuing throughout October as well. And so we think we've got the right value proposition as we head into Black Friday and to the end of the year. And so that's what you should expect to see from us. We'll see how the marketplace responds. And to the extent we need to pivot based on the market dynamics, then we'll do so. But right now, we're feeling pretty good about the pricing constructs that we have in the marketplace. Stephanie Price: And then maybe a follow-up on churn. Your churn has been down over the past 2 quarters. Great to see and hoping you can give us some thoughts on churn management and where there's further opportunities potentially. Anthony Staffieri: What you're seeing is a very concerted effort. We've always focused on base management, but we've taken a much more holistic approach to base management and employing tactics that are resonating with customers in terms of what's important to them, drilling down on customers that we think might have a propensity to churn and dealing with the issues in advance of them calling us. And so there are a number of tactics that we've been going through, and the team is executing extremely well in base management. We expect to continue to see good churn performance across our entire base. Operator: The next question is from Aravinda Galappatthige with Canaccord Genuity. Aravinda Galappatthige: I wanted to start off with Wireless. Obviously, the lag effect of the historical promotional activity, it continues to show in the service revenue numbers. But just looking at the sequential trend in service revenue growth, I wanted to sort of clarify whether that was sort of items around roaming or external customers that would have had an impact on that number? Glenn Brandt: Thanks, Aravinda. Yes, the part of that decline really is lower roaming volumes as well as a reference to some wholesale revenues that, I'll shortcut and simply say, moved to another carrier. And so you're seeing that roll through. That's a very substantial part of what you've seen in the revenue. Aravinda Galappatthige: And just maybe just a bigger picture question on operating leverage. I mean with the progress that's made on the AI side of things, the latest generation being agentic AI and so forth. Can you talk about the magnitude of the opportunities that you have to potentially deploy those technologies within the firm and potentially drive streamlining efforts within Rogers, whether it's in CX or even on the network operations side, marketing, et cetera? Just to get a sense of how material that could be from an operating leverage perspective to the company. Anthony Staffieri: Thanks for the question, Aravinda. Really good question and something we've been spending quite a bit of time on, not just historically, but as advancements in AI tools and technology continues to grow exponentially, we continue to look at ways to capitalize on it. And we see three main areas. One is the customer experience, as you indicated, combining with a completely digital experience, and that's the journey we're on. It's going to allow us to give the customer a more consistent, streamlined experience to address whatever issue they have. And we're really looking forward to that and are much more cost effective -- on a much more cost-effective basis. The second relates to efficiency and the ability of these AI tools to make us much more efficient and some of which you're seeing already in our industry-leading margins in both Wireless and Cable. And then the third really relates to security and the ability to continue to enhance security for our customers and for our own data. And so it's all three of those categories that we're very much focused on, and we'll continue to deploy. So the opportunity for this is significant for us in this sector and we'll continue to follow in many ways the large players globally and the tools that they've deployed successfully, so that we're a fast follower in many of these areas and implementing them efficiently. Operator: The next question is from Drew McReynolds with RBC. Drew McReynolds: Maybe extending the network revenue question, I think from Aravinda. Maybe, Glenn, can you talk about just, let's level set expectations about how that trends just given all the moving parts whether you want to talk about Q4 into 2026, just how are you thinking of the puts and takes and the trajectory? And then second question, obviously going to fit in a Jays one here. On the sports assets, I mean, clearly, incredible to see the whole country alive here. Maybe, Tony, you've talked about kind of how these three businesses have to stand on their own, but clearly, there's a branding and cross-promotional aspect to this all. Just wondering if we would see or have seen direct impacts on your telecom business in terms of subscriber growth or benefits that are coming your way on the telecom side that we'd see in either Q3 or Q4 or just maybe longer term? Glenn Brandt: Thanks, Drew. Let me start with the first part of that. I'm not going to take the opportunity to start guiding for '26. I will say the trends you see, I'll say, through the first 3 quarters of 2025 and the trajectory of hitting growth on the year for service revenue, we remain firmly committed to and expect. And so for the year, you'll see positive service revenue growth for Wireless. We all know the competitive framework that we operate in and the slower subscriber growth. That's why you see us leaning in on base management and churn improvement. That's a very efficient way of finding, if not revenue growth, certainly sustaining the base of operations. And so we remain committed to that. Q4, I expect, you'll see strong execution. Part of our Q3 backdrop as we are lapping a very strong Q3 in the prior year, and we have sustained and held the very fast part of that growth that you saw in '24 through the first 3 quarters of '25. So I'm pleased with that progress. So Q4 will be another strong quarter. I won't comment further on guiding for that or beyond in '26, but pleased with progress for sustaining that base management through the 3 quarters. Anthony Staffieri: Drew, with respect to your second question, as you pointed out, we're looking to each one of our pillars of growth being Wireless, Cable and now Sports & Entertainment to stand on their own and drive value, profitability and growth in their own respect. But we also look to ensure that we're capitalizing on the cross synergies amongst all our assets. And the run of the Toronto Blue Jays and heading into the World Series, you can see that in spades in terms of the ability to enhance our brand, the ability to showcase our Cable and Wireless products and services to viewers of the game, and we've seen that throughout the year. If you think about some of the key events in 2025, Four Nations, the playoff run of the Toronto Maple Leafs, and then the Toronto Blue Jays and there are others as well. But you see the power of live sports, and it's good to see, and it's been a benefit for us, as I said, in and of itself, but also in terms of helping the broader Rogers. Operator: The next question is from Vince Valentini with TD Cowen. Vince Valentini: I assume you're getting a lot of favors and requests for tickets for the World Series. I'm wondering if you can compare that. How many requests are you getting for this versus the Taylor Swift concerts. You don't have to answer that. Anthony Staffieri: These are the most World Series requests we've had in 32 years. Vince Valentini: Thanks, Glenn, a very accurate answer as always. The more serious question. Look, you've been asked this several times. I want to hit this head on. Given pricing is improving in Wireless, your front book is now above your back book. And we've seen the CPI stats showed a material improvement in September to basically flat for Wireless pricing versus double-digit declines earlier in the year. All that should mean that Q3 is the trough quarter for Wireless ARPU at minus 3.2%. Can you not confirm that, that it won't get worse than that and should gradually get better over the next 5, 6 quarters? Glenn Brandt: Succinctly, I agree with your sentiment. I think we are seeing some strong initiatives around a large number of initiatives to sustain the base, low churn and sustain revenue. And so broadly, yes, I think you are seeing us continue solid Wireless growth on a full year as well as quarter-to-quarter. You saw a dip in the third quarter, but all of the elements that you've pointed out are true Vince. Vince Valentini: If I can just sneak in one more. Wireless equipment margin was pretty positive contributor to EBITDA again this quarter. In the past, it hasn't always been a positive. Has something changed in terms of handset subsidies and the amounts you're giving out to or something changed with your deals with the vendors to allow that to be a sustainable source of positive EBITDA? Anthony Staffieri: That's -- the driver for it in the third quarter was really our shift to the tiered promotional discounting that I spoke about. Although we implemented it later in the quarter, it came out of time with higher volumes with back-to-school. And so it was extremely and continues to be very effective in reducing our net hardware costs, but also in incenting the customer to move up tier. And so when we look at our ARPU in, we're really pleased with the effect that it's happening. You see ARPU in up very nicely year-on-year. So we like what we see there. And so it is, we believe, the beginning of a trend in terms of net hardware cost for us. Operator: The next question is from Maher Yaghi with Scotiabank. Maher Yaghi: Glenn, I just wanted to double check on something. You -- in the previous question, you said in your response that you agreed with all the assumptions based on the basis of the question. But I'd just be very specific. Are you saying that you confirm that the back book of your Wireless service customers is above -- sorry, is below the current front book? Glenn Brandt: I'm answering from a general sentiment of whether or not we are troughing whether or not Wireless service revenue is growing. I'm not getting into the detail of front or back book. You've heard me answer these questions consistently, Vince, when -- or Maher, when we're asked on what's ARPU trajectory, I focus on service revenue growth and EBITDA growth. And on service revenue growth, I expect Wireless service revenue to grow each quarter and each year. We had a slight and it's a very slight decline just below 0 or flat in the third quarter. For the year we'll be positive, and I expect will be positive going forward. It's a mix of subscriber additions, pricing initiatives, service plan initiatives, simplifying our service plan offerings and trying to move customers up through premium plans. I could go on and on. So I don't want to talk about front and back book because it makes it seem like there's a difference between new and long-standing customers. It's really working with our service plans and our initiatives all around that to drive service revenue and EBITDA growth. So don't read too much into that. I'm answering from a general sentiment we expect Wireless Service revenue to grow period. Maher Yaghi: Perfect. Thank you for answering this question more precisely because I think there's still some gap left to be closed, but I agree that there's upside for next year. So I just wanted to ask you, I know it's not much visible in your results. And I'm not surprised because in Canada, we have a lag to the U.S. in terms of new product introduction, but results from AT&T yesterday and T-Mobile this morning are showing a significant increase in jump balls coming from customers looking to get their hands on the new iPhones. So I wanted to just see if you're noticing thus far in Q4, a slight pickup in jump balls in Canada yet? Or if not, why not? And how are you positioning yourself for Q4 for -- if we do see the same trend occurring in Canada, do you think handset subsidization will become a bigger factor in overall economics of floating customers in Q4 versus prior quarters? Anthony Staffieri: A couple of things that you touched on, and I'll work backwards from your question. In terms of Q4, the demand for new devices and the subsidy and cost for us, what you see in market for us is how we intend to approach the marketplace in the fourth quarter. We think we have a very good value proposition, and our promotional incentives are really going to be centered around hardware rather than rate plans. But we're also going to be very disciplined in the tiering constructs that I spoke about earlier, so that higher promotional discounts come with our more premium plans and vice versa. In terms of, to use your term, jump ball that we're seeing with the launch of the new iPhone device, we've seen good demand for it. Our bigger constraint has been supply, frankly, on that front. And so that's been a limiting factor for us, but I would say at the margin. But we're seeing the same type of industry constructs for our business that you described. Operator: The next question is from Batya Levi with UBS. Batya Levi: Can you talk a little bit about the competitive environment in terms of, if you're seeing any pickup in go-to-market strategy with converged offers? And from your perspective, can you give us a sense of maybe what percent of your broadband base takes the Rogers services as for mobile? And what are some benefits you see beyond just churn reduction? Anthony Staffieri: Thanks, Batya, for the question. Converged offering is something that we spoke about in previous calls and continues to be competitive advantage for us, frankly, given our Wireline and Wireless converged footprint. And now with FWA, we're essentially converged on 100%. And so our go-to-market strategy has been to leverage our distribution channels, which are the strongest and frankly, the best in the industry here in Canada and leverage those to offer customers a converged home solution as well as their wireless products, and we're seeing good pickup in that. In terms of the percentage, we don't disclose that, but it continues to rise rather rapidly and customers looking for that solution. And there are a number of benefits beyond. The converged offer is a bundled discount, a modest discount for it, but there are other benefits the customer sees in terms of simplified servicing, having to deal with only one provider. And the convergence of the technologies as that evolves, they see benefit in that. Batya Levi: Got it. And just a quick follow-up on the lower CapEx for this year. Can you just provide a bit more color on where it's coming from and also how we should think about capital intensity going forward? Anthony Staffieri: We've been very focused on efficiency throughout our operations. You've seen it and continue to see it in our operating margins across our Cable and Wireless businesses. And you'll see it in our Media business as well going forward at scale. But we've also continued to focus on capital efficiency. And that's what you're seeing play out there. There are projects that we decided not to invest in as a result of government decision on TPIA. Certain projects were just not viable and carried too much uncertainty and it's disappointing. We're a company that wants to invest in this country and in infrastructure. And when faced with uncertainty that those types of decisions create for us, we have no choice but to pull back on capital investment, and you see that impacting the total dollars. In terms of going forward, you should expect us to continue to look for improved efficiencies and ways of continuing to reduce our capital intensity across our businesses. Operator: The next question is from Jerome Dubreuil with Desjardins. Jerome Dubreuil: The first one, I just wanted to hear maybe more about the financing plan for the Kilmer deal, which we understand is coming. Glenn, you mentioned that there's been credit agencies discussion. I'm sure they're aware but if you can comment on the plan maybe to bridge a gap just so the market is ready, and we don't have to start over with the balance sheet questions when the Kilmer deal comes. Glenn Brandt: So the -- what we're focused -- thank you, Jerome. What we're focused on is, first, acquiring the remaining 25% minority stake, combining the operations and then proceeding with recapitalizing the combined Roger Sports & Media, including MLSE and Blue Jays entity. That could happen very shortly on the heels of acquiring the minority stake or it could happen sometime following that. And so we're guiding towards -- within the next 18 months. I do anticipate it could well be in 2026, which is just inside 18 months now that we're standing in October. But it's over a timeframe that is going to take some time to work through the acquisition of the 25% stake. And over the course of that exercise, we are working with our analysis to figure out how best to capitalize that combined entity. It's going to depend upon the arrangements that we strike with the minority shareholder on buying out their stake and just when that comes. Tremendous interest being expressed by institutional -- potential institutional investors. They are an extremely attractive set of assets. We are working with the credit rating agencies, so they are aware of our timing. You mentioned -- you heard me mention on the second quarter call, critical for us was getting our arms around the Shaw delevering at midyear before and then embarking on this MLSE consolidation with RSM and recapitalization that allows the calendar to be reset, gives us time to fill in those details. So I'll quickly draw to a conclusion then, Jerome, that I'm not going to give you the roadmap on exactly how much we're selling down into whom because we -- I don't want to pre-announce. I don't have anything to pre-announce. I do know we have assets that are worth more than $20 billion once we combine it all and tremendous interest in buying in. We have shown time and again, most recently, with the Shaw acquisition, our ability to delever. We are absolutely focused on that exercise, and we have a tremendous value of assets here to do that with. So I'm highly confident on our execution. Jerome Dubreuil: Great, Glenn, and if I can just go more specifically on this if I can summarize there is that credit agencies are aware we're not going to need any equity to bridge a gap and probably -- I know the answer to that question, but it would be great to have it out there. Glenn Brandt: The -- yes, succinctly, yes, they are aware we have time to execute. They know we are committed to executing on this. I have been managing our credit ratings and our capitalization and capital structure and funding as a primary part of my role for coming up on 34 years now, I've been working with these credit rating agencies throughout that 34-year period. They're well aware of our intentions and our capabilities. Paul Carpino: Galyene, we have time for two more questions, please. Operator: The next question is from Matthew Griffiths with Bank of America. Matthew Griffiths: Just on the Sports, in the past, if I'm not mistaken, it's been a priority to consider control of the assets following the transaction. That hasn't been brought up this morning, but I just wanted to see if that remains kind of one of the priorities that you're factoring in, in addition to the kind of shareholder return maximization from any potential deal 18 months down the road? And then separately, just on Wireless. On the cost side, in the release, it was mentioned kind of the satellite -- launch of the satellite service was one of the items called out for increased cost. And I just was curious if that was mostly a marketing-related comment or if it's related to kind of the payments to the partner or a combination of both? Just kind of what was -- what exactly is that referring to? Because I know so it's early days. So I just wanted some clarity, if it's possible. Glenn Brandt: Thank you, Matt. Let me start with the Sports side of it. I'll answer it quickly with just a reference back to the asset value within our sports holdings is, as I've said, somewhere in the range of once we own 100% of everything, Blue Jays and RSM operations today plus MLSE. We've indicated we think the value of that is over $20 billion if we were to sell a majority stake that would be raising north of $10 billion. I don't need $10 billion of equity improvement in the RCI balance sheet. And so I do expect we will maintain control simply because the exercise is not that large, and these assets are very valuable. We do anticipate we will control these assets. Anthony Staffieri: And the second part of your question, Matt, in terms of our Wireless operating costs, you're referring to the comments made in the press release. Year-on-year, we've had a very modest increase in operating costs, and you see it in the disclosures of about $8 million. It's a combination of several factors. One of those factors that is described is the satellite to mobile initiative. And as you rightly point out, it does encompass both the marketing as well as the fee paid for the service under our contract. And we are currently in the beta trial mode. We've extended the beta trial mode to allow the commercial launch to be coincident with the launch of new feature capabilities of the satellite. Right now, it is just texting, but very soon, we're pleased to announce and see that it will include data as well. And so that's the reason for extending the beta trial before we get to commercial launch. And so you don't see any of the revenue pickup in our Q3 results, and you won't see it until we move to commercial launch. Operator: The next question is from David McFadgen with Cormark Securities. David McFadgen: So maybe just following on the Rogers Satellite for a second. So right now, this texting, do you expect to add data, I guess that would be a light data plan. And then do you have any ideas when you'd be able to offer text, voice and just full data? Anthony Staffieri: Thanks for the question, David. So on launch, again, to reiterate, it was texting, including 911 texting in terms of capability. We are extremely pleased with the advancement of the roadmap. Data wasn't going to come until next year and voice was planned for the year after that. As a result of the work that our partner has been doing at a very rapid pace, we're pleased that this quarter, what we will have for our customers is the ability to use data and apps. As you describe, it will be somewhat light data. We'll see the capability in terms of bandwidth once it's into production. But we're really excited about that. And then the next to follow is voice. We don't have something we can disclose on that. But you should expect it at some point in 2026. David McFadgen: Okay. And then can you give us any idea on the number of people that have signed up for the trial so far? Anthony Staffieri: It's received terrific demand from our customers and Canadians broadly in signing up for it. As you can imagine, just given our topography and landscape here in Canada, there are significant areas that weren't covered by any wireless network, including some major highways. And so the use case for it is significant. And what we're seeing is a very good pickup. So it's a material amount. What I can tell you, it's over $1 million, but we're not disclosing the specific number because we don't want to get too far ahead of ourselves in trying to extrapolate what kind of revenue that means. Glenn Brandt: One of the real opportunities here for us, David, is that it covers the very remote regions of the country, it covers virtually every road and highway. And so there's the individual Canadians that are signing up the enablement of this for businesses is tremendous and the opportunity for us is tremendous. David McFadgen: Well, the fact that you've had over 1 million sign-ups, that's pretty very good. And then just one, if I could squeeze in one more. Just on the Wireless side. So if we don't see any change in immigration, immigration stays at the current levels, do you think your Wireless net adds would be similar next year or higher or lower? Glenn Brandt: Right. I think let me avoid guiding for next year. But I would say if I look at 2025, even with very, very low immigration our growth is in the range of 3% for the sector, for the industry and 3% growth is roughly 1 million adds for the industry. And so I would expect that to continue until immigration turns up again. It will at some point. I don't expect that in '26, would be wonderful if it did, but it will come back at some point. We will look to growing the population. Again, I expect that's a key part of economic growth for any country, but 3% growth in the base is certainly something we can still build on. Paul Carpino: Thanks, everyone for joining us. If there's any follow-up, please feel free to reach out, and have a great day. Glenn Brandt: Thank you all. Go Jays. Operator: This brings to a close today's conference call. You may disconnect your lines. Thank you for participating, and have a pleasant day.
David Mulholland: Good morning, ladies and gentlemen. Welcome to Nokia's Third Quarter 2025 Results Call. I'm David Mulholland, Head of Nokia Investor Relations. And today with me is Justin Hotard, our President and CEO; along with Marco Wiren, our CFO. Before we get started, a quick disclaimer. During this call, we will be making forward-looking statements regarding our future business and financial performance, and these statements are predictions that involve risks and uncertainties. Actual results may therefore differ materially from the results we currently expect. Factors that could cause such differences can be both external as well as internal operating factors. We have identified such risks in the Risk Factors section of our annual report on Form 20-F which is available on our Investor Relations website. Within today's presentation, references to growth rates will mostly be on a constant currency and portfolio basis, and other financial items will be based on our comparable reporting. Please note that our Q3 report and the presentation that accompanies this call are published on our website. The report includes both reported and comparable financial results under reconciliation between the 2. In terms of the agenda for today, we will go -- Justin will go through our key messages from the quarter, and then Marco will go through our financial performance. We'll then move to Q&A. With that, let me hand over to Justin. Justin Hotard: Thank you, David. Overall, we delivered a solid performance in the third quarter, in line with our expectations. We grew net sales by 9% with all business groups growing. Order intake was again strong, particularly in optical networks and IP networks driven by AI and cloud customers. Our profitability in the quarter was as expected. Network Infrastructure gross margin improved sequentially, that was impacted slightly by product mix. Cloud and Network Services had a strong gross margin in the quarter. Product mix impacted the gross margin of mobile networks with a lower mix of software revenue. Our operating margin declined year-on-year due to a onetime benefit seen in the prior year from a loss provision reversal. Without which our operating margin would have been flat. The broader demand environment remains healthy as we move into the fourth quarter. We have seen some improvements in CSP expectations along with the strong order intake I mentioned in AI and cloud. In fact, entering the fourth quarter, our backlog coverage is stronger than in recent years. We're also pleased with our progress on the Infinera acquisition. We are ahead of schedule with the integration time line and with synergy expectations. The acquired business contributed strongly through both our net sales growth and order intake growth in Q3. So after a solid Q3 and continued strong order intake, we are well on track to achieve our full year outlook. We expect the fourth quarter with net sales growing sequentially and slightly above our historical seasonality of 22%. We are currently tracking towards the midpoint of our operating profit outlook range. Let me now share a few highlights across the business from the third quarter. For our network infrastructure business, and the key highlight has been our progress in the AI and cloud customer segment. In Q3, this segment accounted for 6% of our group net sales. Breaking it down, it was 14% of our network infrastructure business and more specifically, 29% of optical networks. In Optical, as mentioned, our 800-gig ZR, ZR+ coherent pluggables became available in the quarter and ships to our first hyperscale customer. Our pipeline in this space is growing as customer investments accelerate and data center architectures evolve. Q3 also saw us announce strategic partnerships with both end scale and Super Micro. With Endscale, we are now a preferred partner for advanced networking technologies across our NI portfolio. Super Micro is adopting our SR Linux network operating system for their 800 gig Ethernet switches, providing expanded footprint for our network operating system. Finally, we secured 2 new design wins for our switching platform in the quarter with hyperscalers. The market is growing rapidly. And while I'm pleased with these initial signs of progress in IP networks, clearly, we still have a lot of work ahead of us. In our fixed network business, we launched our new 50 gig PON offering. With our unique solution built on our Chilean chipset, operators can easily evolve from GPON to XGS, 25 gig and 50 gig PON on the same fiber. Ready with encryption for the post-quantum era, Nokia solution also provides enterprises with the bandwidth, security and reliability they require. Customers like Frontier Communications in the United States are already using our unique PON technology to seamlessly introduce 25 gig PON. Now I want to turn to our mobile businesses, starting with Cloud and Network Services. The team has delivered strong network -- net sales growth and operating profit growth as it continues to focus on autonomous cloud native architectures. In voice core, we became the market share leader in the first half of 2025 and as reported by Dell'Oro. Approximately 70% of 5G stand-alone core network deployments outside China use a portion of Nokia's 5G core stack. And network penetration is still less than 30% for 5G stand-alone core. In Mobile Networks, we continue to see the market stabilize. We recently announced a deal with Vodafone 3 that will see us enter their new combined network in the U.K. as a major RAN supplier with approximately 7,000 sites. We are focused on improving the returns in the business over time. delivering for our customers and differentiating through innovation. In Nokia Technologies, we secured several new agreements in the quarter. The team continues to be disciplined on productivity and operating leverage. While we are now entering the heightened investment phase for 6G standardization, we continue to see stability in our annual operating profit. In Q3, we completed a strategic review of our venture fund investments. We have decided to scale down our passive venture fund investments. Over time, we will substantially reduce the capital deployed in these areas. As a result, our venture fund investments are now reported within financial income and expenses. Going forward, we will consider targeted direct minority investments in companies that help us to accelerate our strategy. An example is the investment we made in Endscale alongside the strategic partnership that I referred to earlier. Because of this change, we are making a technical change to our operating profit guidance. increasing it by EUR 0.1 billion, which is related to the negative impact the venture funds had on our operating profit in the first half. However, operationally, our guidance is unchanged. After a solid Q3 and with recent order trends, we are well on track to achieve our full year outlook for operating profit. As I mentioned before, we expect fourth quarter net sales to grow sequentially at slightly above our historical seasonality of 22%. And we are tracking towards the midpoint of our operating profit range of EUR 1.7 billion to EUR 2.2 billion. At our Capital Markets Day in New York on November 19, we will share our strategy to unlock the full potential of our portfolio and the steps we are taking to focus the company to deliver ongoing growth and operating leverage. The AI super cycle is accelerating demand for providers of advanced and trusted connectivity. Nokia is uniquely positioned to be a leader in this market. With that, let me hand it over to Marco to discuss our financial performance. Marco Wiren: Thanks, Justin, and hello from my side as well. In quarter 3, we saw net sales increased by 9%, and we are pleased to see growth across all our business groups. Gross margin for the group declined 150 basis points year-on-year, and this was largely as we have expected. And this is because of the product mix within both network infrastructure and mobile networks. Operating margin was 9%, 220 basis points below the prior year, although this was mainly due to a onetime impact from the reversal of loss allowance for trade receivables in the prior year. Without this, the operating profit -- operating margin would have been flat year-on-year. And we generated EUR 429 million of free cash flow and ended the quarter with $3 billion of net cash. I would like to update you on our cost savings program, which we introduced in 2023. We expect to get about EUR 450 million savings in 2025. And going forward, we will focus on delivering operational leverage through continuous productivity improvement, IT simplification, digital instrumentation and organizational efficiency rather than using large restructuring programs. Ultimately, this means a cultural shift towards consistent cost discipline and efficiency to help us deliver our strategic calls. Turning to business group now, starting with net infrastructure, which had another strong quarter with 11% growth. Optical Networks was the standout performer with 19% sales growth and continue to see strong order trends with book-to-bill well above 1. IP Networks also saw a strong growth in orders in the quarter as we start to see and increased traction with AI and cloud, as Justin mentioned. IP Networks sales grew 4% and fixed networks grew 8% in the quarter. Gross margin was impacted by product mix and declined 190 basis points, although it did increase from the level we had in quarter 2. Operating margin declined because of lower gross margin along with the increased investments in R&D and the acquisition of Infinera. In the quarter, we see -- did see a small positive contribution to operating profit from Infinera as we start to see some initial benefit from synergies, along with the growth in the business. Cloud and Network Services sales grew by 13% in the quarter as we continue to see strong demand for our cloud-based core platforms. Gross margin increased 380 basis points as we improved cost of delivery, along with the operating leverage benefit of higher sales. Operating margin also increased by 250 basis points with some of the gross margin strength partially offset by higher R&D expenses. And mobile networks net sales increased by 4% year-on-year, driven by growth in Vietnam and Middle East and Africa. In quarter 2, we said we expect Quarter 3 gross margin to be lower than normal, reflecting a lower software contribution, and this was indeed the case. During year we saw a 370 basis point decline. With respect to operating margin, although operating expenses declined, the reversal of loss allowance in the prior year meant that operating margin declined. Without this, the operating margin would have only slightly declined despite this being a quarter with a low software contribution in the mix. Turning now to Nokia Technologies. Net sales grew by 14% in the quarter, and we signed several new deals in quarter 3. And our annual net sales run rate remains at approximately EUR 1.4 billion. Operating expenses in quarter 3 saw some timing benefits and therefore, will increase slightly in quarter 4. We continue to expect EUR 1.1 billion operating profit for the full year in Nokia Technologies. Now let's look at the net sales by region. In North America, we saw strong growth in network infrastructure and cloud and network services, while mobile networks declined slightly. In APAC, India sales grew in network infrastructure, driven by strong demand for fixed wireless, while mobile network sales returned to some modest growth. Outside of the benefit we saw from Nokia Technologies, Europe was stable in quarter 3. Now turning to our cash performance. We ended the quarter with a net cash position of EUR 3 billion. Free cash flow was positive EUR 49 million, consistent with our profit generation and well-managed working capital. We continue to target 50% to 80% free cash flow conversion from comparable operating profit for the full year. David Mulholland: Thank you, Justin and Marco. Before we turn to the Q&A session, you should really received an invitation to register for our Capital Markets Day, which as Justin mentioned, will be held in New York on the 19th of November. We hope as many of you as possible will be able to join us at the event. As usual, for the Q&A session, as a courtesy to whether is in the queue, can you please limit yourself to 1 question and a brief follow-up. Kelly, could you please give the instructions? Operator: [Operator Instructions] Yes. Let's go. I'll now hand back to David Mulholland. David Mulholland: We will take our first question today from Artem Beletski from SEB. Artem Beletski: So my question would be relating to IP Networks and switching business on that front. So how do you see the progress on that front in general. And you have also said to target 3 quarters ago, when it comes to year 2028. So are you well tracking on it? David Mulholland: One second, could you start your question again, please? We just got tech difficulty on our side. Artem Beletski: Yes, no worries. Can you hear me now? David Mulholland: Yes, we can hear you. Artem Beletski: Okay. Great. So I would like to ask a question relating to IP Networks and your initiatives what comes to data center and switching business. So you mentioned that you have some new design wins during the quarter. So how you're tracking against your target for 2028? And also, should we anticipate some contribution to revenues looking at upcoming quarters? Justin Hotard: Yes. So Artem, I think as I've said in a couple of forms, but maybe just to share here, I think when we talk about EUR 100 million incremental investment, the reality for me is that's a small portion of our overall capital. And so I don't think you'll see us focus on that metric going forward. What I will say about the business is, I was pleased with the wins I'm pleased on the book-to-bill in IP networks overall. The reality, as we all know, is that we're still a fairly small player in this space, well behind some of the market leaders. So we're at the start of a journey. But the announcements we've made, I think are positive. The metrics are positive. It's much more work to be done longer term. David Mulholland: Did you have a quick follow-up, Artem? Artem Beletski: Yes, absolutely. So maybe more general questions. So looking at your growth opportunities when it comes to AI and cloud. So it was sales in the quarter, so increased compared to Q2. But in general, looking at the next couple of years, where do you see the biggest growth opportunities looking at different customer segments. So as it's like hyperscalers, enterprise or super insight where you see the biggest opportunity for you? Justin Hotard: Yes. I think, first of all, the biggest opportunity is clearly it's clearly is in the hyperscalers and the neo cloud. So that's driving most of the demand. Obviously, the partnership with Endscale is a good example of our focus in this area. We've made other announcements in the past. And we also believe that sovereign clouds will present a significant opportunity for us over time. As we've talked about before, we're optimistic about the work that's being done in the EU as well as in other regions. So we think that these are all important growth segments for us. But clearly, the demand today is largely coming from the hyperscalers on some of the larger neo clouds. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Simon Leopold from Raymond James. Simon Leopold: Appreciate it. So nice to hear about the progress in the hyperscalers. I want to dig a little bit more deeply here in that more recently, we've heard about an application refer to a scale across for optics, which I think of as basically data center interconnect on steroids. Could you talk a little bit about what this means for Nokia in particular and how you see that as an opportunity. Justin Hotard: Yes, sure, Simon. And I think it's something that's been around obviously scale up or what's been talked about at scale across has been in networks for in data centers for a long time in certain parts of the market. So this isn't a new technology. But what is happening is as we push bandwidth demands, which obviously the AI data centers are driving it's creating new demand for innovation in that space. And I think this is where the assets we have, I think, are well positioned. It's not a place where I can tell you we can point to it and say, we've got material revenue today. It's still early days. But I do think if you look at our assets here, particularly what we're doing in Indian phosphide with the fab, the ability to build optical components down on the indium phosphide silicon and innovate and packaging in these areas. We think we've got technology that can be relevant here. But obviously, as bandwidth demands continue in networks, both scale across and scale out, which is what we typically call -- what we typically see in top-of-rack networking and IP switching, both of those create tremendous opportunity for us. And the way I would dimensionalize the opportunity in optical is we'll share more of this at CMD is that every time you get to the next unit, if you go from the long-haul networks to the metro networks to the data center or inside the data center, then inside the rack, each 1 of those has incremental opportunity at a volume level. Of course, there's a performance and cost delta you have to hit as well because what we build for long-haul networks is obviously going to be significantly more expensive than what you'd have to build to fit inside of a server inside of a rack. So there's a part of this that will require us to continue to innovate in this space. And you'll hear more about it in our discussions. David Mulholland: Did you have a follow-up, Simon? Simon Leopold: Sure. Yes, I presume we'll talk about the long-term strategy, of course, at the Capital Markets Day. But I'm wondering if you could provide us a few thoughts on how Nokia's plan is regarding 6G mobility investments. Have you started investing? Is that in the R&D today? Is it something that starts in 26 or is it something further out in time? I'm just really focused on modeling for the moment because I expect we'll hear some more at the Capital Markets Day next month. Justin Hotard: Yes. So on technology standardization, which is obviously very important relevant for tech, that work has already started and the investment is ongoing. And as I touched on in my comments, we're going to go through a bit of an investment. You go through a bit of an investment cycle in that space. So that ramp is happening, and we obviously reiterated confidence in the on the ongoing profit outlook for Nokia Technologies as a part of that. So I think that gives you some indication from a modeling standpoint. For MN, we are -- we've talked about this publicly. We're doing work on early on 6G -- I'd say pre-standard 6G radio technology. There's more work here. I think the thing for me in this space is. And Simon, I've talked about this a little bit in comments as well as I think there's a lot of focus on for obvious reasons on the G transition, the 3G, 4G, 5G, 6G. I actually think what's more important for us is what we've done in cloud and network services, which is the pivot to a cloud-native core. And then you look at the results and the performance on share capture and revenue growth. I think that's a good indicator for how we see the -- we're going to start to think about the opportunity in RAN, which is as we go into AI and in yes, there's going to be a new generation of radios in terms of hopefully, frequencies with spectrum approvals and, of course, 6 capabilities in terms of spectral efficiency. But there's a lot more to do in terms of radio capabilities and features. And we've got -- this is why we announced things like the AI ran Alliance. Previously, it's where we see opportunity with our work in Cloud RAN, for example. And I think that's where we'll continue to invest. What will impact for you is that these are things that we need to focus on and invest and innovate and of course, continue to work closely with customers. So we'll unpack that for you at CMD as well as how we're approaching that. But I wouldn't assume that we haven't -- it's a binary thing where we haven't started. It's a part of ongoing investment. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Alex Duval from Goldman Sachs. Alexander Duval: Yes. Thank you so much for the question. Firstly, just dovetailing off the last question, I'm very much looking forward to hearing more about the long-term tech strategy on wireless. Just in the short term, you talked about a measure of stabilization there. I wondered if you could give a bit more color as to the extent to which that's driven by the RAN market in your most important geographies versus progress you've made on your product? And then secondly, it was interesting to hear in your prepared remarks about how you will focus on cost control by ongoing steps like digitalization rather than large restructuring programs, wondered if at this point you could talk a bit more about what motivates that shift and the benefits this brings? Justin Hotard: Let me start with the second part, Marco, do you want to talk about that [indiscernible]? Marco Wiren: Yes, absolutely. And what comes to cost savings just like I mentioned in my introduction as well. So thinking is that operational leverage is extremely important for us and continues improvement is something that we want to get in our genes that every entity basically continuously in ways, how can we continuously improve and do things more efficiently and of course, here comes quite naturally in the new technologies, utilizing AI and other digitalization opportunities that you can find, and that's why IT simplification is extremely important in this and securing that we can actually get the benefit out of those different installations of AI that we have and continuously work on the process simplification and find ways how we can make the processes more efficient continuously. And it's not a one-off action. It's something that you have to do continuously. Justin Hotard: Yes. And then in terms of the market outlook, first of all, I think you're pretty clear from what we've been saying that if you think about the AI and cloud market growing rapidly, the CSP market broadly has been quite stable. So as we think about that, when I look at our results, I think stabilizing in MN in terms of our performance being predictable. There's always puts and takes. There's going to be ups and downs in the quarter and varies based on a given customer's volume in 1 quarter. So we'll see a little bit of that. But when you look at the longer-term trends, I think we're feeling better about a stabilizing environment. And then on Cloud and Network Services, as I touched on, we believe that we believe we're growing above market rates at this point. David Mulholland: Thanks, Alex. We'll take our next question from Sami Sarkamies from Danske Bank. Sami Sarkamies: Could you please elaborate on the factors that drove the positive surprise in the third quarter as you had anticipated similar sales and margins as in Q2. And when we think about Q4, you also mentioned a strong order book, but do you have still uncertainties related to timing of deliveries as you chose not to narrow the guidance range down? Marco Wiren: Yes. Thank you, Sami. And what comes to them, if you look at gross margin development and in different businesses, you can see that we had a very good development in Cloud and Network Services. And here, as you understand, this business has been frequently so that you get a big part of the profits in quarter 4. Now this year, we have been working actively to try to actually balance that distribution of profits more equal between the different quarters. But at the same time, you see also that we have increased our gross margins, and there's a few reasons for this. One is, of course, that we've seen a good traction on 5G stand-alone core implementations where we have been very successful in gaining market share. And then, of course, we've been working quite a long time in the CNS as well to clean up the portfolio. And this, of course, giving result as well. And the third point I would say as Wally is that also in our core business CNS has been working heavily to take cost out and make things more efficiently and by that, improving the margin levels. David Mulholland: Do you have a follow-up, Sami? Sami Sarkamies: Maybe a detail question on the 6% exposure to AAN Cloud in the third quarter. I think you mentioned 5% hyperscaler exposure after Q2. These are different metrics, right? Justin Hotard: These are comparable, Sami. So think of the 5% 6% as Q3. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Richard Kramer from Arete. Richard Kramer: Justin, when we look at your competitors into the various NI divisions, many of them are point solutions in 1 or another of the field of routing optics are fixed. In the current hyperscaler [indiscernible] are these areas being kept separate? Or do you think that the end-to-end promise we heard about so much from both of the prior CEOs at Nokia is finally being realized at least within NI? Justin Hotard: Well, I think a couple of things on this, Richard. So first of all, for me, clearly, fixed access is its own business and the technology and innovation there is coming out of a few markets. I mean, the largest 1 for us, obviously, is in the U.S., but there's other markets where we're seeing technology and innovation opportunities and so I think that's almost its own trend. And I shared -- obviously, I shared the discussion around the 50 gig PON but this capability that we have to allow you to add new technologies in line in your terminals, we think is a true differentiator. We hear that from customers. The customers using it, believe it gives them value because they can -- they don't have to invest in a complete infrastructure upgrade to overhaul. The key message there is we're competing on the technologies merits itself. And I think if you look at IP switching and certainly in optical networking, I would say the same. We've got a win on the technical merit themselves. I mean we've got very capable customers across our portfolio, AI and cloud as well as piece that want to buy best-of-breed technologies and enable their solutions and execute on their strategies and deliver value to their customers. And our focus has to be on doing the things that add value to them. and where I think there's leverage and synergy for us is being able to see what's happening across these markets and bring greater scale and innovation to them. But I think that for me, the term is an end to end. It's -- you've always got to have best-of-breed products, breast of breed technology, and then you've got to be able to leverage the ecosystem so that you're obviously, you're better together, but it's not something that we do that assume we could have a deficiency in 1 area. That's certainly not how we think about it. Marco Wiren: And just in just sense that, of course, the compatibility is very important. So that's a benefit that we can get compared to competition, which only go with 1 product. And when we come with several products and they are best of breed and customers want to buy those, that those actually work well together. David Mulholland: Did you have a follow-up, Richard? Richard Kramer: Yes. Quick 1, quickly for Marco. We saw a reduction in your forecast restructuring cash outflows from EUR 450 million to EUR 350 million. and an increase of EUR 50 million in gross cost savings. Is this Nokia finally transitioning from what's been a decade-long restructuring to maybe being able to focus more beyond '26 on just growth? Marco Wiren: Yes. I would say that the important thing is that we want to avoid this large-scale restructuring programs going forward and more get this into our DNA as continuous improvement and customer focus and secure that we continuously find ways how we can take out cost in our fixed cost basis and our operations and utilize all the digitalization opportunities that could bring instead of doing this large-scale cost-cutting programs. So that's our focus going forward. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Felix Henriksson from Nordea. Felix Henriksson: Good to see Infinera turning positive on operating profit contribution. And I wanted to ask about that, that in light of the progress that you made on integration, do you see the EUR 200 million in run rate operating profit synergies for 2027 as conservative? And are these savings something that you will have to reinvest in the growth in the optical business, kind of what you're doing in the IP side of things? Justin Hotard: Yes, multiple questions in there. So let me sort of answer. First of all, we'll provide a full update at CMD on our view. But I would say, certainly well on track on our commitments as we've talked about on the cost synergies, clearly, with the growth that we're seeing ahead of our expectations on top line synergies. And then I think in terms of investment, what I would say is we'll talk more about that talk more about that in CMD, but we're going to be very disciplined in capital allocation. Obviously, you saw 1 dimension of that with our decision on venture funds this quarter. But this is a place where if we see the opportunity to accelerate or enhance returns, we'll make continued investments. But right now, I think, again, pleased to be on track on the cost synergies and thrilled to be running ahead of expectations on revenue. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Rob Sanders from Deutsche Bank. Robert Sanders: I just had a question on mobile networks. This some speculation that the EU will apply pressure on some member countries to accelerate their swap out of Chinese vendors. So I'm just interested in that. And how you think about that given your recent public statements. And then, of course, I just want to talk a bit about OpEx, how you're thinking about OpEx into next year, given you clearly wanted to invest more in these growth areas. Justin Hotard: Yes. So Rob, thanks for that. First of all, I mean, obviously, we're -- we would love to see regulations in the that create the market opportunity you're talking about. And I think it's important from a high-risk vendor standpoint, it's also important from a -- just from a sovereignty perspective in terms of having the largest providers of networks in the West being European. I think that's important. We're optimistic that we would be able to obviously grow and that capture some portion of that market if it was available. Number two, in terms of the OpEx question was really just around operating leverage. I think our -- my push is really specific on this is I want to see us drive operating leverage, something Marco touched on in his comments, but the reason for that is because I want to be able to maximize returns in terms of capturing value from the business we have and then deploy capital in areas where we think we can win, things like incremental R&D if there's demand in the market, things like increasing factory capacity and optics to the extent that we see opportunities there. And it's important, we talk a lot about the fabrication facilities. These are far smaller than you think of a fabrication facility in silicon. And actually, the investment sizes are much smaller. And again, we'll impact more of that for you at CMD. But those are the kinds of things I want to be able to deploy capital into, obviously, incremental sales coverage where we're seeing growth in AI. But I would think of all of this as is driving enhanced returns, not something that's going to -- not going to dilute our performance, and that's key. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Andrew Gardiner from Citi. Andrew Gardiner: Thank you, David. I just had 1 on gross profitability, please, both I suppose on the positive side and what you've seen in CNS and then perhaps on the more negative side with mobile networks. We're seeing quite a lot of volatility quarter-to-quarter. CNS clearly driven nicely in 3Q by the mix towards 5G core. Is that mix sustainable? And so high 40s gross margin for CNS is what we should be anticipating? Yes, perhaps with some quarterly fluctuation, but perhaps not to the extent that we've been seeing, right? Can you sustain gross margins around that level? And then similarly, on the other side with mobile, 41% in the prior quarter, down to 35% in the current quarter. Yes, I understand again, software mix has changed, but quite dramatic moves. What do you think is sort of a more normalized level, given the revenue run rate that you're at in mobile? What's a more normalized level of gross margin for MN at this point? Marco Wiren: Yes. Thank you. If I start with the mobile network side, there is variability, and that's why we usually see that mobile networks would be better to look on an annual basis of 4 quarters because you have always some product mix fluctuations. The level of software has a big impact on gross margin and that you see also between quarter 2 and quarter 3, while we see this fluctuation between those quarters where you have more software in quarter 2 and less in quarter 3. And I would say that if you look on a longer-term or annual basis, then you can see the levels of mobile networks, gross margins and get an understanding of where it is and how we are tracking compared to previous year. And then when it comes to I mentioned already a few points there that are what about the reasons for the improved gross margins. And we definitely believe that it is sustainable. And this has been a multiyear journey to get the improvements here in up the portfolio, focus on cost out on the different products that we have. But also we see the market support here. It took for a while before the 5G stand-alone core started to get traction actually from our customer side on CSP side. Now we've seen in the past 18 months that it actually have been quite positive, and we have momentum there. And thanks to our cloud-based solution that we have, we have actually gained market share and been able to improve our market position. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Daniel Djurberg from Handelsbanken. Daniel Djurberg: Congrats to strong numbers. I actually would like to continue on that question, I heard the same, more or less. On the mobile networks, the software upgrades on stand-alone seems not to be in tandem, at least with the CNS on the 5D core. So should we expect to have a little bit of an upgrade in the baseband software radio unit software or ahead of us on back stand-alone core now being let down. Marco Wiren: Usually -- I can start and Justin, if you have anything you can add as well. What usually happens is in the new generation is that you first install the hardware basement and radios, and when you see that the demand increases on the customer side, then you actually implement the core as well when you see that actually you need those features that the new generation can offer. And this is exactly the same example here in 5G. In the beginning, the 4G core was still functional quite well and on the early 5G installations. And now when there's more opportunities to slice and done the network, you need actually a 5G stand-alone core to be able to capture those opportunities and offer those services to our customer base. Justin Hotard: I would just add a couple of things. I think we're -- we want to make sure we're clear on the Q2 to Q3 margin impact in is timing because of how we release software in this portfolio, which is we release an upgrade, we then recognize the revenue of those upgrades as they get deployed into customers and they largely customers take their release. And so that's the timing dimension between Q2 and Q3, but also realize that the MN baseband software, which is the majority of the software revenue we have in mobile networks today, is still largely in a legacy, what I would call more legacy appliance model. Cloud and Network Services or our core networks have moved to a cloud model. And that means you have much -- we have more subscription-based pricing. We have more ratable deployment. That means customers will be paying on a recurring revenue basis for an ongoing support and service. So whether it's a subscription-based models there. It's a very different. It's a different business model and that dynamic. Obviously, we think that's the long-term direction of travel in mobile, but that's not where the market is today. Today, our CloudRamp business is fairly small. David Mulholland: Did you have a quick follow-up, Daniel? Daniel Djurberg: Yes, please. Yes, just a question on -- a little bit on your work already in Q2, you commented to unify corporate functions, simplify work, et cetera, and more change culture, but to unlock the operating leverage. And then you've seen quite a large changes, especially when your CTO office. And my question is on the Nokia Bell Labs organization. Should we expect this to be more focusing on AI data center than on the mobile networks and radio access networks ahead given the departure of [indiscernible]? Justin Hotard: Yes. Look, I think for me, a couple of things. First of all, I talked about functional excellence, which was the purpose around the corporate functions. And I think having a leader that is the Chief Technology and AI officer that's focused on technology key areas of our platforms, AI, security, cloud, all of those elements that we're touching on or talking around on this call today is very important. And having someone who's excellent in that but also understands fixed -- our fixed network infrastructure business and mobile infrastructure. And if you look at Palabi's background, she has a career where she's done both across Juniper HPE and then also at Intel. And then the other thing was focused around corporate development, and that was not just out of the strategy organization, but also bringing together some of the corporate development folks we had within the business groups and also within the finance organization. So for me, this is all about around functional excellence and aligning accountability and having cleaner and simple functions. And then obviously, we also moved the digital office or the IT organization into finance, which really ties back to the focus that Mark touched on in his comments around driving ongoing improvement, ongoing productivity and enabling that through digitization, through AI, through simplification around processes. And obviously, IT is an important part of how you both simplify and standardize and realize those benefits. And so we felt like that was a natural alignment. So I think that's the way I would think about it. I think it's important. We have 2 compelling assets in both our network infrastructure business and our mobile portfolios. And we had a CTO that can look across all of that and also make sure that we're thinking about the right long-term investments in Nokia Bell Labs, whether it's from a research or from a near-term innovation standpoint. David Mulholland: We'll take our next question from Emil Immonen from DNB Carnegie. Emil Immonen: Hi, can you hear me? David Mulholland: Yes, we can hear you now. Emil Immonen: So I wanted to maybe ask a little bit on the demand in Europe in general. So on the revenue decline on some parts in NI and also mobile networks in Europe. Do you see that this is more, let's say, structural or would you say that this is temporary in the way that Europe is just not investing right now. How do you see this developing going forward? Justin Hotard: I think in terms of CSPs, I think that I would say telcos, it's stabilizing demand, and we think that's a good thing. Obviously, we talked about the potential of upside in Europe over time if there's regulation that addresses high-risk vendor status. But I think overall, that feels pretty good. And then Look, we're excited about the potential of AI and data center business in Europe. We're certainly excited about the opportunity we -- the partnership we have with Endscale and the opportunity for other companies to invest in Europe. And so we like the trends of what we're seeing. But the reality is the majority of the investment today is happening in the U.S. And so as you look at our revenues and you look at our profile, the demand is coming from the U.S., and I think that's important. So that's how I would net it out. David Mulholland: Did you have a quick follow-up, Emil? Emil Immonen: Yes. Maybe quickly touching on the private wireless side. The customer numbers grow nicely, but you haven't really discussed it at all in terms of revenue or anything. Could you say how is that part of the business going. Marco Wiren: Yes. Just like you said, we've seen a nice increase in number of customers. But remember, we are still in a very early phase of this journey. And even if growth rates are pretty good, but it will take some time before this will be a meaningful business. So it's worth focusing more about that. Justin Hotard: Yes. And I would just add, I think if you look at where we are today, I think Marco has summarized it well. I would tell you that where I see our biggest opportunity is in focused vertical markets vertical market use cases. And so there's some examples in railways, for example, and utilities is the other, right? So if you look at those, those are the places where we've got opportunity. But again, this goes back to that message of focus. David Mulholland: Our next question from Sébastien Sztabowicz from Kepler Cheuvreux. Sébastien Sztabowicz: Coming back to mobile networks. Your business is going back to moderate organic growth in the third quarter, but to remain close to breakeven rather those days. How do you plan to return to more decent margins in the coming years, maybe not double digit, but maybe high single digit, is it more cost cutting? Is it more to support your revenue with more growth opportunity? And the second question is also linked to mobile. We have heard some comment that the Chinese government could be looking to push the network vendors in Europe outside the Chinese market? Is this something that you already see in your order intake in China? Or is this not something that you see already in your business? Justin Hotard: Yes. Absolutely. I mean, I addressed this a little bit in my comments. I mean, I think on mobile networks, we're absolutely -- 1 of my priorities right now is on improving the returns. And I think we do that in a couple of ways. Continued tight focus and tight engagement with customers. It ties a little bit to the second question you asked, which I'll address in a minute, but tight focused engagement with customers, particularly those customers that want to co-innovate and collaborate with us. because I think differentiation for us longer term comes through innovation and technology leadership. That was historically where the market was. I would say that obviously, if you go back 5 years, the business -- the company's business was in dire straits because we weren't in that case. We've now stabilized the portfolio. But as an industry, and I think certainly as a player in this industry, we need to continue to innovate. So that's as much of a preview as I'll give you to CBD, but I'd encourage you to attend. But I think absolutely, that's the line of where we're headed. And then in terms of China, this is 1 of the places where we were largely not exposed. The revenue in China has come down massively over the last few years. So I -- the reality is it's a fraction of our revenue today, and our market share is fractional in mobile networks in China. It's not a core market for us. So the communications from the government, obviously, we follow those closely. We respect and support their decisions. And the reality for us is we're going to focus on markets where we believe there's significant opportunity and customers where we believe we can collaborate and innovate. And I think there's more opportunity ahead for us. David Mulholland: We'll take our last question from Didier Scemama from Bank of America. Didier Scemama: Thanks, David, a question for Justin really. You've been in the job now for a few months. I just wondered if you could share your thoughts about the direction of the business strategically, especially when it comes to the mobile networks the core activities and also IPR, which are vastly different, I guess, from your day-to-day activities, which presumably are focused on getting those AI and cloud contracts. So that was my first question, and I've got a quick follow-up. Justin Hotard: Sure. So Didier, look, I think probably nothing I haven't shared in my comments. I think we have 2 businesses: network infrastructure, and mobile businesses in the portfolio. I mean, obviously, if you look at the comps, there's 4 major providers of mobile infrastructure. They all have 3 things. They have core networks, they have the radio networks, which was what we call MN and they have IP licensing, which is what we call tech. So I think we've got a pretty clear -- it's pretty clear you need the full portfolio. If you look at the players that have not had the full portfolio they've all struggled to innovate or sustain a foothold. And so I think that's for me, number one. In terms of the difference, look, as I've said before, I think connectivity is going to be an area where performance, reliable and trusted providers are going to be very valuable. And the reality is we have a portfolio that plays across all of those core elements of connectivity. What we're seeing today with AI, and I think the thing that, candidly, we weren't capturing a historical Nokia prior to the Infinera acquisition as much as we could have, was the fact that in our optical and IP businesses, the market -- the technology investment or the technology leadership has shifted to cloud and now AI and cloud. So now we're starting to capture some of that. Like I said, I'm pleased with the progress there. And I think that same -- I think you're going to see those same trends happen and roll into mobile over time. Because ultimately, if you think about some of the compelling uses of AI, autonomous vehicles, robotics, smart glasses, virtual reality, augmented reality. They all need mobile connectivity and I think that will be favorable. But I don't know if the answer I think -- I don't think the answer is going to be doing the same thing we've always done. I think we have to continue to innovate. And that's why I like what we've done in cloud and network services with setting up an autonomous cloud native core stack, and I think there's more opportunity for us ahead in mobile networks. Again, it's going to require the things I talked about: focus, collaboration and co-innovation with customers and an emphasis on best-of-breed technology and strong partnerships. David Mulholland: Did you have a quick follow-up, Didier? Didier Scemama: Yes, completely unrelated on the Nokia Technology side. So I mean, Nokia sold their phone business to Microsoft, what 10 years ago or so. So I just wondered how is the innovation pipeline in the IPR business for the nonstandard essential patents? Is there a risk of a cliff at some point as you're not in the phone business? Or are you confident that you can continue to monetize the SCP and non-SEPs at least at the current level? Justin Hotard: Yes, absolutely. I mean I think this is a good question. So just back to the comment I just made. Again, every player of scale in mobile infrastructure has to -- has a strong IP business, what we call tech with the changes, I didn't touch on this in my earlier comments, but with the changes we made in the CTO office, we've also now really tightly aligned the Standards team into tech. But we see -- one, we see very good , stable revenue in the business. We are -- we've said already, we're starting to invest in 16 gene monetization. That's important for us. And we see other -- we also see other emerging revenue streams in other segments. So I think the business is very healthy. The team is doing an excellent job. They're also doing, I think, probably the best job of any of the businesses right now. And in pushing on operating leverage so that they can continue to deliver the performance they need to. And you'll hear a little more about that in CMD. So that's the last plug I'll make for CMD. But we'll talk about some of that as well there. David Mulholland: Thanks, Justin, Marco, for the comments. Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's call. I would like to remind you that during the call today, we have made a number of forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. Actual results may, therefore, differ materially from the results currently expected. Factors that could cause such differences can be both external as well as internal operating factors. We have identified such risks in the Risk Factors section of our annual report on Form 20-F, which is available on our Investor Relations website. Thank you for joining us. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Hello, and welcome to the AutoNation, Inc. Q3 Earnings Call. My name is Harry, and I'll be your operator today. [Operator Instructions] I will now hand the conference over to Derek Fiebig, VP of Investor Relations. Please go ahead. Derek Fiebig: Thanks, Harry, and good morning, everyone. Welcome to AutoNation's Third Quarter 2025 Conference Call. Leading our call today will be Mike Manley, our Chief Executive Officer; and Tom Szlosek, our Chief Financial Officer. Following their remarks, we will open up the call to questions. Before beginning, I'd like to remind that certain statements and information on this call, including any statements regarding our anticipated financial results and objectives, constitute forward-looking statements within the meaning of the Federal Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Such forward-looking statements involve known and unknown risks that may cause our actual results or performance to differ materially from such forward-looking statements. Additional discussions of factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially are contained in our press release issued today and in our filings with the SEC. Certain non-GAAP financial measures as defined under SEC rules will be discussed on this call. Reconciliations are provided in our materials and on our website at investors.autonation.com. With that, I'll turn the call over to Mike. Michael Manley: Yes. Thank you, Derek. Good morning, everybody. Thank you for joining us today. And as usual, I'm going to start on the third slide. Firstly, we were very pleased to report our strong third quarter. We delivered 25% adjusted EPS growth, generated strong cash flow and deployed significant capital for share repurchases and acquisitions while maintaining our leverage at the lower half of our targeted range. Overall market conditions for New and Used Vehicles, we think are reasonable and holding up well, industry inventory of about 2.6 million units remains well below the 4 million units which was the norm ahead of the pandemic and units are down about 6% year-to-date. I think OEMs have been adding some production, but overall, inventory levels are in good shape. New vehicle sales remained below historical standards with the year-to-date light vehicle [indiscernible] averaging 16.3 million units and the retails are averaging around 13.6. Our industry sales are up 5% year-to-date, with about half of that increase attributable to a strong performance in March and April. But we think comparisons will probably get tougher in the fourth quarter as we [indiscernible] of $16.7 million and $13.9 million, respectively. The tariff story continues to evolve. Most of the negotiations with major trade partners are nearing completion, and the effects on the auto industry, I think, are becoming clearer. The impact on the OEM profitability is significant and well chronicled but they're clearly not standing still. There will be manufacturing relocations and other actions to drive a more efficient tariff supply chain and the knock on impacts of the dealers and consumers are beginning to play out as well. We expect decontenting and reductions in trim levels, additional fees and moderation in incentives and marketing spend. Now in the third quarter, we've already started to experience a reduction in certain types of incentive spending, which I will discuss a little bit more shortly. Our same-store sales of New Vehicles increased 4.5%, largely in line with the overall industry and unit growth was led by our domestic segment, which increased 11% from a year ago on a same-store basis. Import brand also increased and Premium Luxury was slightly down. With the expiration of government incentives for EVs on September 30, there was a significant increase in sales of Hybrid Vehicles, which were up 25% from a year ago and [indiscernible], which increased 40%. With the incentive exploration in mind, we reduced our BEV inventory by approximately 55% from year-end to around 1,550 units or less than 20 days of supplier quarter end. New Vehicle profitability moderated in the quarter as one might have expected with the mix of ourselves being more heavily weighted to bad and domestic vehicles. And as I mentioned, our [indiscernible] incentive spending played a part in here as well. [indiscernible], it is worth noting over the course of the quarter, we did see an improvement in unit profitability with September closing out more strongly than the average. Used Vehicle gross profit increased 3%, which was 2% on a same-store basis year-over-year as we benefited from stronger unit sales and improved performance in wholesale. Our unit sales increased 4% overall and more than 2% on a same-store basis, outpacing the industry. We had strong performances for the over $40,000 price point. In terms of acquisition, the team did a nice job acquiring vehicles through trade-ins and directly from consumers to our We'll Buy Your Car effort and these channels accounted for around 90% of the vehicles acquired in the quarter. We ended September with over 27,000 Used Vehicles and inventory, which has positioned us well for the fourth quarter of this year. Customer Financial Services gross profit was the highest we had ever reported in a quarter increasing 12% from a year ago. We continue to attach more than 2 products per vehicle with extended service contracts continuing to be the top offering which is, of course, fantastic for our future After-Sales revenue and customer retention. Our finance penetration was higher from a year ago with around 3/4 of units [indiscernible] with financing and we benefited from improved margins on vehicle service contracts. The momentum in After-Sales continued. We delivered record [indiscernible] revenue and gross profit. Total gross profit increased by 7%. The total gross profit margins expanded by 100 basis points from a year ago. Our growth was led by customer pay, which reflects our ongoing customer retention efforts. We continue to focus on our technician workforce by recruiting, retaining and developing our technicians. And I think we're continuing to see positive signs here. Turnover has decreased and franchise technician hand count increased 4% from a year ago on a same-store basis. Now the strong momentum at AN Finance continued originations have nearly doubled from the year prior, and we continue to scale the business with the portfolio now exceeding more than $2 billion. The portfolio and balance continues to perform in line with our expectations from a delinquency and a loss perspective and the business's base cost to remain reasonably stable, enabling good profit scaling as the portfolio grows. Our Q3 performance, combined with our share repurchases, helped us to grow our adjusted EPS by 25% from a year ago. This was the third consecutive year-over-year increase in adjusted EPS. Cash flow for the quarter and year-to-date was also strong. On a year-to-date basis, our adjusted free cash flow is 1.7x that for 2024, and Tom will talk a little bit more about that after me. Our investment-grade credit rating and balance sheet, as you know, is really anchored around a low net capital, high free cash flow model, enabled us to once again deploy significant capital in the quarter for both share repurchases and acquisitions to improve our franchise density and portfolio in existing markets. We've expanded our presence in 2 key markets, including the acquisition of a [ Ford and Matastore ] in Denver as well as an [ Audi ] in the Mercedes store in Chicago. All in all, I think, really good results and good progress from the automation team. And as usual, it is their results that have delivered this. So thank you all, many of you listen. At that time, I'm going to hand it over to you to take everyone through the results in more detail. Thomas Szlosek: All right. Great. Thanks, Mike. I'm turning to Slide 4 to discuss our third quarter P&L. Our total revenue for the quarter was $7 billion an increase of 7% a year ago on both total store and same-store basis. We achieved attractive same-store growth across the entire business, including double-digit growth in Customer Financial Services. 7% increase in same-store new vehicle revenue, which reflects new unit volumes across all 3 segments and After-Sales growth of 6%. Gross. Profit of $1.2 billion increased by 5% from a year ago, reflecting same-store CFS growth of 11%, After-Sales growth of 7% and Used Vehicle growth of 2%. The growth was offset in part by a decline in New Vehicle gross profit. Adjusted SG&A of 67.4% of gross profit for the quarter was in line with a year ago. For the year-to-date, we are at 67% within our targeted 66% to 67% range. Adjusted operating income increased by 9% and margin of 4.9% increased modestly from a year ago, reflecting excellent growth and performance in CFS and After-Sales, offset by moderation in new vehicle gross profit -- our unit profit. As a reminder, CFS and After-Sales comprise close to 80% of our gross profit together comprised a gross margin rate of more than 60% of revenue. Below the operating line, floor plan expense decreased by $13 million from a year ago as average rates were down approximately 100 basis points, combined with lower average outstanding borrowings. Non-vehicle interest expense was approximately flat from a year ago. As a reminder, we reflect floor plan assistance received from OEMs in gross margin. This assistance totaled $34 million compared with $38 million a year ago. Net of these OEMs have net new vehicle floor plan expense totaled $12 million, down from $20 million a year ago. In all, this resulted in an adjusted net income of $191 million compared to $162 million a year ago, an increase of 18%. Total shares repurchased over the 12 months decreased our average shares outstanding year-over-year by 5% to 38.1 million shares, benefiting our adjusted EPS, of course, which was $5.01 for the quarter, an increase of nearly $1 or 25% from a year ago. Adjusted EPS for the quarter excludes the $40 million in business interruption insurance recoveries related to last year's CDK business incident. Also the year-over-year comparison of adjusted EPS benefited from non-reccurence of the residual effects of the CDK business incident that adversely impacted the third quarter last year by approximately $0.21. Slide 5 provides some more color on New Vehicle. New Vehicle Unit volumes increased 5% from a year ago in total store, on a total store basis and 4% on a same-store basis. Total store unit sales were led by domestic vehicles, which grew approximately 12% in the quarter, followed by import growth at 4%. Premium Luxury was relatively flat year-over-year. By powertrain, Hybrid New Vehicle unit sales representing 20% of our volume, were up nearly 25% from the third quarter of a year ago. BEV New Vehicle sales representing nearly 10% of our volume, we're also up more than 40% year-over-year and on a sequential basis. Our New Vehicle unit profitability averaged approximately $2,300 for the quarter, down approximately 500 from a year ago for the reasons Mike mentioned. New Vehicle inventory amounted to 47 days of supply, down 5 days from the third quarter of last year and down from 2 days or down from 2 days at the end of June. The strong BEV sales during the quarter reduced battery electric inventory close to 70% from a year ago to less than 1 month of supply. For the fourth quarter, we expect the mix of new unit sales to improve, including less Battery Electric Vehicles and a higher percentage of Premium Luxury, reflecting seasonal strength during the holiday season. Turning to Slide 6. Used Vehicle retail sales improved on a total store basis by 4%. Average retail prices were up about 4%. Used Vehicle retail unit profitability of [ 14.89 ] was lower than a year ago, reflecting higher acquisition costs, but remains in line with historical levels. Total used gross profit increased 3% from a year ago, reflecting increased units and stronger wholesale performance. We remain focused on optimizing vehicle acquisition, reconditioning, inventory velocity and pricing. Overall, industry supply of Used Vehicles remains tight. We continue to be competitive in securing our vehicle supply from our retail operations, including trade-ins, We'll Buy Your Car, services loaner conversions and lease returns. We source more than 90% of our vehicles from these channels and are encouraged by the level and quality of our Used Vehicle inventories heading into the fourth quarter of the year. Turning to Slide 7. Customer Financial Services. Momentum continues to be strong for CFS. Gross profit increased 12% on a total store basis. Approximately 2/3 of the increase was from higher unit profitability. The rest was volume related. The results reflect improved margins on vehicle service contracts, consistent product attachment and higher penetration of finance products. The continued unit profitability performance in CFS is even more impressive considering the growth of AN Finance which, while superior long-term profitability dilutes our CFS PVR unit profitability. In fact, without the AN Finance dilution, our CFS per unit profitability would increase by an additional $30 from a year ago. Slide 8 provides an update on AN Finance, which is our captive finance company. As expected, the profitability of this portfolio is gaining meaningful traction as the portfolio matures and we get leverage on the fixed cost structure from the outstanding portfolio growth. Year-to-date, you can see that we improved from a $10 million operating loss in 2024 to a $4 million operating profit in 2025. During the third quarter, we again originated more than $400 million in loans bringing the year-to-date originations to more than $1.3 billion, nearly double our originations from last year. We had approximately $160 million in customer repayments in the quarter. Portfolio has more than doubled since last year is now greater than $2 billion. The quality of the portfolio continues to be credit and performance metrics are improving with average FICO scores. Our originations of [ $6.97 ] year-to-date compared to [ 6.74 ] a year ago. Delinquency rates at quarter end of 2.4% or solid and losses are stable as a percentage of the portfolio. We do expect delinquency rates to continue to normalize as the portfolio continues toward full maturity with delinquency rates migrating to the 3%-ish range. Our loss reserving methodology incorporates this expectation. The nonrecourse debt funded status of the portfolio also continued to improve as we have improved advance rates for our warehouse facilities and are benefiting from higher nonrecourse debt funding levels from our ABS issuance in the second quarter. Just going to 86% debt tonnage status that you can see on the page, released over $100 million of equity funding back to AutoNation. As we become a more regular ABS security this year, we expect to further increase the nonrecourse debt funding proportion of the portfolio, and we expect to carry out a second ABS transaction before the end of the first quarter 2026. Closing off [indiscernible] finance, the businesses attractive offerings are driving strong customer takeup, and we continue to expect attractive ROEs in the business driven by profitability growth and the shrinking equity. Moving to Slide 9, After-Sales. Representing nearly 1/2 of our gross profit, continued its revenue and margin momentum and gross profit posted a third quarter record for AutoNation. Same-store revenue increased 6% and gross profit was up 7% led by customer pay, which increased 10%. Internal and warranty were also higher than prior year, reflecting higher value repair orders along with higher overall repair orders. Our total store gross margin increased 100 basis points to 48.7% of revenue. We remain focused on hiring, developing and retaining our technicians. And as Mike mentioned, these efforts helped us to increase our franchise technician headcount by 4% from a year ago on a same-store basis. The increased technician workforce is a key to consistently driving that mid-single-digit growth in after sales gross profit. On Slide 10. Adjusted cash flow for the 9 months of the year totaled $786 million, which is about 134% of adjusted net income, and this compares to $467 million or 91% a year ago. The big increase reflects stronger operational performance, including our continued focus on working capital and cycle times as well as CapEx management and prioritization, which resulted in a $40 million lower spend on CapEx in 2025 and '24 as well the recovery from the CDK outage, including the $40 million in business interruption insurance receipts in the quarter. Our CapEx to depreciation ratio was at 1.2x compared to 1.5x a year ago. We continue to expect healthy free cash flow conversion for the full year. Slide 11, capital allocation. As we've discussed in the past, we consider capital allocation opportunity to either reinvest in the business in the form of CapEx or M&A or to return capital to share owners via share repurchase. Year-to-date, we've deployed over $1 billion in capital, as you can see on the page. We remain prudent in CapEx, which is mostly maintenance-related compulsory spending and totaled $223 million for the first 9 months of 2025, which is 15% lower than 2024, as I previously mentioned. We continue to actively explore M&A opportunities to add scale and density to our existing markets. So far this year, we spent approximately $350 million closing on transactions in Denver and Chicago, which Mike discussed. Share repurchases have been and will continue to be an important part of our playbook year-to-date. We've repurchased $435 million worth or 6% of the shares that were outstanding at the end of 2024 at an average price of $183 per share. In the 9 months ending September 30, we repurchased September 30, 2024, we repurchased $356 million at an average purchase price of $159 per share. In our capital allocation decisioning, of course, we consider our investment-grade balance sheet and the associated leverage levels. At quarter end, our leverage was 2.35x EBITDA, down from 2.45x EBITDA at the end of last year and well within our 2 to 3x long-term target which gives us additional dry powder for capital allocation going forward. Now let me turn the call back to Mike before we go to question and answer. Michael Manley: So I think we just go straight into Q&A. Derek Fiebig: Harry, if you could please remind people how to... Operator: Yes, of course, no problem at all. [Operator Instructions] And our first question will be from the line of Michael Ward with Citi Research. Michael Ward: Thank you very much. Good morning, everyone. I wonder if you can quantify, it looks like the variable gross per unit from 2Q to 3Q went down by about $250. And it looks like -- is it split about equal between the unfavorable seasonal mix with Luxury and then in the BEV sell-up. Is that what we're looking at? And how does that reverse? Or does it fully reverse in 4Q? Michael Manley: Yes. Mike, I'll answer first and then Tom if you've got anything that you want to attend. So I think you saw 2 effects really on the growth. Obviously, everyone is talking about the significant increase in BEV mix, and there's no doubt about it that margins are absolutely -- were absolutely terrible and have been terrible for some time, but we'll talk about our view on how that moderates going forward. So we -- it's still -- even though they increased significantly, it was only 10% of our total mix and it did have an effect on our margin, the biggest effect, frankly, came from our domestic combustion or [ life sales ], where we saw quite a compression, particularly in the middle part of the quarter. We were able to reverse that to some extent as we came out of the quarter, as I alluded to in my comments, and I was pleased with our exit trajectory, but I think we had too much pressure on our domestic mix, as I said, in the middle of the quarter. And that was the largest contribution to the sequential and year-over-year reduction. I think we've got better balance now going into Q4 with regard to that. And I do think that we are going to see a much better dynamic with regard to supply and demand on BEVs in Q4, and we could have a relatively long discussion about what does the effect of the loss of the $7,500 due on that? And what's the thoughts about that? But I do think that we have a better dynamic in terms of supply, matching demand and therefore, less pressure potentially on margins. So a long answer to your question. It was actually more from our -- the highest contribution with our domestic sales. And Tom mentioned, they were up [ 11% ] in the quarter. There was, of course, an impact of BEV, but remember, it was only 10% of our total mix. Some of which will get mitigated as we go into the Q4 and you'll obviously get the benefit if we see normal patterns of a better luxury premium mix in December. Tom, do you want to add anything? Thomas Szlosek: No, I think you hit them all, Mike. Michael Ward: And the flip side of that is you have this record level of finance and insurance per unit. Any reason that won't continue? Michael Manley: Well, I have expectation that team has continued to grow their contribution to our company throughout my 4 years now with AutoNation. And they are led by a great group of people in the dealerships, by the way, in our markets and here. So our expectation is that their performance will continue. And I think the thing that Tom and I are delighted about is that it's really in value-added products. We mentioned the attachment rate, for example, of [indiscernible] service contracts. And it is clear that, that really for us is good for the future in terms of loyalty and in terms of our After-Sales business. So there's no reason why we would see that not necessarily change. It is and will continue to be mitigated by increased penetration of AN Finance in terms of the periodic reporting of that. But over the long term, the contract turn, we're better off with the overall returns AN Finance delivers rather than the one-off contracts we sell on behalf of others. Operator: The next question today will be from the line of Rajat Gupta with JPMorgan. Rajat Gupta: I just wanted to ask a little bit of a high-level question on just the auto credit trends. You noted that delinquencies were flat quarter-on-quarter looks like your average FICO mix is a little similar to some of your public peers out there, you know CarMax and others. I'm curious like, is there anything in the data that you see or the performance that you see in your loan book that concerns you with regard to the health of consumer with regard to how maybe losses or delinquencies have been performing within the quarter, maybe in certain cohorts of the consumer? Any more color you can share there would be helpful. And I have a follow-up on the Used car business. Thomas Szlosek: Yes. Thanks, Rajat. This is Tom. Good question. And obviously, there's a few headlines with some of the well-chronicled issues that came through in a couple of the larger portfolios this quarter. Obviously, that makes us double down and look at everything that we're doing, and we're very, very confident in the portfolio. I mean the growth has been outstanding, the financing levels continue to grow, minimizing our equity. But importantly, the portfolio itself is something that we look at very closely. Mike looks at it every week. And we look at not just the delinquencies, the delinquency rates, but we look at loss rates and write-offs, high vintage going all the way back to the start of when we were -- we did this business. The trends are all in line with what we expected. Our reserving has reflected those expectations and not seeing anything by way of acceleration in anything like repossessions or first payment skips or anything like that, that is not already reflected in how we manage the book. So I'm pretty good, pretty happy knock on wood with how that's been going. Rajat Gupta: Understood. That's helpful color. Just following up on the Used Car business, you had a pretty strong same-store growth number last quarter. Looks like it slowed down a bit. I'm sure like there's been some effect of the prebuy that happened last quarter that's causing the decel. But curious if we can get an update on some of the initiatives you talked about last time on improving the business there, both growth and profitability, where you are in the time line of that progress? And should we start to see further acceleration in that growth here over the next few quarters? Michael Manley: Yes. I'll give you an answer to that question. I would tell you that one of the things that we talked about was that we believe that we could grow our Used Car business, and we are -- we are growing our Used Car business above the industry. And all of those things are continuing to happen and our margin is relatively stable, albeit there's some downward pressure on it. So I think if you look objectively at our performance, you will say, yes, it's market, that's a good performance or some people would. So I would tell you that the team and I are really, really focused on what the other possibility here. And we are maintaining higher stock levels for the sale than we would normally have. Historically, I'd like to make sure that we have an inventory turn rate that for me, balances, obviously, the depreciation that we're now back into a normal cycle with how long we're keeping those vehicles in our inventory. And we're not at that turn rate but the level of inventory that we're carrying today. We are typically the team would balance back down to just above their run rate to give them room to grow. But we're not going to do that time. We're going to hold the line with higher inventory on Used for a period of time. While we continue to work on the other levers to get our run rate to get back to the turn levels that we would expect. Now the consequence of that, of course, is the depreciation effect on our margin will be there for a period of time and will continue, frankly in Q4. And as you know, when you think about depreciation impact and it is completely time based that put some downward pressure on our overall result. So I would say we've made -- we continue to make progress that more headroom, we're not where I or the team would like to be. We're not going to take the balancing approach that we've taken before because we want to work the kinks out of the system. There will come a point that we may have to rebalance Used Inventory down so that we can alleviate some of that margin pressure that we're seeing. We're not there at this moment in time, but we'll make that decision as the quarter continues. So the short answer is progress above industry in Q3. Our expectations are higher. We are doing numerous things to get there. They haven't all worked in the quarter, albeit the result was good. We're going to hold higher inventory levels than we normally would to make sure that we have the supply that is there as we work through those other things. The consequence of that is pick up increased depreciation, which is accounting for about 0.2% of our margin at this moment in time, and we will stay there in Q4 to enable the organization to grow, and we will see what happens with the overall marketplace. That doesn't mean to say that at some point in the quarter, we will balance our inventory back if we see that the market is not giving us the results that we need. That's what our job is to do. But at the moment, we're holding the line with our inventory, which is why you see our inventory levels where they are on Used. So hopefully, that's enough color for you. Operator: The next question will be from the line of Jeff Lick, Stephens inc. Jeffrey Lick: Tom, I was wondering if you could give a little more detail on the impressive 100 bps of gross margin expansion in service and parts, just kind of what's driving that and how sustainable that will be going forward? Thomas Szlosek: I mean when you look at the performance in the quarter, I would say that the total -- just to reference, the growth was roughly [ 7% ] in growth. And I'd say it's equally balanced between volume and price. And with volume, I'm talking about both parts, number of repair orders and labor hours per repair order. Those were all up and tracking nicely. Also from a price perspective, there's inflation in the market and we definitely do our part to offset that on a regular basis. And then we probably got a little bit more mix favorability as well. But the initiatives that Christian and the team are driving around technicians and the hiring and training of technicians as well as having appropriate capacity from a service day perspective or working out well for us, and we're able to leverage the investments that we've made. We talked about maintaining a reasonable level of CapEx spend and been able to achieve these results while being thoughtful about the amount of capital we're putting in as well. So I'd say those are the big drivers. Jeffrey Lick: And just a quick follow-up on SG&A, 67.4% as a ratio of gross profit and flat last year, which given your peers' reports that you're the leader in the club. Outlook's pretty impressive. I know you're kind of taking a bit of an outsider's point of view given your previous professional experience in -- just curious where you see that going and what highlights you'd give as to what's going to lead that? Thomas Szlosek: Mike has his expectations. We talked about a range of 66%, 67%, but that's we're driving even more aggressive than that. I think the other important thing is there's a disparity amongst the group in terms of how service loaners are reported. We include the entire expense for service loaners and our SG&A rate as well. So that I think ours is a bit penalized compared to some in the group. So overall, it's a I agree with you that the performance is good from an outsider's view. But I would say we have a number of initiatives driving productivity on the -- in our variable side, both whether it's on the sales side in the service space, that's really important and drive the outcomes -- unit outcomes also on advertising being very, very thoughtful in terms of return on investments that we're getting there. And then lastly, there was a whole pool of cost, other SG&A types of costs that we manage every day. We have a number of initiatives I've talked about before. But those are front and center. We look at them every month as a leadership team and course correct when we see things not in the direction we want. I think it's getting the right amount of attention in the company. I expect us to closely manage that. Now we've got investments that we make and those are fairly regular. They can be a bit variable and spike at times, but they're all made with the idea of driving further growth. So that's in terms of how I'm looking at it. I think it's a big area focus. Jeffrey Lick: Mike impressive performance. Best of luck in the fourth quarter. Operator: Our next question today will be from the line of Daniela Haigian with Morgan Stanley. Daniela Haigian: One question on forward demand. As we've kind of passed through the peak tariff fears as you spoke to, Mike, we're now seeing OEMs revise up guidance is. Kind of clears the bar on improved outlook here. You spoke to decontenting, but how are you seeing pricing on new model your vehicles. Is that relatively unchanged? How are you thinking about '26? Anything you can share there would be helpful. Michael Manley: Yes. So I think you're right in your view. I think the OEMs now have had enough time and are getting to a level of clarity where they have looked at their product plans, look at their supply chains. And the 2 big impacts of tariffs, but also from a powertrain perspective, have driven significant change into all of the OEMs views on their product lineup and the powertrains that they're going to deploy. And I think that they have, to the most extent, got their heads around that and understand what they want to do and therefore, they're being much more clear and less cautious about their future outlook. A lot of that hasn't really made its way yet into the market. Some of it has, of course. But I would tell you that my view on this is look at pricing and what's come through the system so far, it looks broadly in line with normal pricing that we would expect for the model year changeover. But that, of course, is just a headline. We know that there is, as always, option decontenting. Things that were standard made optional and there is always value engineering that happens with every single OEM. So at the end of the day, if you were to assess true value delivered to the customer for each dollar. I can't really give you a clear picture on that yet. But we know that the levers that have been pulled are on the supplier side, they are on, obviously, the cost per vehicle side and the bill of materials and also on some of the incentives that have been provided to dealers, whether it's volume growth incentives or other support incentives that do not directly impact net transaction price in the marketplace, but ultimately do impact dealer margins. So we know there's effect across all of that. Some of that we saw in the quarter. We alluded to that in my incentive comments. I think that's going to continue as we get into deeper into Q4 and we clear our prior model year. But I'm pleased with where the industry is, frankly. We said at the beginning of the year, we thought it was -- we were hoping 5% up year-over-year. And we had no clue really of the turbulence that we were going to see that we have seen this year. And I think the OEMs have largely navigated it well, some better than others are always. So we are hoping that Q4 continues back. We think that the year-over-year comps are higher bar in Q4. And we said that because we wanted to give you an indication of our view of October through the end of December. But as we get into next year and you see some of the more rapid supply chain changes that OEMs are there. I think what they're going to want to do is to maintain the progress in this year. So it's too early for me to call what I think 2026 will be in terms of the total inventory. But I do think there's a lot more clarity from the OEMs. And I do think we're going to see more potential impacts that will be mitigated to some extent by their actions and dealer actions in Q4. Daniela Haigian: Great. That's very helpful. And back to Used Car, you spoke to sourcing challenges. Availability should improve at the margin over the next year. But how do you expect the strategy around older Used Cars to shift over time? It's clearly a very fragmented Used Car market? How are you viewing competition from the likes of online pure play retailers? And is there a greater opportunity to grow and consolidate there? Michael Manley: Yes. I'm always -- I always believe that there's opportunity to consolidate, particularly when you add the fragmentation that we have got. I mean even if you take the largest of the players in their forecast, it's a tiny percentage of market. So there's always opportunity for that to happen. But let me try let me try and answer your question in sections and redirect you if necessary. Firstly, we have continued to see competition for retail grade used inventory and that competition, it has resulted in some upward pressure on wholesale prices. We and the other big retailers benefit from one more channel than some of the pure plays, and that is obviously in our trading, but that channel is not completely isolated from competition because of the level of transparency pricing in the marketplace, which will only increase. But I think we have a very strong sourcing strategy that enables us to keep the level of inventory we want in place, albeit an elevated, albeit at an elevated cost. Our growth, really, as we alluded to, came from higher-priced vehicles. Others are leaning into maybe lower-priced vehicles. I think as we exhaust the art of the possible from 20,000 units [indiscernible] and above, and we want to continue to grow, we can lean higher into those lower-priced vehicles with obviously, the consequence of the investment required to get them road ready. But as I mentioned, we're going to hold slightly elevated used inventory in the quarter. Really to see the art of the possible of our sales teams and our marketing teams to get our turn rates back up to what we're used to. They'll be given some time to do that. We understand the consequences of that which will be some downward pressure, particularly around the aging that will be in addition to some slightly elevated wholesale prices that we're seeing. We may have to balance that, as I mentioned before, as the quarter closes. But I do think for us, we have a very strong North Star in terms of what we think we should be capable of with our physical the relationships and the confidence that comes from the brands that we have above our doors and the fact that we have multiple sourcing channels. So I am -- if you were to talk to any of our market presidents, I would tell you that I am very bullish on Used Car volumes. I understand it doesn't -- it's not a switch. It takes time, and of course, it includes all of the channels. But the reality is most people buy a Used Car within 50 miles of the dealership that's got it. Operator: The final question in the queue today will be from the line of Bret Jordan with Jefferies. Bret Jordan: One of your peers yesterday was noting that the consumer sentiment around the luxury space was feeling a little softer. Are you seeing any changes sort of at the underlying demand level at the higher price points? Michael Manley: Yes, I think that -- so I mean, it's a good question because really when we closed out the quarter and we saw the level of activity around hybrid and there's a lot of that, obviously, for us is in luxury space, and we come into what really is a bit of a quiet period for luxury. I would tell you that I think it is more muted than last year. But I still have expectations we will see a seasonal uptick in December. But I do think it is more muted, particularly as the way as I see October developing. So that's the best color I can give you at the moment. Bret Jordan: Okay. And then within the domestic internal combustion GPUs, was it brand specific? Or was there sort of a one-off event in there that is to be corrected? Or are we thinking that domestic ICE GPUs are just under some sustained pressure? Michael Manley: Well, I tell you something. I think some of them self-inflicted, frankly. And that's one of the conversations that we have internally. We've set ourselves strong expectations in terms of how we want to perform in line of the marketplace. And it is always a 3-way balance between what share are we able to achieve with the brands that we've got at what margin level and what marketing expense. And I think we -- as I tried to allude to, probably had some self-inflicted downward pressure in the middle of the quarter that was corrected in September, and I expect that to continue to be corrected. But you saw all of the domestic players, all of the domestic players chasing volume, domestic players tend to chase volume and they do it in conjunction with their dealers. In other words, they have programs and schemes and relationships with their dealers when they're chasing volume. Everybody participates into driving a very competitive net transaction price, we're very -- we have a strong partnership with all 3 of the domestics and we were supportive as we could, and that had general downward pressure across the piece. It is true that some domestics had higher downward pressure than others, but that's the nature of the game and the cycles that they're in. I think, as I said, some of our performance was a bit self-inflicted, which was corrected as we came out of the quarter. We just want to make sure that we are growing because I think there's opportunity for us to grow but we do that in an appropriate balance fashion, knowing that for every new car that we sell, we get a customer who has a very high loyalty for us to have 7 years if they keep the vehicle. And large percentage is a great opportunity on used car sales because the value we offer for their trades as well. So it isn't just one element. We try to think about the best balance we can achieve in the business. Sometimes we get it right, sometimes we push a little bit hard. That's why we look at it every day. Operator: With no further questions on the line at this time. I will now hand the call back to Mike Manley for any closing comments. Michael Manley: Yes. Thank you, Harry. Thank you all for being on the call. As always, we appreciate your questions, and we wish you well. Thank you. Operator: This will conclude the AutoNation, Inc. Q3 Earnings Call. Thank you to everyone who is able to join us today. You may now disconnect your lines.